1 Gravitation

CONCEPT MAP

KEPLER’S LAWS

Kepler’s law Newton’s Universal Law of Gravitation

Helped in
formulating Explains
Kepler's Kepler's Kepler's third law the inverse
firstlaw second of time period square Law Gravitational Force
of orbit law of area T2αr3
Velocity to
GMm
escape the F=
Escape velocity d2
Value of influenceof
vesc = 2gR Gravitational force Force gives
vesc = 11.2 km/s
it on Earth rise to

Acceleration due to gravity (g)

Weight gives g = GM
W = mg rise to R2
Variation in the
value of g

Shape Altitude Depth

Pole - 9.832 m/s2
Altitude increases Depth increases
Equator - 9.78 m/s2 value of `g' decreases value of `g' decreases

Points to Remember:
zz Gravitation was discovered by Sir Isaac Newton.
zz Gravitational Force is an universal force which is acting not only on any two bodies on the surface of the Earth
but also on any two celestial objects.
zz Gravitationalforceisanattractiveforce.
zz Everyobjectintheuniverseattractseveryotherobjectwithaforce,whichisdirectly proportional to the product
G m1m2
of their masses and inversely proportional to the square of the distance between their centres F = .
d2
zz If two objects are spherical, the force between them is along the straight line joining their centres and the segment
joining their centres is considered the distance between them.
zz Outofthetwoobjects,ifmassofoneoftheobjectsisdoubled,thenaccordingtolaw,thegravitationalforce
betweenthetwoobjectsgetsdoubled.Ifthedistancebetweenthetwoobjectsisdoubled,thegravitationalforce
between them becomes one fourth.
zz Value of G is 6.67 × 10-11 Nm2/kg2
zz The centripetal force is centre-seeking or the force which is acting towards the centre of the circle.

(5)
6 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

zz The centripetal force between the Sun and the planet Earth is responsible for the revolution of the Earth. It is
inversely proportional to the square of the distance between them.
zz The force that the Earth exerts on any object at or around the surface of the Earth is called the Earth’s gravitational
force.AccordingtoNewton’ssecondlaw,theaccelerationisproducedinthebodyduetoapplied force.
zz The acceleration produced by the Earth’s gravitational force is called acceleration due to gravity or gravitational
GM
acceleration. It is denoted by g = .
R2
zz The acceleration due to gravity depends on mass of the Earth (M) and radius of the Earth (R) for an object on
the surface or height (h) at which the object is placed from the surface of the Earth. It does not depend upon the
massofthefallingobject.Thus,accelerationduetogravityissameforallfreelyfallingobjects.
zz The unit of ‘g’ in SI system is m/s2. The mass of Earth is 6 × 1024 kg and its radius is 6.4 × 106 m.
zz The Earth does not have perfectly spherical shape. It is slightly flattened at the poles and bulged at the equator.
Therefore,theradiusoftheEarthatthepolesislessthanthatattheequator.
zz The value of ‘g’ is maximum at poles and it is 9.83 m/s2 or 983 cm/s2.
zz The value of ‘g’ is minimum at the equator and it is 9.78 m/s2 or 978 cm/s2.
zz Asaltitudeincreases,valueofgdecreases.
zz Asdepthincreases,valueofgdecreases.
zz The gravitational acceleration is considered 9.77 m/s2 for all the practical purposes.
1 th
zz The acceleration on the Moon is of that on the surface of the Earth.
6
zz WhenabodyfallstowardstheEarthundertheinfluenceoftheEarth’sgravityalone,itsmotioniscalled‘free fall’.
zz In‘freefall’,bodycomestothesurfaceoftheEarthwithuniform acceleration. Initial velocity may be zero but
itincreasesateverytimeinterval,duetoaccelerationduetogravity.
zz The mass of an object is the quantity of matter contained in it. The SI unit of mass is (kg) and CGS unit is
gram (g).
zz FromNewton’sfirstlaw,weknowthatmassisthemeasureofinertia of a body.
zz Mass is a scalar quantity and it does not change from place to place on the surface of the Earth and even it does
notchangeonthedifferentplanets.
zz TheweightofthebodyisdefinedastheforcewithwhichtheEarthattractsittowardsitscentreW = mg.
zz Since the weight is a ‘force’,itsSI unit is newton and CGS unit is dyne. (1N = 105 dyne)
zz Weight is a vector quantity. It changes from place to place on the surface of the Earth and even changes with the
planet.
zz Since the value of ‘g’ is notsameeverywhere,theweightofabodykeepsonchangingwithplace.

zz The weight of an object on the Moon is 1 thofthatontheEarth.Wecanwriteitas,wm = m × gm.

6
zz Spring balance is used for measuring weight and two scale balance is used to compare masses.
zz Johannes Kepler (1571 – 1630) was a German astronomer and a Mathematician.
zz Kepler’s first law: The orbit of a planet is an ellipse with the sun at one of the foci.
zz Kepler’s second law: The line joining the planet and the sun sweeps equal areas in equal intervals of time.
zz Kepler’s third law: The square of time period of revolution around the sun is directly proportional to the cube
of the mean distance of a planet from the Sun.
zz Abodycanhaveenergybecauseofitsshapeorpositionorconfiguration.Thisisknownaspotential energy.
zz The gravitational potential energy at the height (h) from the ground is
–GMm .
R+h
zz Escape velocityisthatinitialvelocityofanobjectbywhichitovercomestheEarth’sgravitationalattraction.

zz Escape velocity (vesc) can be calculated by the law of conservation of energy and is equal to vesc = √2gR .
Gravitation 7

(28) The energy possessed because of position or

MASTER KEY QUESTION SET - 1 configurationiscalled .
Q.1. (A) 1. Fill in the blanks: (29) vesc =
(1) Gravitation was discovered by . (30) Gravitational waves are detected by
(2)  veryobjectintheuniverseattractseveryother
E (31) During ascent is zero and during
object with force. descent is zero.
m1m2 (32) Formula for centripetal force is .
(3) Fα means F = . Gm1m2
d2 1
Ans. (1) Isaac Newton (2) gravitational (3) 2
(4) 4
(4) Ifthedistancebetweenthetwoobjectsisdoubled, d
then the gravitational force between them will be (5) increases (6) remains constant (7) 10 (8) Nm2/kg2
times. GM
(9) low tide (10) G (11) centre (12) ‘g’ (13) g =
(5) Ifmassincreases,force . R2
1 th
(6) Ifmasstriples,valueofG . (14) 9.83 (15) 978 (16) decreases (17)
4
(7) I fEarthattractsabodywithaforceof10N,then
(18) acceleration (19) inertia (20) 6 × 10 (21) 6.4 × 106
24
thebodyattractstheEarthwith N.
(22) Zero (23) newton (N) (24) weight (25) six
(8) S.I. unit of G is .
(26) poles (27) ellipse (28) potential energy (29) 2gR
(9) Places on Earth exactly 90° to the direction of the
moon experiences . (30) LIGO (31) Final velocity (v), Initial velocity (u)
(10) is a constant known as universal mv2
(32) F =
gravitational constant. r
(11) The Earth’s gravitational force is always in the Q.1. (A) 2. Find the odd word out:
direction of the of the Earth. (1) Acceleration,mass,force,weight
(12) The Earth’s gravitational acceleration is denoted Ans. Mass-Itisscalar,whileothersarevectors.
byletter . (2)  hangeinvalueof‘g’atsurface,changeinvalue
C
(13) The relation between g and G is of ‘g’ at height, change in value of ‘g’ at depth,
change in value of ‘g’ on thickness
(14) The value of acceleration due to gravity at poles
is m/s2. Ans. Change in value of ‘g’ on thickness. Others are
related factors to the value of ‘g’.
(15) The value of acceleration due to gravity at the
*(3) Light,sound,heat,lawsofplanetarymotion
equator is cm/s2.
(16) Ifaltitudeincreases,valueofg . Ans. Law of planetary motion. Others are related to
(17) When a spaceship is two Earth radii distance from Newton.
thecentreofEarth,itsgbecomes . (4) Mass,potentialenergy,radius,weight
(18) During free fall, the object comes vertically Ans. Weight.Itisvector,whileothersarescalars.
downward with uniform . (5) 9.83 m/s2,9.8m/s2,980cm/s2,9.77m/s2
(19) Mass is also a measure of of an object. Ans. 980 cm/s2. Others are values of g in MKS.
(20) The mass of the Earth is kg. (6) Weight,Thrust,Force,Pressure
(21) The radius of the Earth is m. Ans. Pressure. Others are vectors.
(22) Value of g at the centre of the Earth is . (7)  ewton’s first law, Newton’s law of gravity,
N
(23) The SI unit of weight is . Newton’sthirdlaw,Newton’ssecondlaw
(24) The gravitational force acting on any object on Ans. Newton’s law of gravity. Other are related to law
the Earth is called it's . of motion.

(25) The weight of an object on the Earth is (8) Newton,Ohm,Kepler,Galileo

times its weight on the Moon. Ans. Ohm. Others are concerned with laws of gravity.
(26) The weight of an object is maximum at (9) 983 m/s2,977m/s2,980m/s2,9.83m/s2
on the surface of the Earth. Ans. 9.83 m/s2. Others are in CGS system.
(27) The orbit of a planet is an with the (10) 9.83 m/s2,98.3m/s2,983m/s,98.03m2s
Sun at one of the foci. Ans. 9.83 m/s2. Others are not values of ‘g’.
8 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

Q.1. (A) 3. Complete the analogy: (2) Match the columns:

(1) 6 × 10 kg : Mass of the Earth : : 6.4 × 10 m :
24 6
Column A Column B
.
(1) Mass (a) m/s
Ans. Radius of the Earth - Mass is measured in kg and
distance is measured in metres. (2) Weight (b) m/s2
(2) Height of a weather satellite : 8.7 m/s2 : : Height (3) Acceleration (c) kg
of Communication satellite : . (4) Velocity (d) N
Ans. 0.225 m/s2 - The value of ‘g’ changes with the
change in the height of the satellites. Ans. (1 – c), (2 – d), (3 – b), (4 – a)
(3) Mass : Scalar quantity : : Weight : . (3) Complete the chart:
Ans. Vector quantity - Weight being a force is a vector F (N) m1 (kg) m2 (kg) d (m)
quantity and its direction is towards the centre of
the earth. (1) 500 84 02

(4) At poles : 9.83 m/s2 : : At equator : . (2) 30 × 10 27

15 × 10 5
03
Ans. 9.78 m/s2 - Earth’s radius is the largest at the (3) 16 × 109 17 34
equator and the smallest at the poles.
(4) 250 × 10-7 45 47
(5) Shape of the Earth at equator : Bulged : : Shape of
Ans. (1) 7 × 10-7 (2) 2.69 × 1033kg (3) 1.63 × 1022kg
the Earth at poles :
(4) 7.5 × 10-2m
Ans. F
 lattened-TheshapeoftheEarthisnotexactly
spherical.Duetoitsrotation,theearthbulgesat Q.1. (A) 5. State whether the following statements
theequatorandisflattenedatthepoles. are True or False. Correct the false statement.
1 (1) Force = mass × velocity
(6) Kinetic energy : mv2 : : Gravitational Potential
2 (2) ‘G’ is called gravitational acceleration.
energy :
–GMm (3) Acceleration is a scalar quantity.
Ans.  - For small distances, i.e. heights, the
R+h (4) Gravitational force at the Moon is double than
 potentialenergyislessthanzero,i.e.itisnegative. the Earth’s gravitational force.
(7) Force : ma : : Gravitational force : (5) 1 N = 1 kg × 1 m/s2.
Ans. Gm1m2-Mathematically,thegravitationalforceof (6) 1 dyne = 105 N.
d2 (7) The force towards the centre of the circular orbit
 attractionbetweentwobodiesisgivenbyGm1m2
is called centripetal force.
d2
(8) Force : Vector : : Weight : (8) The gravitational acceleration does not become
Ans. Vector - Weight is also a force and its direction is zero at the centre of the Earth.
towards the centre of the earth. Weight = m × g (9)  t the poles, the acceleration due to gravity is
A
Q.1. (A) 4. With the information in three columns, 9.77 m/s2.
match up and complete the chart: (10) ‘g’ is called universal constant.
*(1) I II III (11) Mass is a scalar quantity.
1
(1) Mass (a) m/s2 (i) Zero at the (12) BeyondthesurfaceoftheEarth,gα .
(R + h)2
centre (13) Weight is a vector quantity.

(2) Weight (b) kg (ii) Measure of (14) The mass of the Earth is 6.4 × 106 kg.
Inertia (15) Ataheightof‘h’fromtheground,thegravitational
–GMm
(3) Acceleration (c) Nm2/ (iii) Same in potential energy is .
due to kg2 the entire R+h
gravity universe Ans. (1) False. Force = mass × acceleration (2) False.
‘G’ is called Universal gravitational constant
(4) Gravitational (d) N (iv) Depends
(3) False. Acceleration is a vector quantity
constant on height
1 th
Ans. (1-b-ii), (2-d-iv), (3-a-i), (4-c-iii), (4) False. Gravitational force at the moon is of
6
Gravitation 9

the Earth’s gravitational force (5) True (6) True (9) The value of ‘g’ is maximum at poles and it is
(7) True (8) False. The gravitational acceleration .
becomes zero at the centre of the Earth (9) False.
(a) 9.72 m/s (b) 9.83 m/s2
The acceleration due to gravity is 9.83 m/s2 at
(c) 9.83 m/s (d) 9.72 m/s2
the poles (10) False. ‘g’ is called acceleration due
to gravity (11) True (12) True (13) True (14) (10) The value of ‘g’ on Earth is zero at .
False. Mass of the earth is 6 × 1024 kg (15) True. (a) Centre of Earth (b) Poles
Q.1. (B) Choose and write the correct option: (c) Infinitedistance (d) Both a and c
(1)  hegravitationalforceofattractionbetweentwo
T (11)  hen an object is thrown upward, the force of
W
objects is given by . gravity .
m1m2 d2
(a) F α (b) F α (a) is opposite to (b) is in the same
d2 m1m2 the direction of direction as that of
m1m2 m1m2 motion motion
(c) F α (d) F α
d2 d3 (c) becomes zero at (d) increase as it rise
(2) I fthedistancebetweentwobodiesbecomeshalf, higher point up
the gravitational force between them becomes (12) The value of ‘g’ as the depth from
. surface increases.
(a) half (b) one forth (a) increases (b) fluctuates
(c) 4 times (d) 2 times (c) decreases (d) varies
(3) If the distance between two objects increases (13) As the height of the object from the surface of the
5 times, the gravitational force becomes Earthincreases,valueof‘g’becomes .
times.
1 (a) more (b) less
(a) 5 (b) 15 (c) (d) 25
25 (c) equal (d) can’t say
(4) The gravitational force on the surface of the Moon (14) The mass of objects at any place on
is times than that on the surface of the surface on the Earth.
the Earth.
(a) remains constant (b) is non-uniform
(a) five (b) onefifth (c) changes (d) increases
(c) one sixth (d) six
(15)  ccordingtoNewton’sfirstlaw,ifmassismore,
A
(5) The gravitational force causes . then the inertia of the body is .
(a) Tides (b) Circular motion of (a) less (b) very less
moon (c) more (d) can’t say
(c) None of these (d) Both a and b
(16) The weight of body gradually decreases from
(6)  heEarthattractsmoonwithaforceof1020 N. The
T .
moonattractsEarthwithaforceof . (a) equator to poles (b) poles to equator
(a) less than 1020 N (b) 1020 N (c) pole to pole (d) height to surface
(c) greater than 1020 N (d) 10-20 N (17)  bodyofmass1kgisattractedbytheEarthwith
A
(7) The SI unit of gravitational constant is . a force which is equal to .
(a) Nm2 / kg2 (b) Nkg2 / m2 (a) 9.8 N (b) 6.67 × 10 -11

(c) m/s2 (d) N cm2 / g2 (c) 1 N (d) 9.8 m/s

(8) The value of acceleration due to gravity at the (18) The gravitational potential energy at the height
height ‘h’ from the ground is . of ‘h’ from the ground is .

GM GM –GMm –GMm1
(a) g = (b) g = (a) (b)
R+h R+h R+h R2 + h
GM GMm1 GMm
(c) g = (d) g = GM (R + h)2 (c) (d)
2 2
(R + h) 2 R +h R2 + h
10 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

(19) The orbit of a planet is an ellipse with the Sun at Ans. Given: r=1m
one of the . m1 = 75 kg
(a) foci (b) centre (c) middle (d) surface m2 = 80 kg
(20) The straight line joining the planet and the Sun G = 6.67 × 10-11 Nm2/kg2
sweeps equal in equal interval of time. To find: Force (F) = ?
(a) volume (b) angle Gm1m2
Formula: F =
(c) density (d) area r2
Solution:
(21) The square of time period of revolution around the
6.67 × 10–11 × 75 × 80
Sun is directly proportional to the F=
of the planet from the Sun. 12
F = 6.67 × 10 × (6 × 103)
–11

(a) mean distance

= 40.02 × 10-8
(b) square of the distance
= 4.002 × 10-7 N
(c) cube to the distance
(d) cube of the mean distance The gravitational force between Mahendra
and Virat is 4.002 × 10–7 N
(22) Which of the following is not an example of free
*(2) The mass of the Earth and Moon are 6 × 1024
fall?
kg and 7.4 × 1022 kg respectively. The distance
(a) Moon revolving around the Earth between them is 3.84 × 105 km. Calculate the
(b) Earth revolving around the Sun gravitational force of attraction between the
(c) Parachute jumping two? G = 6.7 × 10-11 Nm2/kg2.
(d) ArtificialsatellitesrevolvingaroundtheEarth Ans. Given: m1 = 6 × 1024 kg
m2 = 7.4 × 1022 kg
(23) The centre of mass of an object having uniform
r = 3.84 × 105 km = 3.84 × 108 m
density is at its .
G = 6.7 × 10-11 Nm2/kg2
(a) centre (b) Geometrical centre
(c) centroid (d) Circumference To find: F = ?
Gm1m2
mm Formula: F =
Ans. (1) (a) F α 1 2 (2) (c) 4 times (3) (c) 1 (4) (c) one r2
d2 25
6.7 × 10–11 × 6 × 1024 × 7.4 × 1022
sixth (5) (d) both a and b (6) (b) 1020 N (7) (a) Nm2/kg2 Solution: F =
GM (3.84 × 108)2
(8) (c) g = (9) (b) 9.83 m/s2 (10) (d) Both a 297.48 × 10-11 × 1024 × 1022
(R + h)2 =
14.74 × 1016
and c (11) (a) Is opposite to the direction of motion
(12) (c) decreases (13) (b) less (14) (a) remains 300 × 1019
≈
constant (15) (c) more (16) (b) poles to equator 15
–GMm = 20 × 1019
(17) (a) 9.8 N (18) (a) (19) (a) foci
R+h F = 2 × 1020 N
(20) (d) area (21) (d) cube of the mean distance The gravitational force of attraction between
(22) (c) Parachute jumping (23) centroid Earth and Moon is 2 × 1020 N
Q.2.1. Solve the following: *(3) The mass of the Earth is 6 × 1024 kg. The distance
Type: A between the Earth and the Sun is 1.5 × 1011 m. If
Gm1m2 the gravitational force between the two is 3.5 ×
F= v = u + at 1022 N, what is the mass of the sun? G = 6.7 × 10-11
r2
1 2 Nm2/kg2.
F = ma s = ut + at
2 Ans. Given: m1 = 6 × 1024 kg
v2 = u2 + 2as
r = 1.5 × 1011 m
*(1) Mahendra and Virat are sitting at a distance of F = 3.5 × 1022 N
1 metre from each other. Their masses are 75 kg
and 80 kg respectively. What is the gravitational G = 6.7 × 10-11 Nm2/kg2
force between them? To find: m2 = ?
Gravitation 11

Gm1m2 1
Formula: F = Formula: s = ut + at2
r2 2
Fr2 1 1
Solution: = m2 Solution: = 0×t+ × 5 × 10-9 × t2
Gm1 100 2

3.5 × 1022 × (1.5 × 1011)2 1

m2 = = 2.5 × 10-9 × t2
6.7 × 10-11 × 6 × 1024 100
7.875 × 1044 1
= = t2
40.2 × 1013 100 × 2.5 × 10-9
7.875 1 × 109
= × 1031 = t2
40 250
= 0.196 × 1031 kg 1000 × 106
= t2
= 1.96 × 1030 kg 250

The mass of the Sun is 1.96 × 1030 kg 4 × 106 = t2

*(4) In the previous example, assuming that t = √ 4 × 106 s

the bench on which Mahendra is sitting is t = 2 × 103 s
frictionless, starting with zero velocity. What Mahendra will take 2 × 103 s to move towards
will be Mahendra’s velocity after 1s and how Virat.
will it change with time? Mass of Mahendra (75
kg) and force (4.002 × 10-7 N). (6) A truck starts from rest and rolls down a hill
Ans. Given: Initial velocity (u) = 0 m/s with a constant acceleration. It travels a distance
Time (t) = 1 s of 400 m in 20s. Find its acceleration. Also find
the force acting on it if its mass is 7000 kg.
Force (F) = 4.002 × 10-7 N
Ans. Given: Initial velocity (u) = 0 ms-1
mass (m) = 75 kg
Distance travelled (s) = 400 m
To find: Final velocity (v) = ?
F Time (t) = 20 s
Formulae:v=u+at,a=
m Mass of truck (m) = 7000kg
-7 To find: Acceleration (a) = ?
Solution: a = 4.002 × 10
75 Force (F) = ?
a = 0.0534 × 10 m/s2
-7 1
Formulae: (i) s = ut + at2
a = 5.34 × 10-9 m/s2 2
(ii) F = ma
v = u + at
1
= 0 + 5.34 × 10-9 × 1 Solution: (i) s = ut + at2
2
= 5.34 × 10-9 m/s
1
Velocity will increase with time 400 = 0 × 20 + a × (202)
2
As distance decreases, force increases thereby 400 a
400 =
increasing acceleration. Hence velocity increases 2
400 × 2
*(5) Assuming that acceleration remains constant ∴a= = 2 m/s2
(5.34 × 10-9 m/s2), How long will Mahendra take 400
to move 1 cm towards Virat if he starts from (ii) F = ma
rest? (Use your brain power; Textbook Page no. 6) ∴ F = 7000 × 2
∴ F = 14000N
-9 2
Ans. Given: Acceleration (a) = 5.34 × 10 m/s
≈ 5 × 10 m/s
-9 2
The truck moves with an acceleration of 2 m/s2
1 and the force acting on it is 14000N
Displacement (s) = 1 cm = m
100
Initial velocity (u) = 0 m/s (7) Karan and Arjun are two friends of mass m1 and
m2 respectively, separated by a distance d.
To find: time (t) = ?
12 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

What would happen to the force between them if Type: B

(i) Mass of Arjun is doubled. GM
(ii) Mass of both Karan and Arjun is doubled. g= v = u + at
R2
(iii) Distance between them is doubled. 1 2
W = F = mg s = ut + at
2
(iv) Value of G doubled. GM m
W=F= v2 = u2 + 2as
Ans. The force between Karan and Arjun is R2
Note:
G m1 m2 For Earth g = 9.77 m/s2
F= ...(i)
d2 For Moon gm = 1.63 m/s2
(i) If ‘m2’ is doubled.
*(1) Calculate the gravitational force due to
G m1 (2m2) 2(G m1m2)
F1 = = the Earth on Mahendra, if mass of Earth is
d2 d2 6 × 1024 kg, Radius is 6.4 × 106 m , g = 9.77 m/s2 and
1
F = 2F ...[from(i)] mass of Mahendra is 75 kg.
Force becomes double.
Ans. Given: Mass of Earth (M) = 6 × 1024 kg
(ii) If ‘m1’ and ‘m2’ are doubled.
Radius of Earth (R) = 6.4 × 106 m
G (2m1) (2m2) 4(G m1m2)
F1 = = Mass of object (m) = 75 kg
d2 d2
Gravitational acceleration (g) = 9.77 m/s2
F1 = 4F ...[from(i)]
Force becomes 4 times. To find: Force (F) = ?

(iii) If ‘d’ is doubled. GMm

Formula: F =
G m1m2 1 (G m1m2) R2
F1 = =
(2d) 2
4 d2 Solution:
1 6.67 × 10–11 × 6 × 1024 × 75
F1 = F ...[from(i)] F=
4 40.96 × 1012
Force becomes one forth. 9.77 × 75
=
(iv) If ‘G’ is doubled. 1
= 732.75 N
2G m1m2
F1 = = 2F ...[from(i)] F ≈ 733 N
d2
Force is doubled. The gravitational force is 733 N

NUMERICALS FOR PRACTICE *(2) Starting from rest, due to the gravitational force
of the Earth i.e. 733 N, What is the speed of
(1) Two boys are sitting very close to each other at Mahendra after 1 second? If his mass is 75 kg.
a distance of 0.5 m from each other. If the mass Ans. Given: Initial velocity (u) = 0 m/s
of one boy is 40 kg and other is 50 kg, find the Force (F) = 733 N
gravitational force between them.
(5.336 × 10–7 N) Mass (m) = 75 kg

(2) If the force of gravitation between the Earth and Time (t) = 1 s
an object of mass ‘m’ is 9 × 107 N, find the mass To find: Final velocity (v)= ?
of an object if the mass of the Earth is 6 × 1024 kg F
Formulae:v=u+at,a=
and its radius is 6.4 × 106 m. (9.2 × 106 kg) M
(3) If two objects of masses 500kg and 84kg Solution:
respectively are at a distance of 2m apart from 733
a=
each other. Find gravitational force between 75
them? (7 × 10-7 N) ∴ a = 9.77 m/s2
(4) If two objects of 45 kg and 47 kg respectively are v = u + at
attracted towards each other by a gravitational = 0 + 9.77 × 1
force of 250 × 10-7 N, find the distance between
= 9.77 m/s
their centres. (7 × 10-7 N)
Gravitation 13

The speed of Mahendra after 1 second is 9.77 GM

Formula: g =
m/s R2
Solution: For planet A
*(3) If a person weighs 750 N on Earth, how much
would be his weight on the Moon given that GMA
gA = . . . (i)
1 RA2
Moon’s mass is of that of the Earth and its
81 GMB
1 gB = . . . (ii)
radius is of that of Earth. RB2
3.7  Dividingequation(ii)by(i),
Ans. Given: Weight on Earth (WE) = 750 N gB GMB GMA
= ÷
1 Mm 1 gA RB2 RA2
Mm =
81
ME ∴ ( M )=E 81 gB GMB RA2
1 R 1 = ×
gA
∴(
R )
m RB2 GMA
Rm = RE =
3.7 E 3.7 gB MB R 2

To find: Weight on Moon (Wm) = ? = × A

gA M RB
A
GMm M 1
Formula: W = F = 1
R2 = B × . . . from ‘given’
2 MA 4
Solution:
4 2 MB
For Earth For Moon = ∴ 2MA = MB
2 1 MA
G ME m G Mm m
WE = 2
...(i) Wm = ...(ii) MB = 2MA
R E
Rm2
 Dividingequation(ii)by(i), The mass of B is twice mass of A

WM G Mm m G ME m *(5) The mass and weight of an object on Earth is 5 kg

= ÷ and 49 N respectively. What will be their values
WE Rm2 RE2
on the Moon? Assume that the acceleration due
WM G Mm m RE2 1
= × to gravity on the Moon is th of that on the Earth.
WE Rm2 G ME m 6
Ans. Given: me = 5 kg
2
WM Mm RE We = 49 N
= ×
WE ME Rm 1 1
gm = ge = × 9.8 = 1.633 m/s2
Wm 1 6 6
= × (3.7)2 . . . from ‘given’ To find: Mass on Moon mm = ?
750 81
Wm 13.69 Weight on Moon Wm = ?
= Formula: W = F = mg
750 81
750 Solution: Mass remains same : mm = 5 kg
Wm = 13.69 ×
81 Wm = mm × gm
Wm = 126.8 N
= 5 × 1.633
The weight on the Moon is 126.8 N Wm = 8.17 N

*(4) The radius of the planet A is half the radius of Mass on Moon is 5 kg and weight is 8.17 N
planet B. If the mass of A is MA, What must be
*(6) Suppose you are standing on a tall ladder. If
the mass of B so that the value of g on B is half
your distance from the centre of the Earth is 2R,
that of its value on A?
1 RA 1 what will be your weight? (Use your brain power;
Ans. Given: RA = RB ∴ = Textbook Page no. 10)
2 RB 2
Ans. Given: R1 = 2R
1 gB 1
gB = ga ∴ = To find: W1 = ?
2 gA 2
GMm
To find: MassofplanetB,MB = ? Formula: W = F =
R2
14 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

GMm (5) Calculate the value of ‘g’ on the Moon, if its

Solution: W = . . . (i) mass is 7.4 × 1022 kg and radius is 1740 km.
R2
(1.63 m/s2)
GMm
W1 = (6) If the weight of a body on the surface of the
(2R)2
Moon is 100 N, what is its mass? (61.34 kg)
GMm (7) If the acceleration due to gravity on the
= . . . (ii)
4R2 surface of the Earth is 9.8 m/s2, what will be
1 GMm the acceleration due to gravity on the surface
W1 = × of the planet whose mass and radius both are
4 R2
two times the corresponding quantities for the
1 Earth. (4.9 m/s2)
W1 = W ...[from(i)]
4
Type: C
Weight will be one fourth the original weight vesc = √ 2gR
T2
*(7) What would be the value of g on the surface =K
of the earth if its mass was twice as large and R3
its radius half of what it is now? (Can you tell?;
*(1) Calculate the escape velocity on the surface of
Textbook Page no. 8)
the Moon given the mass and radius of the Moon
Ans. Given: M' = 2M to be 7.34 × 1022 kg and 1.74 × 106 m respectively.
R
R' = Ans. Given: Mass (M) = 7.34 × 1022 kg
2
'
Radius (R) = 1.74 × 106 m
To find: g = ?
Gravitational acceleration on Moon(gm)
GM
Formula: g = 1 9.8
= ge = m/s2 = 1.63 m/s2
R2 6 6
GM' To find: vesc = ?
Solution: g' =
R'2
Formula: vesc = √ 2gm R
G × 2M G × 2M 4 × 2 × GM
= = =
R R2 R2 Solution: vesc = √ 2 × 1.63 × 1.74 × 106
( )
2

2 4 = √ 5.67 × 106
GM
= 4 × 2 × g ................ ( g = )
R2 = 2.38 × 103 m/s
g' = 8 g vesc = 2.38 km/s

The value of g will become 8 times. The escape velocity on Moon is 2.37 km/s

NUMERICALS FOR PRACTICE *(2) Let the period of revolution of a planet at a

distance R from a star be T. Prove that if it was
(1) Find the weight of a man whose mass is 50 kg. at a distance of 2R from the star, its period of
(490 N) revolution will be √8 T.
(2) Find the gravitational force between man of Ans. Given: Distance from Sun = R
mass 60 kg and the Earth. (586 N) Time of Rotation = T
(3) A stone of mass 2 kg is falling from a certain New distance = 2R
height. Find the force of attraction between the To find: New time TN= ?
Earth and the stone. Also, find the acceleration. T2
(19.6 N, 9.8 m/s2) Formula: =k
R3
(4) The planet in space has mass twice as that of the Solution: Case (i)
Earth and a radius thrice as that of the Earth. If T2
= k . . . (i)
the weight of a book is 90 N on the Earth, what R3
would be the weight on that planet? Case (ii)
(20 N)
Gravitation 15

TN2 TN2 Gravitational acceleration (g) = 10 m/s2

= k OR = k . . . (ii)
(2R)3 8R3
Initial velocity (u) = 0 m/s
  From(i)and(ii),
To find: Final velocity (v) = ?
TN2 T2
= Displacement (s) = ?
8R3 R3
1
TN2 = 8T2 Formulae:v=u+gt,s=ut+ gt2
2
TN = √ 8T2 Solution: v = u + gt

TN = √ 8 T = 0 + 10 × 1
v = 10 m/s
1
NUMERICALS FOR PRACTICE s=0+ × 10 × 12
2
(1) The escape velocity for mass is 5.02 km/s. If its s=5m
radius is 3390 km, What is the value of g on its Speed on reaching ground is 10 m/s and height
surface. (g = 3.71 m/s2) of the table is 5 m.
(2) A planet orbits the Sun in time T at a distance
*(3) An iron ball of mass of 3 kg is released from
of R from it. Another planet orbits the Sun in a
height of 125 m and falls freely to the ground.
time of 8T. What is its distance R' from the Sun.
Assuming that the value of g is 10 m/s2, calculate
(R' = 4R) (i) time taken by the ball to reach the ground
Type: D Downward/Dropped/Falling (ii) velocity of the ball on reaching the ground
g (positive) = 10 m/s2 (iii) the height of the ball at half the time it takes
v = u + gt to reach the ground.
1 Upward/Thrown up
s = ut + gt2
2 g (negative) = -10 m/s2
v2 = u2 + 2gs
3 kg
*(1) An object takes 5s to reach the ground from a
height of 5m on a planet. What is the value of g
on the planet? 125 m
Ans. Given: Displacement (s) = 5 m ht/2 = ?
Time (t) = 5 s
Initial velocity (u) = 0 m/s
To find: Gravitational acceleration (g) = ?
1
Formula: s = ut + gt2 t=?
2 v=?
1
Solution: 5 = 0 + × g × 52 (Diagram is only for reference)
2
25 Ans. Given: Mass (m) = 3 kg
5=g×
2 Displacement (s) = 125 m
5×2
=g g = 10 m/s2
25
2 Initial velocity (u) = 0 m/s
g=
5 To find: Time (t) = ?
g = 0.4 m/s2 Final velocity (v) = ?
Value of g on the planet is 0.4 m/s2 Height (ht/2) = ?
1
*(2) A ball falls off a table and reaches the ground in Formulae: s = ut + gt2, v = u + gt
1 s. Assuming g = 10 m/s2, calculate its speed on 2
Solution: Case (i)
reaching the ground and the height of the table.
1
Ans. Given: Time (t) = 1 s s = ut + gt2
2
16 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

Final velocity (v) = 0 m/s

s To find:
Initial velocity (u) = ?
ttotal = ?
125 m h = 125 – 5 Formulae:
v2 = u2+2gs,v=u+gt u=?
ttotal = 2 × t S = 4.05 m ttotal = ?
∴v,gandsaregiven,
(Diagram is only for reference)
tofindu,  
1
125 = 0 × t + × 10 × t2 we use 2nd equation
2
125 = 5t2 Solution:
25 (a) v2 = u2 + 2gs (Diagram is only
125
= t2 02 = u2 + 2×(-10)×4.05
5 1 for reference)
0 = u2 - 81
t2 = 25
u2 = 81
t = 5 s ...(i) u = 9 m/s ...(i)
Case (ii) ∴ wehavev,uandgtofindt.
v = u + gt we use 1st equation
= 0 + 10 × 5 (b) v = u + gt
v = 50 m/s...(ii) 0 = 9+(-10)×t (from(i))
Case (iii) 10 t = 9
t 5 t = 0.9 s
Half time = = ...(from (i))
2 2 Time of ascent = Time of descent
= 2.5s ttotal = 2t
Height of the ball at 2.5s = s = 2 × 0.9
∴ UsingNewton'ssecondequation, = 1.8 s
The initial velocity was 9 m/s and total time
1
s = ut + gt 2 taken to come down, is 1.8 s.
2
*(5) An object thrown vertically upwards reaches a
1 height of 500 m. What was its initial velocity?
s=0+ × 10 × (2.5)2
2 How long will the object take to come back to
the Earth? Assume g = 10 m/s2.
s = 31.25 m
Ans. Given: Displacement (s)= 500 m
∴ Height of the ball at half time
Gravitational acceleration (g) = -10 m/s2
= 125 - 31.25
Final velocity (v) = 0 m/s
= 93.75 m
To find: Initial velocity (u) = ?
(i) Time taken by the ball to reach the ground
is 5s. ttotal = ?
(ii) Velocity of ball on reaching ground is 50 m/s. Formulae: v2 = u2+2gs,ttotal = 2t
(iii) Height of ball at half time is 93.75 m. v = u + gt
∴v,gandsisgiven,
*(4) A tennis ball is thrown up and reaches a height
  tofindu,weuse3rdequation
of 4.05 m before coming down. What was its
initial velocity? How much total time will it Solution: v2 = u2 + 2gs
take to come down? Assume g = 10 m/s2 0 = u2 - 10000
Ans. Given: Displacement (s) = 4.05 m 10000 = u2
g = -10 m/s2 u = 100 m/s
Gravitation 17

Since,wehavev,uandgtofindt,
we use 1st equation.
NUMERICALS FOR PRACTICE
v = u + gt (1) A ball thrown up vertically returns to the
0 = 100 + (-10) × t person after 6s. Find the velocity with which it
10 t = 100 was thrown up. (29.4 m/s)
t = 10s (2) A boy drops a coin from the top of a building
Time of ascent = Time of descent which is 49m high. Find the velocity with which
∴ ttotal = 2 × 10 the coin strikes the ground. (v = 31 m/s)
∴ ttotal = 20s (3) A ball is thrown vertically upwards with velocity
Initial velocity was 100 m/s and time taken of 49 m/s. Calculate (i) Maximum height to
to come back to Earth is 20s. which it rises (ii) total time (t) it takes to return
(6) Find a formula for maximum height attained by to the surface of Earth. (s = 122.5 m, t = 10 s)
object. (4) A stone is thrown vertically upwards with
rd
Ans. Solution: From 3 equation of motion initial velocity of 40 m/s. Taking g = 10 m/s2 find
v2 = u2 + 2as the maximum height and total distance covered
 v=0,a=-g by stone. (h = 80 m, d = 160 m)
∴ 02 = u2 + 2(-g)s
Q.2.2. Define/write the laws:
2gs = u2
u2 (1) Force
s= Ans. The force is that physical quantity which changes
2g
or tends to change the state of rest or of uniform
*(7) A stone thrown vertically upwards with initial
motion in a straight line.
velocity u reaches a height ‘h’ before coming
down. Show that the time taken to go up is (2) Newton’s universal law of gravitation
same as the time taken to come down. Ans. According to the Newton’s universal law of
Ans. When object is thrown up. (During Ascent) gravitation, every object in the universe attracts
Initial velocity = u m/s everyotherobjectwithaforce,whichisdirectly
Final velocity = 0 m/s B u = 0 m/s proportional to the product of their masses
Acceleration = –g m/s2 and inversely proportional to the square of the
Time taken to go up = t1 distance between their centres.
According to 1st eq. of motion
t2 (3) Universal constant of gravitation (G)
v = u + gt
Ans. Universal constant of gravitation is the force of
0 = u - gt1
attractionbetweentwounitmassesplacedatunit
gt1 = u
A v = u m/s distance apart from each other.
u
t1 = (s) . . . (i) + g m/s2 (4) Centre of mass
g
Ans. It is the point inside or outside the object at which
When object falls down. (During Descent)
the total mass of the object can be assumed to be
Initial velocity = 0 m/s B v = 0 m/s
concentrated.
Final velocity (v) = u m/s
*(5) Gravitational acceleration (g) OR Acceleration
Acceleration = g m/s2
due to gravity
Time taken to go down = t2
t1 Ans. The gravitational force due to earth on a
According to 1st eq. of motion
body results in its acceleration. This is called
v = u + gt
acceleration due to gravity.
u = 0 + gt2
u A u m/s *(6) Free fall
t2 = (s) . . . (ii) Ans. When a body falls towards the Earth under the
g
– g m/s2 influenceoftheEarth’sgravityalone,itsmotion
 From(i)and(ii),
(Diagram is only is called a ‘free fall’.
t1 = t2 for reference)
18 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

(7) Mass (m) (ii) Electro-magnetic force

Ans. The mass of an object is the quantity of matter (iii) Nuclear force
contained in it. Mass is the measure of the inertia
(iv) Balanced force
of a body.
(v) Unbalanced force
(8) Weight (W)
*(6) What is the value of ‘g’ at the centre of the Earth?
Ans. Theweightofabodyisdefinedastheforcewith
(Think about it; Textbook Page no. 9)
whichtheEarthattractstheobject.
Ans. At the centre of the Earth the value of ‘g’ is zero.
*(9) Centripetal force
Ans. The force that acts on any object moving along a *(7) Will the mass and weight of an object on the
circle,directedtowardsthecentreofthecircleis earth be same as their values on Mars? Why?
called centripetal force. Ans.
(10) Uniform circular motion (i) The mass of the object will remain same but its
Ans. When an object moves in a circular path with weightwilldifferonMars.
uniform speed, its motion is uniform circular (ii) Since mass of an object is the amount of matter
motion. present in the body, its value remains the same
on Earth and Mars.
(11) Potential energy
Ans. A body can have energy because of its shape (iii) WeightistheforcewithwhichtheEarthattracts
or position or configuration. This is known as the object. It is given as W = mg.As g changes,
potential energy. weight (W) also changes.

(12) Escape velocity Q.2.4. Write short notes:

Ans. The minimum initial velocity needed by an (1) Earth’s gravitational force
object projected upwards to overcome Earths Ans.
gravitational force and not fall back on Earth is (i) The Earth attracts all the objects towards the
called escape velocity. surface of the Earth.
Q.2.3. Answer the following in one or two sentences: (ii) TheattractionistowardsthecentreoftheEarth.
*(1) What do you know about gravitational force? Hence, the gravitational force of the Earth acts
(Can you recall; Textbook Page no. 1) towards the centre of the Earth.
(iii) Due to this force, all objects fall vertically
Ans. E
 very object in the universe attracts every
downwards on the earth.
other object with a force. This force is called
gravitational force. (2) Earth’s gravitational acceleration
*(2) Will the direction of the gravitational force Ans.
change as we go inside the earth? (Think about it; (i) The Earth applies a force of gravitation on any
Textbook Page no. 9) object at or around its surface.
Ans. The direction of earth’s gravitational force is (ii) The uniform acceleration produced in a freely
towards the center of earth so it will not change. falling body due to the gravitational force of
the Earth is called gravitational acceleration or
*(3) What would happen if there were no gravity?
acceleration due to gravity.
(Think about it; Textbook Page no. 8)
(iii) Gravitational acceleration is denoted by ‘g’ and is
Ans. If gravitational force of the Earth would not have
a vector quantity. Its SI unit is m/s2.
existed,thenalltheobjectwouldhavefloatedin
the air. Life would be unstable. (3) Variation in the value of g.
*(4) What would happen if the value of G was twice Ans. The value of g varies based on the following
as large? (Think about it; Textbook Page no. 8) (a) Along the surface of the earth.
Ans. I fthevalueof‘G’isdoubled,thenthegravitational - The earth is not perfectly spherical.
force (F) also will get doubled.  -Itisbulgedattheequatorandflattenedatthe
*(5) What types of forces are we familiar with? poles,duetoitsrotation.
(Can you recall; Textbook Page no. 1) - The radius is highest at the equator and least at
Ans. Types of forces are: the poles.
- Value of g is highest at poles(9.832 m/s2)
(i) Gravitational force
Gravitation 19

- Value of g is least at equator (9.78 m/s2) Q.2.5. Complete the following table:
(b) Change with height.
Altitude from g
 -Asheightincreases,valueofgdecreases. Place the Earth’s
surface (km) (m/s2)
- The change is negligible for height smaller than
the radius of the earth. (i) Surface of Earth 0
(c) Change with depth. (ii) Mount Everest 8.8
 -Asdepthincreases,valueofgdecreases. (iii) Altitudeattainedby 36.6
Man-made balloon
 -This is because, as we go inside the earth, the
mass under consideration decreases. (iv) Orbitofspaceshuttle 400
 -Hence,valueofgdecreases. (v) Communication 35700
satellite
Ans. (i) 9.83 (ii) 9.8 (iii) 9.77 (iv) 8.7 (v) 0.225
Q.2.6. Distinguish between:
(1) Gravitational constant and Gravitational acceleration.
Ans. Gravitational constant (G) Gravitational acceleration (g)
(i) Gravitational constant is the force of (i) The uniform acceleration produced in a freely
attractionbetweentwounitmassesplacedat falling body due to the gravitational force of the
unit distance apart from each other. Earth is called gravitational acceleration.
(ii) It has SI unit Nm2/kg2,whileCGSunitis (ii) It has SI unit m/s2,whileCGSunitis
dyne.cm2/g2. cm/s2.
(iii) It is always denoted by ‘G’. (iii) It is always denoted by ‘g’.
(iv) Its S.I. value is 6.673 × 10–11 Nm2/kg2,while (iv) Its S.I. value is 9.77 m/s2,whileinCGS,itis977
inCGS,itis6.673× 10–8 dyne cm2/g2. cm/s2.
(v) Itsvalueisfixedanddoesnotchangewith (v) The value of ‘g’ depends on various factors like
conditions,henceitiscalleduniversalconstant. altitude,depth,shapeetc.

*(2) Weight and Mass

Ans. Mass (m) Weight (W)
(i) Massistheamountofmatterpresentinthe (i) WeightistheforcewithwhichtheEarthattracts
object. the object.
(ii) Mass does not change with place. (ii) Weight(W)=mg.Asgchanges,Walsochanges.
(iii) SI unit is kg. CGS unit is gram (g). (iii) SI unit is newton. CGS unit is dyne.
(iv) Mass is a scalar quantity. (iv) Weight is a vector quantity.

Q.2.7. Give scientific reasons: (iv) This situation occurs two times a day on regular
(1) High and low tides are regular phenomena. basis, water level rises two times in a day and
Ans. reduces two times in a day.
(i) ThesealevelontheEarthisdirectlyinfluenced Low tide
by the gravitational force of the moon.
The Moon’s
(ii) Due to the gravitational force, the water on the
(v) High High gravitational
Earth experiences pull towards the direction of
tide Earth tide force
theMoon,hencethereoccurshightide. Moon
(iii) At the same time, the place which is at right
angles or at 90°,thewaterlevelgetsreducedand Low tide
experiences low tide.
20 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

(2) In the spacecraft, travellers and objects appear (e) Potential energy:
floating. The energy possessed due to position or
Ans. configurationiscalledpotentialenergy.
(i)  houghthespacecraftistakentoahugeheight
T
(2) Define: The Universal law of gravitation and
from the Earth, the value of acceleration due to
derive mathematically.
gravity does not become zero.
Ans. The Universal law of gravitation: Every object
(ii) Theweightlessnessisbecausethespacecraftisin
intheuniverseattractseveryotherobjectwitha
a state of free fall.
force which is directly proportional to the product
(iii) Any object in a state of free fall will feel weight
of their masses and inversely proportional to the
lessness.
square of the distance between their centres.
(3) Weight of an object changes from place to place
on the surface of the Earth. m1 m2
Ans. F1 F2
(i) The shape of the Earth is not exactly spherical. It
d
isflattenedatpoles,whilebulgedatequator.
Fig 1.1 Gravitational force between two objects.
(ii) Weight is the Earth’s gravitational force acting on Let m1 and m2 be the masses of two objects, the
theobject,whichisgenerallyW=mg. distance between their centres be ‘d’.
(iii) Mass of the object remains the same but value of   hegravitationalattractionbetweenthetwowill
T
‘g’ keeps on changing from place to place. begivenby,
(iv) The value of ‘g’ is maximum at poles i.e. 9.83 m/s2 m1m2
while it is the least at equator i.e. 9.78 m/s2. Fα
d2
(v) Due to this the weight of an object changes from Gm1m2
place to place on the surface of the Earth. ∴ F= (G is constant)
d2
(vi) It is maximum at poles but gets reduced at
G is called gravitational constant; it is also known
equator.
as Universal constant of gravitation.
Q.3.1. Explain the following:
*(3) What are Newton’s laws of motion?
(1) Explain the terms: (Can you recall; Textbook Page no. 1)
(a) Free fall (b) Acceleration due to gravity Ans.
(c) Escape velocity (d) Centripetal force (i) Newton’s first law of motion : Every inanimate
(e) Potential energy object continues to be in a state of rest or of
Ans. uniform motion in a straight line unless it is acted
*(a) Free fall: upon by an external unbalanced force.
When a body falls towards the Earth under the (ii) Newton’s second law of motion : The rate of
influenceoftheEarth’sgravityalone,itsmotion change of momentum is directly proportional
is called free fall. to the applied force and it takes place in the
*(b) Acceleration due to gravity: direction of force.
The gravitational force due to earth on a (iii) Newton’s third law of motion : To every action
body results in its acceleration. This is called thereisalwaysinstantaneous,equalandopposite
acceleration due to gravity. reaction.
*(c) Escape velocity: *(4) What are the effects of force acting on an object?
The minimum initial velocity needed by an (Can you recall; Textbook Page no. 1)
object projected upwards to overcome Earths Ans. The applied force can:
gravitational force and not fall back on Earth is (i) change the state of rest.
called escape velocity.
(ii) change the motion of an object
*(d) Centripetal force: (iii) change the direction of motion
The force that acts on any object moving along a (iv) change the speed of a moving object
circle,directedtowardsthecentreofthecircleis (v) change the shape of the object temporarily.
called centripetal force.
Gravitation 21

2
(5) Define: Acceleration due to gravity and derive Centripetal force F = mv ...(i)
mathematically. r
Distance travelled Circumference
Ans. The gravitational force due to the Earth on =
by planet in one revolution of orbit
an object results in its acceleration. It is called
  = 2πr 
acceleration due to gravity.
Time period of revolution = (T)
 Weknow,
distance
GMm ∴ speed of planet v =
F= . . . (i) time
R2
2πr
F = mg . . . (ii) = ...(ii)
T
 From(i)and(ii), Substituting eq. (ii) in (i)
GMm 2
mg = 2πr
R2 m( T
) m4π2r2
GM ∴ F = =
g= 2 r rT2
R 2
4mπ r
 ForEarth,g=9.77m/s2 ∴ F =
T2
*(6) The value of ‘g’ at the centre of the Earth is zero.
Multiplying numerator and denominator with ‘r2’.
Explain?
4mπ2r r2
Ans. The acceleration due to gravity is given as ∴ F = ×
GM T2 r2
g= 2 4mπ2r3
R ∴ F = ...(iii)
 At the centre of the Earth, the mass under r2T2
consideration is zero. According to Kepler's 3rd law
i.e. M = O T2 r3 1
= k or = ...(iv)
3 2
r T k
∴ g=0
Substituting (iv) in (iii)
 Hence,accelerationduetogravity,atthecentre
oftheearth,iszero. 4mπ2r3 1 4mπ2
F = × = ...(v)
*(7) Write the three laws given by Kepler. How did r2T2 k r2k
they help Newton to arrive at the inverse square
Rearranging eq. (v)
law of gravity?
Ans. Kepler’s laws: 4mπ2
F= × 1
(i) Kepler’s first law : The orbit of a planet is an k r2
ellipse with the Sun at one of the foci. 4mπ2
(ii) Kepler’s second law : The line joining the planet Since = constant.
k
and the Sun sweeps equal areas in equal intervals 1
of time. ∴ F = constant ×
r2
(iii) Kepler’s third law: The square of its period of 1
revolution around the Sun is directly proportional ∴ Fα
r2
to the cube of the mean distance of a planet from (8) State Kepler’s third law and derive mathematically
the Sun. to obtain constant.
m
v Ans. Kepler’s third law: The square of its period of
revolution around the Sun is directly proportional
r to the cube of the mean distance of a planet from
the Sun.
Sun If ‘T’ is a periodic time and the average distance
ofaplanetfromtheSunis‘r’,then,
T2 α r3
22 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

∴ T2 = kr3 ...kisconstant,k≠ 0 E1 = E2
2
T 1 GMm
∴ k = mv2esc – =0
r3 2 R
*(9) If the value of g suddenly becomes twice its 1 GMm
mv2esc =
value, it will become two times more difficult to 2 R
pull a heavy object along the floor. Why? 2GM
v2esc =
Ans. R
(i) I f the value of g becomes double,the force with 2GM × R
which the earth pulls the object i.e weight of vesc =
R ×R
object becomes double.
(ii) Asweightincreases,frictionalforcealsoincreases vesc = 2GM × R ... g = GM
while pulling the object R2 R2
(iii) Hence,itwillbecometwotimesmoredifficultto vesc = 2gR
pullaheavyobjectalongthefloor.
 ForEarth,vesc = 11.2 km/s.
(10) Explain centripetal force with suitable example.
Q.3.2. Open Ended Question:
Ans. The force on an object revolving in a circular path
towards the centre is called centripetal force. *(1) According to Newton’s law of gravitation, every
object attracts every other object means if the
Earth attracts an apple towards it, then an apple
also attracts the Earth with the same force, then
why an apple falls down but the Earth does not
move towards the apple? (Use your brain power;
Textbook Page no. 7)
Ans. Y
 es, the apple attracts the Earth with equal
force but the mass of the apple is much less as
Fig 1.2 Centripetal force compared to that of the Earth.
F
e.g. A stone tied to the string moves in a circular  Weknow,F=ma  or a=
m
path and its velocity is tangential.
 Hence, greater the mass, lesser the acceleration.
(11) Define: Escape velocity and derive Therefore, due to greater mass, the Earth’s
mathematically. acceleration is almost zero.
Ans. The velocity required to overcome the Earth’s
*(2) Is there a gravitational force between two
gravitational force to move into the space is
objects kept on a table or between you and your
called escape velocity.
friend sitting next to you? If yes, why don’t the
On surface of Earth two move towards each other? (Use your brain
1 power; Textbook Page no. 5)
A K.E. = mv2esc
2
Ans. Y
 es,thereisaforceofattractionbetweenthetwo
GMm objects as well as me and my friend.
B P.E. = –
R
 Weknow,
C T.E. = P.E. + K.E.
F α m1m2
1 GMm
E1 = mv2esc – Since the mass of me and my friend is very less as
2 R
comparedtotheEarth,theforceisalsoveryless.
 Atinfinity Hence,wedon'tmovetowardseachother.
A K.E. = 0 *(3) Will your weight remain constant as you go
GMm above the surface of the earth? (Use your brain
B P.E. = – =0 R+h=∞
∞ power; Textbook Page no. 10)
C T.E. = P.E. + K.E. Ans.
=0+0=0 (i) Weight of a body depends on acceleration due to
Accordingtothelawofconservationofenergy, gravity. W = m × g
Gravitation 23

(ii) As we go above the surface of the earth height (iii) The mass of m2 was reduced to 50% and the
increases and hence acceleration decreases. force exerted by m1 on m2 was found to be 20 N,
(iii) As acceleration due to gravity decreases what will be the force exerted by m2 on m1?
consequently weight decreases. Ans. The force exerted by m2 on m1 is 20 N.
*(4) According to Newton’s law of gravitation, (iv) Why gravitational constant is called universal
earth’s gravitational force is higher on an object constant?
of larger mass. Why doesn’t that object fall Ans. The value of gravitational constant does not
down with higher velocity as compared to an depend upon the nature and size of the bodies.
object with lower mass? (Use your brain power; It also does not depend upon the nature of the
Textbook Page no. 12) medium between two bodies; hence it is called
Ans. universal constant.
(i) The acceleration due to gravity (g) on an object (v) What will happen to gravitational force if mass
only depends on mass (M) and radius (R) of the of one of the objects is doubled?
GM Ans. I fthemassofoneoftheobjectsisdoubled,then
earth i.e. g = .
R2 the gravitational force between them also gets
(ii) It does not depend on mass (m) of the object. doubled.
(iii) The acceleration produced at a given point is the (vi) What is the value of universal constant in SI?
same for all objects. Ans. I n SI system, the value of ‘G’ is 6.67 × 10–11
(iv) Hence, object of larger mass does not fall down Nm2/kg2.
with higher velocity as compared to an object *(2) Observe the following diagram and answer the
with lower mass. questions:
Q.3.3. Application based Questions / Questions based D C
on figures:
B
*(1) Observe the figure and answer the following E
questions: (Textbook Page no. 4) F s
Sun A
m1 m2
F1 F2 Fig 1.3: The orbit of a planet moving around the Sun.
(a) In a given figure, area ESF is equal to ASB, then
d what can you say about EF? (Use your brain power;
Textbook Page no. 4)
(i) The force of Gravitation between two bodies
Ans.
having irregular shape is taken to be the
(i)  istanceEFislesserthanAB.Hence,speedwill
D
distance between their
be lesser at EF and greater at AB
(a) centre of mass (b) centre of the body
(ii) Therefore, in an elliptical orbit, speed is not
(c) Edge of the body
constant.
Ans. (a) centre of mass
(b) If x, y and z are the speeds of revolution of the
(ii) If the distance between the two bodies is tripled, planet from A to B, C to D and E to F, then which
how will the Gravitational force between them of the following relation is true?
change? (a) x > y > z (b) x < y < z (c) x < y > z (d) x > y < z
m1m2 Ans. (a) x > y > z
Ans. F = G
d2 (c) Correct and rewrite Kepler's third law.
 Ifthedistanceistripled, The period of revolution of a planet around the
m1m2 m1m2 1 sun is directly proportional to the cube of the
F' = G =G = F distance of the planet from the sun.
(3d)2 9d 9
The gravitational force between them becomes Ans. The square of the period of revolution of a planet
1 around the sun is directly proportional to the
th the initial force. cube of the mean distance of the planet from the
9
Sun.
24 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

(3) If two objects are at a distance of d from each Ans.

others On Earth’s surface At infinity
1
m1 m2 (A) KE = mv2 (A) KE = 0
2
d GMm
(B) PE = ‒ (B) PE = 0
Gm1m2 R
Then F =
d2 (8) An artificial satellite is shifted from LEO to
If the distance between two bodies is 3d HEO, how will the value of g’ vary?
Ans. IfanartificalsatelliteisshiftedfromLEOtoHEO,
m1 m2
the value of ‘g’ decreases. This is because as the
3d satelliteisshiftedfromLEOtoHEO,itsdistance
1
Then F = fromearth'ssurfaceincreases.Becausegα 2 , as
r
distance increases the value of g will decreases.
Gm1m2 (9) How will the value of g’ change if a person
Ans. 2
9d A travels from Delhi to Moscow?
B
(4) Ans. From Delhi to Moscow, the value of g will increase.
As Delhi lies close to equator and Moscow is close
to pole, the value of g from equator to pole goes
F1 F2 on increasing.
(10)

C A B
m1 m2 m1 m2
AF1 + AF2 = = F1 F2 F1 F2

Ans. BF1 + BF2 ; CF1 + CF2 2d d/3

(5) Which of the following best represent force In which of the two cases, A or B, is the force
between Sun and Earth. exerted stronger?
m1m2
S S S Ans. F = G
E E E d2
m1m2 1
Case A : F1 = G = F
4d2 4
(A) (B) (C) m1m2
Ans. B. Force is equally exerted by 2 bodies. Case B : F2 = G d2 = 9 F
(6) An elephant and a matchbox fall from a height 9
The force exerted is maximum in case B.
of 200m. If they are in a state of free fall, which
(11) If a traveler in a spacecraft orbiting the Earth
of them will reach the ground first and why?
releases an object from his hand, it remains
Ans. Both will reach the ground at the same time. stationary and appears to be in a state of
Since they are in a state of free fall, there is no weightlessness. Does this mean there is no
resistive force acting on them and the only force force of gravity acting on the object?
acting is the force of gravity. The acceleration due Ans.
to gravity is same for all the bodies irrespective of (i) No, there is a force of gravity acting on the body.
the mass of the body. Though the spacecraft is at a height from the
(7) Complete the following for an object of mass 'm' surface of the earth, the value of g there is not
zero, but only 11% less than its value on the
On Earth’s surface At infinity surface of the earth.
1
(A) KE = mv2 (A) KE = .............. (ii) Thus, the weightlessness is not caused by the
2 height of the satellite but by being in a state of free
(B) PE = .............. (B) PE = 0 fall. Though the spacecraft is not falling on the
Gravitation 25

earth because of its velocity along the orbit, the Q.4.1. Paragraph based Questions:
only force acting on it is the gravitational force of (1) Read the paragraph and answer the following
the earth and therefore it is in a state of free fall. questions:
(iii) As the velocity of free fall does not depend on
the properties of an object, it is the same for the (1) You must be knowing about the high and low
spacecraft, the travellers and the objects in the tides that occur regularly in the sea. The level
craft. of sea water at any given location along sea
(iv) Thus, if a traveller releases an object from his shore increases and decreases twice a day at
hand, it will remain stationary with respect to regular intervals. High and low tides occur at
him and will appear to be weightless. different times at different places. The level
of water in the sea changes because of the
(12) (i) Will the velocity of a stone thrown vertically
upwards remain constant or will it change with gravitational force exerted by the moon. Water
time? How will it change? directly under the moon gets pulled towards
the moon and the level of water there goes up
(ii) Why doesn't the stone move up all the time?
Why does it fall down after reaching a certain causing high tide at that place. At two places
height? on the earth at 90° from the place of high tide,
the level of water is minimum and low tides
(iii) What does its maximum height depend on?
occur there.
Ans.
(i) The velocity of the stone thrown vertically (i) How many times does the sea level at the coast
upward will not remain constant. It will decrease change?
with time till it becomes zero. Ans. Sea level at the coast increases and decreases two
(ii) When the stone is thrown vertically upwards, times a day. Two high tides and two low tides.
the gravitational force tries to pull it down (ii) How does sea level get changed?
and reduces its velocity. Due to this constant Ans. The sea-level at the coastal region gets changed
downwardpull,thevelocitybecomeszeroafter twotimesadayduetogravitationalattractionof
a while. The pull continues to be exerted and the the Moon.
stone starts moving vertically downward towards (iii) Where is high tide and low tide caused?
thecentreoftheearthunderitsinfluence.
Ans. D
 ue to gravitational attraction of the Moon, the
(iii) The maximum height the stone can achieve water mass swells towards the direction of the
depends on the initial velocity with which the Moon causing high-tide. The water mass shrinks
stone is thrown vertically upwards. at 90° from this place which causes low tide.
Q.3.4. Complete the flow chart:
(2) The centre of mass of an object is the point inside
or outside the object at which the total mass of
the object can be assumed to be concentrated.
High The centre of mass of a spherical object having
Earth uniform density is at its geometrical centre. The
tide
Moon
centre of mass of any object having uniform
density is at its centroid.
Low tide
(i) Where can the total mass of an object be
assumed to be concentrated?
Ans. Low tide Moon's Ans. At the centre of the mass of object.
Gravitational (ii) Where is the centre of mass located for an object
High force of uniform density?
High
Earth tide
tide Ans. At its centroid.
Moon
(iii) Where is the centre of mass located for a
spherical object?
Low tide
Ans. At its geometrical centre.
26 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

(iv) What was the basis of Kepler’s laws? (4) Weightlessness in space:
Ans. Kepler’s laws were based on the motion of the Space travellers as well as objects in the
planets.
spacecraftappeartobefloating.Whydoesthis
(3) Gravitational waves: happen? Though the spacecraft is at a height
Waves are created on the surface of water when from the surface of the earth, the value of g
we drop a stone into it. Similarly you must have there is not zero. In the space station the value
seen the waves generated on a string when both ofgisonly11%lessthanitsvalueonthesurface
its ends are held in hand and it is shaken. Light oftheearth.Thus,theheightofaspacecraftis
is also a type of wave called the electromagnetic not the reason for their weightlessness.
wave. Gamma rays, X-rays, ultraviolet rays, Their weightlessness is caused by their being
infraredrays,microwaveandradiowavesare inthestateoffreefall.Thoughthespacecraftis
all different types of electromagnetic waves. not falling on the earth because of its velocity
Astronomical objects emit these waves and alongtheorbit,theonlyforceactingonitisthe
we receive them using our instruments. All gravitational force of the earth and therefore
our knowledge about the universe has been it is in a free fall state. As the velocity of free
obtained through these waves. fall does not depend on the properties of an
Gravitational waves are a very different type object, the velocity of free fall is the same for
of waves. They have been called the waves thespacecraft,thetravellersandtheobjectsin
on the fabric of space-time. Insteine predicted thecraft.Thus,ifatravellerreleasesanobject
their existence in 1916. These waves are very from her hand, it will remain stationary with
weak and it is very difficult to detect them. respect to her and will appear to be weightless.
Scientists have constructed extremely sensitive
instruments to detect the gravitational waves (i) Is the value of g zero in the space station?
emittedbyastronomicalsources.Amongthese, Ans. No,thevalueofgisonly11%lessthanitsvalue
LIGO (Laser Interferometric Gravitational on the surface of the Earth.
Wave Observatory) is the prominent one. (ii) Why is weightlessness caused in a spacecraft?
Exactlyafterhundredyearsoftheirprediction, Ans. The weightlessness is caused by them being in a
scientists detected these waves coming from state of free fall.
an astronomical source. Indian scientists have (iii) Why doesn't the spacecraft fall towards the
contributedsignificantlyinthisdiscovery.This Earth?
discovery has opened a new path to obtain Ans. The spacecraft does not fall towards the Earth
information about the Universe. because of its velocity along the orbit.
(iv) If a traveller releases an object from her hand in
(i) What are the different types of electro magnetic
the spacecraft, what will happen?
waves?
Ans. Gamma rays, X-rays, Ultraviolet rays, infrared Ans. The object will remain stationary with respect to
rays,microwaveandradiowaves. her,because,thevelocityoffreefallisthesamefor
thespacecraft,travellerandobjectsinthecraft.
(ii) What are the waves on the fabric of space - time
called? Q.4.2. Activity based Questions:
Ans. They are called gravitational waves. (1) Read the following paragraph carefully and
(iii) Is it easy to detect Gravitational waves? answer the following:
Ans. No, these waves are very weak and it is very (1) Tie a stone to one end of a string. Take the other
difficulttodetectthem. end in your hand and rotate the string so that the
(iv) What is the device, used to detect Gravitational stone moves along a circle.
waves?  As long as we are holding the string, we are
Ans. LIGO (Laser Interferometric Gravitational waves pulling the stone towards us i.e. towards the
Observatory) is used to detect Gravitational centre of the circle and are applying a force
waves. towards it. The force stops acting on it if we
Gravitation 27

release the string. In in a free fall. In free fall, the initial velocity of
this case, the stone will theobjectiszeroandgoesonincreasingdueto
flyoffalongastraight acceleration due to gravity of the earth. During
line which is the free fall, the frictional force due to air opposes the
tangent to the circle at motionoftheobjectandabuoyantforcealsoacts
the position of the ontheobject.Thus,truefreefallispossibleonly
stone when the string invacuum.Forafreelyfallingobject,thevelocity
(a)
is released, because on reaching the earth and the time taken for it
that is the direction of can be calculated by using Newton’s equations
its velocity at that ofmotion.Forfreefall,theinitialvelocityu=0
instant of time. You andtheaccelerationa=g.Thus,wecanwritethe
may recall a similar equationsas
activity in which a 5 1
 v=gt s= gt2 v2=2gs
rupee coin kept on a 2
rotating circular disc  F
 or calculating the motion of an object thrown
flies off the disc along (b) upwards, acceleration is negative, i.e. in a
the tangent to the disc. Fig 1.4: A stone tied to direction opposite to the velocity and is taken
Thus, a force acts on a string, moving along a to be – g. The magnitude of g is the same but
any object moving circular path and its velocity the velocity of the object decreases due to -ve
in tangential direction
along a circle and it is acceleration.
directed towards the centre of the circle. This is  T
 hemoonandtheartificialsatellitesaremoving
called the Centripetal force. onlyundertheinfluenceofthegravitationalfield
(i) The impressed force on the stone is in which oftheearth.Thustheyareinfreefall.
direction? (Try this; Textbook Page no. 11)
Ans. On the stone, the force is directed towards the (i) Which force acts on the stone when held in the
centre of the circle. hand?
(ii) What happens if the string is released? Ans. Gravitational force in downward direction and
Ans. T
 hestonewillflyoffinastraightlinealongthe reaction force of hand in upward direction.
tangent to the circle. (ii) Which force acts on the stone in free fall after
(iii) What is centripetal force? you release it?
Ans. The force exerted towards the centre of the circle Ans. O
 nly gravitational force acts on it when it is
onanobjectmovingalongacircularpathiscalled released.
centripetal force. It is a centre seeking force. (iii) What is free fall?
(2) T
 akeasmallstone.Holditinyourhand. Ans. W
 henanobjectfallstowardstheEarthunderthe
 W
 eknowthattheforceofgravityduetotheearth influenceoftheEarth’sgravityaloneitiscalled
acts on each and every object. When we were free fall.
holding the stone in our hand, the stone was (iv) What is the initial velocity and what is the effect
experiencingthisforce,butitwasbalancedbya of gravitational acceleration on the object in
forcethatwewereapplyingonitintheopposite free fall?
direction. As a result, the stone remained at rest. Ans. I nfreefall,theinitialvelocityofanobjectiszero
Once we release the stone from our hands, the andasthetimeprogresses,velocityincreasesdue
onlyforcethatactsonitisthegravitationalforce to uniform gravitational acceleration.
of the earth and the stone falls down under its (v) Write kinematic equations used in free fall?
influence. Whenever an object moves under the 1
influence of the force of gravity alone, it is said Ans. Thekinematicequationsare,v=gt,s= gt2 and
2
to be falling freely. Thus the released stone is v2=2gs

vvv
28 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

ASSIGNMENT - 1
Time : 1 Hr. Marks : 20

Q.1. (A) Answer the following questions: (3)

(1) Fill in the blanks:
(i) Value of g at the centre of Earth is .
(ii) Mass is also a measure of of an object.
(2) Complete the analogy:
At poles : 9.83 m/s2 : : At equator : .
Q.1. (B) Choose and write the correct option: (2)
(1) Thegravitationalforceofattractionbetweentwoobjectsisgivenby .
m1m2 d2 m1m2 m1m2
(a) F α 2
(b) F α (c) F α (d) F α
d mm d 2 d3
1 2
(2) The gravitational force on the surface of the Moon is times than that on the surface of the
Earth.
(a) five (b) onefifth (c) one sixth (d) six
Q.2. Answer the following: (Any 2) (4)
(1) MahendraandVirataresittingatadistanceof1metrefromeachother.Theirmassesare75kgand
80 kg respectively. What is the gravitational force between them?
(2) Define:(i) Centreofmass (ii) Freefall
(3) Distinguish between: Weight and Mass
Q.3. Answer the following: (Any 2) (6)
(1) Ifapersonweighs750NonEarth,howmuchwouldbehisweightontheMoongiventhatMoon’s
1 1
mass is of that of the Earth and its radius is of that of Earth.
81 3.7
(2) Define:TheUniversallawofgravitationandderivemathematically.
 (3) Observethefigureandanswerthefollowingquestions:

m1 m2
F1 F2

d
(i) Write gravitational force between them.
(ii) What will happen to gravitational force if mass of one of the objects is doubled?
(iii) What is the value of universal constant in SI system?
Q.4. Answer the following: (Any 1) (5)
(1) Write the three laws given by Kepler. How did they help Newton to arrive at the inverse square law of
gravity?
(2) Define:Escapevelocityandderivemathematically.

vvv
 2
Atomic number of the element
Symbol of the element
Name of the element
Atomic mass of the element

(29)
Periodic Classification of Elements

Fig 2.1 Modern Periodic Table

30 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

CONCEPT MAP
Elements are arranged with Elements are arranged with
increasing Atomic mass Classification of elements increasing Atomic number

Group of three upto Ca 63 Elements are arranged 118 elements

elements having out of 56 elements with increasing
similar chemical elements Atomic mass
properties.

Dobereiner’s Limitations Newlands' Modified Mendeleev’s Research Modern

Triad led to Octave further Periodic Table led to Periodic Table

Main Main Main Main

features features features features

Atomic mass of Every eighth Elements are Elements are

middle element is element had arranged in arranged on the
the arithmetic mean properties similar vertical groups and basis of electronic
of atomic mass of tothatofthefirst horizontal periods. configurationinto4
the other two. element. blocks.

Points to Remember:
zz Today 118elementsareknowntothescientificworld.
zz In the year 1817, a German scientist Dobereiner suggested that properties of elements are related to their
atomic masses.
zz Group of three elements having similar chemical properties are known as Triads.
zz In the year 1866, English scientist ohn Newlands arranged the elements known at that time in an increasing
order of their atomic masses.
zz Newlands’ Octaves or Law of Octaves: When the elements are arranged in an increasing order of their
atomic masses, every eighth element had properties similar to those of the first.
zz The Russian scientist Dmitri Mendeleev developed the periodic table of elements during the period 1869 to
1872 A.D.
zz He arranged 63 elements known at that time in an increasing order of their atomic masses.
zz Mendeleev’s Periodic Law: Properties of elements are periodic function of their atomic masses.
zz In 1913 A.D., an English scientist Henry Moseley revealed through experiments done using x-ray tube that
atomic number (Z) is a more fundamental property of an element than its atomic mass.
zz Modern Periodic Law: Properties of elements are a periodic function of their atomic numbers.
zz Modern Periodic table contains seven horizontal rows called the periods 1 to 7 and the eighteen vertical
columns are the groups 1 to 18.
zz Entire Modern Periodic table is divided into four blocks, viz, s block, p block, d block and f block.
zz Electronicconfigurationofanelement:Thedistributionofelectronsinthevariousorbitsaroundthenucleus
ofanatomofanelementiscalleditselectronicconfiguration.
zz Itistheelectronicconfigurationofanelementwhichdecidesthegroupandtheperiodinwhichtheelement
is to be placed.
 i i  i i   31

zz Valency: Combining capacity of an element.

zz Valence electrons: Electrons present in the outermost shell of an atom.
zz Atomic radius is the distance between the nucleus of the atom and its outermost shell. It is expressed in the
unit picometer (pm). (1 pm = 10–12 m)
zz Atomic radius goes on decreasing while going from left to right within a period and goes on increasing while
going down (from top to bottom) in a group.
zz Metal atoms have a tendency to form a cation by losing their valence electrons. This property is called
electropositivity of an element.
zz An atom of a non metal has a tendency to form an anion by accepting electrons from outside into its valence
shell. This property is called electronegativity.

(16) As we go down a group, the number of shells

MASTER KEY QUESTION SET - 2 goes on .
Q.1. (A) 1. Fill in the blanks and rewrite the complete (17) In the Modern Periodic table, the elements placed
statement: at the bottom of the periodic table are called as
(1) The arrangement of elements in a group of three elements.
is known as . (18) Atomic radius is expressed in the unit
(2) The law used by Newlands’ to arrange elements (19) Inert gases belong to group.
is known as . (20) Elements with atomic numbers 90 to 103 in the
(3) Mendeleev arranged elements known Modern Periodic table are called
at that time. (21) The valency of an element is determined by the
(4) The vertical columns in the periodic table are number of electrons present in the
called , while the horizontal rows are outermost shell of an atom.
called . (22) From left to right, the atomic size of an atom
(5) The element eka-boron in Mendeleev’s periodic .
table is known as in the Modern (23) An element is placed in 2nd period, so it has
Periodic table. shells.
(6) There was no place for in Mendeleev’s (24) Valency across a period gradually.
original periodic table.
(25) An atom is said to be a non-metal if it
(7) Mendeleev created the group without electrons.
disturbing the original periodic table.
(26) is the only element in duplet state.
(8) In the Modern Periodic table, the elements are
(27) Elements of group 1A are called .
arranged in accordance with their .
(28) Group II A elements are called as .
(9)  worowsshownseparatelyatthebottomofthe
T
Modern Periodic table are called and (29) Group VII A elements are called as .
. (30) First period contains elements.
(10) The contains the group 1 and 2 elements. (31) Moseley arranged elements according to
(11) The d-block elements are called . .

(12) Elements showing properties of both metals and (32) The number of shells down the group.
non-metals are called . (33) The formula of chloride of a metal is MCl2, the
(13) Newlands could arrange elements upto metal M belongs to group.
out of total 56 elements known. (34) group contains all gases at room
(14) In the family of alkali metals, the number of temperature.
valence electrons is . Ans. ( ) i  (2)    v  (3) 3
(15) There are seven electrons in the outermost shell ( )  i  (5) i  ( )  
of the elements, such elements belong to the (7)  (8) i   (9) i  i 
family of . i i  i  ( 0)  ( ) ii  
32 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

( 2) i  ( 3) i  ( ) ( )  ( ) Mendeleev’s periodic table whereas the atomic

( 5)  ( ) i i  ( 7) i  ii  number is the basis for Modern Periodic Table.
( 8) i  ( 9)  (20) i i  (2 ) v  (3) Hydrogen : First period :: Lithium :
(22) (23)2(2 )v i (25) i   
Ans. Secondperiod-ThefirstperiodcontainsHydrogen
(2 ) i  (27) i  (28) i  
(1) and Helium (2) Lithium’s atomic number is 3,
 (29)  (30) 2 (3 ) i  
therefore, it is put in the second period.
(32)i (33)2(  )(3 ) 8 
(4) Fluorine : 2, 7 :: Chlorine :
Q.1. (A) 2. Find the odd word out.
Ans. 2, 8, 7 - Chlorine’s atomic number is 17 therefore
(1) Lithium, Beryllium, Boron, Chlorine itselectronicconfigurationis(2,8,7)
Ans. Chlorine: It belongs to the third period while (5) Group 1: Alkali metals :: : Alkaline
others are second period elements. earth metals
(2) Helium, Radon, Argon, Boron Ans. Group 2 - The outermost shell of these elements
Ans. Boron: It is a metal while others are inert or noble has 2 electrons, therefore, they are put in group 2.
gases. (6) Transition elements : d-block :: Inner transition
(3) Chlorine, Bromine, Iodine, Oxygen elements :
Ans. Oxygen: It is a gas belonging to group 16 while Ans. f-block - The d-block elements have 2 incomplete
others are halogens belonging to group 17 outermost shells whereas the f-block elements
have 3 outermost shells which are incomplete.
(4) Sodium, Lithium, Copper, Beryllium
(7) Tellurium : :: Radium : Metal
Ans. Copper: Others are normal elements, while
Ans. Metalloid - Tellurium has properties of both metals
copper is a transition element.
and non metals, therefore, it is called a metalloid.
(5) Dalton, Dobereiner, Moseley, Newlands
(8) Transition elements : :: Inner transition
Ans. Dalton: He put forth the Dalton’s theory for atomic elements : Three incomplete outermost shells
structure,whereasallothersclassifiedelements.
Ans. Two incomplete outermost shells - The d-block
(6) Boron, Silicon, Potassium, Antimony elements have 2 incomplete outer most shells
Ans. Potassium: It is a metal while others are metalloids. whereas the f-block elements have 3 outermost
(7) Aluminium, Argon, Xenon, Sodium shells which are incomplete.
(9) Lanthanides : Ce to Lu :: Actinides:
Ans. Sodium: It belongs to s-block, whereas others
belong to p-block. Ans. Th to Lr - Ce to Lu are called Lathanides and Th
to Lr are called Actinides.
(8) Boron, Silicon, Neon, Polonium
(10) Ca : Alkaline earth metal :: Cs :
Ans. Neon: It is an inert gas, whereas all others are
Ans. Alkali metal - Cs has one electron in its outermost
metalloids.
shell and Ca has 2 electrons in its outermost shell.
(9) Lithium, Magnesium, Sodium, Potassium
(11) Fe : Electropositive :: Cl :
Ans. Magnesium: It belongs to group II A (group 2),
Ans. Electronegative - Fe has a tendency to form
whereas others belong to group I A (group 1).
a cation by losing its valence electrons and it
(10) Chlorine, Bromine, Arsenic, Fluorine is called electropositive property whereas Cl
Ans. Arsenic: It is a metalloid and others are halogens. has a tendency to gain electron and it is called
electronegative property.
Q.1. (A) 3. Complete the analogy.
(12) (Li, Na, K) : :: (F, Cl, Br) : Group 17
(1) Dobereiner: Triad :: Newlands :
Ans. Group 1 - Li, Na, K have one electron in their
Ans. Octaves - Doberiner arranged three elements in a outermost shell whereas F, Cl, Br have 7 electrons
triad whereas Newlands arranged the elements
in their outermost shell.
in increasing order of their atomic masses. He
(13) Valency of Na (2,8,1) : 1 (One) :: Valency of P(2,8,5)
found that first element and the eighth element
:
had similar properties and called it law of octaves.
Ans. 3 (Three) - Na loses 1 electron to get the
(2) Mendeleev’s Periodic Table : Atomic mass ::
configurationofHe(2b)andPrequires3electrons
Modern Periodic table :
togetaconfiguration2,8,8.(Ar).Therefore,the
Ans. Atomic number - Atomic mass is the basis for
valency of P is 3.
 i i  i i   33

Q.1. (A) 4. Match the columns:

*(1) Column A Column B Column C
(i) Triad (a) Lightest and negatively charged particle in all the atoms. (1) Mendeleev
(ii) Octave (b) Concentrated mass and positive charge (2) Thomson
(iii) Atomic number (c) Averageofthefirstandthethirdatomicmass (3) Newlands
(iv) Period (d) Propertiesoftheeighthelementsimilartothefirst (4) Rutherford
(v) Nucleus (e) Positive charge on the nucleus (5) Dobereiner
(vi) Electron (f) Sequentialchangeinmolecularformulae (6) Moseley
Ans. (i   5) (ii   3) (iii    ) (iv    ) (v    ) (vi   2)
(2) Q.1. (A) 5. State whether the following statement
Column A Column B
is True or False’. If false write the correct
(1) Sodium (a) Non-metal statement for the same.
(2) Sulphur (b) Lanthanide (1) Lithium, Potassium and Sodium are elements
(3) Manganese (c) Metal forming Dobereiner’s triad.
(2) According to Mendeleev’s periodic law, the
(4) Cerium (d) Transition metal
properties of elements are a periodic function of
Ans. (   ) (2  ) (3  ) (   ) their atomic numbers.
(3) Column A Column B (3) Periods are the horizontal rows of elements.
(4) Group 17 elements are known as Noble gases.
(1) Alkali metals (a) Valency4
(5) Silicon is a metalloid.
(2) Alkaline earth (b) Valency 0
metals (6)  s we move from left to right in a period
A
of Modern Periodic table, atomic size of the
(3) Argon (c) Divalent
elements gradually increases.
(4) Carbon (d) Monovalent
(7) Group 1 elements in Modern Periodic table are
Ans. (   ) (2  ) (3  ) (   ) referred as “alkali metals”.
(4) Column A Column B (8) Argon is not an inert gas.
(9) The d-block elements are called transition
(1) Atomic size in a (a) Atomic mass
elements.
period from left
to right (10) Upto Calcium, the law of octaves was found to
be applicable.
(2) Atomic size in a (b) Increases
group from top (11) Metals are electronegative and non-metals are
tobottom electropositive.

(3) Modern (c) Atomic number (12) Eka-aluminium was discovered and named as
Periodic Law Gallium (Ga).
(13) Atomic number is the number of protons or
(4) Mendeleev’s (d) Decreases
electrons present in the nucleus.
Periodic Law
(14) Eka boron is known as Germanium.
Ans. (   ) (2  ) (3  ) (   )
(15) Tellurium, Polonium are metalloids.
(5) Column A Column B (16) Isotopes have same atomic masses.
(1) Alkali metals (a) Group 2 (17) Isotopes have similar chemical properties.
(2) Alkaline earth metals (b) Group 1 (18) La stands for Lutetium.
(3) Halogens (c) Group 18 (19) f-block elements are metalloids.

(4) Noble gases (d) Group 17 (20) In an atom of an element, extra-nuclear electrons
take part in the chemical reaction.
Ans. (   ) (2  ) (3  ) (   )
34 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

Ans. ( ) . i i  i   i    Q.1. (A) 7. Name the following:

i  i  i . (2) . i   *(1) Three elements having a single electron in their
v  i i    i    outermost shell.
  i i  i   i i  .
Ans. (i) Lithium (Li) (2,1) (ii) Sodium (Na) (2, 8 1)
(3)  ( ) .  7    
(iii) Potassium (K) (2,8,8,1).
. (5)  ( ) .   v  
 i i   i     i i  *(2) Threeelementswithfilledoutermostshell.
i  i      . Ans. (i) Helium (2) (ii) Neon (2,8) (iii) Krypton (2,8,18,8).
(7)  (8) . i  i     *(3) Three elements having 7 electrons in their
 8. (9)  ( 0)  ( ) .   outermost shell.
i iv     iv .
Ans. (i) Fluorine (2,7) (ii) Chlorine (2,8,7) (iii) Bromine
( 2)  ( 3)  ( ) i  
(2,8,18,7).
i . ( 5)  ( ) .   
(4) Three elements which are metalloids.
    vi   i  
 i  i  .( 7) ( 8) .  Ans. (i) Boron (B) (ii) Silicon (Si) (iii) Germanium (Ge).
  .( 9) .    (5) Three alkaline earth metals with electronic
.(20) configuration.
Ans. (i) Beryllium (Be) (2,2) (ii) Magnesium (Mg)
Q.1. (A) 6. Answer the following.
(2,8,2) (iii) Calcium (Ca) (2,8,8,2).
*(1) Write the name and symbol of the elements from
(6) Two pairs of Dobereiner’s triad.
the description.
Ans. (i) Lithium (Li), Sodium (Na), Potassium (K)
(i) The atom having the smallest size. (ii) Chlorine (Cl), Bromine (Br), Iodine (I).
Ans. Helium (He). (7)  hescientistwhoclassifiedelementsonthebasis
T
(ii) The atom having the smallest atomic mass. of atomic mass.
Ans. Hydrogen (H).
Ans. Dmitri Mendeleev.
(iii) The most electronegative atom.
(8)  hescientistwhoclassifiedelementsonthebasis
T
Ans. Fluorine (F).
of atomic number.
(iv) The noble gas with the smallest atomic radius.
Ans. Henry Moseley.
Ans. Helium (He).
(9) The 3 elements which were predicted by
(v) The most reactive nonmetal.
Mendeleevforwhichheleftblankspacesinthe
Ans. Fluorine (F).
periodic table.
*(2) Write the names from the description. Ans. Eka-Boron, Eka-Silicon, Eka-Aluminium.
(i) The period with electrons in the shell, K, L and M. (10)  eries of 14 elements placed below the periodic
S
Ans. Period 3. table having atomic no. from 58 to 71 [Ce to Lu]
(ii) The group with valency zero.
Ans. Lanthanides.
Ans. Group 18
(11)  eries of 14 elements placed below the periodic
S
(iii) The family of non-metals having valency one.
table having atomic no. from 90 to 103 [Th to Lr]
Ans. Halogens.
Ans. Actinides.
(iv) The family of metals having valency one.
Ans. Alkali metals. Q.1. (B) Choose and write the correct options:
(v) The family of metals having valency two. *(1) The number of electrons in the outermost shell of
Ans. Alkaline Earth metals. alkali metals is
(vi) The metalloids in the second and third periods. (a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 3 (d) 7
Ans. Boron and Silicon. *(2) Alkaline earth metals have valency 2. This means
(vii) Non-metals in the third period. that their position in the Modern Periodic table
Ans. Phosphorus, Sulphur, Chlorine and Argon. is in
(viii) Twoelementshavingvalency4. (a) Group 2 (b) Group 16
Ans. Carbon, Silicon. (c) Period 2 (d) d-block
 i i  i i   35

*(3) Molecular formula of the chloride of an element Ans. Atomic Electronic

X is XCl. This compound is a solid having high Element
number configuration
melting point. Which of the following elements
be present in the same group as X. X Z = 12 2, 8, 2
(a) Na (b) Mg (c) Al (d) Si Y Z = 16 2, 8, 6
(4) In which block of the Modern Periodic table are
Both these elements belong to third period.
the non-metals present?
(a) s-block (b) p-block *(3) Identify Dobereiner’s triads from the following
groups of elements having similar chemical
(c) d-block (d) f-block
properties?     
(5) triad does not follow Dobereiner’s (i) Mg (24.3), Ca (40.1), Sr (87.6)
law of triad. (ii) S (32.1), Se (79.0), Te (127.6)
(a) Li, Na, K (b) Ca, Sr, Ba (iii) Be (9.0), Mg (24.3), Ca (40.1)
(c) Mg, Ca, Sr (d) Cl, Br, I Ans.
(i) (a)Mg(24.3),(b)Ca(40.1),(c)Sr(87.6)
(6) resembles alkali metals as well as
a+c 111.90
halogens. ∴ mean of = = 55.95
2 2
(a) Lithium (b) Sodium  which is not approximately equal to the atomic
(c) Hydrogen (d) Silicon mass of middle element (Ca). Therefore, it does
(7) First period consists of elements. not form Dobereiner’s triads.
(ii) (a) S (32.1), (b) Se (79.0), (c) Te (127.6)
(a) 1 (b) 8 (c) 2 (d) 4
a+c 159.70
(8) ElectronicconfigurationofMgis ∴ mean of = = 79.85
2 2
(a) (2,8,4) (b) (2, 8, 1)  whichisapproximatelyequaltoatomicmassof
(c) (2, 8, 3) (d) (2, 8, 2) Se. Hence, it forms Dobereiner’s triads.

(9) isinliquidstateatroomtemperature. (iii) (a)Be(9.0),(b)Mg(24.3),(c)Ca(40.1)

a+c 49.10
(a) Fluorine (b) Chlorine ∴ mean of = =24.55
2 2
(c) Bromine (d) Iodine  whichisapproximatelyequaltoatomicmassof
(10) Atomic radius of Lithium is pm. Mg. Hence, it forms Dobereiner’s triads.

(a) 41 (b) 151 (c) 152 (d) 157 Q.2.2. State the laws / Define:
Ans. ( ) ( )  (2) ( )  2 (3) ( )  ( )( ) (1) Newlands’ Law of Octaves:
(5)( )   ( )( ) (7)( )2 Ans. Newlands’ Law of Octaves states that “When
 (8)( )(2 8 2)(9)( ) i ( 0)( ) 52 the elements are arranged in an increasing order
of their atomic masses, the properties of every
Q.2.1. Solve the following: eighthelementaresimilartothoseofthefirst.
(1) , and are the elements of a Dobereiner’s (2) Mendeleev’s Periodic law:
Triad. If the atomic mass of is 7 and that of Ans. Mendeleev’s Periodic law states that “properties
is 39, what should be the atomic mass of ? of elements are periodic function of their atomic
Ans. Atomic mass of X = 7 masses.”
Atomic mass of Z = 39 (3) Modern Periodic Law:
∴ According to Dobereiner’s Triad, atomic mass of Y Ans. Modern Periodic law states that “properties of
X+Z 7 + 39 46 elements are periodic function of their atomic
= = = = 23 numbers.”
2 2 2
(4) Dobereiner’s Triad
∴ Atomic mass of Y = 23
Ans. When elements with similar chemical properties
(2) Two elements and have atomic number are arranged in increasing order of their atomic
12 and 16 respectively. Write the electronic mass in group of three called as triads, the atomic
configuration for these elements. To which mass of the middle element is approximately
period of the Modern Periodic table do these equal to the mean of the atomic masses of the
two elements belong? other two elements.
3 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

(5) Periods Q.2.3. Answer the following questions in one or two

Ans. The Horizontal rows of elements in the periodic sentences:
table are called periods. (1) What is meant by periodicity?
(6) Groups Ans. The repetition of same properties after certain
interval is called periodicity.
Ans. The Vertical columns of elements in the periodic
table are called groups. (2) How will the tendency to gain electrons change
as we go from left to right across a period? Why?
(7) Normal Elements
Ans. Tendency to gain electrons increases from left
Ans. The elements in which only last shell is to right in a period because atomic size goes on
incompletelyfilledarecalledasnormalelements. decreasingandeffectivenuclearchargeincreases.
(8) Lanthanide Series (3) Why was Dobereiner’s classification of elements
Ans. The series of fourteen elements from Cerium [Ce not useful?
(58)] to Lutetium [Lu (71)] is called Lanthanides Ans. Dobereiner’sTriadwasnotusefulforclassification
Series. of elements because he could identify only some
(9) Actinide Series triads from the known elements as other triads
Ans. The series of Fourteen elements from Thorium did not obey Dobereiner’s rule.
[Th (90)] to Lawrencium [Lr (103)] is called (4) In the periodic table where are the metalloids
Actinide Series. placed?
(10) Transition elements Ans. The metalloids are elements which lie along the
Ans. The elements in which last two shells are border of the zig zag line which separates metals
incompletelyfilledarecalledTransitionelements. placedontheleftsidefromnon-metalsplacedon
They belong to d-block of Modern Periodic Table. the right side.
(11) Inner Transition elements (5) Elements of which group are called as alkali
Ans. T
 hef-blockelementsareplacedatthebottomof metals?
the periodic table and they have last three shells Ans. Elements of group 1 are called alkali metals.
incompletely filled. These elements are called (6) Which is the incomplete period in the Modern
Inner Transition Elements. Periodic table?
(12) Atomic radius Ans. Since the Modern Periodic table is complete there
Ans. For an isolated atom, atomic radius is the distance is no incomplete period.
between the centre of the nucleus of an atom to (7) Which law was modified into Modern Periodic
its outermost shell. law?
(13) Valency Ans. Mendeleev’s Periodic law was modified into
Ans. The number of electrons accepted, donated or Modern Periodic law.
shared by an atom so as to complete the octet in (8) What are periodic properties?
its outermost shell is called valency. Ans. The properties which show gradual variation in a
OR group and in a period and they repeat themselves
Valency is the combining capacity of an element. after a certain interval of atomic number are
(14) Inert elements called periodic properties.
Ans. Elements present in group 18 on the extreme (9) What are normal elements?
right of the Modern Periodic table are called Inert Ans. Elements of group 1, 2 and 13 to 17 are called
elements or Noble gases. They have all shells normal elements. These elements have only the
includingtheoutermostshellcompletelyfilled. outermostshellincompletelyfilled.
(15) Isotopes (10) On what basis is Potassium ( 19) placed in
Ans. D
 ifferent atoms of the same element having 4th period and group 1?
same atomic number but different atomic mass Ans. The electronic configuration of potassium is
number are called Isotopes. (2, 8, 8, 1). It has four shells so it belongs to the
(16) Metalloids period4.Theperiod4haselementswiththe4th
Ans. Elements which show the properties of both shell being filled. Potassium has 1 electron in its
metals and non-metals are called as metalloids. valence shell. Hence, it is placed in group 1. Group
e.g. Silicon (Si), Arsenic (As), Tellurium (Te). 1 has elements with 1 electron in the valence shell.
 i i  i i   37

(11) How will you differentiate between metals and element where as molecules of compounds contain
non metals by the number of valence electrons? atomsoftwoormoredifferentelements.
Ans. Elements which have 1, 2 or 3 valence electrons *(16) What are the values of n’ for the shells K, L and
are metals and those which have 4, 5, 6 or 7 M? (     2 )
valence electrons are non-metals. Ans. K - 1 L-2 M-3
*(12) What are the types of matter? (    *(17) What is the maximum number of electrons
  ) that can be accommodated in a shell? Write the
Ans. There are three types of matters viz elements, formula. (     2 )
compounds and mixtures.
Ans. Shell 2n2 Electron Capacity
*(13) What are the types of elements? (    K 2 × 12 = 2 2
  )
L 2 × 22 = 8 8
Ans. The three types of elements are metals, non-
metals and metalloids. M 2 × 32 = 18 18
*(14) What are the smallest particles of matter called? N 2 × 42 = 32 32
(      ) *(18) Deduce the maximum electron capacity of the
Ans. Thesmallestparticlesofmatterarecalledatoms shells K, L and M? (    
and molecules. 2 )
*(15) What is the difference between the molecules Ans. K - 2 (2n2 = 2 × 12 = 2)
of elements and compounds? (    L-8 (2n2 = 2 × 22 = 2 × 4 = 8)
  )
M - 18 (2n2 = 2 × 32 = 2 × 9 = 18)
Ans. Molecules of elements contain atoms of the same

*(19) There are some vacant places in Mendeleev’s Periodic table. In some of these places, the atomic masses are
seen to be predicted. Enlist three of these predicted atomic masses along with their group and period. ( i 
i    9)
Ans. Predicted atomic mass Group Period Predicted Name Present Names
44 III 4 Eka boron Scandium
68 III 5 Eka aluminium Gallium
72 IV 5 Eka silicon Germanium
*(20) Due to uncertainty in the names of some of the (ii) Mendeleev’s periodic table is the most important
elements, a question mark is indicated before stepintheclassificationofelements.
the symbol in the Mendeleev’s periodic table. (iii) Mendeleev considered the fundamental property
What are such symbols? ( i  i   of elements, namely the atomic mass as standard
 9) and arranged 63 elements known at that time in
Ans. Mendeleev arranged the elements in the an increasing order of their atomic masses.
increasing order of atomic masses. In some places (iv) Then, he transferred this into the periodic table
the atomic mass of elements would not be in right of elements in accordance with the physical and
order to put them in the correct group. Tellurium chemical properties of these elements.
is heavier than Iodine, but he put Iodine after
(v)  eorganizedtheperiodictableonthebasisofthe
H
Tellurium because Iodine has similar properties
chemical and physical properties of the elements.
like F, Cl, Br. He placed the elements according
to their properties and put a question mark to (vi) These were the molecular formulae of hydrides
indicate that the atomic mass needs to be checked. and oxides of the elements, melting points,
for e.g. ?Yt = 88 in Mendeleev’s periodic table was boiling points and densities of the elements and
corrected as Yt = 88.906 in Modern Periodic table. their hydrides and oxides.
(vii) Mendeleev found that the elements with similar
Q.2.4. Write short notes on:
physical and chemical properties repeat after a
*(1) Mendeleev’s Periodic law: definiteinterval.
Ans. (viii) O
 nthebasisofthisfinding,Mendeleev,statedthe
(i) The Russian scientist Dmitri Mendeleev developed following periodic law “Properties of elements
the periodic table of elements during the period are periodic function of their atomic masses”.
1869 to 1872 A.D.
38 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

*(2) Structure of the Modern Periodic table. (iv) Based on chemical properties, they were to be
Ans. placed in same group, while based on atomic
massestheyweretobeplacedindifferentgroups.
(i) The Modern Periodic table contains seven
horizontal rows called the periods 1 to 7. (v) Hence,therewasnodefiniteplaceforisotopes.
(ii) Similarly, eighteen vertical columns are the (vi) This anomaly arose in Mendeleev’s periodic
groups 1 to 18. table because the elements were arranged in an
increasing order of their atomic masses.
(iii) The arrangement of the periods and groups
results into formation of boxes. (vii) In 1913 A.D., Henry Moseley revealed that atomic
number is a more fundamental property of an
(iv) Atomic numbers are serially indicated in the
element than its atomic mass.
upper part of these boxes.
(viii) H
 ence, he modified Mendeleev’s Periodic Table
(v) Each box corresponds to the place for one element. and arranged the elements in an increasing order
(vi) Apart from these seven rows, two separate rows of their atomic number in the Modern Periodic
areplacedatthebottomoftheperiodictable. Table.
(vii) These are called Lanthanide series and Actinide (ix) By doing so, the anomaly of Mendeleev’s Periodic
series respectively. Table regarding isotopes was removed.
(viii) There are 118 boxes in the periodic table including (x) Therefore, in the Modern Periodic Table the
the two series. isotopes could be placed in the same group
(ix) It means that there are 118 places for elements in and the radioactive isotopes were placed in
the Modern Periodic table. two separate series below at the bottom of the
periodic table.
(x)  heModernPeriodictableisnowcompletelyfilled,
T
means all the 118 elements are now discovered. (4) Halogens or group 17 elements.
(xi) The entire periodic table is divided into four Ans.
blocks, viz, s-block, p-block, d-block and f-block. (i) The second last column in the periodic table is
(xii) The s-block contains the groups 1 and 2 elements. group 17 (VII – A) which contains halogens.

(xiii) The groups 13 to 18 constitute the p-block elements. (ii)  he members of this group from top to bottom
T
are as given in the following table:
(xiv) The groups 3 to 12 constitute the d-block
elements. The d-block elements are called Group Symbol Atomic Electronic Valency
transition elements. 17 Number configuration
(xv) T
 helanthanideandactinideseriesatthebottom elements ( )
form the f-block elements. Fluorine F 9 2, 7 1
(xvi) A zig-zag line can be drawn in the p-block of the
Chlorine Cl 17 2, 8, 7 1
periodic table.
Bromine Br 35 2, 8, 18, 7 1
(xvii) The metalloid elements lie along the border of
the zig-zag line. Iodine I 53 2, 8, 18, 18, 7 1
(xviii) All the metals lie on the left side of the zig-zag Astatine At 85 2, 8, 18, 32, 18, 1
line, while all the non-metals lie on the right side. 7
*(3) Position of isotopes in the Mendeleev’s and the (iii) The valence shell of a halogen contains seven
Modern Periodic table. electrons.
Ans. (iv) Thus, it needs one electron to complete its octet.
(i)  ifferentatomsofthesameelementhavingsame
D (v)  he halogen complete their octet and attain the
T
atomicnumberbutdifferentatomicmassnumber stable inert gas configuration by gaining one
are called isotopes. electron.
(ii) I sotopes were discovered long time after (vi) Hence, the valency of halogens is one, i.e. they
Mendeleev put forth the periodic table. are monovalent.
(iii) As isotopes have the same chemical properties but (vii) All of them have general formula X2. Fluorine (F2)
differentatomicmasses,achallengewasposedin and Chlorine (Cl2) are gases. Bromine (Br2) is a
placing them in Mendeleev’s periodic table. liquid,whileIodine(I2) is a solid.
 i i  i i   39

(5) Transition Elements. (7) Metallic and Non metallic properties

Ans. Ans.
(i) Elements present in groups 3 to 12 in the middle (i) Metals show tendency to lose electrons. Therefore,
of the periodic table are called transition elements. they are said to be electropositive.

(ii) Their last two outermost shells are incomplete. (ii) Non-metals show the tendency to accept electrons
or share electrons with another atoms. Therefore,
(iii) They belong to d-block of Modern Periodic table.
they are said to be electronegative.
(iv) All these elements are solid metals at room
(iii)  cross the period from left to right, metallic
A
temperature (except Mercury and Gallium).
character decreases and non-metallic character
(6) Inner Transition Elements. increases.
Ans. (iv) This is because the atomic size decreases due to
(i) Elements placed in two separate rows at the greater nuclear pull because of which valence
bottom of the periodic table are called inner electrons cannot be easily removed.
transition elements.
(v) Down the group-metallic character increases
(ii) They include two series of elements: Lanthanide and non-metallic character decreases from top to
series and Actinide series. They belong to f-block bottominagroup.
elements of Modern Periodic table.
(vi)  satomicnumberincreasesfromtoptobottom
A
(iii) 1 4 elements with atomic number 58 to 71 in a group, newer shells get added which in
(Cerium to Lutetium) are called lanthanides.
turn increases its atomic size. Thus nuclear pull
These elements are placed along with lanthanum
decreases due to addition of newer shells and
(La = 57) in group 3 and period 6 because of very
thus the valence electrons present in outermost
close resemblance in properties between them.
shell can be easily removed from the atom.
(iv) 1 4 elements with atomic number 90 to 103
(vii) The three types of elements can be easily shown
(Thorium to Lawrencium) are called actinides.
in the Modern Periodic table with the help of zig-
These elements are placed along with actinium
zag line.
(Ac = 89) in group 3 and period 7 because of very
close resemblance in their properties. (viii) The metalloid elements lie along the border of
thezig-zagline.Allthemetalslieontheleftside
(v) Theyhavelastthreeshellsincompletelyfilled.
of zig-zag line while all the non-metals lie on the
(vi) All these elements are metals.
right side.

Q.2.5. Distinguish between:

(1) Mendeleev’s Periodic table and Modern Periodic table.
Ans. Mendeleev’s Periodic Table Modern Periodic Table
(i) This table is based on the atomic mass of the (i) This table is based on the atomic number of the
elements. elements.
(ii) Elements are arranged in increasing order of (ii) Elements are arranged in increasing order of their
their atomic mass. atomic number.
(iii) Mendeelev’s Periodic table consists of only (iii) Modern Periodic table consists of 118 elements.
63 elements.
(iv) Mendeelev’s Periodic table is based on (iv) Modern Periodic table is based on Modern Periodic
Mendeleev’s Periodic Law, ‘Properties of Law,‘Properties of elements are periodic function
element are a periodic function of their of their atomic number.’
atomic masses.’
(v) There was no space for inert gases and (v) The table contains all elements including inert
radioactive isotopes. gases and radioactive isotopes.
40 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

(vi) Some elements having similar properties (vi) All elements placed in the same group have similar
wereplacedindifferentgroups.Some properties.
elementsindifferentgroupswerefoundto
have similar properties.
(vii) Elements could not be divided into four (vii) Elements are divided into four blocks – i.e. s, p, d
blocks. and f blocks.

(2) Transition elements and Inner transition elements

Ans. Transition elements Inner transition elements
(i) Elements placed in groups 3 to 12 in the (i) Elements placed in two separate rows at the
middle of the Modern Periodic table are bottomoftheModernPeriodictablearecalled
called transition elements. inner transition elements.
(ii) These elements have last two incompletely (ii) Theseelementshavelastthreeincompletelyfilled
filledoutermostshells. outermost shells.
(iii) They belong to the d-block in the Modern (iii) They belong to the f-block in the Modern Periodic
Periodic table. table.
(3) Inert gases and Normal Elements
Ans. Inert gases Normal Elements
(i) In the atoms of inert gases all the shells are (i) In the atoms of normal elements, all shells are
completelyfilledincludingtheoutermost completelyfilledexcepttheoutermostshell.
shell.
(ii) They are stable and chemically inert (i.e. (ii) They are unstable and are chemically reactive.
chemically non-reactive)
(iii) They are included in the p-block of the (iii) They are included in the s-block as well as p-block
Modern Periodic table. of the Modern Periodic table.
(iv) They are placed in zero group (Group 18) of (iv) These elements are placed in groups 1, 2 and 13 to
the Modern Periodic table. 17 of the Modern Periodic table.
(4) Groups and Periods of Modern Periodic Table
Ans. Groups Periods
(i) Vertical columns of elements in the Modern (i) Horizontal rows of elements in the Modern Periodic
Periodic table are called Groups. table are called periods.

(ii) There are 18 groups in the Modern Periodic (ii) There are 7 periods in the Modern Periodic table.
table.
(iii) The group number indicates the valence (iii) The period number indicates the number of shells in
electrons in the outermost shell. the atoms of an element.

(iv) The elements in the same group have similar (iv) The elements in a period exhibit gradual change in
chemical properties. propertiesfromlefttoright.
(5) Metallic character and Non metallic character
Ans. Metallic character Non metallic character
(i) It is the tendency of an atom to lose electrons. (i) It is the tendency of an atom to accept or share electrons.
(ii) Metalliccharacterdecreasesfromlefttoright (ii) Non-metalliccharacterincreasesfromlefttorightin
in a period. a period.
 i i  i i   41

(iii) In a group, metallic character increases from (iii) In a group, non-metallic character decreases from
toptobottom. toptobottom.
(iv) Elements having metallic character are said (iv) Elements having non-metallic character are said to
to be electropositive. be electronegative.
(6) s block elements and p block elements
Ans. s block elements p block elements
(i) Elements in group 1 and 2 are called s-block (i) Elements in group 13 to 17 and zero group are
elements including hydrogen. called p-block elements.
(ii) They contain 1 or 2 electrons in the outermost (ii) They contain 3 to 8 electrons in the outermost shell.
shell.
(iii) They are all metals (except hydrogen). (iii) They are metals, non-metals and metalloids.
(7) Alkali metals and Alkaline earth metals
Ans. Alkali metals Alkaline earth metals
(i) In the Modern Periodic Table, elements in (i) In the Modern Periodic Table, elements in Group 2
Group 1 are alkali metals. are alkaline earth metals.

(ii) Atoms of these elements have one electron (ii) Atoms of these elements have two electrons in their
in the valence shell. valence shell.
(iii) They are monovalent. (iii) They are divalent.
(iv) Their oxides and hydroxides dissolve readily (iv) Their oxides and hydroxides dissolve slightly in
in water. water.
Q.2.6. Give Scientific easons: metalliccharacterdecreasesfromlefttorightin
*(1) Atomic radius goes on decreasing while going a period.
from left to right in a period. *(3) Atomic radius goes on increasing down a group.
Ans. Ans.
(i) Atomic radius is the distance between the centre (i) Atomic radius is the distance between the centre
of the atom and its outmost shell. of the atom to its outermost shell.
(ii) Atomic radius decreases across a period. (ii) New shells are added to the atoms of the elements
(iii) This is because valence electrons are being added aswegodownfromtoptobottominagroup.
to the same outermost shell or to the same energy (iii) The outermost electrons go further and further
level because of which the electrons added away from the nucleus, extending the radius and
experience greater pull from the nucleus. ultimately increase in the size of the atom. Hence,
(iv) This results in the electrons moving closer to atomic radius goes on increasing down a group.
the nucleus. Hence, the atomic radius goes on
*(4) Elements belonging to the same group have the
decreasingwhilegoingfromlefttorightinaperiod.
same valency.
*(2) Metallic character goes on decreasing while Ans.
going from left to right in a period. (i) Valency is the number of electrons donated,
Ans. accepted or shared by the atoms of an element so
(i) Metallic character is the tendency of an atom to as to complete the octet in the outermost orbit.
lose electrons. (ii) Valency is dependent upon the number of valence
(ii) In a period, electrons are added to the same shell electrons present in the outermost shell of an atom
and hence, these electrons experience greater called valence electrons.
pull from the nucleus. As a result outermost shell (iii) Elements in the same group have same number
comes closer to nucleus, atomic size decreases. of valence electrons, irrespective of the number
(iii)  hus it becomes difficult to remove an electron
T of orbits. Hence, elements in the same group have
from the outermost shell of an atom. Hence, the same valency.
42 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

*(5) The third period contains only eight elements *Q.3.1. Answer the following:
even though the electron capacity of the third (1) An element has its electronic configuration as
shell is 18. 2, 8, 2. Now answer the following questions:
Ans. (i) What is the atomic number of this element?
(i) Period 3 of the periodic table consists of elements
Ans. Electronicconfigurationofthiselementis(2,8,2)
whose atom has three shells occupied by electrons.
∴ Theatomicnumberofthiselementis12.
(ii) As per the electron holding capacity of shells,
(ii) What is the group of this element?
2 elements are present in the first period, and
8 elements in the second period. Ans. Atomic number of element is 12 and its electronic
configuration is (2, 8, 2). As it has 2 valence
(iii) The third period also contain only eight elements
electrons, this element belongs to group 2 and its
due to the law of electron octet and also electrons
name is Magnesium (Mg).
willfillorbitalsinincreasingorderofenergy,i.e.
thelowestenergyorbitalfirst. (iii) To which period does this element belong?
Ans. Atomic number of this element is 12 and its
(6) Atomic number is a more fundamental property
electronic configuration is (2, 8, 2). It has 3
of an element than its atomic mass.
shells. The number of shells indicates the period
Ans.
number. Hence it belongs to period 3.
(i) The atomic number of an element indicates the
number of protons in the nucleus or the number (iv) With which of the following elements would
of electrons in the atom. this element resemble? (Atomic numbers are
given in the brackets) N (7), Be (4), Ar (18), Cl (17)
(ii) All the atoms of an element have the same atomic
number. Ans. The atomic number of the given element is 12
and this element is Magnesium which belongs to
(iii) The number of electrons present in the outermost
group 2 and Period 3.
shell of an atom is responsible for the formation
of compounds either by sharing, accepting or  ElectronicconfigurationofMg(12)= (2,8,2)
donating electrons.  ElectronicconfigurationofN(7) = (2,5)
(iv) The chemical properties of an element are decided  ElectronicconfigurationofBe(4) = (2,2)
by its atomic numbers. Hence, atomic number is a  ElectronicconfigurationofAr(18) = (2,8,8)
more fundamental property of an element than its  ElectronicconfigurationofCl(17) = (2,8,7)
atomic mass. Number of valence electrons in this element
(7) Alkali metals are placed in Group 1. (Magnesium) is 2. Similarly the number of
Ans. valence electron in Be is 2. As they have same
(i) The group number indicates the number of number of valence electrons they belong to same
valence electrons present in the outermost shell of group i.e. group 2 and will resemble in some of
an atom of an element. their properties.
(ii) All alkali metals have one electron in their (2) Write down the electronic configuration of
outermost shell. Hence, they are placed in Group 1. the following elements from the given atomic
numbers. Answer the following questions with
(8) Inert gases exist in the form of free atoms.
explanation.
Ans.
(i) Li, 14Si, 2He, 11Na, 15P Which of these elements
(i) Formation of molecules is based on the electronic 3
belong to period 3?
configurationofthecombiningelements.
Ans.
(ii) In the case of inert gases, all the shells, including
Electronic
theoutermostshellarecompletelyfilled. Name of the Atomic
Configuration
(iii)  heyhaveelectronicconfigurationwithcomplete
T element Number
K L M
duplet or complete octet.
Lithium (Li) 3 2 1
(iv)  ue to their stable electronic configuration,
D
Silicon (Si) 14 2 8 4
atoms of these elements do not lose, gain or share
Helium (He) 2 2
electrons with other atoms. Hence, inert gases
exist in the form of free atoms. Sodium (Na) 11 2 8 1
Phosphorous (P) 15 2 8 5
 i i  i i   43

As the elements Silicon (Si), Sodium (Na) and (iv) 4

Be, 6C, 8O, 5B, 13Al. Which is the most
Phosphorous (P) have electrons in the three shells; electropositive element among these?
K, L and M, therefore these elements belong to Ans.
period 3 as the number of shells indicates the Electronic
period number. Name of the Atomic Configuration
Symbol
element Number
(ii) 1
H, 7N, 20Ca, 16S, 4Be, 18Ar. Which of these K L M
elements belong to the second group?
Beryllium Be 4 2 2
Ans.
Electronic Carbon C 6 2 4
Name
Atomic Configuration Oxygen O 8 2 6
of the Symbol
Number
element K L M N Boron B 5 2 3
Hydrogen H 1 1 Aluminium Al 13 2 8 3
Nitrogen N 7 2 5 Tendency of atoms of an element to lose electrons
Calcium Ca 20 2 8 8 2 and form positive ion, cation, is known as
electropositivity. These elements lose valence
Sulphur S 16 2 8 6 electrons to form cations having a stable noble
Beryllium Be 4 2 2 gas configuration. It is the metallic character
of that element. Electropositivity decreases as
Argon Ar 18 2 8 8
we move from left to right in a period.Among
 From the above electronic configurations, the elements given, Beryllium, Carbon, Oxygen
elements Calcium (Ca) and Beryllium (Be) have and Boron belong to the second period. As
same number of valence electrons, i.e. 2, therefore Beryllium is the left most element, it will show
Calcium and Beryllium belong to group 2. We can high electropositive characteristic. Therefore,
infer from this that the group follows the trend of Beryllium is the most electropositive element.
same valence electrons. (v) Na, 15P, 17Cl, 14Si, 12Mg. Which of these has the
11
(iii) 7
N, 6C, 8O, 5B, 13Al. Which is the most largest atom?
electronegative element among these? Ans.
Ans. Electronic
Name of the Atomic Configuration
Electronic Symbol
Name of the Atomic Configuration element Number
Symbol K L M
element Number
K L M Sodium Na 11 2 8 1
Nitrogen N 7 2 5 Phosphorous P 15 2 8 5
Carbon C 6 2 4 Chlorine Cl 17 2 8 7
Oxygen O 8 2 6 Silicon Si 14 2 8 4
Boron B 5 2 3 Magnesium Mg 12 2 8 2
Aluminium Al 13 2 8 3 Atomic size or radius is the distance between the
Among the elements given, Nitrogen, Carbon, nucleus of an atom and its outermost shell. Atomic
Oxygen and Boron belong to the second period. sizegraduallydecreasesfromlefttorightacross
As we know in a period from left to right, the a period. All the above elements belong to period
electronegativity increases. Electronegativity 3, having electrons in the three shells. Atomic
means the tendency of an element to form anion size decreases across a period, because valence
electrons get added to the same outermost shell.
by accepting the electrons. Therefore, Oxygen
Electrons added experience greater pull from the
is the most electronegative element, since it is
nucleus. Due to the increased nuclear charge,
present at the extreme right amongst the given
the electrons are pulled towards the nucleus to
elements of period 2.
a greater extent and thereby, the size of the atom
decreases.
44 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

In case of sodium, third shell is having only decreases,anditbecomesdifficulttoremovean

1 electron. There is less force of attraction for electron from the atom. As in Sodium (2,8,1), only
the valence electron towards the nucleus and one electron is present in the outermost orbit. So,
therefore, size of the atom is larger as compared it easily loses this one electron because of weaker
to remaining elements. Hence, Na is the largest nuclear attraction, hence, it possesses highest
atom. metallic character.
(vi) K, 3Li, 11Na, 4Be. Which of these atoms has
19
(viii) 6C, 3Li, 9F, 7N, 8O. Which of the above elements
smallest atomic radius? has the highest non metallic character?
Ans. Ans.
Name Electronic Electronic
Atomic Configuration Name of the Atomic Configuration
of the Symbol Symbol
Number element Number
element K L M N K L
Potassium K 19 2 8 8 1 Carbon C 6 2 4
Lithium Li 3 2 1 Lithium Li 3 2 1
Sodium Na 11 2 8 1 Fluorine F 9 2 7
Beryllium Be 4 2 2 Nitrogen N 7 2 5
From the above elements, potassium, lithium Oxygen O 8 2 6
and sodium belong to group 1. As we know,
All the elements given above belong to second
atomic radius increases down a group or from
period.Whilegoingfromlefttorightinaperiod,
toptobottom.Thisisbecausewhilegoingdown
non-metallic character increases. The tendency of
a group, a new shell is added. Therefore, the
an element to form anion or the electronegativity
distance between the outermost electron and
is the non-metallic character of an element. As
the nucleus goes on increasing. Hence, Element
Fluorine is present in extreme right of period 2,
Lithium in group 1 and Beryllium in group 2
it will also possess highest non-metallic character
have the smallest atomic radius as they have
and also Fluorine has 7 electrons in its outermost
only two shells. In period: compared to Lithium,
shell, that means 1 electron is less to complete its
Beryllium has the smallest radius.
octet.
(vii) Al, 14Si, 11Na, 12Mg, 16S. Which of the above
13
elements has the highest metallic character? (3) The following table shows the position of six
elements A, B, C, D, E and F in the periodic
Ans.
table. ( ivi  )
Electronic
Name of the Atomic Configuration 3
Symbol Groups /
element Number 1 2 to 13 14 15 16 17 18
K L M Periods
12
Aluminium Al 13 2 8 3 2 A B C
Silicon Si 14 2 8 4 3 D E F
Sodium Na 11 2 8 1 Using the above table, answer the following
Magnessium Mg 12 2 8 2 questions:
(i) Which element is a metal with valency 2?
Sulphur S 16 2 8 6
Ans. D
All the elements given belong to period 3. Metallic
(ii) Which element is a non metal with valency 3?
character of an element can be defined as how
Ans. B
readily an atom can lose electron. From left to
right across a period, metallic character decreases. (iii) Out of D and E, which one has a bigger atomic
This is because, electrons are added to the same radius and why?
shell, and hence, these electrons experience Ans. D, because the atomic size decreases along a
greater pull from the nucleus, thus atomic size periodfromlefttoright.
 i i  i i   45

(iv) Write a common name for the family of elements  Electronicconfiguration=(2,8,3)

C and F? Valency = 3
Ans. Noble gases *(5) What is the relationship between the electronic
Q.3.2. Explain the following configuration of an element and its valency?
*(1) Chlorine has two isotopes, vi , Cl 35 and ( i  i   2 )
Cl 37. Their atomic masses are 35 and 37. Their Ans. Fromelectronicconfiguration,wecometoknow
chemical properties are same. Where should the number of valence electrons, i.e. the number
these be placed in Mendeleev’s periodic table? of electrons in the outermost shell. The valency of
In different places or in the same place? (Use an element is determined from valence electrons.
 i     9) That is, how many electrons it has to lose or gain
or share to complete its outermost orbit.
Ans. Mendeleev arranged the elements in increasing
order of atomic mass. Since the atomic masses of *(6) The atomic number of beryllium is 4 while
the isotopes of chlorine are 35 and 37, they should that of oxygen is 8. Write down the electronic
be kept in different positions in the Mendeleev configuration of the two and deduce their
Periodic table. valency from the same. ( i  i  
Page 24)
(2) Write the molecular formulae of oxides of
Ans. AtomicnumberofBeryllium= 4
the following elements by referring to the
Mendeleev’s periodic table. (   i   Electronicconfiguration = (2,2)
  20) Atomic number of Oxygen = 8
Ans. Element Oxides  Electronicconfiguration = (2,6)
(i) Na Na2O Valency of Beryllium is 2,

(ii) Ca CaO  ValencyofOxygenis=8 6=2

Q.3.3. Answer the questions based on Modern
(iii) Rb Rb2O
Periodic table.
(iv) Ba BaO
*(1) Use your brain power Textbook Page 25
(v) Sn SnO2
Element O B C N Be Li
(vi) Si SiO2
Atomic 66 88 77 74 111 152
(vii) C CO2 radius (pm)
(viii) P P2O5 (i) By referring to the Modern Periodic table find
(ix) Cl ClO, ClO2 out the period to which the above elements
belong?
*(3) Write the molecular formula of the compounds
Ans. Elements O, B, C, N, Be, Li belong to period 2.
of the following elements with hydrogen.
(C, S, Br, As, F, O, N, Cl) (   i   (ii) Arrange the above elements in a decreasing
 20) order of their atomic radii.
Ans. Elements Compound Elements Compound Ans. The above elements in the decreasing order of
formed formed their atomic radii are as follows:
with H with H Elements Li Be B C N O
C CH4 S H2S Atomic radii 152 111 88 77 74 66
Br HBr As AsH3 (iii)Does this arrangement match with the pattern of
F HF O H2O the second period of the Modern Periodic table.
Ans. Yes.Aswemovefromlefttorightwithinaperiod
N NH3 Cl HCl
the atomic number increases one by one, meaning
(4) A metal M forms an oxide having the formula the positive charge on the nucleus increases by
M2O3. It belongs to 3rd period in the Modern one unit at a time, but the electrons are added
Periodic table. Write the atomic number and to the same orbit, thereby, increasing the pull
valency of the metal. towards the nucleus which decreases the size of
Ans. Atomic number = 13 the atom.
 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

(iv) Which of the above elements have the biggest *(4) Use your brain power Textbook Page 27.
and the smallest atom? (i) What is the cause of non metallic character of
Ans. Li has the biggest atom and O has the smallest element?
atom. Ans. When any element shows tendency to accept or
(v) What is the periodic trend observed in the share electrons and forms a negative charge, they
variation of atomic radius while going from left are said to be electronegative. Non-metals are
to right within a period? electronegative.
Ans. Atomicradiusdecreasesfromlefttorightwithin (ii) What is the expected trend in the variation of
a period. non metallic character of element from left to
*(2) Use your brain power Textbook Page 25 right in a period?
Element K N Rb Cs Li Ans. Non-metallic character increases from left to
Atomic radius 231 186 244 262 152 right in a period.
(i) By referring to the Modern Periodic table find (iii)What would be the expected trend in the
out the group to which above elements belong? variation of non metallic character of elements
Ans. Above elements belong to group 1. down a group?
(ii) Arrange the above elements vertically Ans. Non-metallic character decreases as we move
downwards in an increasing order of atomic down a group.
radii. *(5) Can you tell Textbook Page 22
Ans. The above elements vertically downwards in an (i) Go through the Modern Periodic table (fig 2.1)
increasing order of atomic radii are as follows: and write the names one below the other of the
Ans. Li 152 elements of group 1.
Na 186 Ans. H - Hydrogen
K 231 Li - Lithium
Rb 244
Na - Sodium
Cs 262
K - Potassium
(iii)Does this arrangement match with the pattern
Rb - Rubidium
of the group 1 of the Modern Periodic table?
Cs - Caesium
Ans. Yes. As we go down a group number of shells
increases, therefore the atomic radii also increases. Fr - Francium
(iv) Which of the above elements have the biggest are the elements of group 1.
and the smallest atom? (ii) Write the electronic configuration of the first
Ans. 'Cs' has the biggest atom and 'Li' has the smallest four elements in this group.
atom. Ans. Element Atomic No. Electronic
(v) What is the periodic trend observed in the configuration
variation of atomic radii down a group? K L M N
Ans. Atomic radii increases down a group, as number
of shells are added one at a time. H 1 1

*(3) Use your brain power Textbook Page 26 Li 3 2 1

(i) Classify the elements of the third period into Na 11 2 8 1
metals and non metals.
Ans. Elements of third period are: K 19 2 8 8 1
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar (iii) What similarity do you find in their electronic
configuration?
Metals Metalloid Non - Metals
Ans: The outermost shell contains one electron in all
(ii) On which side of the period are the metals? Left
these elements.
or ight?
Ans. Left. (iv) How many valence electrons are there in each
of these elements?
(iii)On which side of the period did you find the
Non metals? Ans: Number of valence electrons in each of the these
Ans. Right. elements is 1.
 i i  i i   47

*(6) Can you tell Textbook Page 23 numbers, So, the position of isotopes of elements
(i) On going through the Modern Periodic table was decided by arranging the elements in the
(fig 2.1) it is seen that the elements Li, Be, B, C, ascending order of their atomic numbers.
N, O, F and Ne belong to the period 2. Write (ii) As isotopes have the same atomic number they
down the electronic configuration. donotneedtobegivendifferentpositions(slots).
Ans. Element Atomic no. Electronic (3) Can there be an element with atomic mass 53 or
configuration 54 in between the two elements, Chromium
52 Cr and Manganese 55 Mn?
K L M N
24 25
Li 3 2 1 Ans. It is not possible. Since their atomic numbers are
Be 4 2 2 continuous, there cannot be an element between
Chromium and Manganese.
B 5 2 3
C 6 2 4 (4) What do you think? Should hydrogen be placed
in the group 17 of halogens or group 1 of alkali
N 7 2 5
metals in the Modern Periodic table?
O 8 2 6
Ans.
F 9 2 7
(i) Hydrogen fits in its current position in the
Ne 10 2 8 periodic table (group 1) much better than in
(ii) Is the number of valence electrons same for all group 17 (though is not a perfect position). For
these elements? example Hydrogen forms oxide (H2O) just like
Ans. No, they are not the same. oxides of alkali metals (Na2O, K2O). It has the
(iii) Is the number of shells the same in these ? same common charge (+ 1) as all alkali metals.
Ans. Yes, the number of shells are the same. Each one (ii) It resembles halogens in forming diatomic
of this has 2 shells. molecules H2, Cl2, F2, Br2.
*Q.3.4. Write answers with explanation: (iii) It does not behave like halogens, being mainly
  (   i    2 ) in the +1 oxidation state. It does not happen to
(1) How is the problem regarding the position of be like halogens, the most stable compounds of
cobalt (59Co) and nickel (59Ni) in Mendeleev’s halogens have either -1 or a very high oxidation
periodic table resolved in Modern Periodic table? state like -7 or +5.)
Ans. (iv) Hydrogen has one electron in the outermost shell
(i) According to Mendeleev’s periodic law, elements and it is placed in top of group/based on atomic
are arranged in the order of their increasing number.
atomic masses. Q.3.5. Activity Based Questions:
(ii) When Co and Ni were put in the group on the (1) Consider isotopes of oxygen 16O and 18O. Would
basis of their chemical properties it was found you be able to place them in Mendeleev’s
that Co having higher mass of 58.9 comes first Periodic Table?
and Nickel with slightly lower atomic mass of
Ans. No, we cannot place 16O and 18O in Mendeleev’s
58.7 comes later.
Periodic Table.
(iii) Modern Periodic table resolved this problem.
(2) Find resemblance between hydrogen and alkali
According to the Modern Periodic law, elements
metals by writing compounds of both with
are arranged in their increasing order of atomic
chlorine, sulphur and oxygen.
number.
Ans. Alkali metals are : Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs, Fr.
(iv) TheatomicnumberofCobaltis27comesfirstand
Nickel with atomic number 28 comes next even if H2O, Na2O, H2S, Na2S, HCl, NaCl
their atomic masses are in the reverse order. Hydrogen and alkali metals form similar
formulae with oxygen, sulphur and chlorine.
(2) How did the position of 35 Cl and 37 Cl get fixed
17 17 (3) How are isotopes of different elements placed
in the Modern Periodic table?
in the Modern Periodic Table?
Ans.
(i) Modern Periodic table is based on atomic Ans. I sotopeshavesameatomicnumber,butdifferent
48 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

atomic mass. In Modern Periodic table the with oxygen and hydrogen. He selected
elements are arranged in the increasing order hydrogen and oxygen as they were very
of their atomic numbers. So, all isotopes of an
reactive and formed compounds with most
element can be given the same position.
elements. The formulae of the hydrides and
(4) What should be the position of Hydrogen in the
oxides formed were treated as one of the basic
Modern Periodic Table? Why?
properties of an element for its classification.
Ans. In the Modern Periodic Table, elements are He sorted out the elements with similar
arranged in the increasing order of their atomic
properties and pinned the cards together on
number,soHydrogenmustbethefirstelement
a wall. He observed that most of the elements
in the Modern Periodic Table, because it has the
got a place in the periodic table and were
least atomic number.
arranged in the order of their increasing atomic
(5) How do you calculate valency of an element
masses. It was also observed that there occurs
from its electronic configuration?
a periodic recurrence of elements with similar
Ans.
physical and chemical properties. On this basis
(i) Electronic configuration tells about the valence
Mendeleev formulated a periodic law which
electrons. If the number of valence electrons are
1, 2 or 3, then such elements will donate 1, 2 or 3 states that “The properties of the elements are
electrons. Their valency is also 1, 2 or 3 respectively. the periodic function of their atomic masses”.
(ii) Ifanelementhas4valenceelectrons,itsharesall (i) What was the basis of Mendeleev's classification?
4electrons,sothevalencyis4.Ifthenumberof Ans. M
 endeleev's classification was based on the
valence electrons are 5, 6 or 7 electrons, then such fundamental property of atomic mass and also
elements accept 3, 2 or 1 electrons respectively,
on the similarity of chemical properties.
thus their valency is 3, 2 or 1.
(ii) What type of relationship of elements was
(iii) When the valence electrons are 2 (for only
examined by Mendeleev?
one shell) or 8 then it is a stable electronic
configuration.Thus,thevalencyiszero. Ans. Mendeleev examined the relationship between
(6) What is the valency of elements with atomic the atomic masses of the elements and their
number 8, 14, 17 and 20? physical and chemical properties.
Ans. Atomic Electronic Valency (iii) How many elements were known when
number configuration Mendeleev started his work?
Ans. 63 elements were known when Mendeleev
8 (2, 6) 2
started his work.
14 (2,8,4) 4 (iv) What is meant by periodicity according to
17 (2, 8, 7) 1 Mendeleev?
Ans.
20 (2, 8, 8, 2) 2
(i) Mendeleev observed that elements with similar
Q.3.6. Paragraph Based Questions: physical and chemical properties reoccur when
(1) ead the following paragraph and answer the elements were arranged in the increasing order
questions given below: of their atomic masses.
Dmitri Ivanovich Mendeleev was the first (ii) So according to Mendeleev, the recurrence of
to classify elements on the basis of their elements with similar physical and chemical
fundamental property, the atomic mass, and properties when they are arranged in an
also on the similarity of chemical properties. increasing order of their atomic masses, is called
When Mendeleev started his work, 63 elements periodicity.
were known. He examined the relationship (iii) What is Mendeleev's Periodic Law?
between the atomic masses of the elements and
Ans. Mendeleev’s Periodic Law is "The properties of
their physical and chemical properties. Among
elements are the periodic function of their atomic
chemical properties Mendeleev concentrated
masses”.
on the compounds formed by the elements
 i i  i i   49

(2) ead the following paragraph and answer the so as to give them proper place in the periodic
questions given below: table in accordance with their properties. For
In the Modern Periodic table, the elements example, the previously determined atomic mass
are arranged in the increasing order of their of beryllium, 14.09, was changed to the correct
atomic numbers. This arrangement is based on value9.4,andberylliumwasplacedbeforeboron.
the Modern Periodic law, which states that the (ii) Mendeleev kept vacant spaces in the periodic
properties of elements are a periodic function of table for elements not discovered till then.
their atomic numbers. In the Modern Periodic Three of these unknown elements were given
table, each column is called a group and each the names eka-boron, eka-aluminium and eka-
row is called a period. Elements within the silicon from the known neighbours and their
same group show similarity and gradation in atomic masses were indicated as 44, 68 and 72,
properties. This is due to the same number of respectively. Not only this but their properties
electrons in the outermost shell. were also predicted. Later on these elements
were discovered and named as scandium (Sc),
(i) State the law on which modern periodic table gallium (Ga) and germanium (Ge) respectively.
is based. The properties of these elements matched well
Ans. Modern periodic table is based on modern with those predicted by Mendeleev.
periodic law which states that 'Properties of (iii) There was no place reserved for noble gases in
elements are a periodic function of their atomic Mendeleev’s original periodic table. However,
numbers'. when noble gases such as helium, neon and
(ii) How many groups are there in the modern argon were discovered towards the end of the
periodic table? nineteenth century, Mendeleev created the ‘zero’
Ans. There are 18 groups in Modern periodic table. group without disturbing the original periodic
(iii) What is the number of valence electrons in an table in which the noble gases were fitted very
element of group 1 and group 18 respectively? well.
Ans. The number of valence electrons in an element of (2) What are the demerits of Mendeleev’s periodic
group 1 is 1 and the number of valence electrons table?
in an element of group 18 is 8. Ans.
(iv) What is the trend in the variation of valency (i)  o fixed position could be given to hydrogen
N
while going down a group? which resembles alkali metals and halogens in
Ans. All elements in a group have the same number of the periodic table.
electrons in the outermost shell. Therefore, down (ii) I sotopes have different atomic masses but
the group, valency remains the same. Valency same chemical properties. Based on chemical
of group 1 elements is 1 and that of group 2 properties, they were to be placed in same group,
elements is 2. The valency of group 18 elements is while based on atomic masses, they were used to
zero because they are noble gases with completed be placed in different groups. Hence, there was
outermost shell. nodefiniteplaceforisotopes.
(v) Which pair of elements do you think will have (iii) In certain places, elements with higher atomic
similar properties? mass were placed before elements of lower
(a) Sodium and Argon mass e.g. Co (At. Mass 58.93) was placed before
(b) Sodium and Potassium Ni (At. Mass 58.71)
(c) Potassium and Neon (iv)  ome elements with different properties were
S
placed in the same group. e.g. (Mn) Manganese
Ans. The pair of elements having similar properties are,
wasplacedwithhalogenswhichtotallydifferin
(b) Sodium and Potassium as they belong to the
properties.
same group i.e. group 1 of Modern periodic table.
(3) Merits of Modern Periodic table over
Q.4.1. Answer in detail:
Mendeleev’s periodic table.
(1) State the merits of Mendeleev’s Periodic Table.
Ans. In Modern Periodic table elements were arranged
Ans.
on the basis of their atomic number.
(i) Atomic masses of some elements were revised
50 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

(i)  ll isotopes of the same element have different

A Ans. Electronicconfigurationmeansthearrangement
masses but same atomic number. Therefore, they of electrons in their respective shells including
occupy same position in the Modern Periodic valence shell. The number of electrons in the
table. valence shell determines its valency.
(ii) When the elements are arranged according to  Thus, electronic configuration in a way
their atomic numbers, the anomaly regarding determines the valency of an element.
certain pairs of elements in Mendeleev’s periodic (ii) The atomic number of beryllium is 4 while
table disappears. e.g. atomic numbers of Cobalt that of oxygen is 8. Write down the electronic
and Nickel are 27 and 28 respectively. Therefore, configuration of the two and deduce their
CobaltwillcomefirstandthenNickel,although valency from the same.
its atomic mass is greater. Ans. AtomicnumberofBerylliumis4
(iii)  lements are classified according to their
E ∴ Itselectronicconfigurationis2,2
electronicconfigurationintodifferentblocks. Atomic number of oxygen is 8
∴ Itselectronicconfigurationis2,6
*(4) Think about it Textbook Page 24
Valency of Beryllium is 2
(i) What is the relationship between the electronic
and valency of Oxygen is also 2.
configuration of an element and its valency?

(iii) Write the Electronic configuration and valency of first 20 elements.

Ans.
Electronic Electronic
Elements/ Atomic Elements/ Atomic
Configuration Valency Configuration Valency
Symbol No. Symbol No.
K L M N K L M N
Hydrogen H 1 1 1 Sodium Na 11 2 8 1 1
Helium He 2 2 0 Magnesium Mg 12 2 8 2 2
Lithium Li 3 2 1 1 Aluminium Al 13 2 8 3 3
Beryllium Be 4 2 2 2 Silicon Si 14 2 8 4 4
Boron B 5 2 3 3 Phosphorous P 15 2 8 5 3
Carbon C 6 2 4 4 Sulphur S 16 2 8 6 2
Nitrogen N 7 2 5 3 Chlorine Cl 17 2 8 7 1
Oxygen O 8 2 6 2 Argon Ar 18 2 8 8 0
Fluorine F 9 2 7 1 Potassium K 19 2 8 8 1 1
Neon Ne 10 2 8 0 Calcium Ca 20 2 8 8 2 2

(iv) What is the periodic trend in the variation of (v) What is the periodic trend in the variation of
valency while going from left to right within valency while going down a group? Explain the
a period. Explain the answer with reference to answer with reference to group 1, group 2 and
period 2 and period 3. group 18.
Ans. Period 2 Ans.
Elements Li Be B C N O F Ne (i) All the elements in a group have the same number
Valency 1 2 3 4 3 2 1 0 of electrons in the outermost shell. Therefore,
down the group, valency remains the same.
Period 3
Elements Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar (ii) Valency of group 1 elements is 1 and that of group
2 elements is 2.
Valency 1 2 3 4 3 2 1 0
(iii) The valency of group 18 elements is zero because
Forperiods2and3,ongoingfromlefttoright,
they are noble gases with completed outermost
the valency increases from 1 to 4, then starts
shell.
decreasing upto 0.
 i i  i i   51

(5) Comparative study of all the four blocks of Modern Periodic table.
Ans. Comparative study of blocks
s-block p block d-block f block
No. of Outermost shell Outermost shell Last two shells are Last three shells are
shells incomplete (1 or 2 incomplete except zero incomplete. incomplete.
incomplete/ valence electrons). group elements that have
valence completelyfilledshells
electrons (3 to 8 valence electrons).

Position Group 1, Group 2 and Group 13 to Group 17 and Group 3 to Group 12 Lanthanides series and
Hydrogen zero group actinides series placed
separatelyatthebottom
of periodic table.

Includes All metals except Metals, non-metals, Metals. Metals.

hydrogen. metalloids, zero
group elements.

Types of Normal elements Normal and inert Transition elements Inner-transition

elements elements. elements.

(6) How could the Modern Periodic Table remove (i) To which group do the elements belong? What is
various anomalies of Mendeleev’s table? the family called?
Ans. Ans. The elements belong to group 1. The family is
(i)  he Modern Periodic Table was classified on
T called as alkali metals.
the basis of atomic number. All isotopes of the (ii) Arrange the above elements in an increasing
same elements have different masses but same
order of atomic radii. Does this arrangement
atomic number. Therefore, they occupy the same
match with the pattern of the group in the above
position in the Modern Periodic table.
answer?
(ii) When elements are arranged according to their Ans. The above elements in an increasing order of
atomic numbers, the anomaly regarding certain atomic radii are as follows.
pairs of elements in Mendeleev’s Periodic Table
disappears e.g. atomic number of cobalt and Elements Li Na K Rb Cs
nickel are 27 and 28 respectively. Therefore, Atomic 152 186 231 244 262
cobalt will come first and then nickel, although radius (pm)
atomic mass of cobalt is greater.  Thisarrangementmatchwiththepatternofthe
(iii)  lements are classified according to their
E group in the above answer (i.e. group 1)
electronicconfigurationintodifferentblocks. (iii)Which of the above elements have the biggest
(iv) Hydrogen has one electron in the outermost and the smallest atom?
shell. It is placed on top of the group 1 with alkali Ans. The element with biggest atom is Caesium (Cs)
metals which have one electron in the outermost and the element with smallest atom is Lithium
shell. This is because in the Modern Periodic Table (Li).
elements are arranged on the basis of electronic
(iv) What is the periodic trend observed in the
configuration.
variation of atomic radii down a group?
Q.4.2. Ans. While going down the group the atomic radii
(1) Answer the questions based on the given data. goes on increasing, this is because new shells
are added to the atoms of the elements as we
Elements K Na Rb Cs Li
go down from top to bottom in a group. The
Atomic 231 186 244 262 152 outermost electron go further and further away
radius (pm)
from the nucleus, extending the radius and
52 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

ultimately increasing the size of the atom inspite eighteen vertical columns (1 to 18) called groups.
of the increased nuclear charge. The arrangement of the periods and groups
(2) In the following table, seven elements P, Q, results into formation of boxes. Atomic numbers
, S, T, U and V (here letters are not the usual are serially indicated in the upper part of these
symbols of the elements) of the modern periodic boxes.
table with their atomic numbers are given. (ii) How are blocks indicated?
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Ans. On the basis of the electronic configuration, the
elements in the Modern Periodic table are divided
P T V
into four blocks, viz, s - block, p - block, d - block
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 and f - block. The s - block constitutes the groups
Q R S U 1 and 2. Groups 13 to 18 constitute the p - block.
(i) Which of these is an inert gas? Name it. Groups 3 to 12 constitute the d - block, while the
Ans. Element 'V' is an inert gas. It is Neon (Ne). lanthanideandactinideseriesatthebottomform
(ii) Which of these is a halogen? Name it. the f - block. The d - block elements are called
Ans. Element 'U' is a halogen. It is Chlorine (Cl). transition elements. A zig-zag line is shown in the
p - block of the periodic table.
(iii) Which of these are metals? Name them.
Ans. Elements P, Q and R are metals. Element P is (iii)Which elements are present near the ig ag
Lithium metal. Element Q is Sodium metal. line?
Element R is Magnesium metal. Ans. The zig-zag line shows the three traditional
types of elements, i.e. metals, non-metals and
(iv) If Q combines with U, what would be the
metalloids. The metalloid elements lie along the
formula of the compound formed? If Q and U
are replaced by their respective metal what will border of the zig-zag line. All the metals lie on
be the formula of the compound formed. theleftsideofthezig-zaglinewhileallthenon-
Ans. If Q combines with U the formula of the metals lie on the right side.
compound formed is QU. If Q and U are replaced (iv) Draw the electronic configuration of the period
by their respective metal and non - metal. Element 2 elements of first group in the periodic table.
Q is sodium (Na). Element U is chlorine (Cl). The Ans. Theelectronicconfigurationofthesecondperiod
formula of the compound formed is NaCl. elementofthefirstgroupintheperiodictableis
(v) Write the electronic configuration of and T, and shown below:
the type of bond formed by their combination.
Ans. E
 lectronic configuration of :  is (2, 8, 2) and T
is (2, 6). They combine with each other forming
Ionic bond.
(3) Write the answers of the questions with Li
reference to the structure of the periodic table.

1
2
(2, 1)
(4) A part of periodic table is shown in the following
figure.
1 18
1 2 13 14 15 16 17
(i) Which points are considered for the arrangement
2 P Q R
of the Modern Periodic table?
Ans. In the Modern Periodic table, the elements are 3 S T
arranged in the order of their increasing atomic 4
number. In the Modern Periodic table there (i) Write the symbol of the element 'Q'.
are seven horizontal rows called periods and Ans. Symbol of the element 'Q' is N (Nitrogen)
 i i  i i   53

(ii) Will elements 'R' and 'S' have same number of (ii) Among 'A' and 'C' which element has larger
valence electrons? atomic radius? Why?
Ans. Yes elements 'R' and 'S' will have the same number Ans. Element A and C belong to the same period. So
of valence electrons (six electrons) as they belong according to the periodic trends in the modern
to the same group i.e. group 16. periodic table, the atomic radius goes on
(iii)Arrange elements 'P', 'Q' and 'R' in increasing decreasingwhilegoingfromlefttorightwithin
order of their metallic character. a period. Therefore atomic size of element 'A' is
Ans. The elements in the increasing order of their larger than atomic size of element 'B'.
metallic character are as follows: P > Q > R (iii)Identify element 'D' and write its electronic
(iv) What is the number of electrons in L shell of configuration. Also write the electronic
element T? configuration of the elements above and below
Ans. Element T is in the 3rd period of periodic table, 'D' in the same group.
hence it has three shells K, L and M. As it also Ans. Element 'D' is sulphur (S) and its electronic
belongs to 18th group i.e., Zero group all it's configuration is (2, 8, 6). The electronic
shellsarecompletelyfilled.Thereforenumberof configuration of element above 'D' in the
electrons in it's L shell will be 8. same group will be (2, 6) and the electronic
configuration of element below 'D' in the same
(v) Name any two elements that will have properties
group will (2, 8, 18, 6)
similiar to that of element 'P'.
Ans. The two elements that will have properties (6) A scientist was studying reactions of metals and
similar to that of element 'P' are Magnesium (Mg) non-metals. He knew group 1 and 2 elements
and Calcium (Ca) as they also belong to group 2 are metals while group 17 elements are non-
of the modern periodic table. metals. So, he chooses different elements from
group 1, group 2 and group 17.
(5) Study the below given periodic table in which
four elements are indicated by alphabets: A, B, (i) What is the valency of magnesium?
C and D Ans. As Magnesium belongs to group 2, its valency is 2.
1 18 (ii) Name the element in group 17 which forms a
2 13 14 15 16 17 diatomic molecule and exists in solid state at
room temperature.
A 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 B C D Ans. The element in group 17 which forms a diatomic
molecule and exists in solid state at room
temperature is Iodine.
(iii)Name the element in group 17 which belongs to
the same period as sodium.
Ans. The element in group 17 which belongs to the
same period as sodium (Na) is chlorine (Cl).
(i) Which element is a metalloid? Name this
(iv) Write the formula of compound formed in the
element and also mention the metalloids in
reaction between lithium and bromine.
modern periodic table.
Ans. The formula of compound formed in the reaction
Ans. Element 'B' is a metalloid. This element is Silicon
between lithium (Li) and bromine (Br) is LiBr
(Si). The metalloids in periodic table are : Boron
(Lithium bromide).
(B), Silicon (Si), Germanium (Ge), Arsenic (As),
Antimony (Sb), Tellurium (Te) and Polonium (v) Write the formula of compound formed in the
(Po). reaction between calcium and fluorine.
Ans. The formula of compound formed in the reaction
between Calcium (Ca) and fluorine (F) is CaF2
(CalciumFluoride).
vvv
54 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

ASSIGNMENT - 2
Time : 1 Hr. Marks : 20

Q.1. (A) Answer the following questions: (3)

(1) Fill in the blanks:
(i) The element eka-boron in Mendeleev's periodic table is known as in the Modern
periodic table.
(ii) In the family of alkali metals, the number of valence electrons is .

(2) Name the following:

The most electronegative non-metal.
Q.1. (B) Choose and write the correct option: (2)
(1) The number of electrons in the outermost shell of alkali metals is
(a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 3 (d) 7
(2) Alkaline earth metals have valency 2. This means that their position in the Modern Periodic table is in

(a) Group 2 (b) Group 16 (c) Period 2 (d) d-block

Q.2. Answer the following: (Any 2) (4)
(1) (i) StatetheModernPeriodiclaw. (ii) DefineDobereiner'sTriad.
(2) Distinguish between Transition and Inner transition elements.
 (3) Givescientificreason:Inertgasesexistintheformoffreeatoms.
Q.3. Answer the following: (Any 2) (6)
(1) Identify Dobereiner's triads from the following:
(i)Mg(24.3),Ca(40.1),Sr(87.6) (ii) S (32.1), Se (79.0), Te (127.6) (iii)Be(9.0),Mg(24.3),Ca(40.1)
(2) Draw the atomic structure of Calcium and Fluorine.
(3) Write the molecular formula of the compound of the following elements with Hydrogen.
(i) S (ii) C (iii) F (iv) N (v) Cl (vi) P

Q.4. Answer the following: (Any 1) (5)

(1) (a) 4Be, 6C, 8O, 5B. Which is the most electronegative element among these? Justify your answer.
(b) 13
Al, 14Si, 11Na, 12Mg, 16S. Which of these elements has the highest metallic character?
(2) What are the merits and demerits of Mendeleev's Periodic table?

vvv
 3 Chemical Reactions and Equations
CONCEPT MAP
CHANGE

PHYSICAL CHEMICAL
Shown by

Identifiedby CHEMICAL Represented by CHEMICAL

permanent REACTION EQUATION
Chemical changes in
properties Takes Consists of
place by Various
Colour Reactants
types
(L. H. S.)
Chemical
State of Process Combination Products
matter
Like A+B AB (R. H. S.)
Endothermic
Evolution of
(heat taken) Arrow head
gas
Decomposition in (middle)
Exothermic Energy
Change in AB A+B
(heat given out)
temperature
Oxidation (gain Displacement
of O2, loss of H2)
A+BC AC + B
Reduction (gain
of H2, loss of O2) Double decomposition
Precipitation A B–+C+D–
+
A+D–+C+B–
(formation of a precipitate)

Neutralization
(formation of salt and water)

Points to Remember:
z Compounds are formed by chemical combination of elements.
z Many physical and chemical changes occur in our surroundings.
z When chemical changes occur, a chemical reaction takes place.
z Chemical change is irreversible whereas physical change is reversible.
z Representation of a chemical reaction with the help of chemical formulae, is a chemical equation.
z A chemical equation is to be balanced, because total mass of reactants should be equal to total mass of products.
z A chemical reaction involves breaking and making of the bonds between the atoms to produce new substances.
z Chemical reactions are classified into four types. in accordance with the nature and the number of the
reactants and products.

(55)
56 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

z Four types of chemical reactions - (a) Combination (b) Decomposition (c) Displacement (d) Double
displacement.
z When heat or light is evolved in a chemical reaction, this reaction is known as Exothermic reaction. e.g.
burning of Mg wire, dissolving NaOH in water.
z When heat, light or electricity is absorbed, then this type of reaction is known as Endothermic reaction. e.g.
electrolysis of water, melting of ice.
z Many types of substances give reactions called oxidation and reduction.
z When a reactant combines with oxygen or loses hydrogen to form the product, this reaction is called oxidation
reaction.
z In a reduction reaction, oxygen is removed from a substance or hydrogen combines with a substance.
z When oxidation and reduction occur simultaneously in the same reaction, then this type of reaction is known
as redox reaction. e.g. 2H2S + SO2 3S + 2H2O, Here, SO2 is reduced and H2S is oxidized.
z Oxidation of vegetable oil causes rancidity.
z Antioxidants are used to prevent oxidation of fats and oil.
z The slow process of decay or destruction of metal due to the action of air, water, salt or acid, alkali is known
as corrosion.
z Corrosion of metals can be prevented by coating them with suitable paints or plastic coat, galvanizing,
electroplating with non-corrosive metal.
z When an acid reacts with an alkali, we get salt and water, we call it neutralization.

(11) The reaction in which heat is given out along

MASTER KEY QUESTION SET - 3 with products is known as reaction.
Q.1. (A) 1. Fill in the blanks and rewrite the complete (12) AgNO3 + NaCl AgCl + .
statements: (13) A redox reaction takes place during
(1) The reaction CaCO3 CaO + CO2 is a respiration.
reaction. (14)  ancidityinthefoodstuffcookedinoilorgheeis
(2) The reaction in which oxygen is added to the prevented by using .
substance is called reaction. (15) The chemical reaction during which H2(g) is lost is
(3) Corrosion can be prevented by using . termed as .
(4) The chemical reaction in which heat is absorbed (16) When acids and alkalis react together,
is called reaction. and is formed.
(5) The substance undergoing oxidation acts as a (17) Fe + CuSO4 FeSO4 + .
agent. (18) The symbol 'aq' in a chemical equation represents
(6) Formation of Nitric oxide from nitrogen and .
oxygen is a reaction. (19) All chemical reactions obey law of conservation
(7) When Oxidation and Reduction takes place of mass, hence, chemical equations should be
simultaneously in a given chemical reaction, it is .
known as . (20) Double displacement reaction in which an
(8) The substances taking part in a chemical reaction insoluble salt is formed is also called
are called , whereas the substances reaction.
formed as a result of a chemical reaction are Ans. (1) decomposition (2) oxidation (3) anti-rust solution
called . (4) endothermic (5) reducing (6) combination (7) redox
(9) A chemical reaction is represented by writing a reaction (8) reactants, products (9) chemical equation
. (10) Nickel (Ni) (11) Exothermic (12) NaNO3
(10) The reaction of a vegetable oil with hydrogen gas (13) cellular (14) anti-oxidants (15) oxidation (16) salt,
takes place in the presence of as a water (17) Cu(s) (18) aqueous solution (19) balanced
catalyst to form vanaspati ghee. (20) precipitation
Chemical Reactions and Equations 57

Q.1. (A) 2. Match the columns: (5) Rusting of iron is an oxidation reaction.
Types of (6)  ize of the particles of reactants does not affect
S
(I) Reactants Products the rate of chemical reaction.
Reaction
(7) Combustion is the rapid reaction between carbon
(1) Fe + S (a) NaCl + H2O (i) Oxidation
dioxide and fuel.
(2) CuSO4 + (b) 2CuO (ii) Neutralization
(8) A precipitate is an insoluble solid formed from
Zn
solution during a chemical reaction.
(3) 2Cu + O2 (c) ZnSO4 + Cu (iii)Displacement (9) A chemical equation shows a chemical reaction
(4) HCl + (d)FeS (iv)Combination using symbols and chemical formulae instead of
NaOH words.
Ans. (1-d-iv), (2-c-iii), (3-b-i), (4-a-ii) (10) Decomposition of compost is an endothermic
reaction.
Types of
*(II) Reactants Products (11) Unlike physical changes, chemical changes
Reaction
cannot be easily reversed.
(1) BaCl2(aq) + (a) H2CO3(aq) (i) Displacement (12) A burning of match stick is an example of
ZnSO4(aq) chemical change.
(2) 2 AgCl(s) (b) FeSO4(aq) + (ii) Combination (13) The reaction Zn(s) + CuSO4(aq) ZnSO4(aq)
Cu(s) + Cu(s) is an example of double displacement
reaction.
(3) CuSO4(aq) (c) BaSO4 + (iii) Decomposition
(14) Chemical change is a temporary change.
+ Fe(s) ZnCl2(aq)
(15) (g) indicates the physical state of a substance as
(4) H2O(l) + (d)2Ag(s) + (iv) Double solid.
CO2(g) Cl2(g) displacement (16) Conversion of quick lime into slaked lime is an
example of displacement reaction.
Ans. (1-c-iv), (2-d-iii), (3-b-i), (4-a-ii)
(17) Calcium oxide is also called lime or quicklime.
(III) Column A Column B (18) In a chemical equation, the symbol is used to
(1) Heating of (a) Turns lime water denote precipitation formation.
Potassium Chlorate milky Ans. (1) True (2) False. Catalyst speed up the rate of reaction.
(2) Depositing a layer (b) Physical change (3) False. Reaction that releases energy is called
of zinc on iron Exothermic. (4) True (5) True (6) False. Size of the
i        i  i .
(3) Souring of milk (c) Rust (7) False. Combustion is the rapid reaction between
(4) Carbon dioxide (d) MnO2 is used as oxygen and fuel. (8) True (9) True (10) False.
catalyst Decomposition of compost is an exothermic reaction.
(11) True (12) True (13) False. It is a displacement
(5) Iron oxide (e) Chemical change
(single) reaction (14) False. It is a permanent change.
(6) Dissolving common (f) Galvanisation (15) False. (g) indicates the physical state of a substance
salt in water as gas. (16) False. It is an example of combination
Ans. (1-d), (2-f), (3-e), (4-a), (5-c), (6-b) reaction. (17) True (18) True.
Q.1. (A) 4. Name the following:
Q.1. (A) 3. State whether the following statements
are True or False. Write the correct statements: (1) A change that takes place due to change in the
parameters such as temperature, pressure.
(1) Digestion of food is a chemical change.
Ans. Physical change
(2) A catalyst slows down the rate of reaction to
makeabetterproduct. (2) A process in which some substances undergo
bond breaking and are transformed into new
(3) Reaction that releases energy is called
substances by formation of new bonds.
Endothermic.
Ans. Chemical reaction
(4) Ammonium chloride is a sublimable salt.
58 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

(3) Representation of a chemical reaction in a (c) Formation of precipitate

condensed form using chemical formulae.
(d) Lowering of temperature
Ans. Chemical equation
(5) What is rust?
(4) If the number of atoms of each element is not
same on the two sides of an equation. (a) Sodium oxide (b) Iron oxide
Ans. Unbalanced equation (c) Copper oxide (d) Silver oxide
(5) Fuel formed when organic waste is decomposed (6) Because of the formation of which of the following,
by micro-organism. lime water turns milky when carbon dioxide is
Ans. Biogas passed through it?
(6) The substance in whose presence the rate of a (a) Calcium Carbonate
chemical reaction changes without causing any (b) Calcium bicarbonate
chemical change to it. (c) Calcium hydroxide
Ans. Catalyst (d) Sodium Carbonate
(7) The life on earth is protected from ultraviolet
(7) Which of the following is formed when Sodium
radiation of the sun.
hydroxide reacts with hydrochloric acid?
Ans. Ozone layer
(a) Calcium Chloride
(8) A state prior to the formation of the O2 molecule.
(b) Hydrogen Chloride
Ans. Nascent oxygen.
(c) Sodium hydroxide
Q.1. (A) 5. Complete the following reactions and
(d) Sodium Chloride
name the products:
(1) CuSO4(aq) + Fe(s) FeSO4(aq) + Cu(s) (8) is a physical change.
Ferrous Copper (a) Ice changes into water
Sulphate (b) Milk is set into curd
(2) CuSO4(aq) + Pb(s) PbSO4(aq) + Cu(s) (c) Ripening of fruit
Lead Copper (d) Respiration process
Sulphate
(9) When sulphuric acid is poured over zinc, which
Q.1. (B) Choose and write the correct option:
of the following gas is formed?
(1) A chemical reaction involves .
(a) Sulphur dioxide (b) Hydrogen
(a) Only breaking of bonds.
(c) Oxygen (d) Zinc dioxide
(b) Only formation of bonds.
(10) Heating of sugar is called a reaction.
(c) Both breaking and formation of bonds.
(a) Combination reaction
(d) None of these.
(b) Displacement reaction
(2) A balanced chemical equation always obeys (c) Double displacement reaction
.
(d) Decomposition reaction
(a) Law of conservation of Mass (11) Antioxidants are used to prevent of
(b) Law of thermal equilibrium food containing fats and oils.
(c) Law of conservation of energy (a) Reduction
(d) All of the above (b) Oxidation
(3) Oily food kept out for few days gives a bad taste (c) Oxidation and reduction
and a bad smell because of . (d) Decomposition
(a) Corrosion (b) Displacement (12) In the reaction given CuO(s) + H2(g) Cu(s) + H2O(l).
(c) Heating (d) Rancidity Copper oxide is and hydrogen is
(4) The sign indicates. .

(a) Release of gas (a) Oxidized, reduced (b) Reduced, oxidized

(b) Dissolution of gas (c) Unaffected,reduced (d) Unaffected,oxidized

Chemical Reactions and Equations 59

(13) Which among the following is double displacement (5) What is rust? Write the chemical formula.
reaction? Ans.
(a) Pb + CuCl2 PbCl2 + Cu (i) Due to moisture and various components of
atmosphere, oxidation of iron takes place.
(b) Na2SO4 + BaCl2 BaSO4 + 2NaCl
(ii) A certain type of reddish coloured solid layer
(c) C + O2 CO2 collects on the iron surface. This layer is called rust.
(d) CH4 + 2O2 CO2 + 2H2O (iii) The chemical formula is Fe2O3. xH2O.
Ans. (1) (c) Both breaking and formation of bonds. (6) Why respiration is considered an exothermic
(2) (a) Law of conservation of Mass (3) (d) Rancidity reaction?
(4) (c) formation of precipitate (5) (b) Iron oxide Ans. In the process of respiration glucose is broken
(6) (a) Calcium carbonate (7) (d) Sodium chloride into Carbon dioxide and energy is released. That
(8) (a) Ice changes into water (9) (b) Hydrogen is why, it is considered as an exothermic reaction.
(10) (d) Decomposition Reaction (11) (b) oxidation C6H12O6(aq) + 6O2(g) 6CO2(g) + 6H2O(l) + Energy (ATP)
(12) (b) reduced, oxidized (13) (b) Na2SO4 + BaCl2
(7) Name the factors on which the speed of a
BaSO4 + 2NaCl
chemical reaction depends.
Q.2.1.Answer the following: Ans. The speed of a chemical reaction depends on factors
(1) What is a balanced chemical equation? like size of the particles of reactants, concentration
Ans. The chemical equation in which the number of of the reactants, nature of the reactants, temperature
atomsofdifferentelementsareequalinreactant of the reaction and presence or absence of catalyst.
side (L.H.S.) and product side (R.H.S.) is called a (8) What is meant by reactants?
balanced chemical equation. Ans. The chemicals that undergo chemical change in a
(2) “We need to balance an unbalanced skeletal chemical reaction are called reactants.
chemical equation”. Justify the statement. (9) What is meant by the term products of a
Ans. chemical reactions?
(i) Skeletal chemical equations are either self Ans. Thesubstancesthatareformedafterachemical
balanced or unbalanced. reaction takes place, are called products of a
chemical reaction.
(ii) We need to balance the unbalanced chemical
equation because of law of conservation of mass (10) When carbon dioxide is passed through lime
water it turns milky. Why?
which states that “In any reaction, the total mass
Ans. Lime water (Calcium hydroxide) combines with
of each of the elements in the reactants is the same
carbon dioxide to form a suspension of calcium
as that of the total mass of each of the respective
carbonate which turns lime water milky.
elements in the products”.
Ca(OH)2(aq) + CO2(g) CaCO3(s) + H2O(l)
(iii) Therefore, chemical equation must be balanced
in each and every chemical reaction. (11) What type of reaction is this:
Na2SO4 + BaCl2 BaSO4 + 2NaCl.
(3) Giving an example list two information
Ans. It is a double displacement reaction.
which make a chemical equation more useful.
(informative). (12) What do you understand by precipitation
reaction? Explain with examples.
Ans. (i) Physical state of reactants must be mentioned,
Ans.
e.g. 2H2(g) + O2(g) 2H2O(l).
(i) When two ionic compounds react and two ionic
(ii) Condition in which a reaction takes place is compounds (product) are formed of which one
writtenonthearrowhead, product is insoluble and settles as a solid, it is
burning called a precipitate.
e.g. 2H2(g) + O2(g) 2H2O(l).
(ii) Such reactions in which precipitate is formed are
(4) What type of reaction takes place when called precipitation reactions.
vegetable matter is converted to compost? (iii) Example: When aqueous solution of Sodium
Ans. During composting complex substances are Sulphate is mixed with the aqueous solution of
broken down into simpler substances with the Barium Chloride, it forms Barium Sulphate in the
evolution of heat. Hence, it is an exothermic form of white precipitate.
decomposition reaction. Na2SO4(aq) + BaCl2(aq) BaSO4 + 2NaCl(aq)
(White)
60 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

(13) Which soloution is used in voters ink? *(19) Write the reaction of formation of Fe2+ by the
Ans. Solution of Silver nitrate (AgNO3) is used in the reduction Fe3+ by making use of the symbol (e-)?
voters ink. (Use your brain power! Textbook page number 43)
(14) What happens when a piece of zinc metal is Ans. Fe3+(aq) + e- Fe2+ (aq).
reduce
added to copper sulphate solution?
(20) Write two conditions necessary for rusting of
Ans.
iron.
(i) When a piece of zinc metal is added to copper
Ans. Rusting of iron takes place in (i) the presence of
sulphate solution, more reactive zinc metal
air and (ii) presence of moisture.
displaces the less reactive copper from copper
sulphate solution and a solution of zinc sulphate (21) Name the term used for the solution of a
is obtained while copper gets deposited on zinc substance in water.
making it reddish brown in colour. Ans. Aqueous (aq) is the term used for the solution of
(ii) Zn(s) + CuSO4(aq) ZnSO4(aq) + Cu(s) a substance in water.
*(15) Which is the oxidant used for purification of (22) What are the changes that take place when fats
drinking water? (Use your brain power! Textbook and oils are oxidized?
page number 42) Ans. When fats and oils are oxidized, they become
Ans. rancid and their taste changes.
(i) Chlorine is a strong oxidant commonly used in *(23) Identify the reactants and products of equation:
water treatment for oxidation and disinfection. 60°C
(ii) Even Potassium permanganate can be used as Vegetable Oil(l) + H2(g) Vanaspati ghee(s)
Ni Catalyst
oxidantforpurificationofwater. (Use your brain power! Textbook page number 35)
*(16) Why is potassium permanganate used for Ans. Reactants: Vegetable oil and hydrogen gas
cleaning of water tanks? (Use your brain power! Product: Vanaspati ghee
Textbook page number 42)
Ans. *(24) Use your brain power! (Textbook page number 36)
(i) Potassium permanganate oxidises dissolved (i) What is the number of reactants in the following
iron, manganese and hydrogen sulphide into reactions.
solid particles. NH3(g) + HCl(g) NH4Cl(s) - (1)
(ii) KMnO4 is used to remove organic matter from
2Mg + O2 2MgO - (2)
the water tank by oxidation which also removes
unwanted taste and odour. CaO + H2O Ca(OH)2 + Heat - (3)
(iii) It also kills harmful bacteria and fungi. Ans. In all the above equations, there are two reactants.
*(17) Some examples of redox reaction are given. (ii) What is the number of molecules of reactants
Identify the reductants and oxidants from them. taking part in the above reactions?
(Use your brain power! Textbook page number 43) Ans. NH3 + HCl NH4Cl
2H2S + SO2 3S + 2H2O
1 molecule 1 molecule
Ans.
(i) In a redox reaction, the reductant transfers 2Mg + O2 2MgO
electrons to the oxidant. 2 molecules 1 molecule
(ii) Then in the reaction, the reductant or reducing CaO + H2O Ca(OH)2 + Heat
agent loses electrons and is oxidised and the
1 molecule 1 molecule
oxidant or oxidizing agent gains electrons and is
reduced. (iii)How many products are formed in each of the
(iii) ∴ Hence, in the above equation, reductant is SO2 above reaction?
and oxidant is H2S Ans. In all the above reactions, only one product is
MnO2 + 4HCl MnCl2 + 2H2O + Cl2 formed.
(i) Reductant: MnO2 - as it loses oxygen. Q.2.2.Define the following/write notes:
(ii) Oxidant: HCl - as it gains oxygen.
(1) Physical Change
*(18) If oxidation means losing electrons, what is
Ans. It is a change in which only the physical
meant by reduction? (Use your brain power!
properties of substances are changed and no new
Textbook page number 43)
Ans. If oxidation means losing electrons, then substance is formed. This change is a temporary
reduction means gaining electrons. and reversible change.
Chemical Reactions and Equations 61

(2) Chemical Change (iv) The Zn2+ ions formed from Zn atom take the place
Ans. It is a change in which substances are converted of Cu2+ ions in copper sulphate, and Cu atoms
formed from Cu2+ ion come out. It means that Zn
into new substance or product possessing
displaces Cu from CuSO4.
propertiesaltogetherdifferentfromtheoriginal.
This is a permanent and irreversible change. (8) Double displacement Reaction

(3) Chemical Reaction Ans.

(i) The reaction in which the ions in the reactants are
Ans. A chemical reaction is a process in which some
exchanged to form a precipitate are called double
substances undergo bond breaking and are
displacement reactions.
transformed into new substances by formation of
new bonds. (ii) BaSO4(aq) + K2CrO4(aq) BaCrO4(s) + K2SO4(aq)
Barium Potassium Barium Potassium
(4) Chemical Equation sulphate chromate chromate sulphate
Ans. The representation of a chemical reaction in (iii) Potassium chromate solution reacts with Barium
a condensed form using chemical formulae is sulphate solution to form Potassium sulphate
called as the chemical equation. solution and a yellow precipitate of Barium
*(5) Combination Reaction chromate (BaCrO4).
Ans. *(9) Endothermic Reaction
(i) When two or more reactants combine in a Ans.
reaction to form a single product, it is called a (i) A reaction in which heat is either absorbed from the
combination reaction. surrounding or has to be supplied continuously
(ii) e.g.: When a Magnesium strip is burnt in air, it from outside is called as endothermic reaction.
combines with oxygen, to form white ash of (ii) e.g. melting of ice, dissolution of potassium
magnesium oxide. nitrate in water. During the process of dissolution
(iii) 2Mg(s) + O2(g) 2MgO(s) (white ash) of potassium nitrate (KNO3) in water, heat from
Magnesium Oxygen Magnesium the surroundings is absorbed and therefore, the
oxide temperature of the resulting solution is less.
(6) Decomposition Reaction (iii) The process in which heat is absorbed from
outside is called endothermic process.
Ans.
(i) The chemical reaction in which two or more (iv) KNO3(s) + H2O(l) + Heat KNO3(aq)
products are formed from a single reactant is Potassium Water Potassium nitrate
nitrate solution
called Decomposition Reaction.
(ii) e.g.: When Calcium carbonate is strongly heated (10) Exothermic Reaction
it decomposes to form Calcium oxide and Carbon Ans.
dioxide gas. (i) A reaction in which heat is given away when
reactants are transformed into the products is
(iii) e.g. CaCO3(s) CaO(s) + CO2
called as exothermic reaction.
Calcium Calcium Carbon
Carbonate Oxide dioxide (ii) e.g. formation of ice from water, dissolution of
sodium hydroxide in water.
*(7) Displacement Reaction
(iii) When solid NaOH is dissolved in water, heat
Ans. is given out and therefore, the temperature
(i) The reaction in which the place of the ion of a increases.
less reactive element in a compound is taken by
(iv) NaOH(s) + H2O(l) NaOH(aq) + Heat
another more reactive element by formation of its
Sodium Water Sodium hydroxide
own ions, is called displacement reaction. hydroxide solution
(ii) Zn (s)
+ CuSO4(aq) ZnSO4(aq) + Cu(s) *(11) Oxidation Reaction
Zinc Copper Zinc Copper
sulphate sulphate Ans. The chemical reaction in which a reactant
combines with oxygen or loses hydrogen to form
(iii) In the above equation when zinc dust is added
a product is called oxidation reaction.
to blue coloured copper sulphate solution, a
colourless solution of zinc sulphate is formed e.g. (1) 2Mg(s) + O2(g) 2MgO(s)
and copper is deposited on zinc. Magnesium Oxygen Magnesium oxide
62 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

(2) 2Cu(s) + O2(g) 2CuO(s) *(17) Balanced Equation

Copper Oxygen Copper oxide Ans.
(3) MgH2 Mg(s) + H2(g) (i) The number of atoms of the elements in the
Magnesium Magnesium Hydrogen reactants is same as the number of atoms of those
hydride elements in the products. Such an equation is
(12) Reduction Reaction called a 'balanced equation'.
Ans. The chemical reaction in which reactants gain (ii) In any reaction, the total mass of each of the
hydrogen or loses oxygen to form the product is respective elements in the reactants is same as the
called reduction reactions. total mass of each of the respective elements in
e.g. (1) HgO(s) Hg(l) + O2(g) the products.
Mercuric Mercury Oxygen (iii) This is in accordance with the law of conservation
oxide of mass.
(2) H2(g) + Cl2(g) 2HCl(g)
(iv) e.g. SO2 + 2H2S 3S + 2H2O
Hydrogen Chlorine Hydrogen
Chloride On reactant side On product side
(13) Redox Reaction No. of atoms of No. of atoms of
Ans. A chemical reaction in which oxidation and Sulphur (S) = 3 Sulphur (S) = 3
reduction takes place simultaneously is called
No. of atoms of No. of atoms of
redox reaction.
Oxygen (O) = 2 Oxygen (O) = 2
Oxidation
e.g. CuO(s) + H2(g) Cu(s) + H2O(l) No. of atoms of No. of atoms of
Copper Hydrogen Copper Water hydrogen (H) = 4 hydrogen (H) = 4
Oxide
∴ The given equation is balanced.
Reduction
Q.2.3.Complete the following chemical equations,
(14) Catalyst balance and state the type of reactions:
Ans. (1) HSO + HO
2 2 7 2
(i) The substance in whose presence the rate of a
Ans. H S O + H O 2 H2SO4
chemical reaction changes, without causing any 2 2 7 2
chemical change to it is called a catalyst. It is a Combination reaction.
(ii) e.g. Potassium chlorate (KClO3) decomposes (2) KClO3 + O2
rapidly in presence of manganese dioxide (MnO2)
to liberate O2 gas, where manganese dioxide acts Ans.
2KClO3 2 KCl + 3 O2
as a catalyst. It is a Decomposition reaction.
(ii) 2KClO3 2KCl + 3O2 (3) Sunlight
MnO2 Ag + Cl2
(15) Neutralisation Reaction Ans. 2 AgCl Sunlight
2 Ag + Cl2
Ans.
It is a Decomposition reaction.
(i) The reaction in which an acid and a base
(4) Al + HCl + H2
react together to form salt and water is called
Neutralisation reaction. Ans.
2 Al + 6 HCl 2 AlCl3 + 3 H2
(ii) e.g. HCl(aq) + NaOH(aq) NaCl(aq) + H2O(l)
It is a Displacement reaction.
Hydrochloric Sodium Sodium Water
acid hydroxide chloride (5) NaOH + H2SO4 + H2O
(acid) (base) (Salt) (Water)
Ans.
2 NaOH + H2SO4 Na2SO4 + 2 H2O
(16) Rancidity
It is a Double displacement reaction.
Ans. Rancidity is the oxidation of oils and fats
resulting in change in taste and giving out foul (6) N2 + NH3
smell. ancidityinthefoodstuffispreventedby Ans.
N2 + 3 H2 2 NH3
antioxidants.
It is a Combination reaction.
Chemical Reactions and Equations 63

Q.2.4.Distinguish between:
(1) Physical Change and Chemical Change.
Ans. Physical Change Chemical Change
(i) In this change, the composition of substance (i) In this change, the composition of substance changes
does not change and no new substance is and a new substance is formed.
formed.
(ii) There is a change only in physical (ii) There is a change in both physical and chemical
properties. properties.
(iii) This change is temporary. (iii) This change is permanent.
(iv) The original substance can be recovered by (iv) The original substance cannot be recovered by
simple means. simple means.
(v) e.g.: Steam is condensed. (v) e.g.: Ripening of fruit, Milk is converted to curd.

(2) Displacement and Double displacement Reaction

Ans. Displacement Reaction Double displacement Reaction
(i) The reaction in which the place of the ion (i) The reaction in which the ions in the reactants are
of a less reactive element in a compound exchanged to form a precipitate are called double
is taken by another more reactive element displacement reactions.
by formation of its own ions, is called
displacement reaction.
(ii) These reactions are usually slow and take (ii) These reactions are usually fast and take place
longer time for their completion. instantaneously.
(iii) During these reactions, change of colour (iii) During these reactions, precipitates are formed.
takes place. AgNO3(aq) + NaCl(aq) AgCl(s) + NaNO3(aq)
Fe(s) + CuSO4(aq) FeSO4(aq) + Cu(s) Silver Sodium Silver Sodium
Iron Copper Iron copper nitrate chloride chloride nitrate
sulphate sulphate

(3) Combination reaction and Decomposition reaction

Ans. Combination reaction Decomposition reaction
(i) When two or more reactants combine in a (i) The chemical reaction in which two or more
reaction to form a single product, it is called a products are formed from a single reactant is called
combination reaction. decomposition reaction.
(ii) It is a synthesis reaction. (ii) It is a degradation reaction.
(iii) New substances are synthesized in industry (iii) In nature, complex substances are broken down
using this reaction. into simpler compounds.
(iv) CaO(s) + H2O(l) Ca(OH)2(aq) (iv) CaCO3(s) CaO(s) + CO2(g)
Calcium Water Calcium Calcium Calcium Carbon
oxide hydroxide carbonate oxide dioxide

(4) Exothermic reaction and Endothermic reaction

Ans. Exothermic reaction Endothermic reaction
(i) The reaction where heat energy is evolved or (i) The reaction where heat energy is absorbed is called
liberated is called as exothermic reaction. as endothermic reaction.
(ii) Temperature of the reaction mixture rises. (ii) Temperature of the reaction mixture lowers.
64 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

(iii) Generally, the reactions are fast. (iii) Generally, the reactions are slow.
(iv) e.g.: When NaOH dissolves in water heat is (iv) e.g.: When Calcium carbonate is strongly heated,
evolved. calcium oxide is formed.
(5) Oxidation reaction and Reduction reaction
Ans. Oxidation reaction Reduction reaction
(i) It is a chemical process in which a substance (i) It is a chemical process in which a substance gains
gains oxygen or loses hydrogen. hydrogen or loses oxygen.

(ii) During oxidation reaction, an atom or an ion (ii) During reduction reaction, an atom or ion gains
loses electron. electron.
(iii) Oxidizing agents are used to carry out this (iii) Reducing agents are used to carry out this
reaction. reaction.
(iv) Example: C + O2 CO2 (iv) Example: C + 2H2 CH4

Q.2.4.Give scientific reasons: is the surface area available for the reaction and
*(1) When the gas formed on heating limestone is higher is the rate of reaction.
passed through freshly prepared lime water, the (v) Hence, it takes time for pieces of Shahabad tiles
lime water turns milky. to disappear in HCl, but its powder disappears
Ans. rapidly.
(i) On heating, limestone undergoes thermal *(3) While preparing dilute sulphuric acid from
decomposition to form calcium oxide (quick concentrated sulphuric acid in the laboratory,
lime) and carbon dioxide. the concentrated sulphuric acid is added slowly
CaCO3(s) CaO(s) + CO2 to water with constant stirring.
quick lime Ans.
(ii) Calcium oxide when dissolved in water forms (i) Concentrated sulphuric acid (H2SO4) is a
Calcium hydroxide (lime water). hazardous, highly corrosive chemical. It has a
CaO(s) + H2O(l) Ca(OH)2(aq) higher density than water and is hygroscopic,
Calcium which means that it absorbs water from the air.
hydroxide (ii) In the process of dilution of concentrated
(iii) When carbon dioxide is passed through lime sulphuric acid with water, very large amount of
water it turns milky due to formation of white heat is liberated.
precipitate of Calcium carbonate.
(iii) As a result, water gets evaporated instantaneously
Ca(OH)2(aq) + CO2(g) CaCO3(s) + H2O(l)
along with splashing of acid which may cause an
Calcium
accident.
carbonate
(iv) To avoid this, required amount of water is
*(2) It takes time for pieces of Shahabad tiles to taken in a glass container and small quantity of
disappear in HCl, but its powder disappears concentrated sulphuric acid at a time is added
rapidly. with stirring.
Ans. (v) Therefore, only a small amount of heat is liberated
(i) When HCl is added to Shahabad stone at a time.
effervescenceofCO2 is formed. *(4) It is recommended to use air tight container for
(ii) The CO2 effervescenceisformedslowlywiththe storing oil for long time.
pieces of Shahabad tiles while at the faster speed Ans.
with the powder. (i) Air,heatandlightaffectthequalityofedibleoil,
(iii) This is because the rate of a reaction depends which deteriorates through oxidation (rancidity).
upon the size of the particles of the reactants (ii) The oxidation process is greatly enhanced when
taking part in the reaction. edible oils are stored in containers that are not air
tight and in areas where oil is exposed to air, heat
(iv) Smaller the size of the reactant particles more
and light.
Chemical Reactions and Equations 65

(iii) Hence, it is recommended to use air tight *Q.3.1.Choose the correct option from the bracket and
containers for storing oil for long time, to prevent explain the statement giving reason:
itfromgettingoxidised. (oxidation, displacement, electrolysis, reduction, zinc,
(5) Grills of doors and windows are always painted copper, double displacement, decomposition)
before they are used. (1) To prevent rusting, a layer of zinc metal
Ans.
is applied on iron sheets.
(i) The grills of doors and windows are generally
Ans. Explanation: Due to moisture and various
made of the metal iron.
components of atmosphere, oxidation of iron
(ii) When they are exposed to air, due to the effect
takes place. A certain type of reddish coloured
of moisture in air, iron undergoes slow oxidation
solid layer collects on the iron surface. This layer
reaction and forms a layer of reddish brown rust
is called rust. Its chemical formula is Fe2O3. x H2O.
which gets deposited on the surface of grills.
(iii) Thus, due to the reaction of slow process of decay To avoid rusting, a layer of zinc metal is applied
or destruction of metal iron, the grills of doors on iron sheets which prevents iron sheets from
and windows made of metal iron get corroded. directly coming in contact with the atmosphere
(iv) Hence, in order to prevent the rust and corrosion, and hence, prevents rusting. This process of
grills of doors and windows are always painted giving a thin coating of zinc on iron to protect it
before they are used. from rusting is called galvanisation.
(v) By doing this, air and moisture cannot come in (2) The conversion of ferrous sulphate to ferric
contact with the iron and hence rusting doesn't sulphate is oxidation reaction.
take place. Ans. Explanation: The conversion of ferrous sulphate
(6) Digestion of food is an example of decomposition (FeSO4) into ferric sulphate Fe2(SO4)3 is an
reaction. oxidation reaction.
Ans. During digestion, the starch in the various food
2FeSO4 Fe2(SO4)3
items gets decomposed into simple sugar while
proteins get decomposed into amino acids. Hence Net ionic reaction: Fe2+ Fe3+
digestion of food is an example of decomposition (Ferrous) (Ferric)
reaction. (a) In the above ionic reaction, when ferric ion is
formed from ferrous ion, the positive charge
(7) Respiration is considered to be an exothermic
reaction. is increased by one unit. While this happens,
Ans. the ferrous ion loses one electron and losing of
(i) When heat is given out during a chemical electrons is an oxidation reaction.
reaction, it is an exothermic reaction. (3) When electric current is passed through
(ii) Glucose formed in our body during the process acidulated water electrolysis of water takes place.
of digestion, combines with oxygen in our body Ans. Explanation:
and provides energy. (i) Water decomposes into hydrogen and oxygen
(iii) Therefore, respiration is considered to be an gases on passing electric current through
exothermic reaction. acidulated water.
(8) We store silver chloride in dark coloured bottles. (ii) This decomposition takes place by means of
Ans. electrical energy.
(i) A chemical reaction that proceeds by absorption (iii) Therefore, it is called as electrolysis.
of light is called a photo chemical reaction.
(ii) Westoresilverchlorideindarkcolouredbottles (4) Addition of an aqueous solution of ZnSO4 to
inordertoprotectitfromtheeffectofsunlight. an aqueous solution of BaCl2 is an example of
(iii) Sunlight decomposes silver chloride and forms double displacement reaction.
silver and chlorine. Ans. Explanation:
Sunlight (i) When aqueous solution of ZnSO4 is added to
2AgCl(s) 2Ag(s) + Cl2
Silver chloride Silver Chlorine aqueous solution of BaCl2, a reaction takes place
(white) (Grey) forming an aqueous solution of ZnCl2 and a white
(iv) As dark coloured bottles obstruct light, silver precipitate of BaSO4.
chloride will get prevented from decomposition. (ii) In this reaction, ions in the reactants are
66 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

exchanged to form a precipitate. Such reactions (iii) For example :

are called double displacement reactions. (a) Formation of carbon dioxide gas by combustion
of coal in air is a chemical reaction. In this
Q.3.2.Answer the following:
reaction Coal (carbon) and Oxygen (from air) are
*(1) What is the reaction called when oxidation and the reactants while carbon dioxide is the product.
reduction take place simultaneously? Explain C + O2 CO2
with one example.
Reactants product
Ans.
(b) CuSO4 + Zn ZnSO4 + Cu
(i) When oxidation and reduction take place
simultaneously in a given reaction it is termed as Copper Zinc Zinc Copper
sulphate sulphate
Redox reaction.
In the above equation, copper sulphate and zinc
(ii) During oxidation a reactant combines with
are the reactants and zinc sulphate and copper
oxygen or loses hydrogen and during reduction are the products.
it gains hydrogen or loses oxygen.
*(4) Explain the types of reaction with reference to
(iii) Example of Redox reaction:
oxygen and hydrogen. Illustrate with examples.
oxidation (O2 added)
Ans. Types of reaction with reference to oxygen and
2H2S + SO2 3S + 2H2O hydrogen are oxidation reaction and reduction
reduction (O2 lost) reaction.
Oxidation reaction: The chemical reaction in
(iv) In the above reaction, SO2 is reduced and H2S is
which a reactant combines with oxygen or loses
oxidised.
hydrogen to form the product is called Oxidation
*(2) How can the rate of the chemical reaction reaction.
namely decomposition of hydrogen peroxide e.g. 2Mg + O2 2MgO
be increased?
Here O2 combines with magnesium (Mg) to form
Ans.
magnesium oxide (MgO)
(i) The chemical reaction in which two or more
MgH2 Mg + H2
products are formed from a single reactant
is called decomposition reaction. Hydrogen Here MgH2 loses hydrogen.
peroxide decomposes into water and oxygen. Reduction reaction: The chemical reaction in
2H2O2(l) 2H2O (l) + O2 which a reactant combines with hydrogen or
Hydrogen Water Oxygen loses oxygen to form product is called reduction
peroxide reaction.
(ii) The decomposition of hydrogen peroxide into e.g. C + 2H2 CH4
water and oxygen takes place slowly at room Here carbon combines with hydrogen and forms
temperature. However, the rate of this chemical compound CH4 (Methane).
reaction can be increased on adding manganese HgO Hg + O2
dioxide (MnO2) powder in it, here manganese
dioxide acts as a catalyst. Here Mercuric oxide loses oxygen to form
mercury.
*(3) Explain the term reactant and product giving
*(5) Explain the similarity and difference in two
examples.
events, namely adding NaOH to water and
Ans.
adding CaO to water.
(i) A chemical reaction is a process in which some
Ans. Similarity:
substances undergo bond breaking and are
transformed into new substances by formation of (i) Both NaOH and CaO dissolve in water. NaOH
new bonds. dissolves in water forming aqueous NaOH
(ii) The substances taking part in chemical reaction while CaO reacts with water to form Calcium
are called reactants, whereas the substances Hydroxide [Ca(OH)2]
formed as a result of a chemical reaction by (ii) Both are bitter in taste, and turn red litmus to
formation of new bonds are called products. blue. i.e. both are basic in nature.
Chemical Reactions and Equations 67

NaOH(s) + H2O(l) NaOH(aq) + Heat (8) B. Classify the following reactions into different
CaO(s) + H2O(l) Ca(OH)2(aq) + Heat types.
(a) AgNO3(aq) + NaCl(aq) AgCl(s) + NaNO3(aq)
Both are exothermic reactions.
(iii) After adding water, the properties of aqueous Ans. (Double displacement reaction) Precipitation
solution of sodium hydroxide (NaOH) and reaction
aqueous solution of calcium oxide (CaO) are (b) CaO(s) + H2O(l) Ca(OH)2(aq) + Heat
different.
Difference: Ans. Combination reaction [Exothermic reaction.]
(i) Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH) is highly soluble (c) 2KClO3(s) 2KCl(aq) + 3O2(g)
in water, whereas calcium oxide (CaO) is less
Ans. Decomposition reaction/Thermal decomposition
soluble in water.
reaction.
(ii) Aqueous solution of NaOH is monovalent,
whereas aqueous solution of Ca(OH)2 is divalent. (d) CuO + H2 heat Cu + H2O
(iii) As NaOH is highly soluble in water, makes strong Ans. Displacement reaction [Redox reaction.]
base whereas Ca(OH)2 is a weak base.
(e) CuSO4(aq) + Pb(s) PbSO4(aq) + Cu(s)
(6) Explain two ways by which food industries
prevent rancidity. Ans. Displacement reaction
Ans. (f) 2H2O2 UV 2H2O + O2(l)
(i) Rancidity can be prevented by adding light
antioxidants to food containing fat and oil. Ans. Photolytic decomposition is a chemical reaction
(ii) It can be prevented by packaging fat and oil in which molecules are broken down into smaller
containingfoodinairtightcontainersorbyfilling units through the absorption of light.
the extra space by nitrogen gas.
(g) BaS(aq) + ZnSO4(aq) BaSO4(s) + ZnS(aq)
(7) Will it be possible for you to decompose water
Ans. Double displacement reaction.
by heat or light energy? If you pass current
from a 6 volt battery, is decomposition of water *(9) Balance the following equation stepwise.
possible? (a) H2S2O7(l) + H2O(l) H2SO4(l)
Ans. Pure water cannot be decomposed by heat,
lightorbypassingcurrentfroma6voltbattery. Ans. Step 1: Write the equation and then count the
However, if few drops of acid is added to water it number of atoms of each element on the R.H.S.
can be decomposed by passing current from a 6 and L.H.S. of the arrow.
voltbattery. H2S2O7 + H2O H2SO4 ......................................(1)
*(8) A. Identify from the following reactions the No. of atoms No. of atoms
reactants that undergo oxidation and reduction.
Elements in reactants in products
Ans. (L.H.S.) (R.H.S.)
(a) Fe + S FeS Fe undergoes oxidation and S
H 4 2
undergoes reduction.
(b) 2Ag2O 4Ag + O2 Silver oxide undergoes S 2 1
reduction. O 8 4
(c) 2Mg + O2 2MgO Mg undergoes oxidation. Step 2: Check whether no. of atoms on both sides
(d) NiO + H2 Ni + H2O Redox reaction. is equal. It is seen from the above table number of
In the above equation, reactant NiO (Nickel oxide) atoms of all the elements on the two sides are not
loses oxygen, thus undergoes reduction whereas the same.
H2 (Hydrogen gas) gains oxygen forming water Step 3: To balance the number of atoms on both
and undergoes oxidation. sides,wewritecoefficient2forH2SO4.
oxidation Now the equation becomes.
NiO + H2 Ni + H2O H2S2O7 (l) + H2O (l) 2H2SO4 (l) .......................(2)
Reduction Now see that the number of atoms of each
element are equal on both sides.
68 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

No. of atoms No. of atoms on product sides it is only one atom. Hence, we
Elements writecoefficient3forsulphuron .H.S.Nowthe
in reactants in products
equation becomes.
H 4 4
SO2 + 2H2S 3S + 2H2O ............................(4)
S 2 2
Again count number, of atoms in equation (4)
O 8 8
Hence, the equation (2) is a balanced equation. No. of atoms No. of atoms
Elements
in reactants in products
(b) SO2(g) + H2S(g) S(s) + H2O(l)
Ans. Step 1: Write the equation given. S 3 3
O 2 2
SO2 + H2S S + H2O ......................................(1) H 4 4
Count the number of atoms of each element in It means equation (4) is a balanced equation.
products and reactants.
(c) Ag(s) + HCl(aq) AgCl + H2
No. of atoms No. of atoms Ans. Step 1: Write the chemical equation and count the
Elements
in reactants in products numbers of atoms in reactants and products.
S 2 1
Ag + HCl AgCl + H2 ......................................(1)
O 2 1
H 2 2 No. of atoms No. of atoms
Elements
in reactants in products
Step 2: It is seen from the above table, number of
atoms on both sides are not the same. It means Ag 1 1
that equation (1) needs to be balanced. H 1 2
Cl 1 1
Step 3: We will start with oxygen. On product
sideweneed2atomsofoxygen,hencecoefficient Step 2: From the above table, we see the number
2 for H2O. Now the equation will be of atoms of hydrogen on reactant side is not
balanced. So, to balance hydrogen atom, we write
∴ SO2 + H2S S + 2H2O ............................(2) coefficient2forHCl.
Again count the number of atoms of elements on Ag + 2HCl AgCl + H2 ......................................(2)
both the sides.
Again count the number of atoms of elements on
No. of atoms No. of atoms both sides.
Elements
in reactants in products No. of atoms No. of atoms
Elements
S 2 1 in reactants in products
O 2 2 Ag 1 1
H 2 2
H 2 4
Cl 2 1
Still the equation is unbalanced. To balance
Step 3: Now to balance chlorine, we write
sulphur and hydrogen atoms on reactant side,
coefficient2forAgCl
writecoefficient2forH2S
Ag + 2HCl 2AgCl + H2 ......................................(3)
∴ SO2 + 2H2S S + 2H2O ............................(3)
Again count the number of atoms of elements on
Again count the number of atoms on both the both sides.
sides.
No. of atoms No. of atoms
No. of atoms No. of atoms Elements
Elements in reactants in products
in reactants in products
Ag 1 2
S 3 1
H 2 2
O 2 2
H 4 4 Cl 2 2

Now if we count number of atoms of hydrogen Step 4: Atoms of elements, hydrogen and
and oxygen, they are equal. But number of chlorine are now balanced. Number of atoms of
atoms of sulphur is not balanced. Now there are Ag on product side is 2, and on reactant side is
3 atoms of sulphur on reactant side, whereas 1 to balance number of atoms of Ag on reactant
Chemical Reactions and Equations 69

side,wewritecoefficient2forAg.
No. of atoms No. of atoms
∴2Ag + 2HCl 2AgCl + H2 ...........................(4) Elements
in reactants in products
Now count number of atoms in equation (4) again Na 2 2
No. of atoms No. of atoms O 6 6
Elements
in reactants in products
H 4 4
Ag 2 2 S 1 1
H 2 2 Now the number of atoms of elements are equal
on both sides. Hence, equation (3) is a balanced
Cl 2 2
equation.
It means equation (4) is a balanced equation. *(e) Write down the steps in balancing the equation.
(Use your Brain Power! Textbook page no.35)
(d) NaOH(aq) + H2SO4(aq) Na2SO4 (aq) + H2O(l).
N2(g) + H2(g) NH3(g).
Ans. Step 1: Write the equation given.
Ans. Step 1: Write the equation given.
NaOH + H2SO4 Na2SO4 + H2O ...(1)
N2 + H2 NH3 ...(1)
Count the number of atoms of each element in
products and reactants. Now count the number of atoms of each elements
on reactants and product side.
No. of atoms No. of atoms
Elements No. of atoms No. of atoms
in reactants in products Elements
of reactants of product
Na 1 2
N 2 1
O 5 5 H 2 3
H 3 2 Step 2: Number of atoms of elements on both side
is not the same. So we need to balance it. First we
S 1 1 willbalanceNitrogenbywritingcoefficient2for
the product NH3.
The number of oxygen and sulphur atoms are
equal on both sides. Hence, we will balance Na N2 + H2 2NH3 ...(2)
atoms on both sides. Step 3: Again count the number of atoms of
Step 2: TobalanceNaatomwewritecoefficient2 elements on both sides.
for NaOH.
No. of atoms No. of atoms
2NaOH + H2SO4 Na2SO4 + H2O ...(2) Elements
in reactants in products
Step 3: Count the number of Na atoms, H atoms,
N 2 2
O atoms and S atoms on both sides.
H 2 6
No. of atoms No. of atoms
Elements Step 4: Number of atoms of Nitrogen is now
in reactants in products
balanced on both sides, but number of atoms of
Na 2 2 hydrogen is not balanced. Therefore, we write
coefficient3forHydrogenonreactantside.The
O 6 5
equation becomes:
H 4 2
N2 + 3H2 2NH3 ...(3)
S 1 1
Now, count the number of atoms on both side.
Step 4: To balance H, we write coefficient 2 for
H2O on the product side. Hence the equation No. of atoms No. of atoms
Elements
becomes. in reactants in products
2NaOH + H2SO4 Na2SO4 + 2H2O ...(3) N 2 2

Again count the number of atoms of elements on H 6 6

both sides. It means the equation (3) is a balanced equation.
70 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

*(f) Write down a balanced chemical equation for *(i) What is the difference in the process of
the following reaction. (Use your Brain Power! dissolution and a chemical reaction ? (Use your
Textbook page no.35) Brain Power; Textbook page no.39)
Calcium chloride + Sulphuric acid Calcium Ans. In dissolution, solute dissolves in the solvent
sulphate + Hydrogen chloride without reacting chemically with it. In chemical
Ans. CaCl2(s) + H2SO4 (aq) CaSO4(s) + 2HCl(aq) reaction, reactants will react chemically with
Calcium Sulphuric Calcium hydrogen each other and new products are formed. The
chloride acid sulphate chloride bonds in the reactants are broken and new bonds
*(g) Write down the physical states of reactants and are formed.
products in following reactions. (Use your Brain (j) Does a new substance form when a solute
Power! Textbook page no.35) dissolves in a solvent ? (Use your Brain Power;
(i) SO2 + 2H2S 3S + 2H2O Textbook page no.39)

Ans. SO2(g) + 2H2S(g) 3S(s) + 2H2O(l) Ans. No new substance is formed when a solute
dissolves in a solvent.
(ii) 2Ag + 2HCl 2AgCl + H2
*(k) Take into account the time required for
Ans. 2Ag(s) + 2HCl(l) 2AgCl(s) + H2(g) following processes. Classify them into two
*(h) Is it possible to produce hydrogen by groups and give titles to the groups. (Can you
decomposition of water by means of heat, tell; Textbook page no.39)
electricity or light ? (Can you recall; Textbook page (i) Cooking gas starts burning on ignition .
no.37) (ii) Iron article undergoes rusting.
Ans. Yes. It is possible to produce hydrogen by (iii) Erosion of rocks takes place to form soil.
decomposition of water. Water decomposes
(iv) Alcohol is formed on mixing yeast in glucose
into hydrogen and oxygen gases on passing
solution under proper conditions.
electric current through acidulated water. This
decomposition takes place by means of electrical  (v) Effervescence is formed on adding baking
energy. soda into a test tube containing dilute acid.

2H O(l) electric current 2H + O (vi) A white precipitate is formed on adding

2 2 2
dilute sulphuric acid to barium chloride solution.
It is called electrolysis.

Ans. Fast reaction Slow reaction

(i) Cooking gas starts burning on ignition . (i) Iron article undergoes rusting.
(ii) Effervescence is formed on adding baking (ii) Erosion of rocks takes place to form soil.
soda into a test tube containing dilute acid.
(iii) A white precipitate is formed on adding (iii) Alcohol is formed on mixing yeast in glucose
dilute sulphuric acid to barium chloride solution under proper condition.
solution.

*(l) Complete the following reactions and give *(10) Observe the following picture write down the
names of the products. (Use your Brain Power; chemical reaction with explanation.
Textbook page no.38) Collected rust
Fe2O3.H2O Water drop
(i) CuSO4(aq) + Fe (s) ............... + ............... O2
Ans. CuSO4(aq) + Fe (s) FeSO4(aq) + Cu(s) Fe2+ (aq)
Iron copper
e–
sulphate Cathode Anode
–
O2 + 2H2O + 4e– 4OH Fe Fe2+ + 2e–
(ii) CuSO4(aq) + Pb(s) ............... + ...............
O2 + 4H+ + 4e– 2H2O
Ans. CuSO4(aq) + Pb(s) PbSO4(aq) + Cu(s)
Iron
Lead copper
sulphate
Ans.
72 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

Q.4.1. Describe an activity to observe what happens (c) Mention one commercial use of this salt.
when quick lime is added to water taken in a Ans.
beaker. State two important observations and
(a) Photochemical decomposition reaction: Those
name the type of reaction taking place.
reaction in which a compound breaks down into
simple substances in the presence of light are
called Photochemical decomposition reactions.
The colour of salt will change from white to grey.
sunlight
(b) 2AgCl(s) 2Ag(s) + Cl2(g)
(c) Silver chloride is used in photography.

Ans. Aim: To observe what happens when quicklime (2) Check the given materials and chemicals
is added to water taken in a beaker. required for a chemical reaction and answer the
following questions.
Material Required: Quicklime (Calcium oxide),
water, beaker Material - Copper wire, iron nail, beaker or big
Procedure: test tube.
(i) Take 5g of calcium oxide in a beaker. Chemicals - Ferrous sulphate solution and
copper sulphate solutions.
(ii) Add water to it slowly.
(a) Which reaction will you study with the help
(iii) Touch the beaker. of above material and solutions? Draw the
(iv) Note down the observations. diagram of the experiment arrangement.
Observation: The beaker becomes hot Calcium (b) How would identify that the reaction is carried
oxide reacts with water vigorously out?
to form calcium hydroxide with (c) Write a balanced chemical equation for the
the evolution of heat. reaction.
CaO(s) + H2O(l) Ca(OH)2(aq) + Heat Ans.
Quick lime Water Slaked lime
Conclusion: The reaction between CaO and H2O Cork
is a combination reaction. It is an Thread
Test tube
exothermic reaction because heat is stand
evolved. Test tube
Copper wire
Q.4.2. Activity based questions: Iron nail
(1) The following diagram displays a chemical CuSO4 FeSO4
reaction. Observe carefully and answer the solution solution
following questions.
(a) Reaction of metal with solution of salts of other
metals (Displacement reaction)
(b) The reaction is carried out in the test tube where
iron nail is kept in copper sulphate solution. This
is because iron being more reactive than copper,
iron displaces copper from copper sulphate
solution. The colour of copper sulphate changes
from blue to light green due to formation of
ferrous sulphate and copper gets deposited on
(a) Identify the type of chemical reaction that will iron nail making it reddish brown in colour.
take place and define it. How will the colour of Fe(s) + CuSO4(aq) FeSO4(aq) + Cu(s)
the salt change?
Iron Copper Ferrous Copper
(b) Write the chemical equation of the reaction that sulphate sulphate
takes place.
Chemical Reactions and Equations 73

Q.4.3.Answer the following questions in detail: (iv) It does not react with water or any of the gases
(1) What is the importance of a chemical equation? present in the atmosphere. Common acids do not
O Give the significance of a chemical equation. haveanyeffectongold.
Ans. T
 he significance of a chemical equation is as (v) Thus, gold ornaments do not corrode.
follows:
(5) What are the factors which affect the rate of a
(i) Chemicalequationdescribesbrieflythenamesof
chemical reaction.
thereactants,theproductsandthestateofmatter.
Ans. The rate of reaction depends upon the following
(ii) Itexplainsthespecificconditionsoftemperature,
factors.
pressure, catalyst, etc. under which the reaction
takes place. (i) Nature of the reactants:
(iii) It also states whether energy is evolved or needs (a) 2NO(g) + O2(g) 2NO2(g) Fast
to be supplied. 2CO(g) + O2(g) 2CO2(g) Slow
(iv) Chemical equation also represents the relative  hesereactionsappeartobesimilarbutthefirst
T
number of molecules and moles of reactants and
is fast while second is slow. This is due to the
products.
differenceintheamountsofenergieswhichare
(v) The relative masses of the reactants and products requiredforbreakingupofdifferentbondsand
can also be calculated using a chemical equation. differentamountsofenergiesarereleasedinthe
Thus, a chemical equation describes a chemical formationofdifferentbonds.
reaction qualitatively as well as quantitatively.
(b) 2Al + 6HCl 2AlCl3 + 3H2
(2) What is rancidity? Mention only two ways by
which rancidity can be prevented. Zn + 2HCl ZnCl2 + H2
Ans. The process in which taste and smell of food Al and Zn react with dilute hydrochloric acid,
gets spoiled is called rancidity. It happens due to H2 gas is liberated and water soluble salts of
oxidation. the metals are formed. However, the reaction of
Prevention of rancidity. aluminium metal takes place faster as compared
(i) Antioxidantsareaddedtofattyacidstoprevent to zinc metal. The nature of metal is responsible
oxidation. for this difference. Al is more reactive than
(ii) Food should be kept in airtight containers in Zn. Therefore, the rate of reaction of Al with
refrigerator. Chips are packed in presence of hydrochloric acid is higher than that of zinc.
nitrogen gas which prevents spoilage by oxidation. Nature of reactivity of reactants influences the
rate of a chemical reaction.
(3) Give four uses of decomposition reaction.
Ans. (ii) Concentration of the reactants:
(i) Decomposition reaction helps all the living Greater the concentration of the reactants, faster
mattertoreturnbacktonature,afterdeath. is the reaction conversely, as the concentrations
(ii) Management of garbage. of the reactants decrease the rate of reaction also
decreases. Dilute HCl reacts slowly with CaCO3
(iii) Photosynthesis decomposition of water.
and thereby, CaCO3 disappears slowly and CO2
(iv) Photography decomposition of silver bromide.
also liberates slowly on the other hand the reaction
(v) Used in chemical industry to obtain elements with concentrated HCl takes place rapidly and
from complex compounds. CaCO3 disappears fast. Concentrated acid reacts
(vi) Decomposition of agricultural waste leads to faster than dilute acid, which means that rate of
formation of compost. reaction is proportional to the concentration of
(4) What is corrosion? Do gold ornaments corrode? reactants.
Justify. (iii) Temperature:
Ans.
The rate of reaction increases with increase of
(i) The slow process of decay or destruction of metal
temperature. In most of the cases, the rate of
duetotheeffectofair,moistureandacidsonitis
reaction becomes nearly double for 10K rise of
known as corrosion.
temperature. In some cases, reactions do not
(ii) Gold ornaments do not get corroded.
take place at room temperature but take place at
(iii) Gold is a noble metal and is least reactive. higher temperature.
74 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

(iv) Presence of catalyst: For a reaction involving a solid reactant or

A catalyst generally increases the speed of a catalyst, smaller the particle size, greater is the
reaction without itself being consumed in the surface area, and faster is the reaction.
reaction. In case of reverse reaction, a catalyst (vi) Presence of light:
helps to attain the equilibrium quickly without Some reactions do not take place in the dark
disturbing the state of equilibrium. but can take place in the presence of light like
(v) Size of the particles of reactants: photosynthesis or photochemical reactions.

vvv

ASSIGNMENT - 3
Time : 1 Hr. Marks : 20

Q.1. (A) Fill in the blanks: (3)

(1) The reaction CaCO3 CaO + CO2 is a reaction.
(2) The chemical reaction in which heat is absorbed is called reaction.
(3) A redox reaction takes place during respiration.
Q.1. (B) Choose and write the correct options: (2)
(1) Because of the formation of which of the following, lime water turns milky when carbon dioxide is
passed in it?
(a) Calcium Carbonate (b) Calcium bicarbonate (c) Calcium hydroxide (d) Sodium Carbonate
(2) When sulphuric acid is poured over zinc, which of the following gas is formed?
(a) Sulphur dioxide (b) Hydrogen (c) Oxygen (d) Zinc dioxide
Q.2. Answer the following: (Any 2) (4)
(1) What happens when a piece of zinc metal is added to copper sulphate solution?
(2) Write a note on Endothermic Reaction.
(3) Distinguish between physical change and chemical change.
Q.3. Answer the following: (Any 2) (6)
(1) Explain the term reactant and product giving examples.
(2) Balance the given Chemical Equations:
(a) HNO3 + Ca(OH)2 Ca(NO3)2 + H2O
heat
(b) FeSO4 Fe2O3 + SO2 + SO3
(3) Identify the type of reaction:
(a) Fe(s) + CuSO4(aq) FeSO4(aq) + Cu (s)
(b) 2H2(g) + O2(g) 2H2O(l)
(c) Na2SO4(aq) + BaCl2(aq) BaSO4(s) + 2NaCl(aq)
Q.4. Answer the following: (Any 1) (5)
(1) Explain the types of reaction with reference to oxygen and hydrogen. Illustrate with examples.
(2) (a) What is rancidity? Mention two ways by which rancidity can be prevented.
(b) What is corrosion? Do gold ornaments corrode? Justify your answer.
vvv
 4 Effects of Electric Current

Points to Remember:
zz Electric current is the flow of electrons in a conductor or amount of electric charge flowing through a
particularcrosssectionalareainunittime.
zz Acontinuouspathconsistingofconductingwiresandotherresistancesbetweentheterminalsofabattery,
alongwhichanelectriccurrentflows,iscalledanelectric circuit.
zz Theproductionofheatenergyinaconductorbyelectriccurrentflowingthroughitiscalledtheheating effect
of the electric current.
zz Forcethatexistsinthespacearoundamagnetofacurrentcarryingconductoriscalledmagnetic field.
zz ight hand thumb ruleisaconvenientruleforfindingoutdirectionofthemagneticfieldproducedbya
currentflowingthroughanelectricalconductor.
zz Whenacopperwirewitharesistivecoatingiswoundinachainofloop(likeaspring)iscalledsolenoid.
zz Fleming’s left hand rule:Accordingtothisrule,thelefthand’sthumb,indexfingerandthemiddlefingerare
stretchedsoastobeperpendiculartoeachother.Iftheindex finger is in the direction of the magnetic field,
andthemiddle fingerpointsinthedirection of current,thenthedirectionofthumb is the direction of force
ontheconductor.
zz Adevicewhichconvertselectrical energyintomechanical energyiscalledanelectric motor.
zz Theprocessbywhichachangingmagneticfieldinaconductorinducesacurrentinanotherconductoris
calledelectromagnetic induction.
zz Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction states that whenever the number of magnetic lines of force
passingthroughthecoilchanges,currentisinducedinthecoil.Thecurrentproducedinthecoiliscalledas
Induced current.
zz Fleming’s ight hand rule: Accordingtothisrulewhenthumb,indexfingerandmiddlefingerarestretched
in the direction perpendicular to each other then the position of thumb indicates direction of motion of
conductor,theindex fingerindicatesdirection of magnetic fieldandmiddle fingerindicatesthedirectionof
induced current.
zz Thedevicewhichconvertsmechanical energyintoelectrical energyiscalledanelectric generator.
zz Acurrentthatflowsonlyinonedirectioniscalleddirect current(D.C.).
zz Acurrentwhosedirectionreversesperiodicallywithtimeiscalledalternating current.(A.C.)
zz Ageneratorwhichconvertsmechanical energyintoelectrical energyintheformofalternatingcurrentis
calledAC generator.
zz Ageneratorwhichconvertsmechanical energyintoelectrical energyintheformofdirectcurrentiscalled
DC generator.

(2)  heelectricbulbconsistsofafilamentmadeup
T
MASTER KEY QUESTION SET - 4 of .
Q.1. (A) 1. Fill in the blanks: (3)  hepotentialdifferencebetweenalivewireand
T
(1)  he generation of heat in a resistor when an
T neutralwireis .
electric current is passed through the circuit is (4) I n the electric bill, the electricity usage is
called . expressedin .

(75)
Chemical Reactions and Equations 71

(i) In the above diagram, process of rusting takes solution of Barium sulphate, yellow precipitate
place. of barium chromate is formed. It is a double
(ii) A certain type of reddish coloured solid layer displacement reaction.
collects on the metallic surface. K2CrO4(aq) + BaSO4(aq) K2SO4(aq) + BaCrO4(s)
(iii) This layer is called rust. Potassium Barium Potassium Barium
(iv) Its chemical formula is Fe2O3.xH2O. The rust is chromate Sulphate sulphate chromate
formed by an electrochemical reaction. (iv) Sodium carbonate solution is added to calcium
(v) Different regions on the surface of iron become chloride solution.
anode and cathode.
Ans. When sodium carbonate solution is added to
(vi) Fe is oxidised to Fe2+ in the anode region. calcium chloride solution, solid calcium carbonate
Fe(s) Fe2+(aq) + 2e– and aqueous solution of sodium chloride is
(vii) O2 reduces to form water in the cathode region. formed. It is a double displacement reaction.
O2(g) + 4H+(aq) + 4e– 2H2O(l) Na2CO3(aq) + CaCl2(aq) CaCO3(s) + 2NaCl(aq)
Sodium Calcium Calcium Sodium
When Fe2+ ions migrate from the anode region,
carbonate chloride carbonate chloride
they react with water and further get oxidised to
form Fe3+ ions. (v) Copper reacts with concentrated Nitric acid.
(viii) A reddish coloured hydrated oxide is formed Ans. When copper reacts with concentrated nitric acid,
from Fe3+ ions, it is called rust. It collects on the reddish coloured poisonous nitrogen dioxide gas
surface. is formed.
(ix) 2Fe3+(aq) + 4H2O(l) Fe2O3. H2O(s) + 6H+(aq). Cu(s) + 4HNO3(aq) Cu(NO3)2(aq) + 2NO2(g) + 2H2O(l)
(x) Due to various components of atmosphere, Copper conc. Copper Nitrogen Water
oxidation of metals takes place, consequently Nitric acid nitrate dioxide
resulting in their damage.
(vi) Silver nitrate solution added to solution of
(xi) This is called Corrosion Iron rusts and a reddish
sodium chloride.
coloured layer is collected on it. This is corrosion
of iron. Ans. Silver nitrate reacts with sodium chloride to form
a white coloured precipitate of silver chloride
(11) Explain what happens when following reactions
and solution of sodium nitrate.
take place and give the balanced chemical
equations. AgNO3(aq) + NaCl(aq) AgCl + NaNO3(aq)
Silver Sodium Silver Sodium
(i) Iron sulphide reacts with sulphuric acid.
nitrate chloride chloride nitrate
Ans. Iron sulphide reacts with sulphuric acid to form
ferrous sulphate and hydrogen sulphide. (vii) Sulphur dioxide and hydrogen sulphide reacts.
FeS(s) + H2SO4(aq) FeSO4 (aq) + H2S(g) Ans. Sulphur dioxide and hydrogen sulphide react to
Iron Sulphuric Ferrous Hydrogen form sulphur and water.
sulphate acid sulphate sulphide SO2(g) + 2H2S(g) 3S + 2H2O(l)
(ii) Zinc dust is added to copper sulphate solution. Sulphur Hydrogen Sulphur Water
Ans. Zinc dust reacts with copper sulphate solution, dioxide sulphide
forming zinc sulphate and copper. Zinc displaces (viii) Glucose reacts with oxygen.
copper from copper sulphate and an aqueous Ans. When glucose combines with oxygen, carbon
solution of zinc sulphate is formed. dioxide and water are formed with the release of
Zn(s) + CuSO4(aq) ZnSO4(aq) + Cu(s) energy.
Zinc Copper Zinc Copper C6H12O6 + 6O2(g) 6CO2(g) + 6H2O (l) + energy
sulphate sulphate
Glucose Oxygen Carbon Water
(iii)Potassium chromate solution is added to dioxide
solution of Barium sulphate.
Ans. When potassium chromate solution is added to
76 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

(5) 1 kWh electrical energy used, is also called Q.1. (A) 2. Find the odd word out.
. (1) Fusewire,insulator,rubbergloves,generator
(6)  hen a copper wire with a resistive coating
W Ans. Generator (Allothers are concernedwith safety
is wound in a chain of loop (like a spring), it is measures.)
called . (2) V oltmeter,Ammeter,Thermometer,Galvanometer
(7)  hedevicewhichconvertselectricalenergyinto
T Ans. T
 hermometer(Allothersarebasedonmagnetic
mechanicalenergyiscalled . effectofelectriccurrent.)
(8) I n a straight current carrying conductor, if (3) L
 oudspeaker,Microphone,Electricmotor,Magnet
the current through the wire is increased, the Ans. M
 agnet(Allothersarerelatedtomagneteffectof
intensityofmagneticfield . anelectriccurrent.)
(9) The right hand thumb rule is also called as (4) A rmaturecoil,Brushes,Magnet,Directcurrent
. Ans. D
 irectcurrent(Allothersarethepartsofelectric
(10) T
 hemagneticlinesofforceinsidethesolenoidare motor.)
paralleltoeachother,whichmeansthemagnetic (5)  efrigerator, Electric fan, Mixer, Electric water
fieldis .
heater
(11) ThefrequencyofACcurrentinIndiais . Ans. E
 lectricwaterheater(Allothersareapplications
(12) T
 hedirectionofforceactingonacurrentcarrying ofmagneticeffectofcurrent.)
conductordependson and . (6) Fusewire,Neutralwire,Earthingwire,Livewire
(13) T
 heforceactingonacurrentcarryingconductor Ans. Fusewire(Allothersareconcernedwithelectric
is maximum when the direction of current is supplywires.)
tothedirectionofmagneticfield. (7)  lectricheater,Electricbulb,Electricfuse,Electric
E
(14) A
 galvanometerisasensitivedevicewhichworks press
onthesameprincipleasthatofan . Ans. Electric fuse (All others are wires with high
(15) Thecommercialunitofpoweris . meltingpoints.)
(16) Generatorworksontheprincipleof . (8)  lectricoven,Electricbulb,Electricpress,Electric
E
(17) Theelectricovenisanexampleof . fan
(18) TheSIunitofheatenergyis . Ans. E
 lectricfan(Allothersarebasedonheatingeffect
ofelectriccurrent.)
(19) The electric current that reverses its direction
periodicallywithtimeiscalled . (9) E lectricbell,Electricfuse,Solenoid,Microphone
Ans. Electricfuse(Allothersworkontheprincipleof
(20) W
 hen the potential difference between two
terminalsbecomes ,theelectriccurrent magneticeffectofelectriccurrent.)
stopsflowing. Q.1. (A) 3. Answer the following in one sentence:
(21) The  is used in the electric circuit to (1) Whatisheatingeffectofanelectriccurrent?
protectitfromlossduetoexcessivecurrent. Ans. Thegenerationofheatinametallicconductorby
(22) Whenlivewireandneutralwirecomeincontact, theeffectofelectriccurrentflowingthroughitis
takesplace. calledheatingeffectofelectriccurrent.
(23) Theunitofelectricresistanceis . (2)  hat are the appliances that work on the
W
Ans. ( ) i   (2)  (3) 220  principleofheatingeffectofelectriccurrent?
( ) (5)  i ( ) i (7) i  (8) Ans. Electricbulb,electricpress,electricheater,electric
i (9)   ( 0) i  oven, electric fuse, electric stove etc. are some
( ) 50  ( 2) i i     i i   appliancesthatworkontheprincipleofheating
i  ( 3) i ( ) i   effectofelectriccurrent.
( 5) i  ( ) ( ) i i i (3) Whatissolenoid?
( 7) i    i   ( 8)  Ans. When a copper wire with a resistive coating
( 9) i  (20) (2 ) i   is wound in a chain of loop (like a spring), it is
(22)  i i (23) ( ) calledsolenoid.
   i  77

(4) Whatiselectricmotor? (16) Writetherelationbetweenwatthrandjoule.

Ans. T
 he device that converts electrical energy into Ans. 1watthr=3.6×103 J
mechanicalenergyiscalledanelectricmotor. (17) When will the induced current in the electrical
(5)  hat do you understand by the term ‘Direct
W conductor(coil)bemaximum?
current(D.C.)? Ans. I twillbemaximumwhenthedirectionofmotion
oftheelectricconductorisperpendiculartothe
Ans. The electric current that flows in one direction,
magneticfield.
i.e. from higher potential to lower potential is
calledasdirectcurrent(D.C.). Q.1. (A) 4. Match the columns:
(6) Whatisalternatingcurrent(A.C.)? (1) Column A Column B
Ans. The electric current that reverses its direction
(1) Fleming (a) elation
periodically with time is called an alternating betweenelectric
current(A.C.). energyand
(7) Nametwotypesofelectriccurrent. magnetism
Ans. Direct current and Alternating current are two (2) Faraday (b)  awof
L
typesofelectriccurrent. electromagnetic
(8) Namethetypesofelectricgenerator. induction
Ans. ACgeneratorandDCgeneratorarethetwotypes (3) Oersted (c) Magneticfield,
ofgenerators. directionof
(9)  amethethreetypesofwiresorcablesusedin
N electriccurrent
domesticelectriccircuit. directionof
Ans. Therearethreetypesofwiresorcablesusedin motionofa
domesticelectriccircuitnamelylivewire(phase conductor.
wire),neutralwireandearthwire. Ans. (   ) (2  ) (3  )
(10) W
 hich electrical appliance converts electrical (2) Column A Column B
energyintomechanicalenergy?
Ans. Theelectricmotorconvertselectricalenergyinto (1) Earthingwire (a) Electricmotor
mechanicalenergy. (2) Overloading (b) Electric
(11) Which appliance converts mechanical energy generator
intoelectricalenergy? (3) Electromagnetic (c) Protection
Ans. The electric generator converts mechanical force againstelectric
energyintoelectricalenergy. shock
(12) What is the frequency of alternating current in (4) Electromagnetic (d)  xcessive
E
India? induction electriccurrent
Ans. I n India, the frequency of alternating current Ans. (   ) (2  ) (3  ) (   )
(A.C.)is50Hz.
(13) Whatdoyoumeanbyinducedcurrent? (3) Column A Column B
Ans. Theelectriccurrentthatissetupinthecoildue (1) ight hand (a) Magnetic effect
tothemotionofeithercoiloramagnet(magnetic thumbrule ofelectriccurrent
field)iscalledinducedcurrent.
(2) HansOersted (b) Propertiesofa
(14) N
 ame the two components or devices used for barmagnet
thesafetyofelectricalgadgets?
(3) Solenoid (c) Donotintersect
Ans. E
 lectricfuseandearthwirearethetwodevices
eachother
used for the safety of electrical components or
gadgets. (4) Magneticlines (d)  irectionof
D
offorce currentand
(15) W
 rite the relation between kilowatt hour and
magneticfield
joule.
Ans. 1kWh=3.6×106 J Ans. (   ) (2  ) (3  ) (   )
78 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

(4) Ans. ( ) (2) .  i   i  i  .

Column A Column B
( ) (3) . i ivi    .
(1) Electric (a) Transmitted over ( ) (5) ( ) . i  i   
generator longdistances  i i .(7) (8) . i  
(2) Electric (b) Unidirectional i  i  i     
motor flowofcurrent i i   i  i i .(9) . i 
 i   i i . ( 0)  ( ) .
(3) Direct (c)  onverting
C i         ( 2) ( 3) .
current mechanicalenergy   3.   06 ( ) .   i   i .
intoelectrical ( 5) .  vi  i  v  i  
energy i  i   i  i  .
(4) Alternating (d)  sed in mixers,
U ( )  ( 7) .   i  
current refrigeratoretc.  i i  i  v i 
i  .( 8) .
Ans. (   ) (2  ) (3  ) (   )
Q.1. (B) Choose and write the correct option:
Q.1. (A) 5. State whether the following statement
(1)  he direction of magnetic field due to electric
T
True or False’. If false write the correct currentisdecidedby
statement for the same.
(a) ighthandthumbrule
(1) TheSIunitofelectricchargeiscoulomb(C).
(b) Fleming’slefthandrule
(2) TheSIunitofelectriccurrentisvolt(V).
(c) Fleming’srighthandrule
(3)  esistivityofaconductordoesnotdependupon
(d) Noneoftheabove
itstemperature.
(2)  he device which converts mechanical energy
T
(4)  hefilamentintheelectricbulbismadeofawire
T
intoelectricalenergyiscalled
withhighmeltingpoint.
(5)  hedirectcurrentalwaysflowsinonedirection
T (a) Electricbell (b) Electricgenerator
only. (c) Electricfuse (d) Electricmotor
(6) Theelectricmotorisusedtogenerateelectricity. (3) 1mA=
(7)  uring lightning, all the electrical appliances
D (a) 10 6A (b) 106A (c) 10 3A (d) 103A
mustbeswitchedoff.
(4) 1watt=
(8)  anyhighpowerratingelectricalappliancescan
M
(a) 1joule/1second (b) 1000 /s
beconnectedtoacircuitatatime.
(c) 1calorie/1second (d) 1joule.second
(9) Directcurrenthasafrequencyof50HzinIndia.
(5) Electricpower(P)=
(10) Electricpower(P)=VI
(11) AccordingtoOhm’slaw,V=I t (a) V.t/ (b) .t/V (c) V. .t (d) V. /t

(12) T
 heproductionofheatinawirewhenconnected (6) 1kWh=
to electric circuit is called heating effect of an (a) 36 106 J (b) 3.6 106 J
electriccurrent.
(c) 3.6 109 J (d) 36 109 J
9
(13) 1kWh=3.6×10 J
(7)  hedeflectionofthepointerof
T ison
(14) 1kWhelectricunit=10units.
eithersideofzeromark.
(15) T
 he device which converts electrical energy to
(a) Voltmeter (b) Ammeter
mechanicalenergyiscalledanelectricgenerator.
(c) Galvanometer (d) Thermometer
(16) A
 lternatingcurrentisperfectlyusedfordomestic
electriccircuits. (8) Ifthepotentialdifferenceacrossawireis2Vand
(17) W
 hen more electrical appliances work together the current through the wire is 1A, the electric
inacircuit,itresultsinashortcircuit. poweris .
(18) W
 hen a live wire and a neutral wire come in 1 1
(a) 4W (b) W (c) 2W (d) W
contactwitheachother,itmaycauseshortcircuit. 2 4
   i  79

(9) At the centre of which of the following four (13) In the arrangement shown in figure, there are
circularringsisthemagneticfieldstrongest,for twocoilswoundonanon-conductingcylindrical
equalmagnitudeofcurrent? rod.Initiallythekeyisnotinserted.Thenthekey
isinsertedandlaterremoved.Then,
b d
(1) 2I (2) 2I

a c
(3) 2I (4) 2I
(a) Thegalvanometerwillnotdeflect.
(b) The galvanometer will deflect in one
directionwhenthekeyisinsertedandinthe
(a) 3 (b) 1 (c) 4 (d) 2 oppositedirectionwhenthekeyisremoved.
(10) W
 hich of the following is used to find the (c) Thegalvanometerwilldeflectinonedirection
directionofthemagneticlinesofforcearounda when the key is inserted and remain still
conductor? whenthekeyisremoved.
(a) Barmagnet (b) Magneticneedle (d) The galvanometer will deflect in one
directionwhenthekeyisinsertedandinthe
(c) Discmagnet (d) Sphericalmagnet
samedirectionwhenthekeyisremoved.
(11) A galvanometer can be used to measure
(14) Outofthefourcircuitsshown,forstudyingthe
.
dependenceofcurrentonthepotentialdifference
(a) onlyDC (b) onlyAC acrossaresistor,thecorrectcircuitis
(c) bothDCandAC (d) potentialdifference + – + –
+ –
A A
(12) Writethecorrectoptionbyobservingthefigures: (a) – R (b) + R

– + – +
Magnetic Conductor V V
+ – + –
lines loop + –
N A A
(c) – R (d) + R

+ – + –
V V
S
(15) The intensity of magnetic field is expressed in
Cardboard .
R (a) ampere (b) volt
A
(c) coulomb (d) oersted
A
Ans. ( )( ) i    (2)( ) i  
Magnetic Conductor 3
(3) ( ) 0  ( ) ( )      (5) ( ) .
lines loop
( )( )3.   06 (7)( ) v (8)( )2 (9)
N
( )2( 0)( ) i  ( )( )   
 ( 2) ( ) i  i  i   ( 3) ( )
S
 v  i  i   i i  
Cardboard  i i  i   i  i i  
 i  v .( )( )( 5)( )
R

A Q.2.1. Solve the following:

B Type: A

(a) MagneticfieldinAisstronger. H = I2Rt joules P = I2 watt

(b) MagneticfieldinBisstronger. V2t V2
H= joules P= watt
R R
(c) MagneticfieldsinAandBaresame.
H = VIt joules P VI watt
(d) MagneticfieldsinAandBareweaker.
80 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

*(1) Heat energy is being produced in a resistance in    =12

a circuit at the rate of 100 W. The current of 3 A    V=220V
is flowing in the circuit. What must be the value
To find: Power(P)=?
of the resistance?
V2
Ans. Given: I=3A Formulae:P=
R
   P=100W
To find: =? Solution:Case(i)(Forlength6m)
V2 (220)2
Formulae:P=I2R  P= =
R 24
Solution:P=I2R
220 220 55 110 6050
 100=(3)2 × R ∴ P= = =
24 3 3
 100=9 P=2016.67W
100  Case(ii)(Forlength3m)
  =
9
  =11.11 V2 (220)2
 P= =
R 12
R ≈11
220 220 12100
Ans. Thevalueoftheresistanceis11 ∴ = =
12 3
*(2) Two tungsten bulbs of wattage 100 W and 60 P=4033.33W
W power work on 220 V potential difference.
Ans. H
 encemoreheatwillbeobtainedaftercuttingthe
If they are connected in parallel, how much
wireintohalfaspowerconsumptionincreases.
current will flow in the main conductor?
Ans. Given: P1=100W *(4) An electric iron uses a power of 1100 W when
set to higher temperature. If set to lower
P2=60W temperature, it uses 330 W power. Find out the
   V=220V electric current and the respective resistance of
220 V.
To find: I=?
Ans. Given: P1=1100W
Formulae:P=VI
P2=330W
Solution:
   V=220V
 Totalpower(P)=P1 + P2=100+60=160W To find: I1=?,I2=?, 1=?, 2=?,
 P=VI V2
Formulae:P=VI,P=
P 160 8 R
 I= = =
V 220 11 Solution:
P1=VI1
I=0.72A
P1 1100
Ans. The current flowing in the main conductor is   I1= =
0.72A. V 220

*(3) A 6 m long wire made from an alloy, nichrome, is I1=5A

shaped into a coil and given for producing heat. P2 330 3
It has a resistance of 24 ohm. Can we get more   I2= = =
V 220 2
heat if the wire is cut into half of its original
length and shaped into a coil? For getting I2=1.5A
Energy, the two ends of the wire are connected
to a source with a potential difference of 220 V. V2
P1=
R1
Ans. Given: Case(i)(Forlength6m)
V2 (220)2 220 220
   =24 ∴ R1= = = =2×22
P1 1100 1100
   Case(ii)(Forlength3m)
   i  8

R1=44 current and (ii) heat energy produced in 12 sec.

Ans: (i) 0.25 A (ii) 750 J.
V2 (220)2 220×220 440 (6) Find the resistance of a coil of power 60 W when
R2= = = =
P2 330 330 3 potential difference of 240 V is applied across it.
Ans: 960 Ω.
R2=146.67
(7) If a bulb is rated 220 V and 100 W . Find
Ans. If power is 1100 W, then the current is 5A and resistance. Ans: 484 Ω
resistanceis44 andwhenpoweris330W,then
(8) An electric current of 5 A flows through a wire
thecurrentis1.5Aandresistanceis146.67
of resistance 41.8 . Find the time to obtain heat
*(5) A cell is connected to a 9 ohm resistance, of 3000 cal. Ans: 12 seconds
because of which heat of 400 is produced
Type: B
per second due to current flowing through it.
Obtain the potential difference applied across Energy Power × Time
the resistance. H=P×t
Ans. Given: =9
Note: Power should be in kW
   H=400 Time should be in hours
   t=1s
*(1) Who will spend more electrical energy, 500 W
To find: V=? TV set in 30 mins or 600 W heater in 20 mins?
V 2t
Formula:H= Ans. (i)ForTVset
R
V2t  Electricalenergyconsumed= P× t
Solution:H=
R 500 30
=  
1000 60
V2 ×1
 400=   = 0.5×0.5
9
3600=V2   = 0.25kWh
 (ii)ForHeater
V=√ 3600
 Electricalenergyconsumed= P× t
V=60V
600 20
Ans. The potential difference applied across the =  
1000 60
resistanceis60V.
1
  = 0.6×
3
NUMERICALS FOR PRACTICE
  = 0.2kWh
(1) The resistance of a wire is 25 . Due to electric Ans. Therefore, TV will consume more electrical
current passing through it, 6.25 /sec heat energy.
is generated in the wire. Find the potential
*(2) An electric tungsten bulb is connected into a
difference. Ans: 12.5 V
home circuit. The home electric supply runs
(2) If 90 W bulb is connected to a circuit with at 220 V potential difference. When switched
potential difference of 360 V, find the current on, a current of 0.45 A flows through the bulb.
flowing through the bulb. Ans: 0.25 A What must be power (wattage) of the bulb? If
(3) An electric bulb is connected to 250 V. The it is kept on for 10 hours, how many units of
current passing through it is 0.27 A. What is the electricity will be consumed?
power of the bulb? Ans: 67.5 W Ans. Given: V=220V
(4) If the bulb of 60 W is connected across a source    I=0.45A
of 220 V, find the electric current drawn by it.
   t=10h
Ans: 0.2727 A.
To find: P=?
(5) A potential difference of 250 V is applied across a
resistance of 1000 in an electric iron. Find (i) the  Unitofenergy=?
82 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

75
Formulae:P=VI,H=P× t ∴ = ×60=45kWh
100
Solution:P=VI
∴ TotalCost=45×3
   =220×0.45
Totalcost=` 135
P=99W
Ans. Costofenergytooperateelectricironfor30days
99
∴P= kW is ` 135.
1000
  H=P× t (5) A washing machine rated 300 W operates one
hour/day. If the cost of unit is ` 3.00, find the
99
  = ×10 cost of the energy to operate a washing machine
1000
for the month of March.
H=0.99kWh Ans. Given: (P)=300W
Ans. T
 hepowerofthebulbwillbe99Wandtheunits 300 3
   = kW= kW
ofelectricityconsumedis0.99. 1000 10
*(3) An electric iron of 1100 W is operated for 2 hrs    (t)=1×31=31hrs
daily. What will be the electrical consumption   Unitcost=` 3
expenses for the month of April? (The electric To find: TotalCost=?
company charges ` 5 per unit of energy). Formula:H=P× t
Ans. Given: P=1100W Solution:H=P× t
1100 11
   = kW= kW 3 93
1000 10 ∴ H= ×31= =9.3kWh
10 10
   t=2×30=60h
∴ Costofenergy=9.3×3
  Unitcost=` 5
To find: Totalcost=? Costofenergy=` 27.9

Formula:H=P× t Ans. The cost of the energy to operate a washing
machineforthemonthofMarchis`27.90.
Solution:H=P× t
(6) If a TV of rating 100W is operated for 6 hrs per
11
   = ×60 day, find the number of units consumed in a
10 leap year.
∴ H=66kWh Ans. Given: Power(P)=100W
  Totalcost=66×5 100 1
    P= kW= kW
Totalcost=` 330 1000 10
Ans. T
 he electrical consumption expenses for the    Time(t)=6×366=2196hrs
monthofAprilwillbe` 330. To find: Unitconsumed=?
(4) An electric iron rated 750 W operates 2 hours/ Formula:H=P× t
day. If the cost of unit is ` 3.00 per kWh. Find
Solution:H=P× t
the cost of energy to operate electric iron for 30
1
days. H = ×2196
10
Ans. Given: (P)=750W
H=219.6kWh
750 75
  = kW=
1000 100 Ans. Numberofunitsconsumedis219.6.
   (t)=2×30=60hours
NUMERICALS FOR PRACTICE
  Unitcost=` 3
To find: TotalCost=? (1) The potential difference of 260 V is applied at
Formula:H=P× t the domestic circuit. An LED is connected to
Solution:H=P× t the circuit. An electric current of 0.35 A flows
through the LED.
   i  83

Then find : (i) Power of LED Bulb (4) Fleming’s left hand rule:
(ii) Units consumed if the bulb is operating for Ans. Accordingtotherule,thelefthandthumb,index
finger,andthemiddlefingerarestretchedsoasto
10 hr. Ans: (i) 91 W (ii) 0.91 unit (kWh)
beperpendiculartoeachother.Iftheindexfinger
(2) A 300 W T.V is operated every day for 6 hr. Find is in the direction of the magnetic field, middle
the electrical energy (no. of units) consumed. fingerpointsinthedirectionofthecurrent,then
Ans: 657 kWh. thedirectionofthethumbisthedirectionofthe
(3) An electric iron rated 750 W is operated for forceontheconductor.
2 hr/day. If the cost of unit is ` 3.00 per kWh, (5) Heating effect of electric current:
find the cost of energy used to operate electric Ans. Theproductionofheatenergyinaconductorby
iron for 30 days. Ans: ` 135. the electric current flowing through it is called
(4) If T.V. of rating 100 W is operated for 6 hr per theheatingeffectofanelectriccurrent.
day. Find the number of units consumed in a (6) Fleming’s ight Hand ule:
leap year. Ans: 219.6 units Ans. Stretch the thumb, the index finger and the
Q.2.2. Write the definition / laws: middle finger in such a way that they will be
perpendiculartoeachother.Inthisposition,the
(1) AC generator:
thumb indicates the direction of motion of the
Ans. The device which converts mechanical energy
conductor,theindexfingershowsthedirectionof
into electrical energy in the form of alternating
themagneticfield,andthemiddlefingershows
currentiscalledACgenerator.
thedirectionoftheinducedcurrent.
(2) DC generator: *(7) Maxwell’s cork screw rule:
Ans. Adevicewhichconvertsmechanicalenergyinto Ans. If a right handed cork screw is assumed to be
electrical energy in the form of direct current is held along the conductor, and screw is rotated
calledDCgenerator. suchthatitmovesinthedirectionofthecurrent,
(3) ight Hand Thumb ule: then the direction of magnetic field is same as
Ans. I magine that you have held the conductor in thatoftherotationofscrew.
yourrighthandinsuchawaythatyourthumb (8) Faraday’s law of induction:
pointsinthedirectionofthecurrent.Thenturn Ans. Ifthenumberofmagneticlinesofforcepassing
yourfingersaroundtheconductor,thedirection throughthecoilchanges,currentisinducedinthe
of the fingers is the direction of the magnetic coil.ThisisknownasFaraday’slawofinduction.
linesofforce. The current produced in the coil is called the
inducedcurrent.
Q.2.3. Distinguish between:
*(1) AC generator and DC generator
Ans. AC generator DC generator
(i) AC generator converts mechanical energy into (i) DCgeneratorconvertsmechanicalenergyinto
electricalenergyintheformofalternatingcurrent. electricalenergyintheformofdirectcurrent.
(ii) Inthis,brassslipringsareused. (ii) Inthis,brasssplitringsareused.

(2) Electric motor and AC generator

Ans. Electric motor AC generator
(i) Thedevicewhichconvertselectricalenergyinto (i) The device which converts mechanical energy
mechanicalenergyiscalledelectricmotor. intoelectricalenergyiscalledelectricgenerator.
(ii) Abatteryisusedtopassacurrentthroughthe (ii) Agalvanometerisusedtodetectthepresenceof
armaturecoil. electriccurrent.
(iii) Inmotor,acurrentcarryingcoilissetinrotation (iii) Ingenerator,acurrentisproducedwhenthecoil
duetothemagneticfield. rotatesinthemagneticfield.
(iv) Inmotor,thesplitringcommutatorisused. (iv) IntheACgenerator,slipringcommutatorisused.
(v) Electricmotorrunsonelectricity. (v) Electricgeneratorgenerateselectricity.
8 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

(3) Short circuiting and Overloading

Ans. Short circuiting Overloading
(i) I falivewireandneutralwirecomeincontact (i) Ifelectricalappliancesofhighpowerratingare
ortoucheachother,shortcircuitingtakesplace. switchedonsimultaneously,overloadingoccurs.
(ii) Duringashortcircuit,theresistancebecomes (ii) Inoverloading,thepowerconsumptionofa
verysmall. circuitbecomeslarge.
(iii) Inthis,largeamountofcurrentflowswhich (iii) Inthis,largeamountofcurrentflowsthrough
producesheatandcancausefire. appliancebeyonditspermissiblelimit.
(iv) Canbeavoidedbyperiodicchecking. (iv) Canbeavoidedbynotusingmanyappliancesat
atime.
(4) Direct current and Alternating current
Ans. Direct current Alternating current
(i)  heelectriccurrentthatflowsinonedirection,
T (i) Theelectriccurrentthatreversesitsdirection
i.e.fromhigherpotentialtolowerpotentialis periodicallywithtimeiscalledanalternating
calledasdirectcurrent(D.C.). current(A.C.).
(ii) ThefrequencyofDCiszero. (ii) ThefrequencyofACinIndiais
50Hz.
(iii) DCcannotbeusedonalargescalefor (iii) ACcanbeusedonalargescaleforhousehold
householdpurpose. purpose.

Q.2.4. Give Scientific easons: andcanbeheatedtoahightemperaturewithout

*(1) Tungsten metal is used to make a solenoid type undergoingoxidation.
coil in an electric bulb. (iv) Thus, Nichrome is preferred over other pure
Ans. metalsandareusedformakingcoilfordevices
(i) T  heelectricbulbworksontheprincipleofheating workingonheatingeffectofelectriccurrent.
effectofelectriccurrent. *(3) For electric power transmission, copper or
(ii) Theintensityoflightemittedbythefilamentof aluminium wire is used.
an electric bulb depends on the temperature of Ans.
thefilament. (i) C  opperandAluminiumaregoodconductorsof
(iii) When electric current is passed through the electricity.
filament,alargeamountofheatisgeneratedand (ii) Copper and aluminium have large number of
filamentbecomeshot,thenemitslight. freeelectronsandarehighlyductilemetals.
(iv) The melting point of Tungsten is very high (iii) They have less resistivity, due to which these
(3380°C),sothatfilamentcanbeheatedtoahigh metalshavehighconductivity.
temperaturewithoutmelting.
(iv) H
 ence,connectingwiresintheelectriccircuitare
(v) Hence,thefilamentofelectricbulbismadeupof generallymadeofcopperandaluminium.
Tungsten.
*(4) In practice the unit kWh is used for the
*(2) In the electric equipments producing heat measurement of electrical energy rather than
e.g. iron, electric heater, boilers, toaster, etc an joule.
alloy such as Nichrome is used, not pure metal.
Ans.
Ans. (i) T
 heunitofelectricpower(W)isaverysmallunit,
(i) T  he appliances like iron, electric toaster etc. hence1000Wor1kWisusedinpractice.
works on the principle of heating effect of an
(ii)  owif1kWpowerisusedfor1hour,itmeans
N
electriccurrent.
1kW×1hi.e.1kWhenergyisconsumed.
(ii) Athightemperaturepuremetalcangetoxidised
(iii) joule is the SI unit for energy which is very
andalsopuremetalshavelowresistivity.
small,henceoncommercialscalekWhisusedto
(iii) An alloy such as Nichrome, has high resistivity measureelectricalenergy.
   i  85

*(5) Why are carbon brushes used? How do these (ii) I t is caused if the insulating coating of a wire is
work? ( i     5) spoiltorlostoriffaultyelectricappliancesareused.
Ans. Brushesmakecontactwiththesplitringandare Effects of shortcircuiting:
responsibleforthemakeandbreakofthecircuit. (a) Duringashortcircuit,theresistanceofthecircuit
 Asthebrushesaremadeupofcarbontheyoffer becomes very small and hence huge amount of
lessresistance andact asa goodconductorand currentflowsthroughit.
arealsocheapertoreplace. (b) Thisproducesalargeamountofheatandraises
*(6) Iron is a conductor of electricity, but when we the temperature.As a result, the circuit catches
pick up a piece of iron resting on the ground, fireandcancausedamage.
why don’t we get electric shock? (    *(2) What is Solenoid ? Compare the magnetic field
  7) produced by a solenoid with the magnetic field
Ans. Inapieceofiron,thenetflowofelectronsiszero of a bar magnet. Draw neat figure and name
and hence current is zero. Hence we don’t get various components.
electric shock. If we want an electric current to Ans. Solenoid:
flowthroughit,thenweneedtoconnectittoa
(i) When a copper wire with a resistive coating is
sourceofpotentialdifferencei.e.cell.
wound in a chain of loops (like a spring) it is
(7) The material used for making fuse wire has low calledsolenoid.
melting point.
(ii) When an electric current is passed through a
Ans. solenoid,magneticfieldisproducedinit.
(i) T  hefusewireworksontheprincipleofheating (iii) Themagneticlinesofforcearesimilartothatof
effectofelectriccurrent.
thelinesofabarmagnet.
(ii) Thefuseismadeupofanalloywithlowmelting
(iv) Solenoidhasallpropertiesofthefieldproduced
point.
byabarmagnet.
(iii) Thiswirecanallowcertainmaximumcurrentto
flowthroughit.Ifcurrentexceedsthisvalue,the Magnetic
heatgeneratedinthecoilissufficienttomeltit. linesof
(iv) Duetothiselectriccurrentstopsflowingthrough force Solenoid
thecircuitandthevaluableelectricalappliances
can be saved from possible damage due to S N
excessiveelectriccurrent.
(v) Due to this, the material used for making fuse
wireshouldhavelowmeltingpoint.
Q.2.5. Answer the following:
(1) If lines of force passing through the coil are i  .  i i      i  
increased, will current be induced? Why?     i    i  i.
Ans. Yescurrentwillbeinduced.Asthelinesofforce
passingthroughthecoilareincreased,thereisa (v)  neendofthecoilactsasthesouthpole,while
O
change in intensity of magnetic field and thus, theotherendasthenorthpole.
currentisinducedintheconductor. Various components are:
(2) What is overloading? (a) Copperwirewith esistivecoating,
Ans. A flow of large amount of current in a circuit,  (b) Battery
beyond a permissible value of current, is called  (c) Plugkey
overloading. It occurs when many electrical
appliancesofhighpowerrating,suchasgeyser, *(3) Which device is used to produce electricity?
heater,ovenetc.,areswitchedonsimultaneously. Describe with a neat diagram.
Q.3.1. Explain the following: (a) Electric motor (b) Galvanometer
*(1) How does short circuit form? What is its effect? (c) Electric generator (DC) (d) Voltmeter
Ans. Shortcircuiting:
Ans. (c) Electric generator (DC) - The device which
(i) If a live wire (phase wire) and a neutral wire
convertsmechanicalenergyintoelectricalenergy
comeindirectcontactortoucheachother,short-
iscalledelectricgenerator.
circuitingtakesplace.
8 All About Electromagnetism Master Key Science and Technology Part-1
103(Std. X)

B C properly to
VABprevent leakage of current which
∴P=
can cause electric[∴W=V
shock.
t
Iron core
N S (ii) Rubber gloves made from insulated

A D
Armature coil ∴P=VABshould
materials
sole shoes.
[
be worn
I...........(i) ∴I=
along with rubber
t
 Now,H=P×t...........(ii)
(iii) During lightning, electric circuits should be
 Substituting(i)in(ii),
switched off.
B1 B2
Split ring (iv)
 To H=V
avoid overloading,
It many appliances
AB
should not be connected at the same point.
Axle ∴ H=I ×I× t
(v) Insulation of the wires should be checked
∴ H=I2Rt
regularly to avoid short circuit.
 Thisiscalled oulesLawofHeatingEffect.
Q.13. Read the following paragraph and
*(7) answer
In the the
above circuit, ifgiven
questions the resistor
below:is replaced
Fig. 5.6 D. C. Generator
i  .2   by a motor, in which form will the energy given
(i) Armature coil (ii) Strong magnets In our homes we receive supply of electric
For description refer Q. 4.2 1 (c) by the cell get transformed into? (   i 
power through a main supply, either
(iii) Split rings or commutator (iv) Brushes    7)
*(4) How do we decide that a given material is a supported through overhead electric poles
(v)good
Bulb.
conductor of electricity or is an insulator? Ans.orIntheabovecircuit,iftheresistorisreplacedby
by underground cables. One of the wires
( The components
 
such  as
7) armature coil, inamotor,thentheenergygivenbythecellwillget
this supply usually with red insulation
strong magnet, brushes are the same which
Ans. (a)Ifthecurrentpasseseasilythroughamaterial, transformedintomechanicalenergy.
cover is called live wire or positive.
are used for AC generators.
thatmeansithaslargenumberoffreeelectrons (8) Another
How will wire
you with black
increase the insulation
strength of is
magnetic
anditisagoodconductorofelectricity.
Split rings or commutator is the same as used called neutral wire
field in an electromagnet?(or negative). In our
 (b)in
If electric motor.
a material does not allow current to flow country, the potential difference between
Ans.the W
 ecanincreasethestrengthofmagneticfieldby
two is 220V.
throughit,thatmeansithaslessorpracticallyno
Working of DC generator : threeways:
freeelectrons.Hence,itisaninsulator. At the meter board in the house, these
(a) When the coil of DC generator rotates in the (i) Increasethemagnitudeofcurrentinthecircuit
wires pass into an electricity
*(5) How can wefield,
magnetic write potential
mechanical power inis a
difference (ii) meter
Increasethenumberofturnsofthecoil
through a main fuse. Through the
manner
produced in the coil. This gives rise to( the
similar to the electrical power? i 
(iii) main switch they are connected to the live
educetheradiusofthecoil.
i    8)
flow of current. This is shown by glowing of wires in the house. Often two separate
ElectricWork (9) Write a note on Galvanometer.
the bulb. circuits are used, one of 15A current rating
Ans. ElectricalPower= Time
(b) In D.C. generator, the flow of current in the Ans.for appliances with higher power rating
Energyconsumed (i) such as geysers, air coolers etc.The other
Agalvanometerisaninstrumentwhichisusedto
   circuit is in the=
same direction as long as the
coil rotates in the magnetic Timefield. circuit is of 5A current rating for bulbs, fans
detectthepresenceofelectriccurrentinacircuit.
Work etc. The earth wire, which has insulation
 (c)MechanicalPower=
This is because one Timebrush is always in (ii) Ifthecurrentinthecircuitiszero,thegalvanometer
of green colour is usually connected to a
contact with the arm of the armature moving willshowzeroornodeflection.
*(6) Derive oules Law with metal plate deep in the earth near the
up and other brush is the help ofwith
in contact a neat
thecircuit
arm (iii) house.
Thedeflectionisoneithersideofthezeromark
diagram. This is used as a safety measure,
of the armature moving downward in the dependinguponthedirectionofthecurrent.
especially for those appliances that have a
magnetic field. I (.) (10) metallic
What do body
you e.g.
mean electric press, toaster,
by earthing?
(4) Describe the safety + measures
A that you Ans. table fan etc. The metallic body is
would adopt whileVAB Vhandling electrical connected to the earth wire which provides
R (i) a M any electricalconducting
appliances path
havefor
metallic
+
appliances. – low resistance the body.
B If by chance insulation of the wire melts, the
+ handling of current.
Ans. The measures
– adopted for safe
A live wire may touch the metallic body of the
electrical appliances are given
– below : When insulation of wires is damaged or
appliance.Ifwetouchthisbodywithbarehands,
there is fault in the appliances, the neutral
(i) The electrical appliances should be earthed wemayreceivesevereelectricshock.
i  .3 (ii)  o avoid such accidents, metal casings of all
T
Work electricalappliancesmustbeearthed.Oneendof
Ans. Power= Time
thecopperwireisconnectedtothemetalcaseof
theapplianceandtheotherendisconnectedto
   i  87

thecopperplatewhichisburrieddeepinsidethe (2) State the rule you will use:

earth. (a) To find the direction of the motion of a conductor,
(iii) T
 hissystemofconnectingthemetalcasingofan if direction of the current and magnetic field are
electrical appliance with a copper plate burried known to you.
deepinsidetheearthiscalledasearthing. (b) To find the direction of the induced current,
if the direction of motion of conductor and
(11) State the factors on which the strength of the
magnetic field are known to you.
magnetic field of a circular loop depends?
Ans. Ans.
(a) If the direction of current and directions of
(i) Currentflowingthroughtheloop
magnetic field is known, then we will use
(ii) Numberofturnsintheloop Fleming’sLeftHand uletoknowthedirection
(iii) adiusoftheloop ofmotionoftheconductor.
Q.3.2. Open Ended Questions (b) If the direction of motion and magnetic field is
knownwewilluseFleming’s ightHand uleto
(1) Which of the statement given below correctly
knowthedirectionoftheinducedcurrent.
describes
*(i) The magnetic field near a long, straight current Q.3.3. Figure/Application Based Questions
carrying conductor? *(1) Identify the figure and explain the uses of
following:
(a) The magnetic lines of force are in a plane
perpendicular to the conductor in the form of (a)
straightlines.
(b) The magnetic lines of force are parallel to the
conductoronallthesidesofaconductor.
(c) Themagneticlinesofforceareperpendicularto i  .
Ans.
theconductorgoingradiallyoutward.
(i) CartridgeFuse
(d) The magnetic lines of force are in concentric
(ii) Fuse is a device which protects the appliances
circles with the wire at the centre, in a plane
fromexcesscurrent.
perpendiculartotheconductor.
(b)
Ans: Thecorrectstatementis,(d)Themagneticlinesof
forceareinconcentriccircleswiththewireasthe
centre,inaplaneperpendiculartotheconductor.
*(ii) Electromagnetic induction
(a) Chargingofanelectricconductor.
(b) Production of Magnetic field due to a current i  .5
Ans.
flowingthroughthecoil.
(i) Miniaturecircuitbreaker(MCB)
(c) Generation of a current in a coil due to relative
(ii) When the current in the circuit suddenly
motionbetweenthecoilandthemagnet.
increases,thisswitchopensandcurrentstops.
(d) Motion of coil around the axle in an electric
(c)
motor.
Ans. The correct statement is (c), Generation of a
currentinacoilduetorelativemotionbetween
thecoilandthemagnet.
 Theprocessbywhichachangingmagneticfield
in a conductor induces a current in another
conductoriscalledelectromagneticinduction.
 This was first studied by the scientist Michael A

Faraday. i  .
88 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

Ans. Ans.
(i) DC generator (i) ightHandThumb ule
(ii) It is used to generate direct current. (ii) T  his rule is used to find out the direction of the
magnetic field produced by current flowing
(2) Name the following diagrams and explain the
through an electrical conductor.
concept behind them.
(iii) Imaginethatyouhaveheldtheconductorinyour
*(a)
righthandinsuchawaythatyourthumbpoints
in the direction of the current. Then turn your
fingersaroundtheconductor,thedirectionofthe
fingers is the direction of the magnetic lines of
force.
Ans. Fig 4.7 (3) Answer the following based on the graph given
(i) Fleming’s right hand rule below.
(ii)  his rule is used to find the direction of the
T 2
Direct current (DC)
induced current. 1.5 Alternating current (AC)
(iii) S
 tretchthethumb,theindexfingerandthemiddle 1

Current Ampere
fingeroftherighthandinsuchawaythatthey 0.5
are perpendicular to each other. In this position, 0
the thumb indicates the direction of motion of
–0.5
the conductor, the index finger indicates the
direction of the magnetic field, and the middle –1
fingershowsthedirectionoftheinducedcurrent. –1.5
ThisruleisknownasFleming’srighthandrule. –2
0
1 1.5 0.5 2
*(b) time (s)
Fig 4.10
(i) After how many seconds does AC change its
direction?
Ans: 0.5 sec
(ii) What is the maximum value of AC?
Ans. Fig 4.8
Ans: 1A
(i) Fleming’slefthand ule.
(iii) What is the maximum value of DC?
(ii)  hisruleisusedtofindthedirectionoftheforce
T Ans: 1A
on the conductor.
(iv) What is the time interval for 1 cycle of AC?
(iii) A
 ccordingtothisrule,thelefthandthumb,index Ans: 1 sec
finger, and the middle finger are stretched such
(v) What is the frequency of AC and DC?
that they are perpendicular to each other. If the
index finger is in the direction of the magnetic 1
Ans: f= ∴AC=1HzandDC=0Hz
field,andthemiddlefingerpointsinthedirection T
ofthecurrent,thenthedirectionofthethumbis (4) Answer the following based on the diagram
thedirectionoftheforceontheconductor. given below.
(c) Coil Solenoid coil

Galvanometer Battery
Fig 4.9 Fig 4.11
   i  89

(i) What change do we observe in the Galvanometer (i) What is the direction of the force experienced by
when the current in the Solenoid coil is the conductor when the current is downward?
switched off? Ans. W
 hen the current is downward, the force
Ans. I f we open the plugkey and turn the current to experiencedbytheconductorwillbeoutward.
zerointhecoil,thepointeroftheGalvanometer (ii) If the conductor experiences force inwards, then
deflectstoasideandquicklycomesbacktozero. what would be the direction of current?
If the current in the coil is started again, the Ans. I ftheconductorexperiencesforceinwards,then
pointeragaindeflectstotheothersideandthen thedirectionofcurrentwouldbeupward.
returnsquicklytozero. (iii) Which rule helps us to find the force experienced
(ii) What change do we observe in the galvanometer by a current carrying conductor in the above
when a current is passing through the solenoid diagram?
coil and the coil is displaced laterally with Ans. Fleming’sLeftHand ule.
respect to the coil?
(6) Answer the following based on the diagram
Ans. I fthecoilisdisplacedlaterally,thencurrentwill given below.
beinducedinthecoilandtheGalvanometerwill
Solenoid
showadeflection.
(iii) What change do we observe in the galvanometer
if the displacement of the Solenoid is faster?
Ans. T
 he faster is the displacement of the solenoid,
larger is the deflection of the Galvanometer (i) Complete the diagram of magnetic lines of force
pointer. passing through a solenoid.
(iv) What change do we observe in the galvanometer Magnetic
if the current in the Solenoid coil is increased? linesof
Ans. I f the current is increased, the strength of the force Solenoid
magneticfieldincreasesandthedeflectioninthe
galvanometeralsoincreases. S N
(v) Name and state the law responsible for the
above phenomena.
Ans. F
 araday’s law of induction: Whenever the
number of magnetic lines of force passing
through the coil changes, current is induced
(ii) Define : Solenoid
in the coil. The current produced in the coil is
calledtheinducedcurrent. Ans. W
 hen a copper wire with a resistive coating is
wound in a chain of loops (like a spring) it is
(5) Answer the following based on the diagram
calledsolenoid.
given below.
(iii) What is the nature of the magnetic field inside
the solenoid?
Ans. Themagneticlinesofforceinsideasolenoidare
I I
paralleltoeachother.
Stand S (7) Answer the following based on the diagram
H given below.
N Magneticlines Conductorloop
A N

C Copperwire
B
Magnet S

Cardboard

A
A
i  . 2
90 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

(i) Which rule helps to find the direction of

magnetic field? B C
Ans. Right Hand Thumb Rule.
N S
(ii) State any 2 factors on which the strength of
magnetic field, for a circular loop depends? A D
Split rings (X and Y) X Y Carbon
Ans. Thestrengthofthemagneticfield,foracircular
loop,dependsonthecurrentflowingthroughthe E brushes
F
(E and F)
wireandthenumberofturns.
Axle
Q.4.1. Draw a neat and labelled diagram: K
(1) Circuit for Direct Current
Ans. (DC) Fig 4.15: Electric Motor

I Construction:
(i) Armature coil: ectangularloopofcopperwire
having resistive coating.
(ii) Strong Magnet:Armaturecoilisplacedbetween
the north pole and south pole of the magnet (such
I as horse shoe magnet).
Fig 4.13 (iii) Split ring:Thetwohalvesofthering(XandY)
have a resistive coating on the inner side and
(2) Circuit for Alternating Current conducting surface on the outer side.
Ans. (AC) (iv) Carbon Brushes: Twostationarycarbonbrushes
I (E and F) are connected to the outer side of the
split ring.
(v) Battery: Thebatterysuppliestheelectriccurrent
to the armature coil.
Working:
I
(i) Whenthecircuitiscompleted,thecurrentflows
Fig 4.14 in the branch AB of the loop from A to B through
(3) DC generator the carbon brushes E and F.
Ans. Fordiagramreferfig4.2. (ii)  ince the direction of the magnetic field is
S
(4) Magnetic lines of force through a Solenoid from north pole to south pole, according to the
Ans. Fordiagramreferfig4.1. Fleming’slefthandrule,aforceisexertedonthe
branch AB in downward direction and CD in
Q.4.2. Answer in brief upwarddirection.
(1) Explain the construction and working of the (iii) T
 hus, the loop and the axle start rotating in an
following. Draw a neat diagram and label it. anticlockwisedirection.
*(a) Electric Motor (iv) A
 fter half rotation, the current in a loop starts
Ans. A
  device which converts electrical energy into flowinginthedirectionDCBA.
mechanicalenergyiscalledelectricmotor. (v)  herefore, a force is exerted on the branch CD
T
Principle of working: indownwarddirectionandonthebranchABin
 Electric motor works on the principle that a theupwarddirection,andtheloopcontinuesto
currentcarryingconductorplacedinamagnetic rotateintheanticlockwisedirection.
fieldexperiencesaforce. (vi) T
 hus,thecurrentintheloopisreversedaftereach
halfrotationandtheloopandtheaxlecontinue
torotateintheanticlockwisedirection.
   i  9

*(b) AC Generator: (iii) C

 urrentflowsfromB2toB1inthefirsthalfofthe
Magneticfield revolutionintheexternalcircuit.
(iv) A
 fterhalfrevolution,armsABandCDexchange
B coil C theirpositions.Duetothis,theinducedcurrent
N S
flows in the direction DCBA. But, armAB is in
A D contactwithB1,throughslipringandarmCDis
B1 R1 incontactwithB2.
Carbon
Conducting (v) I n the second half cycle, in the external circuit,
B2 brushes
ring R2 electriccurrentflowsfromB1toB2,i.e.opposite
totheprevioushalfrotation.
Axle
(vi) T
 his repeats after every half rotation, and
alternatingcurrentisproduced.
(c) DC Generator:
i  .  i  (For diagram, refer fig 4.2)
Ans: A
  generator which converts mechanical energy Ans. T
 hedevicethatconvertsmechanicalenergyinto
into electrical energy in the form of alternating theelectricalenergyintheformofdirectcurrent
currentiscalledACGenerator. iscalledDCgenerator.
Principle of working: Principle of working:
(i)  lectric generators works on the principle of
E (i)  C generator works on the principle of
D
electromagneticinduction. electromagneticinduction.
Construction: Construction:
(i) Armature coil: ectangularloopofcopperwire (i) Armature coil: ectangularloopofcopperwire
havingresistivecoating. havingresistivecoating.
(ii) Strong Magnet:Armaturecoilisplacedbetween (ii) Strong Magnet:Armaturecoilisplacedbetween
thenorthpoleandsouthpoleofthemagnet(such thenorthpoleandsouthpoleofmagnet(suchas
ashorseshoemagnet). horseshoemagnet).
(iii) Slip rings:Theendsofthearmatureareconnected (iii) Split ring:Thetwohalvesofthering(XandY)
toconductingrings 1and 2 whicharefixedto have a resistive coating on the inner side and
theaxlewiththeresistivecoatinginbetweenthe conductingsurfaceontheouterside.
ringandtheaxle.
(iv) Carbon Brushes: Twostationarycarbonbrushes
(iv) Carbon Brushes:Thestationarycarbonbrushes
(E and F) are connected to the outer side of the
B1andB2areconnectedtoagalvanometer.
splitring.
(v) Galvanometer:Itdetectsthepresenceofcurrent
(v) Electric bulb or Ammeter :
inthecircuit.
 (a)The output is shown by the glowing bulb
Working:
connectedacrossthecarbonbrushes.
(i)  hen the armature coil ABCD is rotated by
W
 (b)Ammeterisconnectedinthecircuittodetect
external force in the magnetic field provided
by strong magnets, it cuts the magnetic lines of thepresenceofelectriccurrentinthecircuit.
forces.Thus,thechangingmagneticfieldinduces Working:
currentinthecoil. (i)  hen the coil of DC generator rotates in the
W
(ii) After rotation of axle, armAB moves upwards, Magnetic field, potential difference is produced
while arm CD moves downwards. Therefore, inthecoil.
ABCD rotates in the clockwise direction. (ii)  s the coil rotates in the magnetic field, the
A
As per the Fleming’s right hand rule, the potential difference produces induced current
current is induced in the Coil and flows from accordingtoFleming’srighthandrule.
A  B and C  D. Current flows in the
(iii) T
 hepresenceofcurrentcanbedetectedeitherby
directionABCD.
electricbulborgalvanometer.
92 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

(iv) I n DC generator, the flow of current in the (ii) Which effects of electric current do you
externalcircuitisinonedirectionaslongasthe find? (   i     7)
coilrotatesinthemagneticfield.Thisisbecause
one brush is always in contact with the arm
movingupandotherbrushisincontactwiththe
armmovingdownwardinthemagneticfield.
(v) Thus,thisgeneratoriscalledDCgenerator.
Q.4.3. Paragraph Based Question
(a)
(1) ead the paragraph and answer the following
question.
Galvanometer is a sensitive device which
works on the same principle as that of an
electric motor that we have studied earlier.
We can make some electrical measurements
withit.Acoilispositionedbetweenthepole (b) (c)
pieces of a magnet in such a way that the i  . 7
pointeronthegalvanometerdialisconnected Ans.
All About Electromagnetism
toit.Whenasmallcurrent(forexample1mA) (i) I n the above pictures, we observe different
flowsthroughthecoil,thecoilwillrotate.The householdappliances,whichworkonelectricity.
ACTIVITY : 5.2 ACTIV
rotation will be proportional to the current. (ii) In the picture (a), The electric heater and the 2
(2) lamps
Takework
two on
coils of about (3) D
Voltmeter and Ammeter also work on the heating effect50 turns. Insert
of electric current
same principle. In galvanometer, the pointer them
and over a(b)
in picture non-conducting
and (c), the fancylindrical
and the bell fo
deflects on both the sides of the zero mark roll, as shown in the following
workonmagneticeffectofelectriccurrent. figure (i) D
dependingonthedirectionofthecurrent. (2) (thick
Take twopaper
coils roll can be50
of about used). Connect
turns. Insert coil
them
(i) State the principle on which Galvanometer over
1 to aa battery
non conducting
with a plugcylindrical
key. Connect roll,
coilas Earth

works. shown
2 to in the following figure
a galvanometer. Plug(thick paper
the key androll Wire

Live
canobserve
be used). Connect coil 1 to a battery
the deflection in the galvanometer. with Wire
Ans. Itworksontheprinciplethatacurrentcarrying a plug key. Connect coil 2 to a galvanometer. Neutral
Wire
conductorplacedinamagneticfieldexperiences Unplug the key and again observe the
Plug the key and observe the deflection in B

aforce. deflection. (HOTS)

the galvanometer. Unplug the key and again
(ii) State the relation between the strength of the observe the deflection. (HOTS)
current and the deflection of Galvanometer? Coil 1 Coil 2
Ans. As the strength of the current increases, the (ii) M
deflectionofgalvanometeralsoincreases.
(iii) Name any three devices working on the same
_
+

principle as Galvanometer. ( ) G
Key, K
Ans. Electricmotor,VoltmeterandAmmeter. i  . 8
Fig. 5.8
(iv) When the current in the Galvanometer is (i) What do you observe when you switch on the
switched on and later switched off, how will the current in coil 1, i.e. when you connect coil 1 to
(i) theWhat do you observe when you switch on
battery?
deflection in the Galvanometer change?
the current in coil 1, i.e. when you connect
Ans: Whencoil1isconnectedtothebattery,weobserve
Ans. T
 hegalvanometerwilldeflectononesideofthe
coil 1 to the battery?
deflectioninthegalvanometerconnectedtocoil2.
zeromarkwhenthecurrentisswitchedonandon
theoppositesize,whenthecurrentisswitchedoff. (ii) (ii)What
Whatdodoyou
youobserve
observewhen
whencurrent
currentin
in coil
coil 1 (iii) El
reaches a steady
1 reaches valuevalue
a steady or ero?
or zero?
Q.4.4. Activity Based Question. Ans. R
Ans: Whenthecurrentincoil1reachesasteadyvalue
*(1) (i) What do you observe in the following (iii) Why is current induced in coil 2 when we (iv) A
or becomes zero, there is no deflection in the
pictures? connect coil 1 to a battery? Ans. R
galvanometer.
Ans.
(v) D
(i) When coil 1 is connected to the battery, we Ans. R
(iii) Electric motor
Ans. Refer
  Fig.
i  5.6 93

(iv)(iii)ACWhy
generator
is current: induced in coil 2 when we (i) Observe the pattern of iron filings.
connect coil 1 to a battery? Ans: The iron filings which are sprinkled get
Ans. Refer Fig. 5.7
Ans: magnetizedandontappingthecardboardsheet,
(v) (i) DCWhen we connect
generator : the coil to a battery, current they arrange themselves in concentric circles
starts flowing, hence there is change in the
aroundthewire.
Ans. Refer Fig. 5.8
magneticfield.
(ii) This change in magnetic field induces a current (ii) What changes are seen in the magnetic field
incoil2.
ACTIVITY : 5.4 lines when the current is increased?
(iii) The process by which changing magnetic field Ans: When current is increased the magnetic field
inducesacurrentinanotherconductor,iscalled
(4) Place the white paper on the drawing board linesareformedmorecloserandmoredistinctly
electromagneticinduction.
(3)and place a barpaper
magneton thein the middle of the indicatingthattheintensityofthemagneticfield
Place the white drawing board and
increases.
paper.
place Sprinkle
a bar magnetsome
in the iron
middlefilings on it
of the paper.
Sprinkle some iron filings on it (iii) What happens to the magnetic needle of the
compass when the compass is brought near
the wire, and moved away from the wire? Also
observe what happens to the magnetic needle
when strength of current is increased.
N S
Ans:
(i) Themagneticneedleinthecompassdeflectsmore
when we moved towards the wire and it starts
deflecting less when we move it away from the
i  5.11
Fig. . 9 wire.
(i) Tap the board gently, what do you observe? (ii) Similarly, on increasing the strength of the
Ans: Theironfilingsarrangethemselvesintheformof current, it is observed that the magnetic needle
concentriccircle,whichindicatesthedirectionof deflectsmore.
magneticfieldofabarmagnet. (iii) Thisindicatesthatthestrengthofmagneticfield
(ii) Why do the iron filings arrange themselves in a increaseswithincreaseinstrengthofthecurrent.
pattern as shown in the figure above?
(iv) What happens to the magnetic needle of the
Ans: The magnetic field of the bar magnet influence
compass when direction of the current is
theironfilingsduetowhichtheybehaveliketiny
magnets and hence align themselves along the reversed in the straight conductor? State the
directionofmagneticlines. reasons for your observation.
(4) Take a battery, (12V) a variable resistance (or a Ans:
rheostat), an ammeter (0.5 A), a plug key, needle (i) Thedirectioninwhichthemagneticneedlegets
and a long straight thick copper wire. Take a deflectedchanges,whendirectionofthecurrent
rectangular cardboard, pass this wire through
isreversed.
center. Fix the cardboard and see that it does
not slide up or down. Sprinkle iron filings (ii) Thisshowsthatifdirectionofcurrentisreversed,
uniformly on the cardboard. Close the key and the direction of magnetic field lines is also
tap the cardboard gently. reversed.
R (6) Take a rectangular cardboard with two holes.
Take a coil of large numbers of turns. Insert the
Cardboard
Thickcopperwire coil through the holes such that the turns are
normal to the plane of the cardboard. Connect
two ends of the coil in series with battery, a key
and a rheostat as shown in figure. Sprinkle iron
K filings uniformly on the cardboard. Plug the key,
Magneticneedle tap the cardboard gently. Note your observations.

i  .2
 when we move away from the loop the
108 Master Key Science & Technology (Std. X)
concentric circles representing magnetic
field lines become bigger and bigger. At the
tap the cardboard gently. Note your (10) Take three ring shaped magnets, insulated
9 centre of
Master theScience
Key circular loop
and the magnetic
Technology Part-1field
(Std. X)
observations. copper wire (1.5m)
lines are straight. battery and paper clips.
(7) (9)
StateCut
State
whattheiswire
what the into
isthe three
direction
direction pieces.
ofofthe One piece
magnetic
the magnetic oppo
field
fieldshould lines
lines with with respect
respect1m to
to long each
each other other
in in
every and p
be about and the other two
B every segment of the loop and the
segment of the loop and the centre of the loop.centre three
0.25m
of the longWhere
loop. each. Take 1m piecefieldof wire and
Where is the magneticisfield
the magnetic
strongest? ( efer abov

A
the strongest?
wrap this(Refer
following wirethe
figure). following
around twofigure).
fingers to form Take
a coil. Take the loose end of this wire and them
( )
wrap it once along the diameter of the coil. 5.17.
- + K (i) What
The two arms of the coil should be directly
Fig.
i  5.15
.22 Ans. On gi
N S
Ans: curre
Ans. Observation:Ontappingthecardboard,theiron
(i) Observation: On tapping the cardboard, the rotati
filingsalignthemselvesinconcentriccirclesnear
iron filings align themselves in circles near (ii) What
thecurrentcarryingloop.
the current carrying loop. Thus it can be seen
Fig. curre
(ii) Thus,itcanbeseenthatthemagneticfieldlines i  5.16
.23
Coil
that the magnetic field lines are circular near Ans: Ans. On p
arecircularnearthecurrentcarryingloop.
the current carrying loop. It is observed that (i) Ans.
It can
It can
Paper clip
be seen thatthat
be seen eacheach
segment of the
segment of circular
the deve
(iii) It is observed that when we move away from
when loop carrying current
Ring produces
currentmagnetic
producesfield
loopwethemove away from the loopthe
the circular loop carryingmagnets
the concentric circles representing field
linesinthesamedirectionwithintheloop.
magnetic field lines in the same direction
concentric circles representing magnetic
magneticfieldlinesbecomebiggerandbigger. Cell exert
(ii) Atthecentreofthecircularloopallthemagnetic
within the loop. At the centre of the circular
field
(iv) At thelines become
centre bigger loop,
of the circular and bigger. At the
the magnetic fieldlinesareinthesamedirection,duetowhich rotat
loop all the magnetic field lines are in the
fieldlinesarestraight.
centre of the circular loop the magnetic field Fig. 5.17
thestrengthofmagneticfieldincreasesanditis
same direction, due to which the strength of
lines are straight. thestrongest.
magnetic field increases and it is the
strongest.
opposite each other. Bend the paper clip
(9) vvv
State what is the direction of the magnetic
field lines with respect to each other in and prepare a holder for the coil. Pile the
every segment of the loop and the centre three magnets on the table. Place the coil
of the loop. Where is the magnetic field above the magnet on the paper clip holder.
strongest? (Refer the following figure). Take free ends of the wire and connect
them to the battery as shown in the figure
5.17. Give a single spin to the coil.
(i) What do you observe?
Ans. On giving a spin to the coil which is carrying
N S
current we observe that the coil starts
rotating till the current is being passed.

(ii) What makes the coil rotate on passing the

Fig. 5.16 current?
Ans. On passing the current the magnetic field
Ans. It can be seen that each segment of the develops around the loop. The magnetic
circular loop carrying current produces field of the three magnets placed below
magnetic field lines in the same direction exerts a force on the coil due to which it starts
within the loop. At the centre of the circular
rotating.
loop all the magnetic field lines are in the
same direction, due to which the strength of
magnetic field increases and it is the
strongest.
   i  95

ASSIGNMENT - 4
Time : 1 Hr. Marks : 20

Q.1. (A) Fill in the blanks: (3)

 (1) Theelectricbulbconsistsofafilamentmadeupof .
 (2) Intheelectricbill,theelectricityusageisexpressedin .
 (3) Whenalivewireandaneutralwirecomeincontact, takesplace.
Q.1. (B) Choose and write the correct option: (2)
 (1) Thedevicewhichconvertsmechanicalenergyintoelectricalenergyiscalled
(a) Electriccharge (b) Electricgenerator (c) Electricfuse (d) Electricmotor
 (2) Thedeflectionofthepointerof isoneithersideofzeromark.
(a) Voltmeter (b) Ammeter (c) Galvanometer (d) Thermometer
Q.2. Answer the following: (Any 2) (4)
 (1) Acellisconnectedtoa9ohmresistance,becauseofwhichheatof400 isproducedperseconddue
tocurrentflowingthroughit.Obtainthepotentialdifferenceappliedacrosstheresistance.
 (2) Distinguishbetween:DirectcurrentandAlternatingcurrent
 (3) StateMaxwell’scork-screwrule.
Q.3. Answer the following: (Any 2) (6)
 (1) Namethefollowingdiagramsandexplaintheconceptbehindthem.
(a) (b)

 (2)  nelectricalironusesapowerof1100Wwhensettohighertemperature.Ifsettolowertemperature,
A
ituses330Wpower.Findouttheelectriccurrentandtherespectiveresistanceof220V.
 (3)  nelectrictungstenbulbisconnectedintoahomecircuit.Thehomeelectricsupplyrunsat220V
A
potentialdifference.Whenswitchedon,acurrentof0.45Aflowsthroughthebulb.Whatmustbepower
(wattage)ofthebulb?Ifitiskeptonfor10hours,howmanyunitsofelectricitywillbeconsumed?.
Q.4. Answer the following: (Any 1) (5)
 (1) ExplaintheconstructionandworkingofElectricMotor.Drawaneatlabelleddiagram.
 (2) Derive oulesLawwiththehelpofaneatcircuitdiagram.
vvv
 5 Heat

Points to Remember:
zz Heat is one of the forms of energy and can be obtained by transforming any other form of energy.
zz Temperature is the degree of hotness or coldness; it is measured with the help of thermometer.
zz Heat is one of the important factors on which the change of state depends.
zz Generally substances expand on heating and contract on cooling.
zz During change of the state of a substance, heat may be gained or lost but there is no change in temperature.
zz The constant temperature at which substance changes from solid state to liquid state is called melting point
of that solid.
zz The constant temperature at which substance changes from liquid state to gaseous state is called as boiling
point of the liquid.
zz Latent heat: The amount of heat energy either absorbed or released during change of state is called ‘Latent
Heat’. Latent heat is not recorded on the thermometer in the form of rise or fall in temperature.
zz Specific latent heat of fusion: The amount of heat energy absorbed at constant temperature by unit mass of a
solidtoconvertintoliquidphaseiscalledthespecificlatentheatoffusion.
zz Latent heat of vapourization: The amount of heat energy absorbed at constant temperature during
transformation of liquid into gas is called Latent heat of vapourization.
zz Specific latent heat of vapouri ation: The amount of heat energy absorbed at constant temperature by unit
massofaliquidtoconvertintogaseousphaseiscalledspecificlatentheatofvapourization.
zz Differentsubstanceshavedifferentmeltingpointsandboilingpoints.Thevaluesofmeltingpoint,boiling
point and latent heat depend on atmospheric pressure.
zz The phenomenon in which ice converts to liquid due to applied pressure and then re-converts into ice, once
the pressure is removed is called regelation.
zz The behaviour of water between its temperature from 0°C to 4°C is called anomalous behaviour of water.
zz At 4°C, the volume of water is minimum, hence its density is maximum.
zz Effectsofanomalousbehaviourofwaterinnature:
z - Survival of aquatic plants and animals.
z -z Cracking of rocks in winter.
z -z Pipelines carring water may burst in cold region during winter.
zz Atmosphere contains water vapour. The amount of moisture in air due to the presence of water vapour in it
is called 'humidity'.
zz The temperature at which air becomes saturated with water vapour is called 'dew point'.
zz The mass of water vapour per unit volume of air is called absolute humidity. It is measured in kg/ m3.
zz The ratio of the mass of water vapour in a given volume of air at given temperature to the mass of water
vapour required to saturate the same volume of air at the same temperature is called relative humidity.
zz At dew point, relative humidity is 100%. If the relative humidity is greater than 60%, the air is called 'humid'
(moist) and if the relative humidity is less than 60%, the air is 'dry'.
zz In SI system, heat is measured in joule (J) and in CGS system, it is measured in calorie (cal).
zz The amount of heat required to raise the temperature of 1 g of water by 1°C (from 14.5°C to 15.5°C) is called
one calorie of heat.

(96)
Heat 97

zz The amount of heat required to raise the temperature of 1 kg of water by 1°C (from 14.5°C to 15.5°C) is called
one kilocalorie of heat.
zz The amount of heat required to raise the temperature of unit mass of substance through 1°C is called the
specific heat capacity of a substance.
zz Specificheatcapacityisdenotedbyletter,‘c’. Its SI unit is J/g°C and its CGS unit is cal/ g°C.
zz Specific heat capacity can be measured by mixing method.
zz Ifthesystemofboththeobjectsisisolatedfromtheenvironment:
- Heat lost by hot object = Heat gained by cold object
zz Heat Q = mL(m mass,L latentheat):(changeofstate)
zz Heat Q mc t(m mass,c specificheatcapacity, t changeintemperature):(changeoftemperature)
zz Heat lost by hot object = heat gained by calorimeter + Heat gained by water

(20) CGSunitofspecificheatcapacityis .
MASTER KEY QUESTION SET - 5
*(21) If objects of equal masses are given equal heat,
Q.1. (A) 1. Fill in the blanks: their final temperature will be different, this is
(1) Temperature is a degree of of a substance. duetodifferenceintheir .
(2) The melting point of ice is °C. (22) Heat lost by hot object = .
*(3) During transformation of liquid phase to solid (23) The specific heat capacity of a substance can be
phase, the latent heat is . measured by method.
Ans. (1) hotness or coldness (2) 0 (zero) (3) given out
(4) The quantity of heat absorbed by liquid at constant
(released) (4) Latent heat of vaporisation (5) lost
temperature to convert into gas is .
(6) Regelation (7) 4 (8) dew point (9) kg/m3
(5) When substance is converted from liquid to solid (10) Humidity (11) Absolute humidity (12) 100%
state, the heat energy is . (13) humid (14) less than (15) joules (J) (16) calorie
(6) Melting of ice due to applied pressure, getting ( 7) . 8 ( 8)  ( 9) i   i
converted back into ice after the pressure is (20) cal/g0  (2 ) i   i i  (22) 
removed is called . gained by cold object (23) Mixing.
(7) The density of water is maximum at °C. Q.1. (A) 2. Complete the analogy:
(8) The temperature at which the air gets saturated (1) Boilingpointofwater:100°C::Meltingpointof
with water vapour is called ice:
temperature. Ans. 0°C - Ice melts at 0°C
(9) Absolute humidity is measured in .
(2) Latent heat of fusion of ice : 80 cal/g :: Steam :
(10) The presence of water vapour in the atmosphere
is called . Ans. 540 cal/g - Latent heat of fusion of steam is 540
*(11) The amount of water vapour in air is determined cal/g
in terms of its .
(3) CGS unit of heat : calorie :: CGS unit of heat
(12) At dew point, the relative humidity is . capacity:
(13) If the relative humidity is more than 60%, then Ans. cal/g°C-Heatcapacityofsubstanceismeasured
the air is . per gram of the substance per degree, increase in
(14) If the relative humidity is 60%, then temperature
the air is dry. (4) Water:1cal/g°C::Kerosene:
(15) In SI system, heat is measured in . Ans. 0.1cal/g°C-ThespecificheatofKaroseneis0.52
(16) In CGS, heat is measured in . cal/g°C.
(17) 1 calorie = joule. (5) Dryair:lessthan60% elativehumidity::Humid
(18) SIunitofspecificheatcapacityis . air:
(19) The heat energy required to raise the temperature Ans. More than 60% elative humidity - When the
of unit mass of a substance through 1°C is called relative humidity is more than 60%, we feel that
of the substance. the air is humid.
98 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

Q.1 (A) 3. Answer in one sentence. mass of water vapour required to saturate the
(1) What is melting point of a solid? same volume of air at the same temperature is
called relative humidity.
Ans. The constant temperature at which a solid
converts to liquid is called melting point. (13) Write the formula of percentage relative humidity.
(2) What do you mean by latent heat of fusion? Ans. % relative humidity
Ans. The amount of heat energy absorbed at constant Actual mass of water vapour
temperature during transformation of solid into in the air in a given volume
= × 100
liquid is called latent heat of fusion. Mass of water vapour
required to saturate the same
(3) Defineboilingpointofliquid.
volume at same temperature.
Ans. The constant temperature at which a liquid
(14) What is kilocalorie?
transforms into gaseous state, is called boiling
point of that substance. Ans. The amount of heat energy required to raise the
temperature of 1 kg of water by 1°C, i.e. 14.5°C to
(4) What do you mean by Latent heat of vapourization?
15.5°C is called kilocalorie.
Ans. The heat energy absorbed at constant temperature
(15) What is calorie?
during transformation of liquid into gas is called
Latent heat of vapourization. Ans. The amount of heat energy required to raise the
temperature of 1 g of water by 1°C, i.e. 14.5°C to
*(5) Whatarethedifferentwaysofheattransfer?
15.5°C is called calorie.
Ans. T
 hree different ways of heat transfer are
(16) Write the units of heat in CGS and SI systems.
Conduction,Convectionand adiation.
Ans. In CGS system, heat is measured in calorie and in
*(6) Is the concept of latent heat applicable during
MKS,isjoule( ).
transformation of gaseous phase to liquid phase
and from liquid phase to solid phase? (Use your (17) Whatisspecificheatcapacity?
Brain Power! Textbook page no. 63) Ans. The amount of heat energy required to raise the
Ans. Yes, the concept of Latent heat is applicable in temperature of a unit mass of a substance by 1°C
both the cases. The heat energy will be evolved iscalledspecificheatcapacity.
from the substance. (18) Whataretheunitsofspecificheatcapacity?
*(7) Where does the latent heat go during these Ans. T
 he units of specific heat capacity, in CGS is
transformation? (Use your Brain Power! Textbook cal/g°CandinSI,itis /kg°C.
page no. 63) (19) How does heat get transfered?
Ans. The latent heat is used for the transformation of Ans. Heat always gets transferred from a hot body
state and is released into the atmosphere. to the cold body till the temperature of both the
(8) How anomalous behaviour of water can be bodies becomes equal.
experimented in the laboratory? (20) What is the principle of heat exchange?
Ans. Anomalous behaviour of water can be experimented Ans. The principle of heat exchange is, when a hot
by using Hope's apparatus. object is kept in contact with a cold object then,
(9) What do you understand by the term 'Humidity'? Heat lost by hot object = Heat gained by cold object.
Ans. The moisture of air due to the presence of water [Isolated from the environment]
vapour in it is called Humidity. Q.1. (A) 4. Match the columns:
(10) What is dew point temperature? (1) Column A Column B
Ans. The temperature at which the air gets saturated
(1) Melting point of ice (a) 100°C
with water vapour is called dew point temperature.
(2) Boiling point of water (b) 540cal/g
(11) What is absolute humidity?
Ans. The mass of water vapour in a unit volume of air (3) SpecificLatentheatof (c) 80cal/g
is called absolute humidity. vaporisation of water
(12) What is relative humidity? (4) SpecificLatentheatof (d) 0°C
Ans. The ratio of actual mass of water vapour in a fusion of ice
given volume of air at a given temperature to the Ans. (1 – d), (2 – a), (3 – b), (4 – c)
Heat 99

relative humidity is 100% (11) True (12) False.

(2) Column A Column B
In CGS, heat is measured in calorie. (13) False.
(1) Humidity (a) Mass of water vapour    . 8 .( ) . i  i   
(2) Absolute (b) Moistness or dampness  .( 5) ( ) . i   i i 
humidity in air CGS is measured in cal/g°C (17) False. Calorimeter is
   i   i .( 8)
(3) elative (c) Proportion of vapour
humidity content of air Q.1 (B) Choose and write the correct option:
(1) Thespecificheatcapacityof is maximum.
Ans. (1 – b), (2 – a), (3 – c)
(a) Mercury (b) Copper
(3) Column A Column B (c) Water (d) Iron
(1) Heat (a) cal/g°C (2) If temperature of water increases from 1°C to
(2) Specificheatcapacity (b) kg/m3 3°C, the density of water .
(a) remains the same (b) decreases
(3) Absolute humidity (c) calorie
(c) increases (d) fluctuates
Ans. (1 – c), (2 – a), (3 – b) (3) Aquatic plants and animals can survive in cold
Q.1 (A) 5. State whether following statement are region because of .
True or False. If false; rectify the statement. (a) humidity
(1) Differentsubstanceshavedifferentmeltingpoints. (b) dew point
(2)  ifferent substances have same specific heat
D (c) heat capacity
capacities. (d) Anomalous behaviour of water
(3) At 4°C the volume of water is maximum. (4) Water is such a substance which at 0°C
(4) Density of water is maximum at 4°C. upto 4°C
(5) Presence of moisture in air is called humidity. (a) expands on heating
(6) Heat is necessary to saturate the air with vapour. (b) contracts on heating
(7) Water vapour content of air is measured by (c) contracts on cooling
relative humidity. (d) remains unchanged
(8) Absolutehumidityismeasuredinkg/m3. (5) If temperature of water is lowered from 4°C to
(9) Humidity is measured by relative humidity. 3°C; its volume .
(10) At dew point, the relative humidity is 60%. (a) increases (b) decreases
(11) S.I. unit of heat is joule. (c) remains the same (d) fluctuates
(12) In CGS system, heat is measured in joules. (6) ThespecificheatcapacityismeasuredinC.G.S.
system in .
(13) 1 =4.18cal.
(14) Specificheatisdenotedbyletter'h'. (a) cal (b) kcal
(c) cal/g°C (d) joule/kg°C
(15)  pecific heat capacity is measured in SI system
S
in /g°C. (7) At dew point, the relative humidity is
(16) I n CGS, specific heat capacity can be measured (a) 100% (b) 10%
in calorie. (c) 60% (d) 50%
(17)  hermometer is used to measure specific heat
T (8) If the pressure is applied on ice, its melting point
capacity. .
(18) Thespecificheatcapacityofwateris1.0cal/g°C. (a) decreases (b) increases
Ans. ( ) (2) . i   v i  (c) remains the same (d) fluctuates
i   i i . (3) .  v i 
(9) The specific heat capacity of water is
minimum, density is maximum. (4) True (5) True
kcal/kg°C
( ) .  i   i 
of air. (7) False. It is measured by absolute humidity. (a) 10 (b) 1.0
(8) True (9) True (10) False. At dew point the (c) 1.5 (d) 0.5
100 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

(10) When water boils and is converted into steam, (d) temperature at which the density of water is
then . maximum
(a) heat is taken in and temperature remains (15) Why do street ice cream vendors add salt their
constant. freezingmixtureintermittently?
(b) heat is taken in and temperatures rises.
(a) to increase the melting point of the freezing
(c) heat is given out and temperatures lowers.
mixture.
(d) heat is given out and temperature remains
(b) to maintain the melting point of the freezing
constant.
mixture as constant.
(11) In Hope’s a apparatus when the temperature of (c) to reduce the melting point of the freezing
water drops from 4°C to 3°C water . mixture
(a) emainsstill (b) moves upwards (d) to reduce the weight of the freezing mixture.
(c) moves downwards (d) freezes solid
(16) Heat needed to raise the temperature of 1 kg of
(12) Wax layer water from 14.5°C to 15.5°C is .
(a) 4180 (b) 103
(c) 1 cal (d) 4180 cal
Lead (17) Heat is absorbed when .
Copper
(a) water is converted into vapour
Iron (b) water is converted into ice
With reference to the above diagram, which of (c) steam is converted into water
the following relation is incorrect? (d) all of these
(a) CIron > Ccopper (b) Ccopper > Clead
(18) Heat absorbed when 1 g of ice melts at 0°C to form
(c) CIron > Clead (d) Clead > Ccopper 1g of water at the same temperature is cal
(13) Which of the following is a correct relation? (a) 80 (b) 800
(a) 4.18 calories = 1 joule (c) 540 (d) 54
(b) 1 calories = 4.18 joule
(19) A sample of air containing certain amount of water
(c) 107 calories = 1 joule
vapour is saturated at a particular temperature. If
(d) 1 calories = 107 joule
the temperature of air sample is raised further,
(14) In the experiment of Hope’s apparatus, the point
then .
of intersection of the two curves in the graph
corresponds to the . (a) The sample becomes oversaturated.
(b) The sample remains saturated.
12° (c) The sample reaches dewpoint.
T2
(d) The sample becomes unsaturated.
8° Ans. (1) (c) water (2) (c) increases (3) (d) Anomalous
Temperature °C

behaviour of water (4) (b) contracts on heating (5) (a)

4° increases (6) (c) cal/g°C (7) (a) 100% (8) (a) decreases
(9) (b) 1.0 (10) (a) heat is taken in and temperature
remains constant. (11) (b) moves upwards (12) (d)
0°
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 Clead > Ccopper (13) (b) 1 calories = 4.18 joule (14) (d)
Time (Minutes) temperature at which the density of water is maximum
(15) (c) to reduce the melting point of the freezing
(a) melting point of ice mixture (16) (a) 4180 J (17) (a) water is converted
(b) freezing point of water into vapour (18) (a) 80 (19) (d) The sample becomes
(c) temperature at which the density of water is unsaturated.
minimum
Heat 101

Q.2.1. Solve the following: 3cA = 5cB

Type: A 5
cA = c
3 B
Q = mc∆T (Heat energy during change in
→ Specific heat of A is more.
temperature) 5
→ It is greater by a factor of
Q = mL (Heat energy during change of state) 3
Note: Specific heat capacity (c) 1 cal/g C 1
kcal/kg°C NUMERICALS FOR PRACTICE
∆T = Higher temperature – Lower temperature
(1) How much heat is required to raise the temperature
*(1) (a) How much heat energy is necessary to raise of 500 g of mercury from 20°C to 100°C. (Sp. heat
the temperature of 5 kg of water from 20°C to cap.ofHgis0.033kcal/kg°C) (1.32 kcal)
100 °C. (2) The initial temperature of 40 g copper ball is 24°C.
Ans. Given: Mass (m) = 5 kg When 200 cal heat is supplied, the temperature
   Temp.difference(∆T) = 100 - 20 = 80°C rises to 74°C. Find the specific heat capacity of
copper? (0.1 cal/g°C)
   Specificheatcapacity(c)=1kcal/kg°C
(3) Calculate the heat gained by 50 g of ice at 0°C to
To find: Heat energy (Q) = ?
change into water of the same temperature. (Latent
Formula: Q = mc∆T heatoffusionoficeis80cal/g) (4000 cal)
Solution: Q = 5 × 1 × 80 (4) Calculate the amount of heat absorbed by 100 g
= 400 kcal oficetochangeintowaterof30°C.(Specificheat
Heat energy needed is 400 kcal. capacityofwateris1cal/g°C) (11000 cal)
Type: B
(1) (b) How much energy needs to be supplied to
150g of water at 100°C to convert it to steam at Principle of Heat Exchange
100°C. (Lvap = 540 cal/g) Heat energy lost by Heat energy gained
Ans. Given: m = 150g hot object = by cold object
   L=540cal/g Heat lost by hot Heat gained by
body (QA) = cold body (QB)
To find: Q = ?
Q = mc∆T
Formula: Q = mL Q = mL
Solution: Q = 150 × 540 Note: cwater/Ice/Steam = 1 cal/g°C = 1 kcal/kg°C
= 81000 cal Lfusion for water = 80 cal/g = 80 kcal/kg
Lvap for water = 540 cal/g = 540 kcal/kg
Heat energy needed is 81000 cal.
*(1) Liquid ammonia is used in ice factory for making
*(2) Equal heat is given to two objects A and B of ice from water. If water at 20 °C is to be converted
mass 1g. Temperature of A increases by 3°C and into 2 kg ice at 0 °C, how many grams of ammonia
B by 5°C. Which object has more specific heat? is to be evaporated? (Given: The latent heat of
And by what factor? vaporization of ammonia= 341 cal/g)
Ans. Given: For A For B QA QB
Mass (m) 1g 1g Water/Ice Ammonia
Temperature Ans. Given: (m) 2kg m1
difference(∆T) 3°C 5°C
(c) 1kcal/kg°C -
Q A = QB t1 20°C -
To find: cA = ? cB = ? t2 0°C -
Formula: Q = mc∆T L 80kcal/kg 341kcal/kg
Solution: QA = QB To find: m1 = ?
mAcA∆TA = mBcB∆TB Formulae: QA = QB
1 × cA × 3 = 1 × cB × 5 Q = mc∆T, Q = mL
102 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

Solution: (150 × 80) + {150 × 1 × (50 - 0)} = {m1 × 540} + {m1 × 1 ×

(1) Water (100 - 50)}
mc∆T mL 12000 + 7500 = m1 (540 + 50)
Water (20°C) → Water (0°C) → Ice (0°C) 19500 = m1 × 590
QA = mc∆T + mL ............... (i) 19500
m1 =
(2) Ammonia 590
QB= m1L1 ............... (ii) m1 = 33.05 = 33
from (i) and (ii) Hence, 33g steam has to be mixed.
QA = QB
*(3) If 80 g steam of temperature 97 °C is released on
mc∆T + mL = m1L1 an ice slab of temperature 0 °C, how much ice will
2 × 1 × (20 - 0) + (2 × 80) = m1 × 341 melt? How much energy will be transferred to the
40 + 160 = m1 × 341 ice when the steam will be transformed to water?

200 = m1 × 341 QA QB
200 Steam Ice
m1 = Ans. Given: (m) 80g m1
341
m1 = 0.5865 kg (c) 1cal/g°C 1cal/g°C
or
t1 97°C 0°C
m1 = 586.5 g
t2 0°C 0°C
Hence, 586.5g of ammonia has to be evaporated.
L 540cal/g 80cal/g
*(2) A thermally insulated pot has 150 g ice at
To find: QA = ?, m1 = ?
temperature 0 °C. How much steam of 100 °C has
to be mixed to it, so that water of temperature Formulae: QA = QB
50 C will be obtained? Q = mc∆T, Q = mL
QA QB Solution:
Ans. Given: Steam Ice (1) Steam
(m) m1 150g mL mc∆T
(c) 1cal/g°C 1cal/g°C Steam(97°C) → Water (97°C) → Water (0°C)
t1 100°C 0°C ∴ QA = mL + mc∆T
t2 50°C 50°C
= (80 × 540) + {80 × 1 × (97 - 0)}
L 540cal/g 80cal/g
= 43200 + 7760
To find: m1 = ?
QA = 50960 cal ............... (i)
Formulae: QA = QB
(2) Ice
Q = mc∆T, Q = mL
mL
Solution: Ice (0°C) → Water (0°C)
(1) Steam QB= m1L1 ............... (ii)
mL mc∆T
Steam(100°C) → Water (100°C) → Water (50°C) from (i) and (ii)
∴ QA= m1L1 + m1c1∆T1 ............... (i) QA = QB
(2) Ice 50960 = m1L1
mL mc∆T 50960 = m1 × 80
Ice (0°C) → Water (0°C) → Water (50°C)
50960
∴ QB = mL + mc∆T .................... (ii) m1 =
80
from (i) and (ii) m1 = 637g
QB = QA
Hence, 637g of ice will melt and 50960 cal of
mL + mc∆T = m1L1 + m1c1∆T heat energy is transfered to ice.
Heat 103

Type: C The maximum temperature of water will be

Calorimeter 23.8°C.
Heat lost by Heat gained Heat gained
= + *(2) A calorimeter has mass 100g and specific heat
hot object by calorimeter by liquid
Q = Q1 + Q2 0.1 kcal/ kg°C. It contains 250 gm of liquid at
Q = mc∆T 30 C having specific heat of 0.4 kcal/kg C. If we
Q = mL drop a piece of ice of mass 10 g at 0°C, what will
Note: C(copper) = 0.1 cal/g°C = 0.1 kcal/kg°C be the temperature of the mixture?
Final temperature becomes equal to
'T' for all substances Q Q1 Q2
Ice Water Calorimeter
*(1) A copper sphere of 100g mass is heated to raise
its temperature to 100°C and is released in water (m) 10g 250g 100g
of mass 195g and temperature 20°C in a copper Ans. Given:
1cal/ 0.4cal/ 0.1cal/
calorimeter. If the mass of calorimeter is 50g, (c)
g°C g°C g°C
what will be the maximum temperature of water?
t1 0°C 30°C 30°C
Q Q1 Q2
Ans. Given: Copper Water Calorimeter t2 T T T
(m) 100g 195g 50g L 80cal/g – –
0.1cal/ 1cal/ 0.1cal/ To find: T = ?
(c)
g°C g°C g°C
t1 100°C 20°C 20°C Formulae: Q = Q1 + Q2
t2 T T T Q = mc∆T, Q = mL

To find: T = ? Solution:

Formulae: Q = Q1 + Q2 (1) Ice

mL mc∆T
Q = mc∆T Ice (0°C) → Water (0°C) → Water (T°C)
Solution: ∴ Q = mL + mc∆T ............... (i)
(1) Copper
(2) Water
Q = mc∆T ............... (i)
Q1= m1c1 ∆T1 ............... (ii)
(2) Water
(3) Calorimeter
Q1= m1c1∆T1 ............... (i)
Q2= m2c2 ∆T2 ............... (iii)
(3) Calorimeter
from (i), (ii) and (iii)
Q2= m2c2∆T2 ............... (iii)
from (i), (ii) and (iii) Q = Q1 + Q2

Q = Q1 + Q2 mL + mc∆T = m1c1∆T1 + m2c2∆T2

mc∆T = m1c1∆T1 + m2c2∆T2 (10 × 80) + {10 × 1 × (T - 0)} = {250 × 0.4 × (30 - T)}
+ {100 × 0.1 × (30 - T)}
{100 × 0.1 × (100 - T)} = {195 × 1 × (T - 20)} + {50 ×
0.1 × (T - 20)} 800 + 10 T = 100 (30 - T) + 10 (30 - T)
10 (100 - T) = 195 (T - 20) + 5 (T - 20) 800 + 10T = 110 (30 - T)
1000 - 10T = (T - 20) (195 + 5) 10T + 110T = 3300 - 800
1000 - 10T = (T - 20) 200 120T = 2500
1000 - 10T = 200 T - 4000 2500
T= = 20.8°C
1000 + 4000 = 200 T + 10 T 120
5000 = 210 T The temperature of the mixture will be 20.8°C.
5000
T= = 23.8°C
210
104 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

due to presence of water vapour in it is called

NUMERICALS FOR PRACTICE humidity.
(1) A solid of mass 250 g at 90°C is dropped in a (9) Dew point temperature
calorimeter containing 100 g of water at 15°C. The Ans. The temperature at which the air becomes
resulting temperature of mixture becomes 40°C. saturated with water vapour is called dew point.
Themassofcalorimeteris100ganditsspecific (10) Absolute humidity
heatcapacityis0.1cal/g°C.Findthespecificheat Ans. The mass of water vapour in unit volume of air is
capacity of the solid. (0.2 cal/g°C) calledabsolutehumidity.Itismeasuredinkg/m3
(2) A copper sphere of mass 500 g is heated to 100°C (11) Relative humidity
and then introduced into a copper calorimeter
Ans. The ratio of the mass of water vapour in given
containing 100 g of water at 20°C. Find the
volume of air at given temperature to the mass
maximum temperature of the mixture, if the mass
of water vapour required to saturate the same
ofcalorimeteris100gandspecificheatcapacityis
volume of air at the same temperature is called
0.1cal/g°C. (45°C)
relative humidity.
Q.2.2. Define/ write the laws: (12) One calorie of heat
(1) Latent heat of fusion Ans. The amount of heat required to raise the
Ans. The heat energy absorbed at a constant temperature temperature of 1 g of water by 1°C (from 14.5°C to
during transformation of solid into liquid is called 15.5°C) is called one calorie of heat.
latent heat of fusion. (13) One kcal heat
(2) Specific latent heat of fusion Ans. The quantity of heat required to raise the
Ans. The amount of heat energy absorbed at a constant temperature of 1 kg of water through 1°C (from
temperature by unit mass of a solid to convert 14.5°C to 15.5°C) is called kilocalorie heat.
intoliquidphaseiscalledthespecificlatentheat (14) Specific heat capacity
of fusion. Ans. The quantity of heat required to raise the
(3) Melting point temperature of unit mass of substance through
Ans. The constant temperature at which solid changes 1°Ciscalledspecificheatcapacity.
to liquid state is called melting point of that solid. (15) Principle of heat exchange:
(4) Latent heat of vaporisation Ans. When a hot body is kept in contact with a cold
Ans. The heat energy absorbed at constant temperature body, isolated from the environment, then the
during transformation of liquid into gas is called quantity of heat lost by the hot body is equal to
Latent heat of vapourization. the quantity of heat gained by the cold body.
(5) Specific latent heat of vapouri ation Q.2.3. Write short notes:
Ans. The amount of heat energy absorbed at constant *(1) Latent heat
temperature by unit mass of a liquid to convert Ans.
intogaseousphaseiscalledspecificlatentheatof (i) The quantity of heat absorbed or released
vapourization. by a substance to change its state at constant
(6) Boiling point temperature is called latent heat.
Ans. The constant temperature at which a liquid (ii) The heat energy absorbed at constant temperature
changes to gaseous state is called as boiling point during transformation of solid into liquid is called
of the liquid. latent heat of fusion. Latent heat of fusion of ice is
80cal/g.
(7) Regelation
(iii) The heat energy absorbed at constant temperature
Ans. The phenomenon in which the ice converts
during transformation of liquid into gas is called
to liquid due to applied pressure and then
Latent heat of vapourization. The latent heat of
re-converts to ice again once the pressure is
vaporisationofwateris540cal/g.
removed is called regelation.
(iv) During change of state there is no rise or fall of
(8) Humidity temperature.
Ans. The presence of dampness or moistness in air
Heat 105

(2) Regelation container. At the middle of the cylinder, there is

Ans. aflatbowl.
(i) If two small ice cubes are pressed upon each (iii) Two thermometers, one at the upper region and
other, the pressure at the surfaces of contact otheratthelowerregionarefixedtorecordthe
increases and melting point is reduced.
temperature.
(ii) Due to this, ice melts and forms water.
(iv) The freezing mixture of salt and ice is taken in the
(iii) When pressure is removed, then the melting point
flatbowl.Temperaturesarerecordedafterevery
comes back to normal and water freezes again to
30 min.
form ice, sticking the two pieces of ice together.
(iv) Ice melts when subjected to pressure and then (v) Water of 10°C is poured into the cylindrical
when pressure irreleased, it reconverts into ice container. Initially, both the thermometers show
again. This is called regelation. the temperature of 10°C.

(3) Anomalous behaviour of water (vi) As the temperature of water decreases due to
Ans. freezing mixture, it contracts, density increases
(i) Generally, liquids expand on heating and contract andgoestothebottomofthecontainertill4°C.
on cooling. (vii) Due to this, for sometime the thermometer at the
(ii) Water, however, shows an exceptional behaviour. bottomshowstemperatureof4°C.
(iii) If water at room temperature is cooled, it contracts
(viii) As the temperature falls below 4°C, water in the
till 4°C, but if it is cooled below 4°C (between 4°C
and 0°C), it expands instead of contracting. region expands instead of contracting, density
decreases and this water rises towards the surface.
(iv) On the contrary, if water at 0°C is heated, it
contracts instead of expanding upto 4°C. (ix)  ftersometime,theupperthermometershowsthe
A
(v) This exceptional behaviour of water between 4°C temperature of 0°C and the lower thermometer
and 0°C is called anomalous behaviour of water. shows 4°C.
(vi) Examples found in nature: (x) Finally both thermometer show 0°C
(a) Survival of aquatic plants and animals. (xi) In this way, the anomalous behaviour of water
(b) Cracking of rocks in winter. can be demonstrated in the laboratory by using
(c) Pipes conducting water in cold regions burst Hope's apparatus.
in a winter.
(5) Relative Humidity
(4) Hope's apparatus
Ans.
Ans.
Thermometer T2 (i) The ratio of actual mass of vapour content in the
air for a given volume and temperature to that
0°C
required to make the air saturated with vapour at
Freezing
that temperature is called the relative humidity.
mixture Cylindrical
% relative humidity
trough
Actual mass of water vapour in the air
Thermometer T1
in a given volume
= × 100
Mass of water vapour required to
4°C
saturate the same volume at same
temperature.
(ii) The relative humidity at the dew point is 100%.
Fig 5.1 Hope's apparatus If the relative humidity is more than 60%, we feel
(i) The anomalous behavior of water can be studied that the air is humid.
with Hope's apparatus. (iii) If the relative humidity is less than 60%, we feel
(ii) In Hope's apparatus, there is a metallic cylindrical that the air is dry.
106 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

Q.2.4. Distinguish between:

*(1) What is the difference between heat and temperature?
Ans. Heat Temperature
(i) It is a form of energy. (i) It is a measure of degree of hotness or coldness of
an object.
(ii) SI unit is joule (J) (ii) SI unit is kelvin (K)
(iii) Twobodiesofdifferentmaterialshaving (iii) Two bodies at same temperature can have
samequantityofheatcanbeatdifferent differentquantitiesofheat.
temperatures.
(iv) It can be measured by using Calorimeter. (iv) It can be measured using Thermometer.

(2) Absolute Humidity and elative Humidity

Ans. Absolute Humidity elative Humidity
(i) The mass of water vapour per unit volume of (i) The ratio of the mass of water vapour in a given
air is called absolute humidity. volume of air at given temperature to the mass
of water vapour required to saturate the same
volume of air at the same temperature is called
relative humidity.
(ii) It has a unit. (ii) It has no unit.
(iii) It is measured in kg/m3. (iii) It is measured in percentage.
(iv) Mass of water vapour present is measured. (iv) Extent of humidity is measured.

(3) Humidity and Dew point

Ans. Humidity Dew point
(i) The dampness or moistness of air due to (i) The temperature at which air becomes saturated
the presence of water vapour in it is called with water vapour is called dew point.
humidity.
(ii) It is usually measured in terms of relative (ii) It is measured in terms of temperature in degree
humidity which is a percentage. celcius.
(iii) When air is saturated with water vapour, the (iii) When the temperature falls below the dew
relative humidity is 100%. point, then relative humidity is 100%, dew starts
forming.

Q.2.5. Give Scientific easons: (ii) We feel that an object is hot, when our body
*(1) ou know that as we go higher than the sea level, temperature is low as compared to that of the
the boiling point of water decreases. What would object because heat is transferred from object to
be effect on the melting point of solid? (Use your body.
Brain Power!; Textbook page no. 64) (iii) Similarly when body temperature is high as
Ans. compared to that of object, we feel that the object
(i) As we go higher than sea level, the atmospheric is cold because heat is transferred from body to
pressure decreases.
object.
(ii) So melting point of ice increases.
(3) Why is a white trail observed at the back of a
*(2) We feel that some objects are cold, and some are
flying plane in clear sky?
hot. Is this feeling related in some way to our body
temperature? (Can you tell?; Textbook page no. 64) Ans.
Ans. (i) I nwinter,astheplanefliesthevapourreleased
(i) If two objects are in contact with each other, there by the aeroplane engine condenses and forms
will be an exchange of heat between them. clouds.
Heat 107

(ii) This cloud appears in the form of a white trail (iii) As there is no place in the crevices for the
behindtheflyingaircraft. expansion of water, it exerts tremendous pressure
(iii) Hence, a white trail is observed at the back of a on the rocks which results in the crumbling of the
flyingplane. rocks.
(iv) Hence, sometimes rocks crumble into pieces in
*(4) How will you explain following statements with cold countries during winter.
the help of the anomalous behaviour of water?
(Use your Brain Power!; Textbook page no. 66) Q.3.1. Explain the following / meaning of statement:
(a) In regions with cold climate, the aquatic *(1) Role of Latent heat in the change of state of a
plants and animals can survive even when the substances.
atmospheric temperature goes below 0°C. Ans.
Ans. (i) During change of state of a substance, object
(i) In cold countries during winter, the temperature absorbs or release heat energy.
of air falls to 0°C or even below. (ii) But the temperature does not change.
(ii) As the temperature of air decreases, the water at (iii) The heat energy is utilized for weakening the
the surface of the lake begins to contract due to bonds between the atoms or molecules in the
which its density increases. substance.
(iii) When the temperature of the water falls below (iv) Hence, this energy which causes a change in state
4°C, due to its anomalous behaviour, the water and does not change the temperature is called
expands instead of contracting. Latent heat.
(iv) As the temperature of water falls to 0°C, the water *(2) On what basis and how will you determine
on the surface of the lake gets converted to ice. whether air is saturated with vapour or not?
Ans.
(v) Since ice is a bad conductor of heat the water
(i) We can determine whether air is saturated with
below the ice layer continues to remain at 4°C even
vapour or not on the basis of relative humidity.
though the temperature of air may fall below 0°C.
(ii)  elative humidity is the ratio of actual mass
(vi) Hence, due to the anomalous behaviour of of vapour content in air for given volume and
water, aquatic animals stay alive even when the temperature to that required to make air saturated
temperature of air falls below 0°C with vapour at that temperature.
(b) In cold regions in winter the pipes for water (iii) If relative humidity is 100%, the air is saturated
supply break and even rocks crack. with vapour. This is called dew point.
Ans. (iv) If its value is less than 100%, then air is unsaturated.
(i) During winter season, in cold countries the
*(3) How can you relate the formation of water
temperature of atmosphere falls well below 0°C. droplets on the outer surface of a bottle taken
(ii) Therefore, the temperature of water inside the out of refrigerator with formation of dew.
pipeline also decreases. Ans.
(iii) When the temperature of the water falls below (i)  hen the bottle is taken out of the refrigerator,
W
4°C, it starts expanding instead of contracting theairaroundthebottlecools.
due to anomalous behaviour of water. (ii) As the air cools, due to decrease in temperature it
(iv) Since there is no place for water to expand it exerts becomes saturated with water vapour.
tremendous pressure on the walls of the pipeline (iii) As a result, the excess water vapour gets converted
causing them to burst. Hence, in winter the intotinydropletsontheoutersurfaceofthebottle
pipeline carrying water burst in cold countries. called dew.
*(5) In cold regions, the winter rocks crack due to (iv) This is similar to the dew we see in the early
anomalous expansion of water. mornings on leaves of plants and window glass
Ans. of vehicle.
(i) During winter season, in cold countries the (4) Specific heat capacity
temperature of atmosphere falls well below 0°C. Ans.
(ii) If water is present within the crevices of the (i) The amount of heat energy required to raise the
rocks, then due to its anomalous behaviour, temperature of unit mass of substance through
water begins to expand below 4°C. 1°Ciscalledspecificheatcapacity.
108 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

(ii) 'm'isamassofandobjectwhichhasspecificheat *(8) What is meant by specific heat capacity’? How

capacity of 'c'. If its temperature is to be increased will you prove experimentally that different
by T,thentheheatabsorbedbyasubstancecan substances have different specific heat capacities?
be calculated as, Ans.
(i) The quantity of heat energy required to raise a
 Heatabsorbed=mc T... Tisrisein temperature of unit mass of a substance through
temperature 1°Ciscalledspecificheatcapacityofasubstance.
(iii) If the temperature of a substance is reduced, then (refer Fig 5.3)
heat lost by a substance can be given as, (ii) Three solid spheres of equal masses of material
 Heatlost=mc T ..... Tisfallintemperature. iron, copper and lead are placed in boiling water for
sametime.Afterremovingthemsimultaneously,
∴Specific heat capacity is necessary to find they are placed on the wax tray together.
amount of heat loss or gain. (iii) Initially, all spheres have temperature of 100°C.
(5) Principle of heat exchange The sphere which absorbs more heat can melt
Ans. more wax.
(i) When a hot and a cold object are kept in contact, (iv) Iron sphere melts more wax and goes deep into it
then, Heat lost by hot object = Heat gained by ray. The lead sphere goes less deep into the molten
cold object. [ In an isolated environment ] wax. The copper sphere goes to intermediate depth.
(v) Thisindicatesthattheheatabsorbedbydifferent
(ii) When a hot object and cold object are placed in
material differs. This is specific heat capacity of
contact, then there is transfer of heat from hot
metals.
object to cold object till the temperature of both
(vi) Specific heat capacity is denoted by letter 'c'. In
become equal. CGS,itismeasuredincal/g°C,whileinMKS,itis
(iii) If there is no other loss or gain of heat energy from measuredin /kg°C.
the surrounding, then principle of heat exchange *(9) Which principle is used to measure the specific
iswrittenas. heat capacity of a substance?
Heat lost by hot body = Heat gained by cold body Ans. T
 he specific heat capacity of a substance is
measured using principle of heat exchange.
(6) How is specific heat measured? or Explain
It states that,
'mixing method' for measurement of specific
Heat lost by hot object = Heat gained by cold
heat.
object.
Ans.
(10) Explain the given graph:
(i)  hespecificheatofanobjectcanbemeasuredby
T
mixing method using a calorimeter. *(a) Observe the graph below. Temperature of
water is raised from 0°C, observe the change in
(ii) When a hot solid metallic ball (sphere) is put
volume at different temperatures and explain
in water in a calorimeter, heat exchange starts the anomalous behaviour of water.
between hot object, water and calorimeter.
(iii) This continues till the temperature of all the three 1000.35
becomes equal. 1000.30
SpecificVolume(cm3/g)

(iv) Heat lost by hot object (Q1) is equal to Heat gained 1000.25
1000.20
by water and calorimeter.
1000.15
(v) I f the specific heat of water and calorimeter are 1000.10
known,thenthespecificheatofsolidobjectcan 1000.05
be calculated. 1000.00

*(7) What is meant by latent heat? How will the state 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

of matter transform if latent heat is given off? Temperature °C
Ans. The quantity of heat absorbed or released Fig : 5.2 Graph between the volume
by a substance to change its state at constant and temperature of water
temperature is called latent heat. If Latent heat
isgivenoff,thenagaswillconvertintoaliquid, Ans.
and a liquid will convert into a solid. (i) As water at 0°C is heated upto 4°C, it contracts
instead of expanding. The volume of water at
Heat 109

4°C is minimum. If water at 4°C is further heated, *(2) In the below experiment, the wire moves through
then it expands and its volume increases. the ice slab. However, the ice slab does not break.
(ii) This exceptional behaviour which water shows Why? (Use your Brain Power!; Textbook page no. 64
between 0°C to 4°C is called anomalous behaviour
of water. Ice
(iii) From graph, we come to know that if water is
heated from 0°C to 4°C, it contracts instead of
expanding. Since volume at 4°C is minimum,
hence, density is maximum.
*(11) Explain the following graph:
Boiling water + vapour
100 C D
90 Liquid - Weight
80 Gaseous Fig 5.4
°C

70
state Ans.
60
qu r

50 (i) The melting point of ice becomes lower than 0°C

e
at
id
W

40 due to the applied pressure by the wire.

Li

30 (ii) So the Ice gets converted into water and the wire
20
moves through the ice slab.
10
A B (iii) Once the pressure is removed, the water becomes
(0, 0)
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 ice again. In this way the wire moves through the
Ice + Water Time (Minutes) ice slab without breaking it.
(Solid + liquid)
*(3) Is there any relationship of latent heat with the
Fig 5.3: Temperature vs Time Graph regelation? (Use your Brain Power! Textbook page
Ans. no. 64)
(i) The graph shown is a temperature - time graph of Ans. Yes there is relationship between latent heat and
Ice transforming into water and steam. regelation
(i) The amount of heat energy absorbed or released
(ii) AB shows that, at constant temperature of 0°C during change of state is called Latent heat.
ice changes to water.
(ii) The phenomenon in which ice converts to liquid
(iii) The temperature at which ice changes to water, is due to applied pressure and then reconverts to ice
called melting point of ice i.e. 0°C. oncethepressureisremovediscalled egelation.
(iv) Now, water at 0°C starts heating and its (iii) Sincetherearechangeofstatesduring egelation
temperature gradually increases to 100°C. processlatentheatisoneofthefactorsaffecting
egelation.
(v) BC shows increase in temperature from 0°C to
100°C without a change in state. Q.3.3. Draw a neat and labelled diagram:
(vi) CD shows that, at constant temperature of 100°C, *(1) Hope's apparatus
water changes to vapour. Ans.
Thermometer T2
(vii) The temperature at which water changes to 0°C
vapour is called boiling point of water i.e. 100°C. Freezing
Q.3.2. Open Ended Question: mixture

*(1) While deciding the unit for heat, which Cylindrical

trough Thermometer T1
temperatures interval is chosen? Why?
Ans. The temperature range of 14.5°C to 15.5°C is
chosen while deciding the unit for heat. If we 4°C
heat1kgofwaterby1°Cindifferenttemperature
range other than 14.5°C to 15.5°C, the amount of
heatrequiredwillbeslightlydifferent.
Fig 5.5
110 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

*(2) Experiment of specific heat capacity with three (i) What is the state of the substance in the region
solid spheres. DE of the graph?
Ans. Ans: Liquid and gas
Wax layer
(ii) What is the heat energy absorbed in the region
EF called?
Ans: Latent heat of vaporization
Lead (2) Answer the following questions based on the
Copper diagram given below.

Iron 100 C D
*(3) Graph of time against temperature for Hope's 90
80
Apparatus.

°C
70
Ans. 60

qu r
50

e
12°

at
id
W
40
Upper Thermometer (T2)

Li
30
20
8°
Temperature °C

Lower Thermometer (T1) 10

A B
(0, 0)
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26
4°
Time (Minutes)

0° Temperature vs Time Graph

5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 (i) What part of the graph shows a change from ice
Time (Minutes) to water at a constant temperature?
Fig 5.6: Time - Temperature Graph Ans. Part AB
*(4) Survival of aquatic life. (ii) Which part of the graph shows a change in the
temperature without a change in the state?
Ans.
Ans. Part BC
Ice at 0°C
(iii) Define : Latent heat of Vapouri ation.
Ans. The heat energy absorbed at constant temperature
during transformation of liquid to gas is called
latent heat of vaporization.
Water at
4°C (iv) What is the heat energy absorbed from A to B
called?
Fish Ans. Latent heat of fusion.
(v) What is the heat energy absorbed from C to D
called?
Fig 5.7: Aquatic animals in cold regions Ans. Latent heat of vaporization.
Q.3.4. Figure/Application Based Questions. (3) Answer the following based on the diagram
given below.
(1) Answer the following based on the graph given
below. Thermometer T2
°C
Freezing
mixture Cylindrical
150 F
trough
D
Temperature (°C)

100
E Thermometer T1
50

0
B °C
C
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
-50
Time (s)
Heat 111

(i) When the temperature of water decreases from (i) Above experiment is meant to understand
4°C to 2°C, will the level of water rise or fall in which phenomenon of heat?
the cylinder? Ans.  egelation
Ans. When the temperature of water decreases from
4°C to 2°C, water expands and therefore it will (ii) Define the phenomenon in minimum words.
rise in the cylinder. Ans. The phenomena in which the ice converts to water
(ii) Which of the two thermometers, T1 or T2, will due to applied pressure and then re-converts to
show a temperature of 0 C first? ice again once the pressure is removed is called
Ans. Thermometer T2 will show temperature of 0°C regelation.
first.
(iii)What is the effect of the increase in pressure on
(iii)Pipe lines crack in winter season in cold the melting point of ice?
countries due to which phenomena?
Ans. As the pressure increases, the melting point of ice
Ans. Pipelines crack in winter season due to anomalous
behaviour of water. decreases.

(4) Answer the following based on the diagram (iv) The wire does not breaks the ice slab while
given below. passing through it. Why?
Ans. On applying pressure, the melting point of ice
1000.35 reduces and it melts. As the wire moves down,
1000.30 the pressure is removed the melting point comes
SpecificVolume(cm3/g)

1000.25
back to normal and water freezes back to ice
1000.20
1000.15 again. Thus, the ice slab doesnot breaks.
1000.10 (v) Will latent heat affect the process?
1000.05
Ans. Yes,latentheatwillaffecttheprocesssincethere
1000.00
is a change in state involved.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
(6) The graph given in daigram represents a
Temperature °C
cooling curve for a substance being cooled from
(i) Which behavior of water is shown in the graph? its vapour to solid phase by releasing heat at a
Ans. Anomalous behavior of water.
constant rate of 100 J s–1.
(ii) At what temperature is the volume of water
minimum?
Ans. 4°C 200 A
(iii)On cooling from 0 C to 4 C, what is the effect on B C
150
(a) Volume (b) Density of water
D E
Temperature (°C)

Ans. (a) The volume of water decreases on cooling 100

from0°C to 4°C 50
F

(b) The density of water increases on cooling

0
from 0°C to 4°C.
5 10 15 20 25 30 35
(5) Answer the following based on the diagram
given below. Time (s)

Ice (i) What is the boiling point of the substance?

Ans. The boiling point of the substance is 150°C.
(ii) What happens in the region DE?
Ans. The region DE represents freezing of the
substance where the liquid changes into solid at
a constant temperature (= 100°C).
(iii) What is the melting point of the substance?
Ans. The melting point of the substance is 100°C.
Weight
112 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

Q.4.1. Paragraph Based Question: *(i) Heat is transferred from where to where?
*(1) Read the following paragraph carefully and Ans. Heat gets transferred from hot object to the cold
answer the following questions: object.

If heat is exchanged between a hot and cold *(ii) Which principle do we learn about from this
object, the temperature of the cold object process?
goes on increasing due to gain of energy and Ans. Principle of Heat exchange.
the temperature of the hot object goes on *(iii) How will you state the principle briefly?
decreasing due to loss of energy.
Ans. The principle of Heat exchange states that, if heat
The change in temperature continues till the is exchanged between a hot and cold object, then
temperatures of both the objects attain the
heat energy lost by hot object is equal to heat
same value. In this process, the cold object
gains heat energy and the hot object loses energy gained by the cold object.
heat energy. If the system of both the objects *(iv) Which property of the substance is measured
is isolated from the environment by keeping using this principle.
it inside a heat resistant box (meaning that the Ans. U
 singthisprinciple,thespecificheatcapacityof
energy exchange takes place between the two
a substance can be measured.
objects only), then no energy can flow from
inside the box or come into the box.
vvv

ASSIGNMENT - 5
Time : 1 Hr. Marks : 20

Q.1. (A) Answer the following: (3)

(1) What is Specificlatentheatoffusion?
(2) Name the apparatus used to experiment anomalous behavior of water.
(3) What is the Principle of Heat exchange?
Q.2. (B) Choose and write the correct option. (2)
(1) The specific heat capacity of is maximum.
(a) Mercury (b) Copper (c) Water (d) Iron
(2) Aquatic plants and animals can survive in cold regions because of .
(a) Humidity (b) Dew point (c) Heat capacity (d) Anomalous behaviour of water
Q.2. Answer the following: (Any 2) (4)
(1) In cold regions in winter, rocks crack due to anomalous expansion of water.
(2) Distinguish between heat and temperature.
(3) Equal heat is given to two objects A and B of mass 1g. Temperature of A increases by 3°C and B by 5°C.
Whichobjecthasmorespecificheat?andbywhatfactor?
Q.3. Answer the following: (Any 2) (6)
(1) Answer the following based on the diagram given below.
Ice

Weight
Heat 113

(i) Above experiment is meant to understand which phenomenon of heat?

(ii) Define the phenomenon in minimum words.
(iii) What is the effect of the increase in pressure on the melting point of ice?

(2) Acalorimeterhasmass100gandspecificheat0.1kcal/kg°C.Itcontains250gmofliquidat30°C having

specificheatof0.4kcal/kg°C. If we drop a piece of ice of mass 10g at 0°C, what will be the temerature of
the mixture?

(3) If 80 g steam of temperature 97°C is released on an ice slab of temperature 0°C, how much ice will melt?
How much energy will be transferred to the ice when the steam will be transformed to water?

Q.4. Answer the following: (Any 1) (5)

(1) Explain Hope's apparatus with a neat and labelled diagram.
(2) Answer the following questions based on the diagram given below.

100 C D
90
80
°C

70
60
er

50
at
id
W

40
qu
Li

30
20
10
A B
(0, 0)
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26
Time (Minutes)
vvv
Temperature vs Time Graph

(i) What part of the graph shows a change from ice to water at a constant temperature?
(ii) Which part of the graph shows a change in the temperature without a change in the state?
 (iii) Define:LatentheatofVapourization.
(iv) What is the heat energy absorbed from A to B called?
(v) What is the heat energy absorbed from C to D called?below.

vvv
 6 Refraction of Light
CONCEPT MAP

Refraction of Light
Phenomena

Total Internal eflection

e.g. mirage
Refraction Dispresion
When light is CombinedEffect
incident Leads to the
Refractive
formation of
index
sin i V1 Rainbow
2 η1  
sin r V2 z splittingof
light into seven
 Effectsof colours.
Atmospheric Denser to Rarer to Normal at z Band of 7 colours
Refraction. Rarer Danser the boundary is called spectrum
z Twinkling of stars of 2 medium
z Violet deviates
z Advanced sunrise the most
z Delayed sunset. Away from Towards the Goes
z Red deviates the
the normal normal undeviated
least

Points to Remember:
zz Refraction of light: The phenomenon of change in the direction of light when it passes from one transparent
medium to another obliquely, is called refraction of light.
zz Laws of Refraction:
(a) The incident ray and the refracted ray are on the opposite sides of the normal at the point of incidence
and all the three lie in the same plane.
(b) For a given pair of media,
If ‘i’ is angle of incidence and ‘r’ is the angle of refraction; then,
sin i
= constant =
sin r
This constant is called as the ‘refractive index’ofsecondmediumwithrespecttothefirstmedium.It
is denoted by 2n1.
sin i
∴ 2n1 = = n.
sin r
This is also called Snell’s law. A ray incident along the normal (i = O) goes forward in the same direction (r = O).
 Therefractiveindexofthesecondmediumwithrespecttothefirstmediumisgivenbytheratioofmagnitude
ofvelocityoflightinthefirsttothatinsecondmedium.Itisdenotedby2n1.
zz The refractive index depends upon the relative speed of propagation of lightindifferentmedia.
zz Suppose v1 is the velocity of light in medium 1 and v2 is the velocity in medium 2.

(114)
Refraction of Light 115

Velocity of light in first medium

∴ Refractive index =
Velocity of light in second medium
v1
n1 =
2 v2
 Inthesameway,therefractiveindexofthefirstmediumwithrespecttosecondmediumisdenotedas,
v2
n2 =
1 v1
zz Refraction of light across the medium:
(a) When the light ray moves from an optically rarer medium to optically denser medium, it bends
towards the normal.
(b) When a ray of light travels from an optically denser medium to an optically rarer medium, it bends
away from the normal.
(c) When the ray is incident normally at the boundary between the two media, it does not change its
direction and hence does not get refracted.
zz Mirage is due to the apparent random wavering of the hot air rising above the heated roads. It is the
apparent image of an object originating from the ground below the object.
zz Twinkling of stars:
(a) Stars emit their own light and shine at night. They are at infinite distances from us, hence appear as
the point source.
(b) Because of mobility of atmospheric air and change in air density and the temperature, the atmosphere
is not steady. Hence, refractive index of air goes on changing continuously and randomly.
(c) When atmosphere refracts more light towards us, the star is seen bright. When atmosphere refracts
less light towards us, the star is seen dim. Thus, due to change in the refractive index of atmosphere,
stars appear twinkling at night. Different colour lights have different frequencies. In vacuum, the
velocity of light rays of all frequencies is the same. In a medium like glass, the angle of refraction are
differentfordifferentcolours.
zz Dispersion of light:
(a) The phenomenon of splitting of white light or sunlight into its component colours while passing
through a medium is called the dispersion of light.
(b) The band of coloured components of a light beam is called its ‘spectrum’.
(c) Variouscoloursobtainedaftersplittingareinasequence-Violet,Indigo,Blue,Green,Yellow,Orange
and ed.TheacronymisVIBGYO andcanbeusedtorememberthecolours.
zz The angle of incidence for which the angle of refraction is 90° is called as critical angle.
zz When the angle of incidence is larger than the critical angle, the angle of refraction is more than 90°, then the
raycomesbackinthedensermedium.Hence,totalinternalreflectiontakesplace.Whenangleofincidence
is more than critical angle, total internal reflection takes place.
sin i
∴ 1n2 =
sin r
 Fortotalinternalreflection,i=Criticalangle,r=90°
sin i
∴ 1n2 = = sin i (! sin 90° = 1)
sin 90°
zz When light enters a rarer medium from a denser medium, it gets partially reflected. This is called partial
reflection.
zz Formation of rainbow: Rainbow is a natural phenomenawithacombinedeffectofdispersion, refraction
and total internal reflection of light.
116 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

(2) Critical angle, angle of incidence, angle of

MASTER KEY QUESTION SET - 6 refraction, alternate angle
Q.1. (A) 1. Fill in the blanks and rewrite the Ans. Alternate angle. Others are concerned with
completed statements: refraction.
*(1) Refractive index depends on the of (3)  eflection,dispersion,refractiveindex,refraction
light. Ans. Refractive index. Refractive index is a value while
*(2) The change in the of light rays while the rest are natural phenomena of light.
going from one medium to another is called (4) Brown, blue, green, red
refraction. Ans. Brown. It is not a component of white light. Blue,
(3) The refractive index of air goes on red and green are components of white light.
while coming to the earth surface.
(4) The splitting of sunlight into its component Q.1. (A) 3. Complete the analogy:
colours is called of light. (1) Refractive index of water : 1.33 : : Refractive index
(5) In the dispersion of sunlight through glass prism of air :
the light deviates the most. Ans. 1.0003:Thevalueofrefractiveindexisdifferent
(6) When the light ray is incident normal to the fordifferentmedia.
interface between any two media, the angle of (2) Stars : Point source of light : : Planets :
incidence is .
(7) When the ray of light passes from denser medium Ans. Collection of point sources of light : Planets are
to rarer medium obliquely, it bends much closer to us as compared to stars, therefore,
the normal. they appear as a collection of point sources.
(8) When the value of ‘r’ is 90°, then the ‘i’ for it is (3) Diamond : Denser medium : : Air :
called as . Ans. Rarer medium : The speed of light is more in air
(9) When light travels from denser medium to rarer, than in diamond.
then the partial takes place.
v1 (4) Least deviation : Red : : Maximum deviation :
(10) The refractive index 2n1 =
(11) The refractive index of diamond is . Ans. Violet : The wavelength of violet is the smallest
(12) When the light passes through glass prism, the and therefore it deviates the maximum.
light deviates the least. (5) Spectrum : Dispersion : : Twinkling of stars :
(13) The scientist used the glass prism
for obtaining spectrum from the sunlight. Ans. Refraction : Spectrum is formed by dispersion of
(14) The wavelength of visible light range for human white light or sunlight, whereas the changes in
is between . the refractive index of air stars appear to twinkle.
(15) The wavelength of light is the least (6) Ice : 1.31 : : Water :
which is . Ans. 1.33 : Liquid water is denser than solid ice.
(16) 1 nm = m. (7) Maximum refractive index : Violet : : Minimum
(17) The wavelength of violet light is . refractive index :
(18) When the angle of incidence is more than critical Ans. Red : Red light has the maximum wavelength
angle takes place. and its refractive index is minimum compared to
violet light which has the smallest wavelength.
Ans. (1) velocity (2) direction (3) increasing (4) dispersion
v
(5) violet (6) 0° (7) away from (8) critical angle (8) n = 1 : : 1n2 :
2 1 v2
(9) i  ( 0) v2 (11) 2.42 (12) red (13) Isaac
v
Newton (14) 400 nm and 700 nm (15) violet, 400 nm Ans. 2 : Velocity of light in a medium depends on the
v1
(16) 10-9 ( 7) 00  ( 8) i  i refractive index of the medium.
Q.1. (A) 2. Find the odd word out: (9)  i  critical angle : Partial reflection : : i >
critical angle :
(1) Mirage, twinkling of stars, scattering of light,
Ans. Totalinternalreflection:Iftheangleofincidence
apparent position of stars
is greater than the critical angle, then all the light
Ans. i  i .Itisreflection,restarerefraction. getsreflectedbackintothedensemedium
Refraction of Light 117

(10) Lens : Transparent : : Mirror : (11) W

 hat is meant by reflection of light?(Can you
Ans. Opaque : Light can pass through the lens whereas recall?; Textbook page no. 73)
in a mirror, light cannot pass through because it Ans. When rays of light fall on a smooth surface they
is covered by a mirror coating on the side. turnback.Thisiscalledreflectionoflight.
Q.1. (A) 4. Answer in one sentence: *(12) Have you seen a mirage which is an illusion of
the appearance of water on a hot road or in a
(1) What is the refractive index of water?
desert? (Can you tell?; Textbook page no. 76).
Ans. The refractive index of water is 1.33.
Ans. Yes. I have seen mirage on hot road during
(2)  ritetheratioofvelocityoflightinfirstmedium
W
summer days.
to the velocity of light in the second medium.
Ans. Refractive index Q.1. (A) 5. Match the pairs:

Velocity of light in the first medium (1) Column A Column B

= (1) Diamond (a) 1.5
Velocity of light in the second medium
v (2) Air (b) 2.42
∴ n = 1
2 1 v2 (3) Alcohol (c) 1.77
(3) What do you mean by dispersion of light? (4) Benzene (d) 1.36
Ans. The process of separation of light into its (e) 1.0003
component colours while passing through a Ans. (1 – b), (2 – e), (3 – d), (4 – a)
medium is called dispersion of light.
(2) Column A Column B
(4) What is critical angle?
(1) Formation of (a) Total internal
Ans. The angle of incidence for which the angle of rainbow reflection
refraction is 90° is called critical angle.
(2) Twinklingofstars (b) Dispersion
(5) What is refraction of light?
(3) Mirage (c) Dispersion,
Ans. Light changes its direction when passing from refraction,
one transparent medium to another transparent reflection
medium. This is called the refraction of light.
(4) Spectrum (d) Atmospheric
(6) What is the value of angle of refraction if angle of
refraction
incidence is 0°?
Ans. If the angle of incidence is zero, then the angle of Ans. (1 – c), (2 – d), (3 – a), (4 – b)
refraction is also zero. (3) Column A Column B
(7) When sunlight passes through glass prism which With respect to
(1) Refraction (a)
light deviates the least? vacuum
Ans. When sunlight passes through glass prism, the Change in
(2) Refractive index (b)
red light deviates the least. direction of light
(8) Whatistotalinternalreflection? Absolute
(3) (c) Spectrum
refractive index
Ans. When the angle of incidence in a denser medium
is more than its critical angle, then the light sin i
reflects back into the denser medium. This is (4) Dispersion (d)
sin r
calledtotalinternalreflection.
(9) Whatispartialreflection? (e) Mirage
Ans. When light enters a rarer medium from denser Ans. (1 - b), (2 - d), (3 - a), (4 - c)
medium, a part of it gets reflected and  comes
back into the denser medium as per laws of Q.1. (A) 6. State whether the following statements
reflection.Thisiscalledpartialreflection. are 'True' or 'False'.

(10) What is absolute refractive index? (1) Lighthasdifferentvelocitiesindifferentmedia.

Ans. The refractive index of medium with respect to (2) The speed of violet light is less than that of red
vacuum is called its absolute refractive index. light.
118 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

(3) Incident ray and refracted rays are parallel to the (d) Changing refractive index of the atmospheric
normal. gases
(4) The refractive index of the medium depends on *(2) If the refractive index of glass with respect to air
the wavelength of light. 3
is , then the refractive index of air with respect
(5) When light rays travel from rarer to denser 2
medium, it bends towards the normal. to glass .
1 1 2
(6) When light ray travels from denser medium to (a) (b) 3 (c) 3 (d)
2 3
rarer medium, it travels parallel to the normal. (3) Wecanseethesunevenwhenitislittlebelowthe
(7) If angle of incidence is zero, then the angle of horizon because of .
refraction is 90°.  (a) eflectionoflight (b) efractionoflight
(8) When light travels obliquely from glass to air, it (c) Dispersion of light (d) Absorption of light
bends away from the normal. (4) When light ray passes from air to glass slab then
(9) The splitting of white light into its component it .
colours is called dispersion. (a) bends towards normal (b) bends away
Ans. (1) True (2) True (3) False. Incident ray and refracted (c) does not bend (d) turn back
ray lie on the opposite sides of normal. (4) True (5) When light passes through glass slab, the incident
(5) True (6) False. Light ray bends away from the normal. ray and emergent ray are .
(7) False. The angle of refraction would also be zero.
(a) intersecting (b) parallel
(8) True (9) True
(c) making an angle (d) touching
Q.1. (A) 7. Name the following:
(6) When light ray travels from denser medium to
(1) The phenomenon of splitting of sunlight into rarer, then it .
spectrum.
(a) bends towards normal
Ans. Dispersion of light (b) bends away from normal
(2) A material whose refractive index is 2.42. (c) goes undeviated
Ans. Diamond (d) deviates randomly
(3) The reason for stars twinkling at night. (7) The velocity of light in air is m/s.
Ans. Atmospheric refraction (a) 3 × 10 10
(b) 3 × 10 8

(4) The ratio of sine of angle of incidence to the sine (c) 1.5 × 10 8
(d) 0.3 × 108
of angle of refraction.
(8) Rakesh performs the experiments on tracing the
Ans. Refractive index path of a ray of light passing through a rectangular
(5) The light ray which gets deviated the least while glass slab for different angles of incidence. He
passing through glass prism. observes that in all cases
Ans. Red light (a) i> r but i= e (b) i < r but i = e
(6) Phenomenon behind formation of rainbow. (c) i> e but i= r (d) i < e but i = r
Ans. Dispersion,totalinternalreflectionandrefraction (9) When a ray of light travels from air to glass and
(7) The unit of refractive index. strikes the surface of separation at 90°, then it
.
Ans. No unit
(a) bends towards the normal
(8) Refractive index of kerosene.
(b) bends away from the normal
Ans. 1.39 (c) passes without bending
Q.1. (B) Choose and write the correct option:  (d) reflectstoair
*(1) What is the reason for the twinkling of stars? (10) A ray of light incident from a denser medium
passes through a rarer medium in a straight line.
(a) Explosions occuring in the stars from time to time
What should be angle of incidence ?
(b) Absorption of light in the earth’s atmosphere
(a) 0° (b) 30° (c) 60° (d) 120°
(c) Motion of stars
Refraction of Light 119

(11) The ray of light gets deviated when it passes The correctly marked angles are:
from one medium to another medium because
.
(a) the colour of light changes r
i
(b) the frequency of light changes e
(c) the velocity of light changes
(d) None of these
(12) A ray of light strikes the glass slab at an angle of
50°. What is the angle of incidence ? (a) i and r (b) i and e
(a) 50° (b) 40° (c) 60° (d) 120° (c) i, e and (d) i, r and e
(13) A glass-slab is placed in the path of convergent (18) Will the light travel through soapy water with the
light. The point of convergence of light same velocity as it travels through air?
.  (a) Yes   (b) No
(a) moves towards the slab (c) Depends on the conditions
(b) moves away from slab (d) None of these
(c) remains at the same point (19) In an experiment to trace the path of a ray of light
 (d) undergoeslateralshift passing through a rectangular glass slab, four
(14) What is the speed of light in a transparent students tabulated their observations as given
medium having absolute refractive index 1.25? below. Which student is correct.
(a) S.N. i r e
(a) 1.25 × 108 m/s (b) 2.4 × 108 m/s
(c) 3.0 × 108 m/s (d) 1.5 × 108 m/s 1. 300 200 300
2. 450 290 430
(15) Which colour of light deviates the least in the
3. 600 360 600
spectrum obtained with a prism ?
(b) S.N. i r e
 (a) ed (b) Yellow (c) Violet (d) Blue
(16) The figure shows the path of ray of light 1. 300 150 380
propagating from medium 1 to medium 2. The 2. 450 200 530
refractive index of medium 1 with respect to 3. 600 280 670
medium 2 is . (c) S.N. i r e
M 1. 300 300 200
2. 450 450 290
Medium 1
3. 600 600 360
30o (d) S.N. i r e
45o
Medium 2 1. 300 200 200
2. 450 290 290
3. 600 360 360
N
(a) a (b) b (c) c (b) d
(a) sin 450 (b) sin 600 (20) If nv, nr, nb are the refractive indices of violet, red
sin 600 sin 450 and blue light respectively, in a given medium
(c) sin 450 (d) sin 30
0 then which of the following is true?
sin 300 sin 450 (a) nv = nb = nr (b) nv > nb > nr
(c) nv > nb < nr (b) nv > nr > nb
(17) After tracing the path of a ray of light through
a glass prism, a student marked the angle of (21) vV = vR= vG are the velocities of violet, red and
indicence ( i), angle of emergence ( e) and the green lights respectively, passing through a prism
angle of deviation ( D) as shown in the diagram. afterdispersionofwhitelight.Whichamongthe
following is a correct relation?
120 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

(a) vV = vR= vG (b) vV < vG= vR v1

Formula: 2n1 = v
(c) vV > vR > vG (b) vV < vR= vG 2
8
Ans. (1) (d) changing refractive index of atmospheric gases Solution: 2n1 = 1.5 × 10 8
0.75 × 10
2 n =2
(2) (d) (3) (b) refraction of light (4) (a) bends 2 1
3
towards normal (5) (b) parallel (6) (b) bends away Refractive index of 2nd medium with respect
from normal (7) (b) 3 × 108 (8) (a) i > r but i = e to 1st is 2.
(9) (c) passes without bending (10) (a) 0° (11) (c) the
velocity of light changes (12) (b) 40° (13) (b) moves *(3) If the speed of light in a medium is 1.5 x 108
away from the slab (14) (b) 2.4 × 108 m/s (15) (a) Red m/s, what is the absolute refractive index of the
sin 600 medium?
(16) (b) (17) (b) i and e (18) (b) No
sin 45 0 Ans. Given: vm = 1.5 × 108 m/s
(19) (a) (20) (b) nv > nb > nr (21) (b) vV < vG= vR vvac = 3 × 108 m/s
To find: mnvac = ?
Q.2.1 Solve the following: vv
Formula: Formula: mnvac = v
m

Refractive index of second medium with respect 8

Solution: mnvac = 3 × 10 8
tofirstmedium, 1.5 × 10
v1 n =2
m vac
n = v
2 1
2 Absolute refractive index of the medium is 2.
v1 = velocityoflightinfirstmedium
v2 = velocity of light in second medium *(4) If the absolute refractive indices of glass and
water are 3/2 and 4/3 respectively, what is the
sin i
Also 2n1 = refractive index of glass with respect to water?
sin r
i = angle of incidence 3 vv
Ans. Given: gnv = =
2 vg
r = angle of refraction
4 vv
*(1) The absolute refractive index of water is 1.36. n = =
w v
3 vw
What is the velocity of light in water? (velocity
To find: n =?
of light in vacuum is 3 × 108 m/s) g w
vw
Ans. Given: wnvac = 1.36 Formulae: gnw =
vg
vvac = 3 × 108 m/s vw
To find: vw = ? Solution : gnw =
vg
vvac vw vv
Formula: wnvac = = ×
vw vg vv
3 × 108 vv vw
Solution: 1.36 = = ×
vw vg vv
3 × 108 3 3
= ×
vw = 2 4
1.36
vw = 2.21 × 108 m/s n = 9
g w 8
The velocity of light in water is 2.21 × 108 m/s Refractive index of glass with respect to water
(2) Light travels with a velocity 1.5 × 108 m/s in a is 9
8
medium. On entering 2nd medium its velocity
becomes 0.75 × 108 m/s. What is the refractive *(5) If the refractive index of second medium with
index of the 2nd medium with respect to the first respect to first medium is 2n1 and that of third
medium. medium with respect to second medium is
Ans. Given: v1 = 1.5 × 108 m/s n What and how much is 3n1? (Can you tell?;
3 2.
Textbook page no. 75)
v2 = 0.75 × 108 m/s
Ans. Refractive index of 2nd medium w.r.t. 1st.
To find: 2n1 = ?
Refraction of Light 121

v1
2 1
n = ........(i) NUMERICALS FOR PRACTICE
v2
(1) The speed of light in a transparent medium is
Refractive index of 3rd medium w.r.t. 2nd.
v2 2.5 × 108 m/s. Find the absolute refractive index of
n =
3 2
........(ii) that medium. (1.2)
v3 3
(2) The refractive index of benzene is and that of
Similarly, 4 2
water is . Find the refractive index of water
n1 = refractive index of 3rd medium w.r.t. 1st. 3
3
v1 v2  8
n = ×
with respect to benzene.  9 
3 1
v3 v2 4
v2 v1 (3) The refractive index of water is and speed of
3
= × 8
light in air is 3 × 10 m/s. Find the speed of light in
v3 v2
From (i) and (ii) water. (2.25 × 108 m/s)
(4) Solveandfillintheblanks
n = 3n 2 × 2n 1
3 1
Sr. Velocity Velocity Refractive Refractive
*(6) If the angle of incidence and angle of emergence No. of light in of light in Index Index
of a light ray falling on a glass slab are i and e the first the second n1 n2
2 1
respectively, then prove that, i = e. medium medium
Ans. v1 v2

Incident ray (1) 3 × 108 m/s 1.2 × 108 m/s

P 4
i Normal
air B (2) 2.25 × 108 m/s
A 3
glass
(3) 2 × 108 m/s 1.5
r
Refracted 2
( ) 2.5 0.4 (2) 08 0.75 ( ) 08 (0.67)
ray r
Q.2.2. Define/write the laws:
D C (1) Refraction of light
e
Ans. The phenomenon of change in the direction of the
S Emergent ray light ray passing from one transparent medium
Fig. 6.1 : Refraction of light passing through a glass slab to another obliquely is called refraction.
(2) Dispersion
1
n = n
2 1 Ans. The splitting of white light into its component
1 2
colours is called dispersion.
1st medium be air
(3) Spectrum
2nd medium be glass
Ans. The band of coloured components of a light beam
1 is called Spectrum.
n = n ........(i)
g a
a g
(4) Angle of incidence
At surface AB
Ans. The angle made by an incident ray with the
sin i normal is called angle of incidence. It is denoted
n = ........(ii)
g a sin r by ‘i’.
At surface CD (5) Angle of refraction
sin r Ans. The angle made by refracted ray with the normal
n = ........(iii)
a g sin e is called as angle of refraction. It is denoted by ‘r’.
Substituting (ii) and (iii) in (i) (6) Laws of refraction
sin i sin e Ans.
=
sin r sin r
(i) The incident ray and the refracted ray are on
sin i = sin e
the opposite sides of the normal at the point of
i=e incidence and all three lie in the same plane.
122 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

(ii) For a given pair of media, the ratio of the sine of (ii) The refractive index of the second medium with
the angle of incidence to the sine of the angle of respect to the first
refraction is constant. medium is given by Ray
v1 Medium 1
If ‘i’ is the angle of incidence and ‘r’ is the angle of the ratio of the Air
sin i magnitude of
refraction, then = constant Medium 2
sin r velocity of light in Glass
This constant is called refractive index of a v
the first medium to 2
medium.
that in the second
*(5) Laws of reflection (Can you recall?; Textbook page
medium. It is Fig. 6.3: Light ray going
no.73)
represented as from medium 1 to medium 2
Ans.
(i) Theincidentray,reflectedrayandthenormalare
n = velocity of light in medium 1
2 1
all in the same plane. velocity of light in medium 2
(ii) Theincidentrayandreflectedrayareonopposite v1
sides of the normal. ∴ n =
2 1
v2
(iii) Theangleofincidenceandangleofreflectionare (iii) The refractive index depends upon the relative
of equal measure. speedofpropagationoflightindifferentmedia.
Q.2.3. Write the short notes on: (iv) Refractive index has no unit.
(1) Dispersion of light (3) Partial and Total internal reflection
Ans. Ans. (For diagram; refer Fig. 6.8, Page No. 114)
(i) When light ray travels from denser medium
to rarer, reflection takes place partially at the
ight interface,thisiscalledpartialreflection.
Sun l R
O (ii) Angle of incidence (i) is smaller than the angle
Y of refraction, (r). If ‘i’ increases gradually, then ‘r’
Glass Prism G
B also increases as refractive index is a constant.
I
V (iii) The angle of incidence for which the angle of
Fig. 6.2 : Dispersion of light
refraction is 90°, is called critical angle.
(i) The process of separation of light into its
(iv) When the angle of incidence in a denser medium
component colours while passing through a
ismorethancriticalangle,thelightreflectsback
medium is called dispersion of light.
into the denser medium. This is called total
(ii)  efractive index of a medium is different for
internalreflection.
differentcolours.
(iii) When white light enters a single medium like (4) Mirage or Have you seen a mirage which is an
glass, the angles of refraction are different for illusion of water on a hot road or desert. Explain.
differentcolours. Ans.
(iv) When white light from the sun through air, enters (i) A mirage is observed on a hot day in the desert or
any refracting medium, it emerges as a spectrum road.
of seven colours. (ii) The air near the hot road or desert surface is hot
(v) Sir Issac Newton was the first person to use a and hence rarer than the air above.
glass prism to obtain sun’s spectrum. (iii) As height increases, the refractive index also
(2) Refractive index increases.
Ans. (iv) The direction of light rays keeps changing due
(i) The ratio of sine of angle of incidence to the sine to refraction and appears to be coming from the
of angle of refraction is called refractive index. image of the object on the ground.
sin i
∴ 1n 2 = (v) This is called a mirage.
sin r
Refraction of Light 123

(5) Rainbow formation or Prove that a rainbow is (ii) They, therefore do not appear as point sources
the combined effect of the refraction, dispersion butappearasacollectionofpointsources.
and total internal reflection of light. (iii) C
 hangesinatmosphericrefractiveindexchanges
Ans. the position as well as the brightness of individual
Light ray point source, but the average position and total
averagebrightnessremainsunchanged.
(iv) As a result of this planets do not appear to
Water droplet twinkle.
(3) We can see the sun even when it is little below
the hori on.
red
Ans.
blue
Internalreflection (i) By sunrise we mean the appearance of the sun
Fig. 6.4: Rainbow formation abovethehorizon.
(i) The beautiful phenomenon of the rainbow is a (ii) When the Sun is somewhat below the horizon, its
combination of different phenomena namely lightraysareabletoreachusalongacurvedpath
dispersion of light, internal reflection and duetotherefractionthroughEarth’satmosphere.
refractionoflight. (iii) Thus we see the Sun even before it emerges above
(ii) The rainbow appears in the sky after a rain thehorizon.
shower. (iv) Samething happens at the time of sunset, we
(iii) Thewaterdropletsactassmallprisms. keepseeingtheSunforashortwhileevenafterit
goesbelowhorizon.
(iv) When sunlight enters the water droplets present
(4) ed colour is used in danger signal.
intheatmosphere,theyrefractanddispersethe
incidentsunlight.Thatresultsinaspectrum. Ans.
(v)  henthelightraysgetreflectedinternallyinside
T (i) In a visible light range, the wavelength of red
thedropletandfinallyagaingetrefracted. lightismaximum,i.e.700nm.
(vi) A
 sacollectiveeffectofallthesephenomena,the (ii) Themaximumscatteringoflightisforbluelight
sevencolouredrainbowisobserved. andtheleastscatteringofredlighttakesplace.
(vii) I n the morning, rainbow can be seen towards (iii) T
 hus,redlightcantraveltolongerdistanceand
west,whileintheevening,itcanbeseentowards canbevisiblefromfaroffdistance.
theEast. (iv) Therefore,thedangersignalsareredcoloured.
(5) It is possible to enjoy a rainbow at fountain in
Q.2.4. Give scientific reasons any season.
(1) Stars twinkle at night. Ans.
Ans. (i) Thephenomenonofrainbowisacombinedeffect
(i) S
 tarsareselfluminousandcanbeseenatnightin ofdispersion,internalreflectionandrefraction.
theabsenceofsunlight. (ii) Therainbowappearsintheskyafterarainfall.
(ii)  heyappeartobepointsourcesastheyareata
T (iii) T
 hewaterdropletsofafountainalsoactassmall
verylargedistancefromus. prismsastheraindrops.
(iii) T
 heapparentpositionofthestarkeepschanging (iv) When the light rays enter these droplets, it first
a bit because of the motion of atmospheric air gets dispersed, then internally reflected and then
andchangingairdensityandtemperature. refractedwhilecomingoutofthedroplets.Allthese
(iv) B
 ecause of this, refractive index of air keeps threeprocessestogetherproducetherainbow.
changingcontinuously. *(6) Will light travel through a glass slab with the
(v) So the position and brightness of the stars keeps same velocity as it travels in air? (Use your brain;
changingandsothestarsappeartobetwinkling. Textbook page no. 74)
(2) Planets do not twinkle. Ans.
Ans. (i) efractiveindexdependsonthevelocityoflight.
(i) Planets are much closer to us as compared to (ii) As refractive index increases, velocity of light
stars. decreases.
124 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

(iii) Since refractive index of glass is greater than air, Light travels along a straight line path in a
the velocity of light in glass is lesser than that in transparent medium. But, it does not travel in the
air. same direction in all media.
*(7) Will the velocity of light be same in all media? The direction of light rays change when it enters
(Use your brain; Textbook page no. 74) from one transparent to another as the velocity of
Ans. lightisdifferentindifferentmedia.
(i) Refractive index depends on the velocity of light. (3) Light rays when travelling from air to water
bends .
(ii)  efractiveindexisdifferentfordifferentmedia.
Ans. Light rays when travelling from air to water bend
(iii) Velocityoflightwillalsobedifferentfordifferent
towards normal.
media.
When light rays travel from rarer medium to
Q.2.5. Label the diagram.
denser medium obliquely, it bend towards
(1)
normal as the velocity of light decreases after
(ii)
entering into denser medium, i.e. water.
(i)
(4) Light rays when travelling obliquely from
Benzene to Air bend .
Ans. Light rays when travelling obliquely from
(iii) Benzene to Air, bend away from the normal.
Generally, when light rays travel obliquely from
denser medium to rarer medium, it bends away
from the normal as the velocity increases after
(iv)
entering air.
Ans. (i) Atmospheric layers (ii) Apparent position Benzene is a denser medium, while air is the rarer
(iii) Horizon (iv) Real position medium. Velocity of light in benzene is less than
(2) that in air.
(iii) (5) The splitting of Sunlight into its component
colours is called .
Ans. T
 he splitting of Sunlight into its component
colours is called dispersion.
(ii)
The band of coloured components of a light beam is
called its spectrum. The various colours are Violet,
Indigo,Blue,Green,Yellow,Orangeand ed.
Q.3.2 Draw neat and labelled diagram for the
(i)
following:
Ans. (i) Internal eflection (ii)Waterdroplet (1) Refraction of light passing through a glass slab.
(iii) Incident Sunlight
Incident ray
Q.3.1. Complete the following statements and explain. A
*(1) The refractive index depends on the B i Air
P N Q
of light.
Ans. The refractive index depends upon the relative r Glass
Refracted ray
speed of propagation oflightindifferentmedia. Refraction i1
This is because light has different velocities in of light
differentmedia. S M C R
e Emergent ray
*(2) The change in of light rays while D Air
going from one medium to another is called
refraction.
Fig. 6.5: Refraction of light passing through a glass slab
Ans. The change in the direction of light rays while
going from one medium to another obliquely is (2) Dispersion of light.
called refraction. Ans. (For diagram, refer Fig. 6.2)
Refraction of Light 125

(3) Partial and total internal reflection.

Ans.

Refracted rays

Air
r r1
r = 90°

Water ic
i i1 i > ic
Total internal
reflection
Light Partialreflection
source Medium 2
Fig. 6.6: i   i  i

(4) Rainbow formation. (ii) Write the colours of the Spectrum?

Ans. (For diagram, refer Fig. 6.4) Ans. Violet, Indigo, Blue, Green, Yellow, Orange and
Red.
Q.4.1. Read the following paragraph and answer the
(iii) What is dispersion?
following questions.
Ans. The splitting of Sunlight or white light into its
(1) In, vacuum the velocity of light radiation component colours is called dispersion of light.
with different wavelength is the same. But in
(iv) What is spectrum?
a material medium, the velocity of different
Ans. The band of coloured components of a light beam
colour radiations is not the same and they
is called as Spectrum.
travel with different paths. Due to this, the
refractive index of the medium is different (v) Which light deviates the least and which one
for different colours. If white beam of light is deviates the most?
incident on a glass prism, the angle of refraction Ans. When light is incident on a surface of a glass
for different colours is different. When prism, the red light deviates the least, while
Sunlight is incident on a refracting surface, violet light deviates the most.
thenitgetssplit ntosevencolouredspectrum (2) The beautiful phenomenon of the rainbow
and emerges out. The splitting of light into is a combination of different phenomena -
its component colours is called dispersion. dispersion, internal reflection and refraction
Sir Isaac Newton was the first to use a glass oflight.Therainbowappearsintheskyaftera
prism to obtain the spectrum of Sunlight. A rainfall. The water droplets act as small prisms.
glass prism is a transparent medium bounded When sunlight enters the water droplets present
by two plane surfaces inclined at an angle. in the atmosphere, they refract and disperse the
When white light is dispersed into seven incident Sunlight. Then, they reflect internally
colours by a prism, different colours of light inside the droplet and finally again refract it.
bend through different angles with respect to Asacollectiveeffectofallthephenomena,the
incident ray. Out of these seven colours, red seven coloured rainbow is observed.
light bends the least, while violet light bends the (i) Which three major phenomena are responsible
most. So, the rays of each colour emerge along for rainbow?
different paths and becomes distinct. Hence, Ans. The three major phenomena responsible for
we get spectrum of seven - different colours. rainbow are dispersion, internal reflection and
refraction of sunlight.
(i) How do emergent rays appear? (ii) How do refraction and dispersion take place?
Ans. The emergent rays appear as a band of colours Ans. When light rays of Sun enter the water droplets of
called spectrum. atmosphere, the refraction of light occurs as the
126 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

medium changes from air to water. The direction (iv) It is found then, that a beam of white light
of light rays also change and at the sametime, due emerges from the other side of the second prism.
todecreaseinthevelocityoflight,thesplittingof *(3) You must have seen chandeliers having glass
light rays result in dispersion. prism. The light from a tungsten bulb gets
(iii) Give a diagrammatic representation of Rainbow dispersed while passing through these prisms
Production. and we see coloured spectrum. If we use on LED
Ans. (For diagram, refer Fig. 6.4) light instead of tungsten bulb, will we be able
to see the same effect? (Use your brain; Textbook
Q.4.2. Activity Activity / Application based Question: page no. 77)
(1) Activity: Ans. Yes.WecanseethesameeffectforLEDlightalso.
(For diagram, refer Fig. 6.5) But the spectrum obtained is not continuous as in
(i) Keep a glass slab on a blank paper and draw its the case of sunlight.
outlineP Sasshowninthefigure. (4) Have you seen that objects beyond and above
(ii) Draw an inclined straight line on the side of a holi fire appear to be shaking? Why does this
PQ so that it intersects PQ at N. Pierce two pins happen? (Can you tell?; Textbook page no. 76). or
vertically at two points A and B along the line. Objects beyond and above a holy fire appear to
(iii) Look at the pins A and B from the opposite side of be shaking. Give scientific reasons.
the slab and pierce pins C and D vertically so that Ans. Yes.
the images of A and B are in line with C and D. (i) Theairneartheholiflameishotterthantheair
(iv) Now remove the chip and the pins and draw a above, hence it is a rarer medium than the air
straight line going through points C and D so above.
that it intersects SR at M. (ii) Because of this change of medium the refractive
(v) Join points M and N. Observe the incident ray index keeps on changing as we go higher and
AN and emergent ray MD. higher above the flame and so the refraction of
Questions: light also changes.
(a) What is your observation about the emergent (iii) Thisgivesashakingeffecttoobjectsbeyondand
ray and incident ray? aboveholyfire.
(5) (a) Complete the diagram. N
Ans. Incident ray and emergent ray lie parallel to each
other. (b) What is the effect on the velocity
glass
*(2) From incident white light how will you obtain of light when it enters water?
Water
white emergent light by making use of two (c) If the light was incident on the
prisms? (Use your brain; Textbook page no. 77) interface at an angle greater than N1
Ans. critical angle; which phenomen
on occurs?
Ans. (a) N

glass
Water

N1
(b) When light enters water, its velocity increases.
Fig. 6.7: Dispersion of light (c) At an angle greater than critical angle, Total
(i) Take a glass prism, Allow white light to fall on it. internal eflectionoccurs.
Obtain a spectrum. (6) (a) Complete the following diagram:
(ii) Take a second identical glass prism. Place it
parallel to the first prism in an upside down Wh
ite
positionwiththefirstprism. ligh
t
(iii) Allow the colours of the spectrum to pass through
the second prism.
Refraction of Light 127

(b) Name the colour that deviates the most and (a) Which phenomenon does the diagram show?
least (b) Which law obeyed by light makes this
(c) Among orange and violet, which colour has phenomenon occur?
highest velocity. (c) Name one more phenomenon in nature where
Ans. (a) the above law is observed.
Ans. (a) Mirage
Wh
ite
ligh (b) efractionoflightorTotalinternal eflection.
t
(c) Formation of Rainbow.
(9) Answer the following questions from the
diagram:
(b) Violet deviates the most and Red deviates the
least. A Medium Air
Incident B
i Normal
(c) The velocity of orange is more than the velocity ray
N
of violet. P R Q
(7) (a) Answer the following questions based on r
the concept of total internal reflection.
(a) What is the angle of incidence called, when angle Refracted ray
of refraction is 900?
(b) State any one phenomenon in nature which is
basedontotalinternalreflection. N1
(c) State any one condition required for total internal S M R
reflection.
e C
Ans. (a) The angle of incidence is called as Critical D
angle. Emergent ray
(b) Mirage or Rainbow formation.
(c) Light should travel from denser medium to rarer (a) How many times does the light undergo
medium. refraction?
OR (b) Which two angles are equal?
Angle of incidence should be greater than critical Ans. (a) The light undergoes refraction 2 times.
angle.
(b) angle of incidence (i) is equal to angle of
(8) emergence (e).

vvv
128 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

ASSIGNMENT - 6
Time : 1 Hr. Marks : 20

Q.1. (A) Attempt the following questions: (3)

(1) Fill in the blanks and rewrite statement.
(i) The wavelength of visible light range for human is .
(2) Find the odd one out:
Brown, Blue, Green, Red
(3) Complete the analogy.

Diamond : Denser medium : : Air :

Q.1. (B) Choose and write the correct option: (2)

(1) The velocity of light in air is m/s.
(a) 3 × 10 10
(b) 3 × 10 8
(c) 1.5 × 108 (d) 0.3 × 108
(2) When light ray travels from denser medium to rarer, then it .
(a) bends towards the normal (b) bends away from the normal
(c) goes undeviated (d) deviates randomly
Q.2. Answer the following: (Any 2) (4)
(1) Write short note on: Laws of refraction.
(2) Givescientificreasons: edcolourisusedindangersignal.
(3) Solve: If the speed of light in a medium is 1.5 × 108 m/s, what is the absolute refractive index of the
medium?

Q.3. Answer the following: (Any 2) (6)

(1) Draw neat and labelled diagram for partial and total internal refraction.
(2) Complete the following statement and explain.
(i) The change in of light while going from one medium to another is called refraction.
(3) If the angle of incidence and angle of emergence of a light ray falling on a glass slab are i and e
respectively, prove that, i = e.

Q.4. Answer in detail. (Any 1) (5)

(1) With a neat labelled diagram explain Rainbow Formation.
(2) (A) Definerefraction  N

(B) (i) Complete the diagram. glass

Water
  (ii) Whatistheeffectonthevelocityoflight  
when it enters water?
N1
(iii) If the light was incident on the interface at an angle greater than critical angle; which phenomen
on occurs?
vvv
 7 Lenses
CONCEPT MAP
(1)
Lenses

Uses Simple microscope

Concave lens Convex lens
(Diverging) (Converging) Compoundmicroscope
Position of
object Position of Refracting telescope
object TelescopeTypes
eflectingtelescope
AtInfinity Between 2F1 & F1
Image Image
HumanEye
At F1 Between F1 & O
EyeDefect

Myopia Hypermetropia Presbyopia

Unable to see Unable to see Inold-age,

distantobjects nearbyobjects unable to see
nearbyobjects
Correctedby Correctedby Correctedby
Concave lens Convex lens Convex lens

AtInfinity At focus (F1) Beyond2F1 Between F1 & 2F1 At 2F1 Between F1 & O
Image Image Image Image Image Image

At Focus (F2 ) AtInfinity Between F2 & 2F2 Between 2F2 At 2F2 Onthesameside
as that of object

(129)
130 Master Key Science and Technology Part - 1 (Std. X)

Points to Remember:
zz A lensisatransparentmediumboundedbytwo surfaces; out of which atleast one surface is spherical.
zz Alenshavingbothsurfacesspherical,bulgingoutward,isaconvex lens or double convex lens. It is thicker at
thecentreascomparedtoitsedges.Thislenscanconvergethelightincidentonit.So,itisaconverginglens.
zz Alenshavingbothsurfacesspherical,bulginginward,isaconcave lens or double concave lens. It is thinner
atthecentreascomparedtoitsedges.Thislenscandivergethelightincidentonit.So,itisadiverginglens.
zz Double convex, plano – convex, concavo convex, positive meniscus, negative meniscus are the types of
convex lenses.
zz Centerofcurvature(C):Thecentresofspherewhosepartsformsurfacesofthelensesarecalledcentreof
curvature of lenses. Each lens has two centre of curvature C1andC2.
zz  adiusofcurvature( ):Theradii( 1
and 2)ofspherewhosepartsformsurfacesofthelensesarecalledthe
radii of curvature of the lens.
zz Principalaxis:Theimaginarystraightlinepassingthroughthetwocentresofcurvaturesoflens(C)iscalled
principal axis of the lens.
zz Opticalcentre(O):-Thecentralpointofalensontheprincipalaxisthroughwhichlightrayspasswithout
changingtheirpathiscalledoptical centre.
zz PrincipalFocus(F):Thepointontheprincipalaxiswherealltheincidentraysareparalleltotheprincipalaxis
actuallymeetorappeartomeetafterrefractionfromsphericallensiscalledPrincipal focus of a spherical
lens.Everylenshastwo principal foci.
zz Focallength(f):Thedistancebetweentheopticalcentreandtheprincipalfocusiscalledfocal length of that lens.
zz Imagesformedbysphericallensescanbestudiedwiththehelpofraydiagrams.Ray diagrams are useful
tostudytheposition,relativesizeoftheobjectandtheimage.Italsohelpstoknowthenatureoftheimage
formedbythatlens.
zz Followingaretherulesforobtainingimagesbyconvex lens :
i) Rule 1: If the incident ray is parallel to the principal axis, then the refracted ray passes through the
principal focus (F).
ii) Rule 2: If the incident ray is passing through the principal focus, then the refracted ray is parallel to
the principal axis.
iii) Rule 3 : If the incident ray of light passes through the optical centre of lens, it passes without changing
its direction.
zz Position,relativesizeandnatureofimageformedbyaconvexlensforvariouspositionsoftheobject.

Sr. No. Position of the object Position of the image Size of the image Nature of the image
1 AtInfinity At Focus F2 Highlydiminished, ealandinverted
Point-Sized
2 Beyond2F1 Between F2and2F2 Smaller ealandinverted
3 At 2F1 At 2F2 Samesize ealandinverted
4 Between F1and2F1 Beyond2F2 Larger ealandinverted
5 At Focus F1 AtInfinity VeryLarge ealandinverted
6 BetweenOandF1 Onthesamesideofthe VeryLarge Virtualanderect
lens as the object
zz FollowingaretherulesforobtainingimagesbyConcave lens.
Rule 1 :Whentheincidentrayisparalleltotheprincipalaxis,therefractedraywhenextendedbackwards,
passes through the principal focus.
Rule 2: Whentheincidentraypassesthroughthefocus,therefractedrayisparalleltotheprincipalaxis.
Rule 3: Whentheincidentraypassesthroughopticalcentre,itpassesundeviated.
Lenses 131

zz Position, relative size and nature of image formed by a Concave lens for various positions of the object.

Sr. No Position of the object Position of the image Size of the image Nature of the image

1 AtInfinity On the 1st Focus F1 Point Image Virtualanderect

Anywherebetweenoptical
2 BetweenOandfirstfocusF1 Small Virtualanderect
centreOandInfinity

zz Lensformula:Theformulashowingrelationbetweendistanceoftheobject(u),thedistanceoftheimage(v)
andthefocallength(f)iscalledlens formula. 1 – 1 = 1
v u f
zz Linearmagnification:Magnificationistheratioofheightoftheimage(h2) to the height of the object (h1)
Height of Image
Magnification= h2
Height of object ∴ M =
h1

zz Magnificationisalsorelatedtoobjectdistance(u)andImagedistance(v).
Distance of Image
Magnification= v
∴ Distance of object ∴ M =
u

zz Poweroflens(P):Thecapacityofalenstoconvergeordivergeincidentraysiscalleditspower(P).Thepower
ofalensdependsuponitsfocallength(f).
1
zz Iffocallengthisexpressedinmetre,thepoweroflensisexpressedindioptre. ∴ P=
f(m)
zz Onedioptreisthepowerofalenswhosefocallengthis1metre.
1
1 dioptre =
1 metre
zz Combination of lenses : If two lenses of focal lengths f1andf2areplacedtogetherthentheircombinedfocal
lengthcanbegivenby,
1 1 1
= +
f f1 f2
zz Combinedpowerorpowerofcombinationoftwolensesisgivenby,P = P1 +P2
zz Humaneyeandfunctionofitslens:-
 (a) Theoutermostthin,transparentmembraneofthehumaneyeiscalledcornea.
 (b) L
 ightenterstheeyethroughitandmaximumamountofincidentlightisrefractedinsidetheeyeattheouter
surface of the cornea.
 (c) Thereisadark,fleshyscreenbehindthecorneacalledtheIris.
 (d) T
 hereisasmallholeofchangingdiameteratthecentreofiriscalledthepupil. It controls the amount of light
enteringtheeye.
 (e) I fthelightfallingoneyeistoobrightitcontractsandifthelightfallingoneyeistoodimitwidens.
 (f) B
 ehindthepupilthereisadoubleconvextransparentcrystallinelens,whichprovidessmalladjustmentofthe
focallengthtofocustheimage.Thislensalsocreatesrealandinvertedimageofanobjectonthescreeninside
theeye.
 (g) Thescreenconsistoflightsensitivecellscalledretina.
 (h) Thesecellsgetsexcitedwhenlightfallsonthemandtheygenerateelectricsignals.
 (i) Signalsareconveyedtothebrainthroughoptic nerve.
 (j) T
 hebrainthusanalysesthesesignalsandconvertstheminsuchawaythatweperceivetheobjectsasthey
actuallyare.
zz Thepowerofaccommodation:Thecapacityoftheeyelenstochangeitsfocallengthasperneedisknownas
power of accommodation.
132 Master Key Science and Technology Part - 1 (Std. X)

zz Myopia(nearsightedness):Thetypeofeyedefectinwhichpersoncan see nearby objectsclearlybutcannot

see distant objectsclearlyiscalledMyopia or nearsightedness.Myopiacanbecorrectedbyusingaspectacle
of concave lensofsuitablefocallength.Aconcavelenswithnegativepowerisrequiredforcorrectingmyopia.
zz Hypermetropia(longsightedness):Thetypeofeyedefectinwhichapersoncan see distant objectsclearly
but cannot see nearby objectsclearlyiscalledHypermetropia or farsightedness. A convex lens with positive
powerisrequiredforcorrectingHypermetropia.
zz Presbyopia(oldagehypermetropia):Thepower of accommodationofeyeusuallydecreases with increasing
age. The nearpoint of aged people recedes and they find it difficult to see nearby objects comfortably and
clearlywithoutspectacle.
zz Uses of concave lens: Medical apparatus scanner,CD player,spectacles,etc.useconcavelens.
zz Usesofconvexlenses:OpticalinstrumentslikeSimple microscope,Compound microscope,Astronomical
telescope,etc.makeuseofconvexlens.
1 th
zz Persistence of vision: The sensation of the image lasts on the retina for ofasecondevenaftertheimage
16
 is vanished from the eye. This effect is called persistence of vision. Motion pictures and TV work on this
principle.
zz Colour blindness: Some people cannot distinguish certain colours as they lack conical cells responding to
certaincolours.Theycannotevenidentifycertaincolours.Thesepeoplearecalled‘colourblind’eventhough
theireyesightisnormal.

(13)  he focal length of a healthy eye in relaxed

T
MASTER KEY QUESTION SET - 7
position is .
Q.1. (A) 1. Fill in the blanks: (14) The cells are responsible for the
(1) The focal length of lens is positive. perception of colours.
(2) Inhypermetropia,theimageisformed (15)  hepowerofconvexlensis0.5D.Hence,itsfocal
T
the retina. length is .
(3) Thepowerofmyopiceyeis . (16) The image of the object at is on the
principal focus.
(4) Myopia can be corrected by using spectacle of
(17)  he image formed by
T  is always
lens.
virtual.
(5) The isthedistancebetweenoptical (18)  hetendencyofpupiltoadjusttheopeningfor
T
centreandprincipalfocus.
lightiscalled .
(6)  he ability of lens to converge or diverge light
T
(19) T
 hediameterofhumaneyeballis .
raysdependson of the lens.
Ans. (1) convex (2) behind (3) negative (4) concave
(7) The power of convex lens with focal length 40 cm
(5) focal length (6) power (7) 2.5 D (8) positive (9) 25
is .
(10) 1 th (11) cornea (12) simple microscope (13) 2 cm
(8) The lens with  power is used to 16
correctfarsightedness.  ( ) i ( 5)2 ( )i i ( 7) v 
(9) Thedistanceofdistinctvisionforhumaneyeis (18) adaptation (19) 2.4 cm
cm. Q.1. (A) 2. Find the odd word out:
(10) The impression of an image lasts on retina for (1) Cornea,iris,pupil,cerebrum.
ofsecond.
Ans. Cerebrum; it is a part of brain while others are the
(11) Thelightentertheeyethrough . partsofhumaneye.
(12) An optical device used by watch repairers is
.
Lenses 133

(2) Spectacle,microscope,torch,camera. (7) Near point : 25cm :: Far point: .

Ans. Torch Concavelensisusedinitwhileinothers Ans. Infinity
mainlyconvexlensisused. Q.1. (A) 4. Match the columns:
(3) L
 ongsightedness,myopia,shortsightedness, (1)
nearsightedness. Column A Column B
(1) Microscope (a) To observe
Ans. Longsightedness  it is corrected by convex lens
celestial objects.
whileothersarecorrectedbyconcavelens.
(2) Telescope (b) Watch repairers.
(4) P
 resbyopia,nightblindness,myopia,
(3) Simple microscope (c) Correctionofeye
hypermetropia. defect
Ans. Night blindness  it is a deficiency disease while (d) To observe tissue
othersareeyedefects.
Ans. (1 – d), (2 – a), (3 – b)
(5) C
 ompound microscope, astronomical telescope,
simplemicroscope,floodlight. (2) Column A Column B
Ans. Flood light  It contains mirrors/reflectors while (1) Persistence of (a) 2.4 cm
others contain lens. vision
(2) Distance of (b) 1 th
Q.1. (A) 3. Complete the analogy:
distinctvision 16 ofasecond
(1) Convex lens: Converging :: Concave lens: (3) Diameterofeye (c) 2 cm
. ball
Ans. Diverging : Light rays parallel to the principal (4) Focal length of (d) 25 cm
axisappeartobedivergingfromprincipalfocus healthyeyelens
in concave lens. Ans. (1 – b), (2 – d), (3 – a), (4 – c)
(2) Object at 2F1 : Image at 2F2 :: Object at F1 :
. (3) Mirror Uses

Ans. Imageatinfinity:Inconvexlenswhentheobject (1) Plane mirror (a) Rear view mirror

is at the focus, a very large, real and inverted (2) Concave mirror (b) At laughing
imagewillbeformedatinfinity. gallery
(3) Convex mirror (c) Atahairdresser
(3) Myopia : Concave lens :: Farsightedness :
. (4) Irregularcurved (d) Atadentist
mirror
Ans. Convexlens:Convexorconverginglensisused
tocorrecttheFarsightedness. Ans. (1 – c), (2 – d), (3 – a), (4 – b)

(4) Concave lens : Negative focal length :: convex (4) Column A Column B
lens : . (1) Microscope (a) Prism
Ans. Positive focal length : Focal length of a convex (2) Telescope (b) Spectacles
lens is positive according to cartesian sign having convex
convention. lenses
(5) Convex lens : Positive power :: Concave lens: (3) Presbyopia (c) To observe
. distantobjects

Ans. Negative power : The power of concave lens is (4) Dispersion of light (d) Observation of
plantandanimal
negativeasthepowerdependsonfocallength.
cells
(6)  od cells : Sensitive to dim light :: Cone cells: (e) Weaknessof
. ciliarymuscles
Ans. espondtocolours:Theconicalcellsrespondto Ans. (1 – d), (2 – c), (3 – e), (4 – a)
colourandgiveinformationaboutthecolourof
the object to the brain.
134 Master Key Science and Technology Part - 1 (Std. X)

(2) True (3) True. (4) False. Pigment in iris gives

(5) Column A Column B
   . (5) .  i i   
(1) Microscope (a) Torchesand
maximum refracted as it passes through cornea.
headlights
(6)True (7) False. Optic nerve takes the impulse
(2) Telescope (b) Observation of
   i .(8) . i   i 
plantandanimal
lasts on the retina for 1 th of a second. (9) True
cells 16
(3) Simple microscope (c) To observe ( 0) .   i   v 
distantobjects lenses are used.
(4) Concave mirror (d) Watch repairers
Q.1. (A) 6. Answer the following in one sentence:
(e) Correctionofeye
defect (1) I ftheobjectisatinfinityfromaconvexlens,what
Ans. (1 – b), (2 – c), (3 – d), (4 – a) wouldbeitssize?
Ans. Iftheobjectisatinfinity,thentheimagewillbe
*(6) Column A Column B Column
highlydiminishedpointimage.
C
(2) Write the lens formula.
(1) Farsightedness (a) Nearby (i) Bifocal
1 1 1
object can lens Ans. The lens formula is – =
be seen v u f
 w
 hereu-objectdistance,v-imagedistanceand
clearly
f is focal length.
(2) Presbyopia (b) Faraway (ii) Concave
object can lens (3) Namethetypesoftelescopes.
be seen Ans. efractingtelescopeandreflectingtelescopeare
clearly thetwotypesoftelescopes.
(3) Nearsightedness (c) Problem of (iii)Convex
(4) Howishypermetropiacorrected?
oldage lens
Ans. Hypermetropia is corrected by using spectacles
Ans. (1 – b – iii), (2 – c – i), (3 – a – ii)
of convex lens of suitable focal length.
Q.1. (A) 5. State whether the following statements (5) Howismyopiacorrected?
are ‘True’ of ‘False’. If false; write the correct Ans. Myopia is corrected by using spectacles of
statement: concave lens of suitable focal length.
(1) A lens is an opaque object. (6)  ywhichlensthematchstickcancatchfireinthe
B
(2)  yopia can be corrected by using a spectacle of
M sunlight?
concave lens. Ans. Byusingconvexlens,amatchstickcancatchfire
(3)  ypermetropia can be corrected by using a
H in the sunlight.
spectacle of convex lens. (7) Whatispersistenceofvision?
(4) Corneagivescolourtotheeye. Ans. The impression of the image lasts on the retina for
1
(5)  he light is first and maximum refracted as it
T thofasecond.Thesensationonretinapersists
16
passesthrougheyelens.
 forawhile.Thisiscalledpersistenceofvision.
(6)  heperceptionofcoloursisconcernedwithcone
T
(8) Whatisprincipalfocus?
cells.
Ans. The point on the principal axis where all the
(7) Auditorynervetaketheimpulsefromeyetobrain.
incidentraysparalleltotheprincipalaxisactually
(8) Impression of an image lasts on the retina for
1
meetorappeartomeetafterrefractioniscalled
10
th of a second. principal focus.

(9) The focal length of a convex lens is positive. (9) Whatisfocallength?

(10) I nthecompoundmicroscope,twoconcavelenses Ans. Thedistancebetweenopticalcentreandprincipal

areused. focusofalensiscalledfocallength.
Ans. (1) False. A Lens is a transparent object.
Lenses 135

(10) Whatisthedistanceofdistinctvision? (9)  onvex lens of power +5 D and concave lens
C
Ans. Theminimumdistanceatwhichanobjectshould with power -3 D are placed together, then the
beplacedfromanormaleyesothattherewon’t combinedpoweris .
be any strain on the eye is called distance of (a) 5 D (b) +3 D (c) 2 D (d) 2D
distinctvision.Fornormalhumaneyeitis25cm.
(10) I nsimplemicroscope, lensisused.
(11) Whatdoyoumeanbypowerofaccommodation?
 (a) Concave (b) Cylindrical
Ans. T
 hecapacityofthelenstoadjustitsfocallength
asperneediscalleditspowerofaccommodation.  (c) Diverging (d) Convex
(12) W
 hy do we have to bring a small object near (11) T
 he perception of dim light is concerned with
theeyesinordertoseeitclearly.(   i  cells.
Power; Textbook Page 89)
 (a) od  (b) Cone
Ans. Ifwebringsmallobjectsneartheeyes,theangle
 (c) Amoeboid (d) Squamous
subtendedbytheobjectattheeyebecomeslarge
whichmakestheeyetoseetheobjectclearly. (12) The impression of an image lasts on the retina fo
Q.1. (B) Choose and write the correct option: 1 thofasecond,iscalled .
16
(1) F
 orthenormalhumaneye,thedistanceofdistinct
vision is  (a) dispersion
 (a)15cm (b)20cm (c)25m (d)25cm (b) refraction
(2) The power of a convex lens of focal length 50 cm (c) persistence of vision
is .  (d) internalreflection
(a) 2 D (b) 0.2 D (c) 50D (d)0.5D (13) T
 hesecondfocalpointislocatedat
(3) The focal length of a concave lens with power ofahumaneye.
-4Dis . (a) Retina (b) Optic nerve
(a) –0.5 m (b) 0.5 m (c) –0.25 m (d)0.25m  (c) Cornea (d) Pupil
(4) I ftheincidentraypassesthroughfocus,thenthe
refractedrayis to the principal axis. (14) F
 oraConvexlens,iftheincidentrayisparallel
totheprincipleaxis,thentherefractedraypasses
(a) parallel (b) opposite
throughthe, .
 (c) perpendicular (d) intersecting
(a) Centre (b) Pole
(5) T
 he image is formedon the of the
 (c) Opticalcentre (d) Principalfocus
humaneye.
(a) Cornea (b) Retina (15) I nsidewater,anairbubblebehaves .
 (c) Pupil  (d) Ciliarymuscle  (a) likeaflatplate
(6) I f an object is placed between F1 and 2F1 of a  (b) likeaconcavelens
convexlens,thennatureoftheimageformedis  (c) likeaconvexlens
.
 (d) likeaconcavemirror
 (a) ealandinverted
 (b) ealanddiminished (16) T
 oobtainanimageofthesamesizeastheobject
withthehelpofaconvexlens,theobjectshould
 (c) Virtual,erect
beplaced .
 (d) Virtual,inverted
 (a) atinfinity (b) beyondF1
(7) I n myopia, objects can be seen
(c) between F1and2F2 (d) at2F1
clearly.
 (a) distant (b) nearby (17) Atwhatdistanceshouldawatchmakerholdhis
 (c) small  (d) big  lensfromthewatch?

(8) L
 ongsightednesscanbecorrectedbyusing (a) At the focal length
lens. (b) At less than focal length
 (a) cylindrical (b) concave (c) At more than the focal length
 (c) diverging (d) converging  (d) Atzerodistance
136 Master Key Science and Technology Part - 1 (Std. X)

(18) When we enter a dark room, pupil of our eye Type: A
.
Problems based on the formulae:
 (a) contracts (b) expands
v=imagedistance
 (c) remainssame (d) noneofthese 1 1 1
– = u=objectdistance
Ans. (1) (d) 25 cm; (2) (a) 2 D; (3) (c) –0.25 m; v u f
f=focallength
(4) (a) parallel ; (5) (b) retina (6) (a) Real and inverted ;
(7) ( )   (8) ( )  v i   (9) ( )  2   (1) An object is placed at a distance of 15 cm from
(10) (d) convex; (11) (a) Rod ; (12) (c) persistence a convex lens. If the focal length of the lens is
of vision (13) (a) retina ; (14) (b) principal focus ; 60 cm, find the image distance.
(15) (d) like a concave lens ; (16) (d) at 2F1 ; (17) (b) At Ans. Given:Objectdistance(u)= 15cm
less than focal length (18) contracts  Focallength(f)=60cm
Q.2.1. Solve the following: To find:Imagedistance(v)=?
 Use the following ray diagrams and tips for 1 1 1
solving the numericals. Formula: – =
v u f
1 1 1
Solution: – =
v u f
h1 1 1 1
∴ = +
v f u
h2
u v 1 1 1
∴ = +
v 60 (–15)
Fig 7.1
1 1 1
∴ = –
h2 v 60 15
1 15 – 60
∴ =
v 900
h1
1 – 45
∴ =
u v 900
1 –1
v ∴ =
v 20
∴ v= 20cm
Fig 7.2
Tips: The image of the object is formed at a distance
(1) If h2isnegative,thenimageis ealandInverted of 20 cm on the same side of the lens.
(2) If h2ispositive,thenimageisVirtualandErect (2) An object is placed at a distance of 10 cm from
(3) h1 greater than h2,imageisdiminished a convex lens of focal length 12 cm. Find the
(4) h1 smaller than h2,imageismagnified position and nature of the image.
(5) vispositivethenimageisonothersideoflens Ans. Given: Objectdistance (u)= 10cm
 visnegativethenimageisonsamesideoflens.   Focallength (f)=12cm
(6) fis+ve,itisconvexlens,correctsHypermetropia To find:ImagePosition(v)=?
orFarsightedness   Natureofimage=?
(7) fis-ve,itisconcavelens,correctsMyopiaorNear 1 1 1
Sightedness. Formulae: – =
v u f
1 1 1
Solution: – =
v u f
Lenses 137

∴ f= 30cm
1 1 1
∴ = + f = – 30cm, Since, f is –ve,
v f u
Lens is concave i.e. diverging lens.
1 1 1
∴ = + Type: B
v 12 –10
Problems based on the formulae:
1 1 1
∴ = – v=distanceoftheimage
v 12 10 1 1 1
– = u=distanceoftheobject
v u f
1 10 – 12 f=focallength
∴ = h2 v M=magnification
v 12 × 10 M= =
h1 u h2=heightofimage
1 –2 h1=heightofobject
∴ =
v 12 × 10
(1) An object 6 cm tall is placed in front of a convex
1 –1 lens at a distance of 18 cm. If the image is formed
∴ =
v 60 at a distance of 9 cm on the other side of lens,
find the height of the image.
∴ v= 60cm
The image is formed at a distance of 60 cm on Ans. Given: Height of the object (h1)=6cm
the same side of the lens, it is a virtual and  Distanceoftheobject(u)= 18cm
erect image.  Distanceoftheimage(v)=9cm

*(3) An object kept 60 cm from a lens gives a virtual To find: Height of the image (h2)=?
image 20 cm in front of the lens. What is the h2 v
Formula:M= =
focal length of the lens? Is it a converging lens h1 u
or diverging lens? Solution:
Ans. Given: Objectdistance (u)= 60cm v × h1
h2=
  Imagedistance (v)= 20cm u
To find:Focallength(f)=? 9×6
∴ h2=
1 1 1 –18
Formulae: – = 6
v u f ∴ h2=
Solution: –2
∴ h2= 3cm
1 1 1
= – The height of the image is 3 cm and it is
f v u inverted.
1 1 1
∴ = – *(2) An object is placed vertically at a distance of
f –20 –60 20 cm from a convex lens. If the height of the
object is 5 cm and the focal length of the lens is
1 –1 1
∴ = + 10 cm, what will be the position, size and nature
f 20 60 of the image? How much bigger will the image
1 –60 + 20 be as compared to the object?
∴ = Ans. Given: Height of the object (h1)=5cm
f 20 × 60
  Focallength(f)=10cm
1 –40
∴ =   Distanceoftheobject(u)= 20cm
f 20 × 60
To find:Imagedistance(v)=?
1 –1
∴ = Height of the image (h2)=?
f 30   Magnification(M)=?
138 Master Key Science and Technology Part - 1 (Std. X)

1 1 1 1 1 1
Formulae: (i) – = ∴ = +
v u f v f u
h2 v 1 1 1
∴ = +
(ii) = v 10 – 25
h1 u
Solution:
1 1 1
1 1 1 ∴ = –
(i) – = v 10 25
v u f
1 25 – 10
1 1 1 11 ∴ =
∴ = + =  + v 250
v –20 10 20 10
1 15
1 10 + 20 ∴ =
∴ = v 250
v 20 x10
1 3 50
1 10 ∴ = ,v= =16.666
∴ = v 50 3
v 200
∴ v = 16.7 cm
∴ v = 20 cm
h2 v
h2 v (ii) =
(ii) = h1 u
h1 u 50
v × h1 h2
∴ h2= ∴ =
3
u 5 –25
20 × 5
∴ h2= –10
–20 ∴ h2= 50 × 5= = 3.333
3 × 25 3
∴ h = –5 cm
∴ h2 = – 3.3 cm
v 20
(iii) M= = = 1 Position of image = 16.7 cm
u –20
Size of the image = 3.3 cm
∴ M = –1 Nature = Real and inverted
The object and the image are of the same Type: C
size. Image is real and inverted
Problems based on the formulae:
*(3) 5 cm high object is placed at a distance of 1
25 cm from a converging lens of focal length P= Dioptre
f (m)
10 cm. Determine the position, size and type of
the image. Note:

Ans. Given: Height of the object (h1)=5cm Whenwehavenumericalinpowerandfocallength:

  Focallength(f)=10cm • Focallengthshouldbeinmetre.

  Distanceoftheobject(u)= 25cm
• Powershouldbeindioptre.

To find:Imagedistance(v)=? *(1) The focal length of a convex lens is 20 cm. What

Height of the image (h2)=? is the power?
20
1 1 1 Ans. Given: Focallength(f)=20cm= m
100
Formula: – =    =0.2m
v u f
To find:Poweroflens(P)=?
Solution:
1 1 1 1
(i) – = Formula:P=
v u f f (m)
Lenses 139

1 ∴ f = 0.4 m
Solution:P=
f (m) The focal length of the lens is 0.4 m.
1 10
∴ P= = *(4) Three lenses having power 2, 2.5 and 1.7 D are
0.2 2
kept touching in a row. What is the total power
∴ P=5D
of the lens combination?
Power of lens is 5 dioptre. Ans. Given: P1=2D
*(2) Doctor has prescribed a lens having power P2=2.5D
+1.5D. What will be the focal length of the lens? P3=1.7D
What is the type of the lens and what must be
To find: Ptotal=?
the defect of vision?
Ans. Given: Poweroflens(P)=1.5D Formula: Ptotal=P1 + P2 + P3

To find:Focallength(f)=? Solution: Ptotal=P1 + P2 + P3

1 ∴ Ptotal=2+2.5+1.7
Formula:P=
f (m) ∴ Ptotal=6.2D
1 Total Power of combination is 6.2 D.
Solution:P=
f (m) Q.2.2. Define the following:
∴ 1
f= (1) Centres of curvatures (C)
P
Ans. The centres of the spheres whose parts form
1
∴ f= surfaces of the lenses are called centres of
1.5 curvature of the lens.
10 (2) Radii of curvatures (R)
∴ f=
15 Ans. T
 heradiiofthesphereswhosepartsformsurfaces
ofthelensesarecalledradiiofcurvatures.
2
∴ f= =0.67m (3) Principal axis
3
Ans. T
 he imaginary line passing through the centres
Since f is +ve, lens used is convex, f = 0.67 m ofcurvatureiscalledprincipalaxis.
The defect is Hypermetropia (farsightedness) (4) Optical centre (O)
(3) Calculate the focal length of a corrective lens Ans. T
 heimaginarypointonthelensthroughwhichthe
having power + 2.5 D. lightraypassesundeviatediscalledopticalcentre.
Ans. Given:Poweroflens(P)=2.5D (5) Principal Focus (F)
To find:Focallength(f)=? Ans. The point on the principal axis where all the
incidentraysparalleltotheprincipalaxisactually
1
Formula: P= meetorappeartomeetiscalledprincipalfocus.
f (m) (6) Focal length (f)
1 Ans. Thedistancebetweenopticalcentreandprincipal
Solution::P= dioptre
f focusiscalledfocallengthofalens.
1
∴ f= (7) Convex lens
P Ans. A lens having both the spherical surfaces bulging
1 outwardisaconvexlens.
∴ f=
2.5 (8) Concave lens
1 × 10 Ans. A
 lenshavingboththesphericalsurfacescurved
∴ f= inwardsisaconcavelens.
2.5 × 10
(9) Real image
10 2
∴ f= = Ans. T
 he image obtained when the refracted rays
25 5 actuallymeeteachotheriscalledarealimage.
140 Master Key Science and Technology Part - 1 (Std. X)

(10) Virtual image (15) Adaptation of pupil.

Ans. The image obtained when the refracted rays Ans. T
 hetendencyofthepupiltoadjusttheopening
appeartomeetiscalledavirtualimage. forlightiscalledadaptation.
(11) Converging lens (16) Iris
Ans. Thelenswhichconvergesthelightincidentonit Ans. T
 hedarkmusculardiaphragmbehindcorneais
iscalledconverginglens. callediris.
(12) Diverging lens (17) Pupil
Ans. Thelenswhichdivergesthelightincidentonitis Ans. T
 he small opening of variable diameter at the
calleddiverginglens. centreofirisiscalledthepupil.
(13) Lens (18) Power of accommodation
Ans. A lens is a transparent medium bounded by Ans. T
 heabilityofthelensofadjustingfocallengthis
twosurfaces,outofwhichatleastonesurfaceis knownaspowerofaccommodation.
spherical. (19) Distance of distinct vision
(14) Retina Ans. T
 he minimum distance from the normal eye,
Ans. The light sensitive screen in the human eye is at which the objects can be seen clearly and
calledretina. distinctlywithoutanystraintotheeyeisknown
asthedistanceofdistinctvision.
Q.2.3. Distinguish between:
*(1) Farsightedness and Nearsightedness.
Ans. Farsightedness/ Hypermetropia Nearsightedness/ Myopia
(i) Curvatureofcorneaandeyelensdecreases (i) Curvatureofcorneaandeyelensincreases
(ii) Eyeballflattensslightly. (ii) Eyeballelongatesslightly.
(iii) Image of the nearby object falls behind the (iii) Imageofthenearbyobjectfallsontheretina.
retina.
(iv) Imageofthedistantobjectfallsontheretina. (iv) Imageofthedistantobjectfallsinfrontofthe
retina.
(v) Thisdefectiscorrectedbyusingaspectacleof (v) Thisdefectiscorrectedbyusingaspectacleof
convex lens of suitable focal length. concave lens of suitable focal length.

*(2) Concave lens and Convex lens.

Ans.
Concave lens Convex lens
(i) Itisalsocalledasdiverginglens. (i) Itisalsocalledasconverginglens.
(ii) Thislensisthinnerinthecentrethanatitsedges. (ii) Thislensisthickeratthecentrethanatitsedges.
(iii) The principal focus is virtual. (iii) The principal focus is real as well as virtual.
(iv) The focal length is negative. (iv) The focal length is positive.
(v) Thislensisusedtocorrectmyopia. (v) Thislenscanbeusedtocorrecthypermetropia.

(3) Real image and Virtual image.

Ans.
Real Image Virtual Image
(i) Whentherefractedraysactuallymeet,thereal (i) When the refracted rays appear to meet, the
imageisformed. virtualimageisformed.
(ii) ealimagecanbetakenonthescreen. (ii) Virtualimagecannotbetakenonthescreen.
(iii) ealimageisalwaysinverted. (iii) Virtual image is erect (upright).
(iv) In a ray diagram, real image is formed on (iv) In a ray diagram, virtual image is formed on
oppositesideoflens. samesideoflens.
Lenses 141

Q.2.4. Give scientific reasons: (v) Hence,wecanidentifyanddifferentiatecolours

*(1) Simple microscope is used for watch repairs. in presence of light.
Ans. (4) Convex lens is also called a converging lens.
(i) A magnifying glass works on the principle of Ans.
simple microscope. (i) Whenlightraysparalleltotheprincipalaxisare
(ii) Whenanobjectisplacedwithinthefocallength incident on a convex lens, they converge to a
of a convex lens we get a virtual, erect and point on the principal axis.
magnifiedimageonthesamesideofthelens. (ii) Thispointiscalledtheprincipalfocus.
(iii) Thisprincipleisusedbythewatchrepairertosee
(iii) Lightrayparalleltotheprincipalaxisfallingon
thesmallpartsmoreclearly.Hence,watchmakers
a convex lens come together, i.e. get focused at
use a magnifying glass while repairing
principal focus. So this type of lens is called a
wristwatches.
converging lens.
*(2) We cannot clearly see an object kept at a distance (5) Concave lens is also called as diverging lens.
less than 25 cm from the eye. Ans.
Or (i) ays travelling parallel to the principal axis of
If we bring an object closer than 25 cm from the aconcavelensdivergeafterrefractioninsucha
eyes, why can we not see it clearly even though waythattheyappeartobecomingoutofapoint
it subtends a bigger angle at the eye? (   on the principal axis.
brain power; Textbook Page 89) (ii) This point is called the principal focus of the
Ans. concave lens.
(i) The minimum distance at which an object is
(iii) Light rays parallel to the principal axis falling
placedfromthenormaleyesothatitcanbeseen
on a concave lens go away from one another
clearly without giving any strain on the eye is
(diverge)afterrefraction.So,thistypeoflensis
calledthedistanceofthedistinctvision.
calleddiverginglens.
(ii) Thisdistanceis25cmforanormalhumaneye.
(6) You can not enjoy watching a movie or television
(iii) If the object is placed at a distance less than 25 from a very short distance from the screen.
cm,ciliarymusclesareunabletoadjustthelens
Ans.
thereisastrainontheeyeanditcannotbeseen
(i) If a person is very close to the screen, then the
clearly.
intensityoflightfallingontheeyeismore.
(iv) Hence an object should be placed at 25 cm or
(ii) Theabilityofanormaleyeorpupiltoadjustthe
moretohaveaclearandsharpimageofitonthe
openingforlightiscalledadaptation.
retina.
(iii) As the light is bright, the pupil contracts and
*(3) One can sense colours only in bright light.
exposure in this condition for longer period of
Ans.
timecangiveanadditionalstrainontheeye.
(i) Thelightsensitivescreenoftheeyecalledretina
(iv) Duetothis,personcannotenjoywatchingmovie
hastwotypesoflightsensitivecells.
ortelevisionprogramsittingclosetothescreen.
(ii)  od cells are concerned with intensity of light
(7) A concave lens is used to correct myopia.
and cone cells are responsible for the vision in
presence of light. Ans.
(iii) Cone cells are also concerned with colour (i) In Myopia, the curvature of the cornea and eye
perception. They do not respond to dim light lensincreases.Duetothis,convergingpowerof
or no light. od cell respond to faint light but lens remains large.
conicalcellsdonot. (ii) Also the eyeball elongates so that the distance
(iv) Conecellscanfunctiononlyinbrightlight. betweenthelensandretinaincreases.
142 Master Key Science and Technology Part - 1 (Std. X)

(iii) A concave lens of suitable focal length can create Height of the image
required divergence, hence, after convergence ∴ Magnification=
Height of the object
by eye lens sharp image of the distant object is h2
formed on the retina and the defect is be corrected. ∴ M= ... (i)
h1
(8) Old people sometimes use bifocal glasses.
Magnification can also be calculated by the
Ans. ratio of the image distance (v) to the object
(i)  ew old people, suffer from both myopia and
F distance (u).
Image distance
hypermetropia. ∴ Magnification=
object distance
(ii) In such cases a bifocal lens is required to correct
v
the defect. The upper part is concave lens to ∴ M= ... (ii)
correct myopia and lower part is convex lens to u
correct hypermetropia. From (i) and (ii),
h2 v
(iii) The concave lens is useful for distant object vision ∴ M= =
and convex lens for nearby object vision. h1 u
(iv) Hence, old people sometimes use bifocal glasses. (3) What is the Power of lens?

(9) Hypermetropia can be corrected by using Ans.

convex lens. (i) The capacity of a lens to converge or diverge
Ans. incident rays is called its power (P).

(i) In hypermeteropia curvature of the cornea and (ii) The power of a lens depends on its focal length
eye lens decreases so that the converging power (f):
of the lens becomes less. (iii) Power of lens is the reciprocal of focal length in
(ii)  uetotheflatteningoftheeye ballthedistance
D meters.
between the lens and retina decreases. 1
∴ Poweroflens=
(iii) This defect can be corrected by using a convex focal length (metre)
1
lens. This lens converges the incident rays which ∴ P=
are further converged by retina to get a sharp f (m)
image of nearby object on the retina. (4) What do you mean by combined focal length?
(10) Why do we have to bring a small object near Ans. The reciprocal of combined focal length is equal
the eyes in order to see it clearly. (Use your brain to the sum of the reciprocals of focal lengths of
power; Textbook Page 89) number of all lenses placed together.
Ans. 1 1 1
∴ = + where f - combined focal length,
(i) The Apparent size of an object depends on the f f1 f2 f1 - focal length of 1st lens,
angle subtended by the object at the eye.
f2 - focal length of 2nd lens.
(ii) When the object is closes to the eye. The angle
subtended is larger and it appears bigger, hence (5) What is the use of astronomical telescope?
we have to bring a small object near eye. Ans. Astronomical telescope is used to observe the
celestial objects like stars and planets.
Q.3.1. Answer the following questions:
(1) Which are the different types of lens? (6) Enlist the functions of Iris.
Ans. In all, there are six different types of lenses, Ans. Functions of Iris are:
namely, bi-convex, plano-convex lens, Positive (i) To decide the size of the pupil.
Meniscus, bi-concave lens, plano-concave lens (ii) To give colour to the human eye.
and Negative Meniscus.
(7) Write the uses of concave lens.
*(2) What is magnification? Write its formula.
Ans. The uses of concave lens are as follows:
Or
What is the relation between h1, h2, u and v. (i) Concave lens are used to correct Myopia.
(Use your brain power; Textbook Page 85) (ii) In Peep hole of the outside door.
Ans. The ratio of height of image (h2) to the height of (iii) I n flash lights to magnify light produced by
the object (h1)iscalledMagnification(M). bulb.
Lenses 143

(8) Write the uses of convex lens. (v) Brain processes all the information received and
Ans. we see the actual image of the object.
(i) Watch repairers use simple microscope which (vi) Thus conical cells are responsible for perceiving
has convex lens.
differentcolours.
(ii) To correct hypermetropia, a spectacle of convex
lens is used. *(13) What are real and virtual images? How will you
(iii) Astronomical telescope, compound microscope find out whether an image is real or virtual? Can
are the optical instruments where two convex a virtual image be obtained on a screen? (Can
lenses are used. you Recall; Textbook Page 82)
(9) What is persistence of vision? Ans.
Ans. (i) I f the reflected or refracted rays from the lens
(i) We see an object because the eye lens creates its actually meet at a point when light rays from the
image on the retina. object are incident on it, then the image formed is
(ii) The image is on the retina as long as the object is Real and it can be seen on a screen.
in front of us. The image disappears as soon as
 I f the reflected or refracted rays from the lens
the object is taken away.
appear to meet at a point when light rays from the
(iii) However, this is not instantaneous and the image
object are incident on it, then the image formed is
remains imprinted on our retina for 1 th of a
16 called virtual.
secondaftertheobjectisremoved.
(ii) If the images are inverted then they are real and
(iv) The sensation on retina persists for a while. This
if they are erect then they are virtual.
is called persistence of vision.
(iii) Virtual images cannot be obtained on a screen.
(10) What is colour blindness?
Ans. *(14) Indicate the following terms related to spherical
mirrors in figure: Poles, centre of curvature,
(i) Some people are unable to identify or distinguish
radius of curvature, principal focus. (Can you
certain colours due to the lack of cone cells in the
retina. Recall; Textbook Page 80)
Ans.
(ii) This is a hereditary disorder and linked with X
Radius of curvature
chromosomes.
(iii) This defect/disorder is called colour blindness Centre of
and person is called colour blind. curvature
(iv) It is mostly for the recognition of red and green Pole
colour. M P of the
Principal axis C
*(11) What is the function of iris and the muscles mirror
connected to the lens in human eye?
Ans.
(i) An iris in human eye imparts colour to the eye.
(ii) The muscles connected to the lens in the human Fig 7.1
eye adjust the focal length of eye lens. *(15) How are concave and convex mirrors
*(12) How do we perceive different colours? (Can you constructed? (Can you Recall; Textbook Page 80)
tell; Textbook Page 91) Ans.
Ans.
(i) The retina in our eyes is made up of many light
sensitive cells. A
(ii) These cells are shaped like a rod and like a cone.
B
(iii) The rod like cells respond to the intensity of light
and give information about the brightness or
dimness of the object to the brain.
(iv) The conical cells respond to the colour and give
information about the colour of the object to the Fig 7.2
brain.
144 Master Key Science and Technology Part - 1 (Std. X)

(i)  enerally, concave and convex mirror are

G *(4) A ray diagram for object position between 2F1
spherical mirrors. and F1 for a convex lens.
(ii) Spherical mirrors are parts of a hollow glass sphere A
likethepartBinthefigure.
(iii) Theinneroroutersurfaceofthispartiscoatedwith
F2 B’
ashinysubstancetoproducesphericalmirror.
2F1 B F1 O 2F2
Q.3.2. Draw well labelled diagrams for the following.
(1) A ray diagram for object position at infinity for
a convex lens or convergence of rays by convex
lens. Image position:Beyond2F2
Nature: eal,invertedandmagnified. A’
A
Fig 7.6
*(5) A ray diagram for object positioned at F1 for a
O convex lens.
2F1 F1 F2 2F2
A

B
B
Image position: At F2 2F1 F1 O F2 2F2
Nature: eal,invertedandhighlydiminished.
Fig 7.3
*(2) A ray diagram for object position beyond 2F1
for a convex lens. Image position:Atinfinity
A Nature: eal,invertedandhighlymagnified.
Fig 7.7
*(6) A ray diagram for object position between F1
F2 B’ and O for a convex lens.
B 2F1 F1 O 2F2 A’

A’
Image position: Between F2 and2F2
A
Nature: eal,invertedanddiminished.
Fig 7.4
*(3) At which position will you keep an object in B’ 2F1 F1 B O F2 2F2
front of a convex lens so as to get a real image of
the same si e as that of the object ? Draw a figure.
Or
A ray diagram for object position at 2F1 for a Image position:Onthesamesideoflensastheobject.
convex lens. Nature: Virtual,erectandmagnified.
A Fig 7.8
*(7) Divergence of rays by concave lens.
B F2 2F2
2F1 F1 O B1

A1
Image position: At 2F2 O
Nature: eal,invertedandofsamesize. 2F1 F1
Fig 7.5
Image position: At F1
Nature: Virtual,erect,highlydiminished
Fig 7.9
Lenses 145

(8) Ray diagrams showing images obtained by Q.4.1. Answer the following in brief.
concave lens. *(1) Draw a figure explaining various terms related
D to a lens.
P A Ans. Concepts related to lens:
P1

S1 A
2F1 Q F1 Q1 O S2
R1 2 1
Image position:Onthesamesideoflens
O
Nature: Virtual,erect,diminished
i 7. 0     v C1 C2
R2
(9) The structure of Human eye.
Muscles B
Ciliarymuscles

Iris
Fig 7.13a Cross section of convex lens
Pupil Optic
nerve S2
Crystalline S1
lens Optic A B
disc 1 O 2 R2
Cornea R1

Sclerotic C1 C2
coat Retina
Choroid
i 7.     D C

(10) The change in the shape of the lens while seeing b

distant and nearby objects.
Fig 7.13b Cross section of ccncave lens
Lensbecomesflat

(i) Centre of curvature (C): The centres of spheres

whose parts form surfaces of the lenses are
calledcentresofcurvaturesofthelenses.Alens
with both surfaces spherical, has two centres of
Light coming
curvature C1andC2.
fromadistant
object (ii) Radius of curvature (R): The radii ( 1 and 2)
of the spheres whose parts form surfaces of the
Fig 7.12a
lensesarecalledtheradiiofcurvatureofthelens.
Lens becomes
rounded (iii) Principal axis: The imaginary line passing
through both centres of curvature is called the
principal axis of the lens.
(iv) Optical centre (O): The point inside a lens on
the principal axis, through which light rays
Light coming pass without changing their path is called the
fromanearby optical centre of a lens. In figure 7.14, rays
object P1Q1,P2Q2 passing through O are going along a
straightline.Thus,Oistheopticalcentreofthe
Fig 7.12b
lens.
146 Master Key Science and Technology Part - 1 (Std. X)

P1 Q2  L
 ightrays parallel to the principal axis falling on
aconvexlenscometogether,i.e.getfocusedata
pointontheprincipalaxis.So,thistypeoflensis
calledaconverginglens.
  ays travelling parallel to the principal axis of
P3 Q3
aconcavelensdivergeafterrefractioninsucha
O waythattheyappeartobecomingoutofapoint
on the principal axis. This point is called the
principal focus of the concave lens. As shown in
figure7.15(b)F1andF2 are the principal foci of
P2 Q1 the concave lens.
 L
 ight rays parallel to the principal axis falling
P1
Q2 on a concave lens go away from one another
(diverge)afterrefraction.So,thistypeoflensis
calledadiverginglens.
(vi) Focal length (f):Thedistancebetweentheoptical
P3 Q3 centre and principal focus of a lens is called its
O focal length.
(2) Enlist the rules for drawing ray diagrams of
convex lens.
Ans. Following are the rules for obtaining images by
P2 Q1 convex lens.

Fig 7.14 Optical centre of a lens

Incidentray
(v) Principal focus (F): When light rays parallel to efractedray
theprincipalaxisareincidentonaconvexlens,
they converge to a point on the principal axis. F1 O F2
This point is called the principal focus of the
lens.Asshown in figure 7.15a F1 and F2 are the
principal foci of the convex lens.
Fig 7.16
  ule(i):Whentheincidentrayisparalleltothe
principal axis, the refracted ray passes through
principal focus (F2).
F1 F2
f
efractedray

Fig 7.15 (a) Principal focus of a convex lens F1 O F2

Incidentray

Fig 7.17

F1 F2   ule (ii): When the incident ray passes through

the principal focus (F1), the refracted ray is
f
parallel to the principal axis.

Fig 7.15 (b) Principal focus of concave lens

Lenses 147

Q.4.2. Explain the following with the help of a diagram:

Incidentray (1) Myopia or Nearsightedness

F1 O F2

eflectedray Nearbyobjectscanbeseenclearly

Fig 7.18
 ule(iiii):Whentheincidentraypassesthrough
Myopiceye
the optical centre of the lens it passes without
changingitsdirection. Concave lens

*(3) What is the Cartesian sign convention used

for spherical mirrors? (    
CorrectionofNearsightedness
Page 84)
Ans. According to the Cartesian sign convention, Fig 7.20 Nearsightedness
the pole of the mirror is taken as the origin. (i) Person having myopia can see nearby objects
The principal axis is taken as the X axis of the clearlybutthedistantobjectsappearindistinct.
frame of reference. The sign conventions are as (ii) Innearsightedness,theimageofadistantobject
follows. forms in front of the retina. There are two reasons
forthisdefect.
Direction of Y-axis
(a)  he curvature of the cornea and the eye lens
T
incidentrays increases, so that the converging power of the
Distance distanceson distanceson
lens remains large.
upward theleft( ve) the right (+ve)
(b)  heeyeballelongatessothatthedistancebetween
T
(+ve) Principal axis thelensandtheretinaincreases.
Distance P X-axis
(iii) T
 hisdefectcanbecorrectedbyusingspectacles
downward with concave lens of proper focal length.
(–ve)
(iv) T
 his lens diverges the incident rays and these
divergedrayscanbeconvergedbythelensinthe
Fig 7.19 eyetoformtheimageontheretina.
(i)  heobjectisalwayskeptontheleftoftheboth
T (2) Hypermetropia or Farsightedness
mirrors. All distances parallel to the Principal
axisaremeasuredfromthepoleofthemirror.
(ii)  ll distances measured towards the right of
A
the pole are taken to be positive, while those Farawayobjectscanbe
measuredtowardsleftaretakentobenegative. seenclearly
(iii)  istancesmeasuredverticallyupwardsfromthe
D
principalaxisaretakentobepositive.
(iv)  istancesmeasuredverticallydownwardsfrom
D Hypermetropiceye
theprincipalaxisaretakentobenegative. Convex lens
(v) The focal length of concave mirror is positive
while that of a convex mirror is negative.
CorrectionofFarsightedness
Fig 7.19 Farsightedness
148 Master Key Science and Technology Part - 1 (Std. X)

(i) I nhypermetropia,apersoncanseedistantobjects (i) Acompoundmicroscopeismadeoftwoconvex

clearlybutcannotseenearbyobjectsdistinctly. lensesobjectiveandeyepiece.
(ii)  he images of nearby objects are formed
T (ii) The axes of both lenses are along the same line.
behind the retina. There are two reasons for Thelensesarefittedinsideametallictubeinsuch
farsightedness. awaythatthedistancebetweencanbechanged.
(a) C
 urvatureofthecorneaandtheeyelensdecreases (iii) T
 he objective has smaller cross-section and
sothat,theconvergingpowerofthelensbecomes smaller focal length. The eye piece has bigger
less. cross section, its focal length is also larger than
(b) D
 ue to the flattening of the eyeball the distance that of the objective.
betweenthelensandretinadecreases. (iv) H
 igher magnification can be obtained by the
(iii) T
 his defect can be corrected by using a convex combinedeffectofthetwolenses.
lens with proper focal length. This lens converges (v)  he magnification occurs in two stages. The
T
theincidentraysbeforetheyreachthelens. imageformedbythefirstlensactsastheobject
(iv) The lens then converges them to form the image forthesecondlens.
on the retina.
*(5) Explain the working of an astronomical
(3) Presbyopia telescope using refraction of light.
(i) P
 resbyopia is an age related vision problem. Ans.
Thevisionbecomesblurred.Becauseofthisold
F0 Fe
peoplecannotseenearbyobjects.
(ii)  enerally the focusing power of the eye lens
G
decreases with age. The muscles near the lens
loosetheirabilitytochangethefocallengthofthe
lens.Thenearpointofthelensshiftsfartherfrom Fe
theeye.
Eyepiece
(iii) P
 resbyopiacanbecorrectedbyusingspectacleof Objective lens
convex lens of suitable focal length.
(iv) S
 ometimes people suffer from nearsightedness Fig 7.21
aswellasfarsightedness.Insuchacase,bifocal (i) Telescope is used to see distant objects clearly
lensesarerequiredtocorrectthedefect. in their magnified form. The telescopes used to
observe astronomical sources like the stars and
(v) I nsuchlenses,theupperpartisconcavelensand
theplanetsarecalledastronomicaltelescopes.
correctsnearsightednesswhilethelowerpartisa
convexlenswhichcorrectsthefarsightedness. (ii)  bjective lens has large diameter and larger
O
focal length because of which maximum amount
(4) Compound microscope
of light coming from the distant object can be
collected.
Object u
Fe (iii) O
 n the other hand the size of the eyepiece is
smalleranditsfocallengthisalsoless.Boththe
Fo
u lenses are fitted inside a metallic tube in such
Objective lens
a way that the distance between them can be
Eyepiece
changed.
(iv) W
 henraysoflightentertheobjective,theyrefract
andgivearealinvertedanddiminishedimage.
Image
(v)  he eye piece is so adjusted that the image
T
becomes an object for the eyepiece and gives a
Fig 7.20
Lenses 149

virtual, enlarged and inverted image w.r.t to (ii) Due to the flattening of the eye ball the
object. distance between the lens and retina
Q.4.3. Application Based Questions: decreases.
(c) P=+2D
(1) Answer the questions based on the following
1 1
diagrams:  f= =
P 2
 =0.5m
∴focallength=0.5metre
(d) Convexlens.
(1)
(3) V ay is 16 yr old and wears a spectacle having a
power of -2D. Answer the following questions:
(a) Namehiseyedefect.
(b) Statetworeasonswhythisdefectiscaused?
(2) (c) Compute the focal length of his lens.
Ans.
(a) Myopia.
(b) (i) Thecurvatureofthecorneaandtheeyelens
increases,sothattheconvergingpowerof
(3)
the lens remains large.
Fig 7.22  (ii) The eyeball elongates so that the distance
betweenthelensandtheretinaincreases.
(a) Namethedefectshowninfigure(1).
(c) P= 2D
(b) Givetworeasonsforthisdefect. 1
 f=
(c) Inwhichfigureisthedefectcorrected,infigure p
(2)or(3)? 1
 = 
Ans. 2
 = 0.5m
(a) Myopia.
∴focallength= 0.5m
(b) (i) Thecurvatureofthecorneaandtheeyelens
increases,sothattheconvergingpowerof (4) Ankit developed an eye defect at the age of 65
the lens remains large. yrs and had to wear a lens of power +3D. Answer
the following questions:
 (ii) The eyeball elongates so that the distance
betweenthelensandtheretinaincreases. (a) Nametheeyedefect.
(b) Statetworeasonswhythisdefectiscaused?
(c) Figure (2)
(c) Compute the focal length of his lens.
(2) Selwyn is 16 yr old and wears a spectacle
Ans.
having a power of +2 D. Answer the following
(a) Presbyopia.
questions:
(b) Thefocusingpoweroftheeyelensdecreaseswith
(a) Nametheeyedefecthehas.
age.Themusclesnearthelenslosetheirabilityto
(b) Statetworeasonswhythisdefectiscaused? change the focal length of the lens. The near point
(c) Compute the focal length of his lens. ofthelensshiftsfurtherthantheeye.
(d) Whichlensisusedbyselwyn? (c) P=+3D
1
Ans.  f=
p
(a) Hypermetropia.
1
(b) (i) Curvature of the cornea and the eye lens  =
3
decreasessothat,theconvergingpowerof  =0.33m
the lens becomes less..
∴focallength=0.33m
150 Master Key Science and Technology Part - 1 (Std. X)

(5) (iv) Inaraydiagram, (iv) Inaraydiagram,

Screen real image is virtual image is
formedonopposite formedonsame
Candle Convex lens sideoflens. sideoflens.

(5)
B

2F1 F1 0 F2 2F2

Fig 7.23
A
(a) Whatchangesinthepositionofthecandleshould
Fig 7.24
bemadetoobtainavirtualandenlargedimage?
(b) Whatisnatureofimageformedifaconcavelens (i) LabelAandBinthediagram.
isusedinsteadofaconvexlens? (ii) Explain the functions of A.
(c) Stateanyonepointofdifferencebetweenareal Ans.
andvirtualimage. (i) A Cornea,B ciliarymuscles.
Ans. (ii) Maximum refraction of light occurs on the cornea.
(a) Toobtainavirtualandenlargedimage,thecandle (5) Name of the two lenses A and B
(object)shouldbeplacedbetweenF1andO.
(b) Ifaconcavelensisused,theimagewillbevirtual
anderect.
(c) ealimageandVirtualimage

Real Image Virtual Image

(i) Whentherefracted (i) Whentherefracted
raysactuallymeet, raysappearto
the real image is meet,virtualimage A B
formed. isformed. Fig 7.25
(ii) Real image can be (ii) Virtual image can Ans. (i) Lens A – positive meniscus.
takenonthescreen. notbetakenonthe
(ii) Lens B – negative meniscus.
screen.
(iii) Real image is (iii) Virtual image
alwaysinverted. isalwayserect
(upright).

vvv
Lenses 151

ASSIGNMENT - 7
Time : 1 Hr. Marks : 20

Q.1. (A) Fill in the blanks: (3)

 (1) Myopiacanbecorrectedbyusingspectacleof lens.
 (2) Thetendencyofpupiltoadjusttheopeningforlightiscalled .
(3) In simple microscope lensisused.
Q.1. (B) Choose and write the correct option: (2)
(1) Farsightedness can be corrected by using lens.
(a) cylindrical (b) concave (c) diverging (d) converging

  (2) Theperceptionofdimlightisconcernedwith cells.

(a) od (b) Cone (c) Amoeboid (d) Squamous

Q.2. Answer the following: (Any 2) (4)

(1) Anobjectisplacedatadistanceof15cmfromaconvexlens.Ifthefocallengthofthelensis60cm,
findtheimagedistance.
(2) Givescientificreasons: Wecannotclearlyseeanobjectkeptatadistancelessthan25cmfromeye.
 (3) Distinguishbetweenfarsightednessandnearsightedness.
Q.3. Answer the following: (Any 2) (6)
(1) Drawaneatandlabelleddiagramofhumaneye.
(2) A5cmhighobjectisplacedatadistanceof25cmfromaconverginglensoffocallengthof10cm.
Determinetheposition,sizeandtypeoftheimage.
(3) Drawaneatandlabelledraydiagramforconvexlens.
  (i)Whenobjectisbeyond2F1 (ii)Whenobjectisatinfinity
Q.4. Answer the following: (Any 1) (5)
(1) Explaintheworkingofanastronomicaltelescopeusingrefractionoflight.
(2) Writeashortnoteon(i)Hypermetropia. (ii)Myopia
vvv
 8 Metallurgy
CONCEPT MAP
Elements
Types

Metals Metalloids Non - metals

rt ies oc
e cu e.g. Si, Ge, As e.g. C, S, P
op occur as ri
Pr n
Physical
Ores Natural state e.g.
Gold, Platinum
Chemical Extraction of metal
Concentration of ores
Processed for extraction

Metals of high Metals of medium Metals of low

reactivity reactivity reactivity
are present as occur as
Electrolysis of Sulphide ore
are reduced
molten ore Carbonate ore to oxides Sulphide ore

Calcination process Roasting method

Pure metal
converted to
Heating

e.g. Na, Al, Mg Oxide of metal

Metal
Reduction of metal
oxide to metal efining

Purificationofmetal e.g. Cu, Hg

e.g. Zn, Fe

(4) The metals that produce a sound on striking on

MASTER KEY QUESTION SET - 8 hard surface are said to be .
Q.1. (A) 1. Fill in the blanks and rewrite the complete (5) The ability of metals to be drawn into wires is
statement : called .
(1) Elements that possess both the properties of (6) The alkali metals from group 1 such as Lithium,
metals and non metals are called . Sodium, and Potassium are very .
(2) and metals exist in (7) Metal tungsten has the highest melting point
liquid state at room temperature. .
(3) The metallic lustre goes on due to (8) Non - metal bromine exists in .
exposure to atmospheric oxygen.
(9) is the hardest natural substance.
(152)
Metallurgy 153

(10) Metals react with oxygen to form . (2 )  i  (22) i  (23) 

(11) The metals; aluminium, iron and zinc do not react (2 ) i i (25) i (2 ) iv  
with but they react with (27) i i  i  (28)  (29)
to form their oxides. (30)  .
(12) Metals react with Nitric acid to form Q1. (A) 2. Select the odd man out:
. (1) Copper, Gallium, Gold, Silver.
(13) The arrangement of metals in the increasing Ans. Gallium: It is a metal in the liquid state and all
or decreasing order of reactivity is called the
others are in solid state.
.
(2) Silver, Gold, Platinum, Calcium
(14) is a highly corrosive and fuming
liquid. Ans. Calcium: Found in combined state,others are in
free state.
(15) Non - metals are also called .
(16) Non - metals combine with oxygen to form (3) Water, Ammonia, Sodium chloride, Hydrogen
. chloride.
(17) The compounds formed from two units, namely Ans. Sodium chloride: It is an ionic compound others
cation and anion are called . are covalent compounds.
(18) Ionic compounds are in nature. (4) K2O, Na2O, CaO, Al2O3.
(19) The Science and Technology regarding the Ans. Al2O3: Others are basic oxides Al2O3 is an
extraction of metals from ores and their amphoteric oxide.
purificationfortheuseiscalled . (5) Malleability,Ductility,Brittleness,Lustre.
(20) is an ore of tin. Ans. B
 rittleness: It is the property of non - metals,
(21) A freshly prepared mixture of concentrated HCl others are properties of metals.
and concentrated HNO3 in the ratio of 3:1 is
(6) Graphite, Iodine, Silver, Phosphorous.
known as .
Ans. Silver: It is a metal, others are non metals.
(22) Aluminium is extracted from its ore
. (7) Sodium oxide, Zinc oxide, Potassium oxide,
(23) The conversion of bauxite ore into alumina is magnesium oxide.
done by a process called . Ans. Zinc oxide: It is an amphoteric oxide others are
(24) In process carbonate ores are basic oxides.
strongly heated. (8) Steel, Iron, Copper, Tungsten.
(25) In process sulphide ores are strongly Ans. Steel: It is an alloy, others are metals.
heated. (9) Galvanizing, Tinning, Anodizing, Roasting.
(26) Metals such as , and
Ans. Roasting: It is a process of metallurgy, Others are
do not react with water at all.
methods to prevent corrosion.
(27) Anodizing is a process of forming a thick layer of
(10) Brass, Bronze, Steel, Antimony.

(28) The impurities present in an ore are called as Ans. Antimony: It is a metalloid and others are alloys.
. Q.1 (A) 3. Find out the correlation:
(29) If one of the metal is mercury, then the alloy is (1) Metal : Reducing agent : : Non - metal :
known as
(30) Copper reacts with moist carbon dioxide in the Ans. Oxidising agent - Metals are electron donors
air and slowly loses its shine to gain a green coat therefore metals are reducing agents. Non metals
of . accept electrons and so nonmetals are oxidising
Ans. (1) Metalliods (2) Mercury, Gallium (3) decreasing. agents.
( )  (5) i i  ( )  (7) 3 22 . (2) Brass : Copper and zinc : : Bronze :
(8) liquid state (9) Diamond (10) metal oxides Ans. Copper and Tin - Bronze is an alloy of copper and
(11) water, steam (12) Nitrate salts (13) reactivity Tin.
series of metals (14) Aqua Regia (15) electronegative
(3) Aluminium : Bauxite : : Mercury :
 ( ) i i  i  ( 7) i i  
( 8) i  ( 9)  (20) i i Ans. Cinnabar - The ore of mercury is cinnavar
154 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

(4) Cryolite : AlF3.3NaF : : Fluorspar : Q.1. (A) 5. State whether the following statements
Ans. CaF2-Flurspariscalciumflouride. are true or false, correct the false statements.
(5) Alumina : Al2O3 : : Sodium aluminate : (1) In the alloy, if one of the metals is mercury then,
Ans. NaAlO2 - Sodium aluminate is an intermediate in it is known as Amalgam.
the extraction of A1. (2) In the process of ‘Kalhaee’ a metal is coated with
(6) Coating of tin over metal : Tinning : : Coating of Zinc to prevent its corrosion.
zinc over iron : (3) Nitric acid is a strong oxidizing agent.
Ans. Galvanization - The process of applying a coating (4) Non - metals react with acids to give a salt and
of zinc on Iron is called galvanisation. hydrogen gas.
Q.1 (A) 4. Match the columns: (5) The elements or compounds which occur
naturally is earth’s crust are known as minerals.
*(1) Substance Property
(6) Ionic compounds have low melting points.
(1) Potassium bromide (a) Combustible
(7) Alloys are resistant to corrosion.
(2) Gold (b) Soluble in water
(8) Non - metals are good conductors of heat and
(3) Sulphur (c) No chemical
electricity.
reaction
(4) Neon (d) High ductility (9) Metals gain electrons and become negatively
charged ions.
Ans. (   ) (2  ) (3  ) (   )
(10) Metal iron is more reactive than metal copper.
*(2) Column A Column B
(11) Non - metals combine with oxygen to form basic
(1) Bauxite (a) Mercury
oxides.
(2) Cassiterite (b) Aluminium
(12) The minerals from which the metal can be
(3) Cinnabar (c) Tin separated economically are called ores.
Ans. (   ) (2  ) (3  ) (13) Stannic oxide (SnO2) is magnetic and Ferrous
(3) Column A Column B tungstate (FeWO4) is a non - magnetic ingredient.
(1) React vigorously (a) Silver and (14) Ore contains some impurities, these are called
with cold water. Copper gangue.
(2) React with hot (b) Iron and Zinc (15) The process of separating gangue from the ores is
water called concentration of ores.
(3) React with steam (c) Calcium
(16) The reactivity of metals increase down to
(4) React less (d) Sodium and reactivity series.
vigorously with Potassium
(17) ElectronicconfigurationofAluminiumis2,8,2.
cold water
(5) Do not react with (e) Magnesium (18) Cryolite (Na3AlF6) and Fluorspar ( CaF2) are used
water to increase the melting point of alumina.
Ans. (   ) (2  ) (3  ) (   ) (5  ) (19) Electrolysis is the method used to obtain pure
metals from impure metals.
(4) Column A Column B
(20) The process of converting sulphide ores into
(1) Wilfleytable (a) SnO2 and FeWO4
oxides by heating strongly in excess of air is
method
(2) Hydraulic (b) CuFeS2 called calcination.
separation (21) Iodine is a lustrous metal.
method Ans. ( ) (2) .       
(3) Magnetic (c) Ball mill i  i  i   v i  i  (3) 
separation (4) False. Metals react with acids to give a salt and
method  (5) ( ) . i   v
(4) Froth Floatation (d) Ore soaked in a i  i  i (7) (8) .   
method solution      i i (9) . 
(5) Leaching (e) Law of gravitation     i iv  i
Ans. (   ) (2  ) (3  ) (   ) (5  ) ( 0) ( ) .   i  i  
Metallurgy 155

to form acidic oxide (12) True (13) False. Stannic oxide Q.1. (B). Choose and write the correct options.
(SnO2) is a non - magnetic and Ferrous tungstate (1) is not a metalloid.
(FeWO4) is a magnetic ingredient (14) True (15) True (a) Silicon (b) Antimony
(16) False. The reactivity of metals decreases down the
(c) Germanium (d) Aluminium
ivi  i  ( 7) . i  i 
(2) has the highest melting point.
 i i  (2 8 3) ( 8) . i  ( 3AlF6)
 ( ) are used to lower the melting (a) Tungsten (b) Copper
2
i   i  ( 9)  (20) .   (c) Iron (d) Zinc
 v i  i  i  i   i  (3) is the most reactive metal.
strongly in air is called roasting (21) False. Iodine is a (a) Potassium (b) Magnesium
lustrous non-metal. (c) Calcium (d) Sodium
Q.1 (A) 6. Name the following : (4) is the formula of cuprite.
*(1) Alloy of sodium with mercury. (a) Cu2O (b) Cu2S (c) CuCO3 (d) CuCl2
Ans. Sodium amalgam. (5) Cassiterite is an ore of
*(2) Molecular formula of the common ore of (a) Copper (b) Silver
aluminium. (c) Calcium (d) Tin
Ans. Al2O3.nH2O (6) Metal oxides are generally in nature.
*(3) The oxide that forms salt and water by reacting (a) Acidic (b) Basic
with both acid and base. (c) Neither acidic nor basic
Ans. Aluminium oxide, Zinc oxide (All Amphoteric (d) Both acidic and basic
oxide)
(7) is a non metal which conducts
*(4) The device used for grinding an ore. electricity.
Ans. Ball mill (a) Diamond (b) Iodine
*(5) The non - metal having electrical conductivity. (c) carbon (d) Graphite
Ans. Graphite (8) is an oxide which is amphoteric.
*(6) The reagent that dissolves noble metals. (a) Copper oxide
Ans. Aqua regia (b) Magnesium dioxide
*(7) An alloy of copper and zinc (c) Zinc oxide
Ans. Brass (d) Calcium oxide
*(8) A metal which does not react with cold water but (9) The reactivity of metals with dil HCl in decreasing
reacts with steam. order is .
Ans. Iron (a) Mg >Zn > Al > Fe

*(9) The most lustrous substance. (b) Mg > Al > Zn > Fe

(c) Fe >Zn > Al > Mg
Ans. Diamond
(d) Fe > Al > Zn > Mg
*(10) An ore of Mercury.
(10) Cinnabar is an ore of .
Ans. Cinnabar (HgS)
(a) Aluminium (b) Sodium
*(11) The process used for heating of carbonate ores.
(c) Iron (d) Mercury
Ans. Calcination
(11) The main constituent of bauxite is .
*(12) The metal which is the least reactive in the
(a) Al2O3 (b) Al2(SO4)3
reactivity series.
(c) CaSO4 (d) Na3AlF6
Ans. Gold
(12) Which method is used for the purification of
*(13) The most reactive metal.
more reactive metals?
Ans. Potassium
(a) Chemical reduction (b) Roasting
*(14) Alloy of copper and tin. (c) Calcination
Ans. Bronze (d) Electrolytic reduction
156 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

(13) Substance used to decrease the melting point of *(4) Metallurgy

alumina in Hall’s process . Ans. The Science and Technology regarding the
(a) CuSO4 (b) Cryolite extraction of metals from ores and their
(c) Gypsum (d) Limonite purificationfortheuseiscalledmetallurgy.
(14) Galvanisation is a method of protecting iron (5) Roasting
from rusting by coating it with a thin layer of Ans. The process of conversion of sulphide ores into
. oxide by strongly heating in air is called roasting.
(a) Aluminium (b) Tin (6) Calcination
(c) Silver (d) Zinc Ans. The process of conversion of carbonate ores into
(15) Copper reacts with moist carbon - dioxide in air oxides by strongly heating in limited supply of
and slowly loses its shine to gain a green coat of air is called calcination.
. (7) Reduction
(a) Copper oxide (b) Iron oxide Ans. The conversion of metal oxide into metal is called
reduction.
(c) Copper carbonate (d) None of the above
(8) Galvanizing
(16) react with dil.HNO3 to evolve
hydrogen gas. Ans. Galvanizing is a process of giving a thin coating
of zinc on iron or steel to protect them from
(a) Iron and Copper
corrosion.
(b) Manganese and Magnesium
(9) Electroplating
(c) Zinc and Manganese
Ans. The process where a less reactive metal is coated
(d) Aluminium and Magnesium
on a more reactive metal using electrolysis is
(17) Silver articles become black on prolonged called electroplating.
exposure to air. This is due to the formation of
(10) Anodization
.
Ans. The process where metals like copper and
(a) Ag3NO3 (b) Ag2O aluminium are coated with a thin and strong
(c) Ag2S (d) Ag2S and Ag3NO3 layer of their oxides by means of electrolysis is
(18) In Tinning a layer of molten is called anodizing.
deposited on metals. (11) Tinning
(a) Zinc (b) Iron Ans. The process of giving a protective coating of tin
(c) Tin (d) Copper over other metals is called tinning.
Ans. (1) (d) Aluminium (2) (a) Tungsten (3) (a) Potassium (12) Alloy
( )( ) 2 (5)( ) i ( )( ) i (7)( ) i  Ans. The homogeneous mixture formed by mixing a
(8) ( ) i  i  (9) ( )        metal with other metals or non - metals in certain
(10) (d) Mercury (11) (a) Al2O3( 2)( ) i  proportion is called an alloy.
i  ( 3) ( ) i  ( ) ( ) i  ( 5) ( ) (13) Ionic compounds
 ( )( )   i  Ans. The compounds formed from two units namely
( 7)( ) 2S (18) (c) Tin. cation and an anion are called Ionic compounds.
Q.2.1. Define the following : (14) Hydraulic Separation method.
*(1) Minerals Ans. I t is the process in which finely grounded
Ans. The compounds of metals that occur in nature (powdered) ore is washed with a stream of water.
along with the impurities are called minerals. The lighter gangue particles are washed away
*(2) Ores in the stream of water whereas heavier mineral
Ans. The minerals from which the metals can be particlessettledownatthebottom.Itisbasedon
separated economically are called ores. thedifferenceinthedensityoforeandimpurities.
(15) Froth Floatation process
*(3) Gangue
Ans. This process is used to concentrate some ores
Ans. Ores contain metal compounds with some of the
especiallysulphideores.Inthisprocess,thefinely
impurities like soil, sand, rocky substances etc.
powdered ore is mixed with water and a suitable
These impurities are called gangue.
Metallurgy 57

oil, like pine oil. It is based on the principle that (6) When steam is passed over aluminium.
the mineral particles due to their hydrophobic Ans. When steam is passed over aluminium,
property are wetted with oil, whereas gangue aluminium oxide and hydrogen gas are formed.
particles get wetted with water due to the 2Al(s) + 3H2O(g) Al2O3(s) + 3H2(g)
hydrophilic property.
Aluminium Steam Aluminium Hydrogen
(16) Magnetic Separation oxide
Ans. It is a process in which magnetic ore is separated (7) Extraction of copper from its sulphide ore.
from non - magnetic impurities with the help of Ans. 2Cu2S + 3O2 2Cu2O + 2SO2
electromagnetic machines.
 Oxygen 
(17) Patination of Copper
i oxide dioxide
Ans. CO2 in moist air reacts with the surface of copper 2Cu2O + Cu2S 6Cu + SO2
vessel. Copper loses its lustre due to the formation

of greenish layer of copper carbonate CuCO3 on
oxide i dioxide
its surface. This is called Patination of copper.
Q.2.2. Write chemical equation for the following (8) When sodium oxide dissolves in water.
events: Ans. Na2O(s) + H2O(l) 2NaOH(aq)
*(1) Aluminium came in contact with air. Sodium oxide Water Sodium hydroxide
Ans. Aluminium combines with oxygen to form (9) Copper reacts with concentrated nitric acid.
aluminium oxide. Ans.
4Al + 3O2 2 Al2O3 Cu(s) + 4HNO3(aq) Cu(NO3)2(aq) + 2NO2(g) + 2H2O(l)
Aluminum Oxygen Aluminium conc.  Nitrogen Water
Oxide Nitric nitrate dioxide
*(2) Iron filings are dropped in aqueous solution of acid
copper sulphate.
(10) Copper reacts with dilute nitric acid
Ans. Whenironfilingsaredroppedinaqueoussolution Ans. Cu(s) + 8HNO3(aq) Cu(NO3)2(aq) + 2NO(g) + 4H2O(l)
of copper sulphate, iron displaces copper from
 i   i i 
the solution. The blue colour of copper sulphate
nitri acid nitrate Oxide
solution fades out.
(11) Aluminium oxide reacts with sodium hydroxide.
Fe + CuSO4 FeSO4 + Cu
Ans.
Iron  Iron Al2O3 . 2H2O(s) + 2NaOH(aq) 2NaAlO2(aq) + 3H2O(l)
Aluminium Sodium Sodium Water
*(3) A reaction was brought about between ferric oxide Hydroxide aluminate
oxide and aluminium. Q.2.3 Answer the following in one or two sentences.
Ans. When Ferric oxide reacts with aluminium, (1) Name the categories into which metals can be
aluminium oxide and iron are formed. This classified based on their reactivity.
reaction is known as “Thermit Reaction”. Ans. B
 asedonreactivity,metalscanbeclassifiedinto
Fe2O3 + 2Al 2Fe + Al2O3 + heat three groups:
Ferric Aluminium Iron Aluminium (i) metals of high reactivity
Oxide Oxide (ii) metals of moderate reactivity
(4) Electrolysis of alumina is done. (iii) metals of low reactivity.
Ans. Electrolysis of molten mixture of alumina is done (2) Which metals are available in free state in
in a steel tank. Electrode reaction nature?
Anode reaction 2O2- O2 + 4e- (Oxidation) Ans. Less reactive metals like gold, silver and copper
are available in free state in nature.
Cathode reaction Al3+ + 3e- Al (Reduction)
(3) In what form are ores / minerals generally found
*(5) Zinc oxide is dissolved in dilute hydrochloric
in nature?
acid.
Ans. Generally, ores / minerals are found in the form
Ans. When zinc oxide dissolves in dilute hydrochloric
of oxides, sulphides, carbonates and nitrates.
acid, zinc chloride and water is formed.
(4) Which impurities of bauxite ore are removed by
ZnO + 2HCl ZnCl2 + H2O
Bayer’s process?
Zinc Hydrochloric Zinc Water
Acid i Ans. Iron oxide (Fe2O3), silica (SiO2) and titanium oxide
Oxide
158 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

(TiO2) are the impurities of bauxite ore which are (15) What is reactivity series of metals?
removed by the Bayer’s process. Ans. The arrangement of metals in an increasing or
(5) On what does the process of metallurgy depend? decreasing order of reactivity is called reactivity
Ans. The process of metallurgy depends on i) the series of metals.
nature of the metal to be extracted ii) the type of (16) What is the nature of the oxides of metals?
impurity present in the ore. Ans. Oxides of metals are basic in nature.
(6) What is concentration of ore? (17) In the extraction of aluminium, name the
process of concentration of Bauxite.
Ans. The process of separating gangue from the ore is
called concentration of ore. Ans. The process used for concentration of Bauxite is
leaching process using either Bayer’s method or
(7) Write the cathode reaction in electrolytic
Hall’smethod.Inboththesemethods,finallythe
reduction of alumina. concentrated alumina is obtained by calcination.
Ans. Cathode reaction in electrolytic reduction of (18) State the chemical composition of Bauxite.
aluminium.
Ans. In bauxite, Aluminium oxide (Al2O3.nH2O) is 30%
Al3+ + 3e- Al(l). to 70% while the remaining portion is gangue
(8) Name the two properties on which Froth made of silica,sand,iron oxide etc.
floatation method is based. (19) What do you mean by amphoteric oxides?
Ans. T
 heFrothfloatationmethodisbasedonthetwo Ans. Those oxides of metals which show both acidic
oppositeproperties,hydrophilic(gettingwetted as well as basic behaviour in aqueous solution
with water) and hydrophobic (getting wetted are called amphoteric oxides. e.g. Zinc oxide,
with oil) of the gangue particles and ore particles Aluminium oxide are amphoteric oxides.
respectively. (20) Why is hydrogen gas not liberated when metals
(9) What is the principle of froth floatation process? (except Mn and Mg) are treated with HNO3?
Ans. T
 he Froth floatation process is based on the Ans. HNO3, being a strong oxidizing agent, oxidises
principle of difference in wetting properties of H2 to water (H2O), Hence, hydrogen gas is not
liberated when metals are treated with HNO3.
the ore and the gangue particles with oil and
water respectively. *(21) What is the electronic definition of Oxidation
and Reduction? (     
(10) What is the principle of magnetic separation
no. 102)
method?
Ans: D
 efinitionintermsofelectrontransfer:
Ans. Magnetic separation method uses the principle of
Oxidation means loss of electrons.
difference in the magnetic properties of the ore
and the gangue. Reduction means gain of electrons.
*(22) What are the moderately reactive metals?
(11) Write an equation for the action of heat on
(      . 0 )
aluminium hydroxide.
Ans: The metals present in the middle of reactivity
Ans. When aluminium hydroxide is heated upto
series are called as, moderately reactive metals
1000oC, it forms alumina and water. e.g. Zinc, Iron, Lead, Tin, Copper.
2Al(OH)3 heat Al2O3 + 3H2O. *(23) In which form do the moderately reactive metals
1000°C
(12) What is the purpose of roasting in metallurgy? occur in nature? (      . 0 )
Ans: These metals are usually present as Sulphides or
Ans. In metallurgy, the purpose of roasting is the
Carbonates in nature.
conversion of Sulphide ore into oxide by strongly
heating it in air. *(24) What is meant by corrosion? (   
  . 0 )
(13) What acts as cathode in electrolytic reduction of
Al2O3? Ans: The degradation of materials due to reaction with
the environment is called corrosion.
Ans. Carbon (graphite) lining inside the Steel tank acts
*(25) Which measures would you suggest to stop the
as a cathode in electrolytic reduction of Al2O3.
corrosion of metallic articles or not to allow the
(14) What works as a electrolyte in Hall’s cell? corrosion to start ? (     
Ans. The mixture of molten Al2O3, Na3AlF6 and CaF2 no. 106)
works as an electrolyte in Hall’s cell. Ans: Various methods are used to protect metals
Metallurgy 159

from corrosion. To stop the corrosion of metallic of iron by applying a layer of paint, oil, grease
articles; they should be kept isolated from a direct or varnish on their surface. Thus, we can prevent
contact with air. rusting of iron windows and doors of our house.
*(26) What is done so to prevent rusting of iron *(27) Which method do we use when we want to
windows and iron doors of your house? study many things together and at the same
(      . 0 ) time? ( i  i    .93)
Ans: We can lower the rate of the process of rusting Ans: Weuseclassificationmethodifwewanttostudy
many things together at the same time.
Q.2.4. Distinguish between:
(1) Metals and Non - metals. (based on physical properties).
Ans. Metals Non - metals
(i) Metals are solid at room temperature with the (i) Non - metals are either in solid or gaseous
exception of mercury and gallium which are in state with the exception of bromine which is in
liquid state at room temperature. liquid state.

(ii) Metals have lustre in their pure state and can (ii) Non - metals usually do not have lustre except
bepolishedtogiveahighlyreflectivesurface. iodine and diamond.

(iii) Metals are malleable, i.e they can be (iii) Non - metals are not malleable.
hammered into thin sheets.
(iv) Metals are ductile i.e they can be drawn into (iv) Non - metals are not ductile.
wires.

(v) Metals are good conductors of heat and (v) Non - metals do not conduct heat and electricity
electricity. except graphite as it is good conductor of electricity.

(vi) Metals have high density. (vi) Non - metals have low densities.

(vii) Metals are sonorous. (vii) Non - metals are not sonorous.

(viii) Metals are hard. Exceptions: Li, Na and K are (viii) Non - metals are not hard. Exception:
softmetalsandcanbecuteasilywithaknife. Diamond

(ix) Metals have high melting and boiling points. (ix) Non - metals have low melting and boiling
Exception: Na, K, Hg and Ga are having low points.
melting and boiling points.

(2) Metals and Non - metals. (based on chemical properties)

Ans. Metals Non - metals
(i) Atoms of metals usually have 1, 2 or 3 (i) Atoms of non - metals usually have 4, 5, 6 or 7
electrons in their outermost orbit. electrons in their outermost orbit.
(ii) Metals lose electrons from their outermost (ii) Non - Metals gain electrons to form negative
orbits to form positive ions. ions.
(iii) Metals are electropositive (iii) Non - metals are electronegative.

(iv) Mostly metals form basic oxides. (iv) Non - metals form acidic oxides.

(v) Metals are reducing agents. (v) Non - Metals are oxidizing agents.
(vi) Metals displaces hydrogen from dilute acids (vi) Non - metals generally do not react with dilute
and form the corresponding salts. mineral acids.
160 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

(3) Calcination and Roasting

Ans. Calcination Roasting

(i) Theprocessbywhichcarbonateoresarefirst (i) The process by which sulphide ores are

converted into oxides is called calcination. converted into oxides is called roasting.

(ii) In this process, the ore is strongly heated in a (ii) In this process, ore is strongly heated in air.
limited supply of air.

(iii) During calcination, CO2 is evolved. (iii) During roasting, SO2 is evolved.

(iv) Example : (iv) Example :

ZnCO3 ZnO + CO2 2ZnS + 3O2 2ZnO + 2SO2

(4) Atoms and Ions

Ans. Atoms Ions

(i) An atom is electrically neutral. (i) Ion is an atom or group of atoms which is
either positively charged or negatively charged,
formed due to loss or gain of electrons.
(ii) An atom has all the properties of the parent (ii) An ion does not have properties of the parent
element. element.
(iii) An atom may or may not have an independent (iii) An ion does not have an independent existence.
existence.
(iv) In an atom, the outermost orbit may be unstable. (iv) In an ion, the outermost orbit is stable. Eg.:
Eg. : Na (Sodium), (2, 8, 1) Na+ (sodium ion) (2, 8), K+ (potassium ion)
K (Potassium) (2, 8, 8, 1) (2, 8, 8).

(5) Cations and Anions

Ans. Cations Anions

(i) Cations are positively charged ions. (i) Anions are negatively charged ions.
–
(ii) Generally, metals produce cations. Eg. : Na+ (ii) Generally non-metals produce anions. Eg. : Cl
–
(sodium ion), K+ (potassium ion). (chloride ion), Br (bromide ion).
(iii) During electrolysis, cations are discharged at (iii) During electrolysis, anions are discharged at
the cathode. the anode.
Q.2.5. Give Scientific easons: (v) Hence, lemon or tamarind is used for cleaning
*(1) Lemon or tamarind is used for cleaning copper copper vessels turned greenish.
vessels turned greenish. *(2) Generally the ionic compounds have high
Ans. melting points.
(i) Copper on exposure to moist air combines with Ans.
carbon dioxide and a green coloured copper (i) Ionic compounds are formed when an atom of a
carbonate salt is formed, tarnishing the copper. combining metal element transfers its electrons
(ii) Lime juice and tamarind contain citric acid and to the atom of another non - metallic element.
tartaric acid respectively. (ii) During this process, the atom of the combining
(iii) These acids react with copper carbonate forming metal after losing electrons, forms a positively
water-solublesalts,whichgetwashedoffeasily. charged ion called as cation and the atom of the
combining non-metal after gaining electrons
(iv) Due to this, the tarnished copper becomes clean
forms a negatively charged ion called as anion.
and regains its lustre.
Metallurgy 161

(iii) Thus ionic bonds are formed between the cations (ii) The cathode and anodes are made of graphite.
and anions during compound formation. (iii) During the electrolysis process, aluminium is
(iv) Due to the presence of cations and anions, there deposited on the cathode on passing electric
is a strong electrostatic attraction between the current.
molecules. (iv) Oxygen is liberated at the anode.
(v) Hence to break these inter - molecular bonds a lot (v) Some of this oxygen reacts with the carbon in the
of energy is needed. graphite to form carbon - dioxide gas then slowly
(vi) Hence ionic compounds have high melting burning away the anodes.
points. (vi) Thus, the anodes need to be replaced from time
*(3) Sodium is always kept in kerosene. to time during the electrolysis of alumina.
Ans. (6) Gold and silver are used to make jewellery.
(i) Sodium is a highly reactive metal. Ans.
(ii) It reacts with the oxygen and moisture present in (i) Goldandsilverarepreciousmetalswithattractive
the air to form sodium hydroxide and hydrogen lustre.
gas. (ii) They have low reactivity. They do not react with
(iii) Hydrogen which is released, catches fire in atmospheric oxygen, moisture, carbon dioxide.
presence of oxygen due to liberation of heat (iii) They do not react with dilute acids.
during this reaction.
(iv) These metals are malleable and ductile.
(iv) Sodium does not react with kerosene and hence,
(v) Due to these properties gold and silver are used
it sinks in it.
to make jewellery.
(v) Thus, to prevent sodium from coming in contact
(7) Aluminium foils are used to wrap food items.
with air, it is immersed in kerosene.
Ans. Aluminium foils are used to wrap food items
*(4) Pine oil is used in Froth floatation.
because aluminium is highly malleable. It can
Ans. Froth floatation is a process to purify sulphide be beaten into thin sheets. Moreover, it does not
ores, in presence of pine oil. react with food.
 The froth floatation method is based on the (8) Aluminium oxide is called an amphoteric oxide.
two opposite properties, hydrophilic and
Ans.
hydrophobic, of the particles. Here the particles
(i) An oxide which shows both acidic as well as
of the metal sulphides, due to their hydrophobic
basic properties is called an amphoteric oxide.
property,getwettedmainlywithpineoil,while
due to the hydrophilic property the gangue (ii) Metal oxides are usually basic in nature.
particlesgetwettedwithwater. (iii) But some metal oxides like aluminium oxide,
Pressurized air is blown through the mixture zinc oxide, etc. react both with acids as well as
and simultaneously mixture is agitated using an bases to produce salt and water.
agitator, due to agitation particles of sulphide (iv) Aluminium oxide shows both acidic as well as
ore form a foam with pine oil. This foam rises to basic properties.
thesurfaceofwaterandfloatsandcanbeeasily (v) Hence, aluminium oxide is called an amphoteric
separated. oxide.
*(5) Anodes need to be replaced from time to time (9) Carbonate and Sulphide ores are usually
during the electrolysis of alumina. converted into oxides during the process of
Ans. extraction.
(i) In extracting aluminium from aluminium oxide, Ans.
the molten the electrolyte is a liquid mixture (i) Reduction of metal oxides is easier and
of cryolite (Na3AlF6) Fluorspar (CaF2) and economical than the reduction of carbonate and
aluminium oxide. (alumina) (Al2O3). sulphide ores.
162 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

(ii) So,carbonateandsulphideoresarefirstconverted Mg + 2HCl MgCl2 + H2

to metal oxide and then further reduced to form Magnesium Hydrochloric Magnesium Hydrogen
metals. acid i gas
(10) Hydrogen gas is not evolved when metals like *(3) What are the physical properties of metals and
copper, zinc, iron, etc. react with dilute nitric Non - metals? (      .93)
acid. Ans. Physical properties of metals:
Ans. (i) Metals are in solid state except Mercury and
(i) Nitric acid is a strong oxidizing agent. It oxidizes Gallium which are in liquid state.
hydrogen (H2) to water. (ii) Metals are hard, have lustre and high melting
(ii) Hence, it oxidizes completely to form any of the and boiling points. They are ductile, malleable,
nitrogen oxide and water. good conductors of heat and electricity.

(iii) Hence, these metals do not produce H2 gas when Physical properties of non - metals:
they react with concentrated and dilute HNO3. (i) Some non - metals are in solid state while some
E.g. Cu(s) + 4HNO3(aq) Cu(NO 3)2 + 2NO2(g) + 2 H2O are in gaseous state.

Copper Conc. Copper Nitrogen Water (ii) They do not posses lustre. Non - metals are not
nitric acid nitrate dioxide hard, except diamond.

Q.3.1. Explain the following: (iii) They have low melting and boiling points.

*(1) When a copper coin is dipped in silver nitrate (iv) Not malleable and not ductile.
solution, a glitter appears on the coin after some (v) Non - metals are bad conductors of heat and
time. Why does this happen? Write the chemical electricity, except graphite.
equation. *(4) Write the electrode reaction for electrolysis of
Ans. Copper being more reactive than silver, displaces molten Magnesium chloride and Calcium chloride.
silver from silver nitrate to form element silver (   i     . 03)
and copper nitrate. Ans.
Cu(s) + 2AgNO3(aq) Cu(NO 3)2(aq) + 2Ag(s) (i) For Magnesium chloride
Silver Silver Mg2+ +2e– Mg(magnesium metal at the cathode)
nitrate nitrate
– –
2Cl – 2e Cl2 (chlorine gas at the anode).
The silver displaced gets coated on to the coin,
hence coin gets the silver shine. Magnesium ions gain electrons (reduction) to
form magnesium atoms. Chloride ions lose
*(2) The electronic configuration of metal A’ is 2,8,1.
electrons (oxidation) to form chlorine atoms.
and that of metal B’ is 2,8,2. Which of the two
metals is more reactive? Write their reaction The overall reaction is
with dilute hydrochloric acid. MgCl2 (l) Mg (s) + Cl2 (g)
Ans. M
 etal‘A’Electronicconfiguration-(2,8,1), (ii) For Calcium chloride
 Metal‘B’Electronicconfiguration-(2,8,2), Ca2 + 2e– Ca (calcium metal at the cathode)
Metal ‘A’ loses its one electron and form positive 2Cl– – 2e– Cl2 (chlorine gas at the anode)
ion. Metal ‘B’ also loses 2 electrons and forms Calcium ions gain electrons (reduction) to form
positive ion; but metal ‘A’ is more reactive than calcium atoms. Chloride ions lose electrons
metal ‘B’,as metal ‘B’ takes more energy to (oxidation) to form chlorine atoms.
remove two electrons where as metal ‘A’ requires Overall reaction is
less energy to lose one electron.
CaCl2 Ca(s) +Cl2
Metal ‘A’ is sodium and metal ‘B’ is magnesium.
*(5) Why do silver articles turn blackish while copper
Hence, sodium is more reactive than magnesium.
vessels turn greenish on keeping in air for a long
2 Na + 2HCl 2NaCl + H2 time? ( i  i    . 0 )
Sodium Hydrochloric Sodium Hydrogen Ans.
acid chloride gas (i) On exposure to air, Silver articles turn blackish
Metallurgy 163

after sometime because of the layer of silver hydrobromic acid loses hydrogen. In this reaction
sulphide (Ag2S) formed by the reaction of silver Cl2 is the oxidizing agent.
with hydrogen sulphide in the air. *(10) Have you seen the following things?
(ii) Carbon dioxide in moist air reacts with the Old iron bars of buildings, copper vessels not
surface of copper vessel and these copper vessels cleaned for long time, silver ornaments or idols
turn greenish because of the formation of copper exposed to air for long time, old abandoned
carbonate (CuCO3) on its surface. vehicles fit to be thrown away. (   
  . 0 )
*(6) Why do pure gold and platinum always glitter?
Ans.
( i  i    . 0 )
Ans.
(i) Gold and Platinum occur in free state.
(ii) They are noble metals, hence they are least reactive.
(iii) They are not affected by air, water and other
natural factors.
Blackened silver
(iv) Hence,puregoldandplatinumalwaysglitter. vessel
*(7) Can we permanently prevent the rusting of an
iron article by applying a layer of paint on its
surface? (   i     .
07)
The copper cladded statue
Ans. of Liberty made 300 years
(i) No, we cannot protect the articles permanently Rusted shackles ago has turned green.
from rusting by painting on them. i 8.    i 
(ii) The method of painting is suitable for short time. (i) After keeping for a long time in air or in open
when these above things come in contact with air
(iii) If there is a scratch on the paint on the surface
and water, it reacts with it and a layer is formed
of the article and if a small surface of the metal
above its, surface. They get corroded.
comes in contact with air, the process of rusting
(ii) Iron bars - They get rusted as coating of Iron
starts below the layer of the paint. oxide (Fe2O3 . H2O) is formed.
*(8) Divide the metals Cu, Zn, Ca, Mg, Fe, Na, Li Copper vessels - They react with CO2 in moist
into three groups, namely reactive metals, air and a coating of copper carbonate (CuCO3) is
moderately reactive metals and less reactive formed.
metals. Silver Ornaments - They react with H2S in air and
Ans. a layer of silver sulphide (Ag2S) is formed.
Reactive Moderately
Less reactive Old abandoned vehicles - They are rusted and
metals reactive
coating of Iron oxide (Fe2O3 . H2O) is formed.
Na Mg Cu (11) An ore on treatment with dilute hydrochloric
Li Zn acid produces brisk effervescence. What type of
Ca Fe ore is this?
*(9) In the reaction between chlorine and HBr a What steps will be required to obtain metal
from the enriched ore?
transformation of HBr into Br2 takes place. Can
this transformation be called oxidation? Which Ans. The ore is carbonate ore.
is the oxidant that brings about this oxidation. Steps required to obtain the metal:
(   i     .98) (i) Calcination: Carbonate ore is heated in limited
supply of air and oxide is obtained.
Ans. When chlorine reacts with hydrobromic acid,
ZnCO3(s) ZnO(s) + CO2
bromine is formed.
(ii) Reduction with Carbon: Metal oxide is heated
Cl2(g) + 2HBr(aq) 2HCl(aq)+ Br2. with carbon.
Yes, this transformation is called as oxidation, as ZnO(s) + C Zn + CO
164 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

(12) A metal ’ acquires a green colour coating on *Q.3.2. Draw a neat and labelled diagram.
outer surface on exposure to air. (1) Magnetic separation method
(i) Identify the metal ’ and name the process Ans.
responsible for this change.
(ii) Name and write chemical formula of the green
coating formed on the metal. Powdered ore
(iii) List two important methods to prevent the Nonmagnetic
process. roller
Ans. Magnetic
Nonmagnetic roller
(i) The metal is copper. The process is corrosion.
ingredient
(ii) Copper carbonate (CuCO3)
Conveyor belt
(iii) (a) It should be coated with tin. Collector
(b) It should be mixed with other metals to form Magnetic ingredient
alloys.
Collector
(13) How is the method of extraction of metals high
up in the reactivity series different from that for i 8.2  i  i 
metals in the middle? Why the same process
(2) Froth floatation method.
cannot be applied for them? Explain by giving
equation, the extraction of sodium. Ans.
Ans.
(i) Metals high up in the series are obtained by Air supply
electrolytic reduction because these metals are Concentrated
Froth sulphide ore
strong reducing agents and therefore cannot be
obtained by chemical reduction.
(ii) Metals in the middle of series are less reactive Bubbles
and can be obtained by chemical reduction. The
same process can not be obtained by chemical Water and
Pine oil
reduction. Extraction of sodium is done by
electrolysis of molten Sodium chloride. Agitator Gangue

i 8.3   i  
2NaCl electrolysis 2Na(s) +Cl2
(Molten) (3) Electrolytic reduction of alumina
*(14) What are the various alloys used in daily life? Ans.
Where are those used? (  i 
  08) Anode (Graphite) Cathode
Ans. (Graphite lining)
(i) Brass and Bronze are the two alloys which we use
in our daily life. Steel tank Mixture of
(ii) Brass is an alloy of copper and zinc and Bronze is alumina,
an alloy of copper and tin. cryolite and
(iii) Brass is used for decorative articles and for fluorspar
making musical instruments. Molten
(iv) Bronze is used for making medals, sculptures, aluminium Outlet for molten
statues cooking utensils and coins. aluminium
*(15) What are the properties that the alloy used for i 8.  i   i i 
minting coins should have? (  i 
  08)
Ans. Alloys used for minting coins should be ductile
and malleable.
Metallurgy 165

(4) Hydraulic separation method. (iii) Thefiltrateiswarmedandneutralisedbypassing

Ans. carbon dioxide gas through it.
(iv) This results in the precipitation of aluminium
powdered ore
hydroxide.
(v) Al2O3.2H2O(s) + Na2CO3(aq) 2NaAlO2 (aq) + CO2 (g) + 2H2O(l)
(vi) 2NaAlO2(aq) + 3H2O(l) + CO2(g) 2Al(OH)3 + Na2CO3
(vii) The precipitate of Al(OH)3 obtained in Hall’s
gangue process is filtered, washed, dried and then
calcinated by heating at 1000°C to obtain alumina.
ore
suspension (viii) 2Al(OH)3 Al2O3 + 3H2O.
(4) Heating the aluminium ore with concentrated
water concentrated ore caustic soda.
Ans. Aluminium oxide being amphoteric in nature, it
reacts with the concentrated solution of sodium
i 8.5  i  i  hydroxide (caustic soda) at 140°C to 150°C under
Q.3.3. Complete the following statement using every high pressure for 2 to 8 hours in a digester to
given options. form water soluble sodium aluminate.
During the extraction of aluminium Al2O3.2H2O(s) + 2NaOH(aq) 2NaAlO2 (aq) + 3H2O(l)
(1) Ingredients and gangue in bauxite. Aluminium Sodium Sodium Water
oxide hydroxide aluminate
Ans. Aluminium is extracted from its ore Bauxite
(Al2O3.nH2O). Q.3.4. (1) Study the diagram and answer the questions:
Bauxite contins 30% to 70% of Al2O3 and remaining
part is gangue. It is made up of sand,silica,iron Cell
oxide etc. Silica (SiO2), ferric oxide (Fe2O3) and e–
e–
titanium oxide (TiO2) are the impurities present
in bauxite.
(2) Use of leaching during the concentration of ore. Cathode
Anode
Ans. silver Aluminium
(i) Leaching is a method in which ore is soaked in a plate spoon
certain solution for a long time.
(ii) Theoredissolvesinthatsolutionduetoaspecific
chemical reaction. i 8.  i
(iii) The gangue does not react and therefore does not
(a) What does the diagram represent?
dissolve in that solution.
Ans. The above diagram represents the process of
(iv) During the concentration of ore, separation of
Electroplating of Silver.
impurities is done by leaching process using
either Bayer’s method or Hall’s method. (b) What can you say about the reactivity of metals
at anode and cathode.
(3) Chemical reaction of transformation of bauxite
into alumina by Hall’s process. Ans. The reactivity of metal at anode is less than the
reactivity of metal at cathode.
Ans.
(c) Write the reactions occuring at cathode and
(i) In the Hall’s process, the ore is powdered and
anode.
then leached by heating with aqueous sodium
Ans. The electrode reaction are as follows:
carbonate to form water soluble sodium
aluminate. Anode reaction - Ag → Ag+ + e–

(ii) Thentheinsolubleimpuritiesarefilteredout. Cathode reaction - Ag+ + e– → Ag

166 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

(2) Refer the following diagram which shows (b) Name the technique used to coat the aluminium
reaction of a metal with water and answer the article.
following questions. Ans. The technique used is ‘Anodising’.
(a) Name two metals which do not react in the (c) Name the anode and electrolyte used in this
above experiment. technique.
Ans. The two metals which do not react in the above Ans. The aluminium article to be coated is used as
experiment are Gold (Au) and Platinum (Pt.) anode, while dilute sulphuric acid is used as an
(b) What are the properties of the gas produced in electrolyte in this technique.
the above experiment? (d) How can we use this technique to obtain articles
Ans. The properties of hydrogen gas are as follows: for decorative purpose?
(i) It is colourless, odourless and tasteless gas. Ans. By adding appropriate dyes in the electrolytic
(ii) It is lighter than air. bath, we can obtain decorative finish for the
articles which can be used for decorative purpose.
(iii) It is insoluble in water.
(e) Name any two articles commonly used in day to
(iv) It is combustible gas but does not support
day life obtained by using this technique.
combustion.
Ans. Anodised pressure cookers, pans and sliding
(v) Hydrogen burns with a pop sound in oxygen with
windows are some articles used in day to day
apaleblueflameformingwater.
life.
(c) Write a balanced chemical equation for the
Q.4.2. Answer in brief.
reaction of any one metal in the above process.
(1) State any four properties of Ionic compounds.
Ans. When Aluminium metal reacts with steam it forms
Ans.
Aluminium oxide and hydrogen gas.
(i) Ionic compounds are solids and are hard due to
2Al(s) + 3H2O(g) Al2O3(s) + 3H2(g)
strong force of attraction between positive and
Aluminium Water Aluminium Hydrogen negative ions.
oxide
(ii) They are generally brittle and break into pieces
Q.4.1. Read the passage and answer the following
when pressure is applied.
question:
(iii) Ionic compounds have high melting and boiling
(1)
Anodising is a process of forming a thick points, as a considerable amount of energy is
oxide layer of aluminium. Aluminium required to break the strong inter molecular
develops a thin oxide layer when exposed forcesofattraction.
to air. This aluminium oxide coat makes it (iv) They are generally soluble in water and insoluble
resistant to further corrosion. The resistance in solvents such as kerosene, petrol etc.
can be improved by making the oxide layer
(v) Ionic compounds do not conduct electricity in
thicker. In this technique aluminium article
solid state, due to their rigid structure. They
is used as an anode. Electrolyte used is dilute
conduct electricity in molten state or in solution
sulphuric acid. The anode reaction results
in solvent like water.
in formation of a black coloured thin film of
aluminium oxide on the surface of anode. By (2) Describe Bayer’s Process.
putting appropriate dyes in the electrolytic Ans.
bath coloured surface with decorative finish (i) During extraction of aluminium from bauxite, the
can be achieved. Kitchen articles like anodised bauxite ore is concentrated by Bayer’s Process.
pressure cooker, anodised pans and also (ii) During concentration, bauxite is converted into
frames of sliding windows are the applications alumina.
of anodising techniques.
(iii) Crude bauxite contains impurities like iron oxide
(a) How can we make an aluminium article resistant and silica which are removed during Bayer’s
to corrosion? process.

Ans. If an aluminium article is coated with aluminium (iv) The ore is first ground in a ball mill. Then it is
oxide, it becomes resistant to the corrosion. leached by heating it with concentrated caustic
Metallurgy 167

soda solution under high pressure for 2 to 8 hours (5) How can corrosion of metals be prevented?
at 140 °C to 150 °C in a tank called digester. Ans. Corrosion of metals can be prevented by coating
(v) Aluminium oxide (Al2O3) being amphoteric the metal with something which does not react
dissolves in aqueous NaOH to form water soluble with moisture and oxygen.
Sodium aluminate (NaAlO2). (i) Tofixalayerofanysubstanceonthemetalsurface
Al2O3.2H2O(s) + 2NaOH(aq) 2NaAlO2 (aq) + 3H2O(l) so that the contact of the metal with moisture and
(vi) The impurities like Fe2O3 do not dissolve in oxygen in the air is prevented and no reaction
aqueousNaOHandareremovedbyfilteration. would occur between them.
(vii) Silica from the gangue dissolves in aqueous (ii)  etalscanbecoatedwithpaints,oils,greaseor
M
NaOH forming water soluble sodium silicate varnish.
(viii) Sodium aluminate is diluted and cooled to 50°C (iii) Another method of preventing corrosion is done
and hydrolyzed to give aluminium hydroxide as by coating a corrosive metal with a non - corrosive
precipitate. metal.
NaAlO2 + 2H2O NaOH + Al(OH)3 This can be done by following methods:
The precipitate of Al(OH)3 obtained is filtered, (a) Galvanizing : It is done by coating the metal
washed,dried and then calcinated by heating at with a thin coating of Zinc on iron or steel.
1000oc to obtain alumina. (b) Tinning is a process where a layer of molten
2Al(OH)3 Al2O3+3H2O. tin is coated over another metal e.g. copper,
(3) Describe Hall’s Process. brass,etc.

Ans. Refer to answer Q.3.3 (3) (c) Electroplating :

 I nthismethod,alessreactivemetaliscoatedon
(4) Describe the process of electrolytic reduction of
a more reactive metal by electrolysis. e.g. silver
Alumina with the help of a diagram.
plated spoon.
Ans. (  i   8. )
(d) Alloying :
(i) During the process of electrolytic reduction of
A homogeneous mixture of a metal with other
aluminium, a molten mixture of pure alumina metals or non-metals in certain proportion is
(m.p. is > 2000 °C) is electrolysed in a steel tank. called an alloy. This prevents corrosion.
(ii) This tank is lined inside with carbon graphite (e) Anodizing :
which acts as cathode and a set of graphite rods It is done to prevent corrosion of aluminium.
dipped in the molten electrolyte acts as anode. Aluminium is coated with a strong film of its
(iii) Cryolite (Na3AlF6) and Fluorspar (CaF2) are also oxide electrically.
added to the mixture to lower the melting point
to about 1000 °C. Current is passed through
the electrolyte and aluminium is formed at the +Power – Anode
cathode. source

(iv) T
 he molten aluminium sinks to the bottom of Power
the tank as it is heavier from there it is removed supply
periodically.
(v) Oxygen is liberated at the anode.
(vi) The reaction occuring at the cathode and anode
are: Cathode

Cathode reaction: Al3+ + 3e– Al(l) (Reduction) i 8.7  i i

Anode reaction: 2O2– + 4e– O2 + 4e– (Oxidation) (6) Describe the separation methods which are
(vii) The oxygen liberated reacts with the carbon anode based on gravitation.
to form carbon dioxide gas. Ans. Separation method based on gravitation - The
(viii) A
 saresultofthisoxidation,carbonanodehaveto heavy particles of ores can be easily separated
be replaced at intervals. from the light particles of gangue by the
168 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

gravitational method. The processes to carry out (c) One of the rollers is nonmagnetic while the other
this separation are as follows: is electromagnetic.
(i) Wilfley table method: (d) The conveyor belt moving around the rollers is
(a) Inthismethodofseparation,theWilfleytableis (non magnetic) made up of leather or brass.
made by fixing narrow and thin wooden ri es (e) The powdered ore is poured on the conveyor belt
on inclined surface. near the nonmagnetic roller.
(b) The table is kept vibrating continuously. (f) Two collector vessels are placed below the
(c) Powdered ore obtained from lumps of the ore magnetic roller.
using ball mill is poured on the table and a stream (g) The particles of the nonmagnetic part in the ore
of water is also released from the upper side. arenotattractedtowardsthemagneticroller.
(d) As a result, the lighter gangue particles are carried (h) Therefore, they are carried further along the belt
away along with the flowing water, while the
and fall in the collector vessel placed away from
heavier particles in which proportion of minerals
the magnetic roller.
is more and proportion of gangue is less, are
blocked by wooden ri es and get collected on (i) At the same time, the particles of the magnetic
the slits between them. ingredients of the ore stick to the magnetic roller
and therefore fall in the collector vessel near the
(ii) Hydraulic separation method: magnetic roller.
(a) The hydraulic separation method is based on the
(j) In this way the magnetic and nonmagnetic
working of a mill.
ingredients in the ore can be separated depending
(b) There is a tapering vessel similar to that used in a on their magnetic nature.
grinding mill.
For example, cassiterite is a tin ore.
(c) It opens in a tank-like container that is tapering
(k) It contains mainly the nonmagnetic ingredient
on the lower side.
stannic oxide (SnO2) and the magnetic ingredient
(d) The tank has an outlet for water on the upper
ferrous tungstate (FeWO4).
side and a water inlet on the lower side.
(l) These are separated by the electromagnetic
(e) Finely ground ore is released in the tank.
method.
(f) A forceful jet of water is introduced in the tank
(  i   8.2)
from the lower side.
(ii) Froth floatation method:
(g) Gangue particles are lighter and therefore they
flowoutalongwiththewaterjetfromtheoutlet (a) The froth floatation method is based on the
on the upper side of the tank and get collected two opposite properties, hydrophilic and
separately. hydrophobic, of the particles.
(h) At the same time the heavy particles of the ore (b) Here the particles of the metal sulphides, due to
arecollectedatthebottomfromthelowersideof their hydrophobic property, get wetted mainly
the tank. with oil, while due to the hydrophilic property
(i) In short, this method is based on the law of thegangueparticlesgetwettedwithwater.
gravitation, wherein particles of the same size are (c) By using these properties certain ores are
separated by their weight with the help of water. concentratedbyfrothfloatationmethod.
(  i   8.5) (d) Inthismethod,thefinelygroundoreisputintoa
(7) Describe some general methods for the big tank containing ample amount of water.
concentration of ore.
(e) Certain vegetable oil such as pine oil, eucalyptus
Ans. oil, is added in the water for the formation of
(i) Magnetic Separation method: froth.
(a) This method requires an electromagnetic (f) Pressurised air is blown through the water.
machine. (g) There is an agitator rotating around its axis in the
(b) The main parts of this machine are two types centreofthefloatationtank.Theagitatorisused
of iron rollers and the conveyor belt moving as per the requirement. Bubbles are formed due
continuously around them. to the blown air.
Metallurgy 169

(h) Due to agitation, a foam is formed from oil, water Ans.   i    8.2
and air bubbles together. Due to the agitating. The powdered ore is poured on the conveyor
Thisfoamrisestothesurfaceofwaterandfloats. belt near the nonmagnetic roller. Two collector
Thatiswhythismethodiscalledfrothfloatation vessels are placed below the magnetic roller.
process. The particles of the nonmagnetic part in the ore
(i) Particles of certain sulphide ore float with the are not attracted towards the magnetic roller.
foam on water as they preferentially get wetted Therefore, they are carried further along the belt
by the oil. For example, this method is used for and fall in the collector vessel placed away from
the concentration of zinc blend (ZnS) and copper the magnetic roller. At the same time the particles
pyrite (CuFeS2) of the magnetic ingredients of the ore stick to the
(  i   8.3) magnetic roller and therefore fall in the collector
(iii) Leaching: vessel near the magnetic roller.
(a) Thefirststepintheextractionofthemetalslike (2) Redraw the given diagram and label it correctly.
aluminium, gold silver from their ores is the Answer the questions given below. (For diagram
method of leaching. refer Q.4.3 (1))
(b) In this method the ore is soaked in a certain Ans.   i    8.2
solution for long time. (a) What does the above diagram indicates?
(c) Theoredissolvesinthatsolutionduetoaspecific Ans. The above diagram indicates the process of Magnetic
chemical reaction. separation method of concentration of ores.
(d) The gangue does not react and therefore does not (b) Name an ore which is concentrated by this
dissolve in that solution. method and also write the two ingredients with
(e) So it can be separated. For example, concentration molecular formulae, present in this ore.
of bauxite, the aluminium ore is done by leaching Ans. The ore which is concentrated by this method is
method. cassiterite.
(f) Here, bauxite is soaked in aqueous NaOH or Cassiterite is a ore. It contains mainly the
aqueous Na2CO3 which dissolves the main nonmagnetic ingredient stannic oxide (SnO2)
ingredient alumina in it. and the Magnetic ingredient ferrous tungstate
Q.4.3. Solve the following questions: (FeWo4).
(1) Redraw the given diagram and label the parts. (3) Redraw the given diagram and label the parts.
Complete the paragraph with the words given Complete the paragraph with the words given
in the bracket: in the bracket:
(magnetic roller, particles of the magnetic (gangue particles, hydrophobic, oil, water, metal
ingredients, away, near, conveyor belt, sulphides, hydrophillic)
nonmagnetic part)
Ans.

Ans.   i    8.3
 The froth floatation method is based on the
two opposite properties, hydrophilic and
hydrophobic, of the particles. Here the particles
 70 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

of the metal sulphides, due to their hydrophobic  In hydraulic separation method, the finely
property,getwettedmainlywithoil, while due ground ore is released in the tank. A forceful jet
to the hydrophilic property the gangue particles of water is introduced in the tank from the lower
getwettedwithwater. By using these properties side. Gangue particles are lighter and therefore
certain ores are concentrated by froth floatation they flow out along with the water jet from the
outlet on the upper side of the tank and get
method.
collected separately. At the same time the heavy
(4) Redraw the given diagram and label it correctly. particles of the ore are collected at the bottom
Answer the questions given below: (For diagram from the lower side of the tank.
refer Q.4.3 (3)) (6) Redraw the given diagram and label it correctly.
Ans.   i    8.3 Answer the questions given below: (For diagram
refer Q.4.3 (5))
(a) What does the above diagram indicates?
Ans.   i    8.5
Ans. The above diagram indicates the process of Froth
(a) What does the above diagram indicates?
floatationmethodofconcentrationofores.
Ans. The above diagram indicates the process of
(b) Name two ores along with their molecular
Hydraulic separation method of concentration of
formula which are concentrated by this method.
ores.
Ans. The two ores concentrated by this method are
(b) Explain the law on which this method is based.
(i) Zinc blende - Zns (ii) Copper pyrite - CuFeS2.
Ans. This method is based on the law of gravitation,
(c) What is the use of pine oil in this process? where in particles of the same size are separated
Ans. The use of pine oil in this process is as follows: by their weight with the help of water.
(i) Pine oil is hydrophobic in nature and also it (7) Redraw the given diagram and label the parts.
attractstheparticlesofsulphideore. Completer the paragraph with the words given
in the bracket:
(ii) Thustheparticlesofsulphideoregetwettedby
pine oil. (heavier, ball mill, lighter, slits, inclined, stream
of water, vibrating)
(iii) Due to air supply and agitation, pine oil forms a
frothwhichfloatsonthesurfaceofwater.Thus
the particles of sulphide ore are separated from
water.
(iv) Thegangueparticlesgetwettedbywaterandare
removedfromthebottom.
(5) Redraw the given diagram and label the parts.
Complete the paragraph with the words given
in the bracket:
(heavyparticles,Gangueparticles,bottom,lower,
lighter, upper)

Ans.   i    8.8
 In the method of separation, Wilfley table is
made by fixing narrow and thin wooden ri es
on inclined surface. The table is kept vibrating
continuously. Powdered ore obtained from lumps
of the ore using ball mill is poured on the table,
a stream of water is also released from the upper
side. As a result, the lighter gangue particles
are carried away along with the flowing water,
Ans.   i    8.5 while the heavier particles in which proportion
Metallurgy 7

of minerals is more and proportion of gangue is Ans.   i    8.

less, are blocked by the wooden ri es and get (a) Whatistheimportanceofcryoliteandfluorspar?
collected on the slits between them.
Ans. Cryolite (Na3AIF6)andfluorspar(CaF2) are added
(8) Redraw the given diagram and label it correctily.
in the mixture to lower its melting point upto
Answer the questions given below: (For diagram
 . .3(7)) 1000 0C.
Ans.   i    8.8 (b) Write the anode and cathode reactions.
(a) What does the above diagram indicates? Ans. Anode reaction : 2O2– → O2 + 4e– (Oxidation)
Ans. The above diagram indicates the process of Cathode reaction : Al3 + 3e– → Al(l) (Reduction)
Wifleytablemethodofconcentrationofores. (10) Redraw the given diagram and label it correctly.
(b) What is the result of gangue particles and ore Answer the questions given below: (For diagram
particles in this process. refer Q.4.3 (9))
Ans. The result of this process is that the lighter
Ans.   i    8.
gangue particles are carried away along with
the flowing water, while the heavier particles (a) What does the above diagram indicate?
oforeareblockedbythewoodenri esandget Ans. The above diagram indicates the process of
collected on the slits between them. Electrolytic reduction of alumina in Extraction of
(9) Answer the questions based on the given aluminium.
diagram.
(b) In the above process, name the two compounds
Label the diagram and answer the given
questions. along with their molecular formula which are
added in the mixture to lower its melting point.
Ans. The two compounds cryolite (Na3AIF6) and
Fluorspar (CaF2) are added in the mixture to
lower its melting point up to 1000 0C
(c) Give the cathode and anode reactions?
Ans. The electrode reactions are as shown below.
–
Anode reaction : 2O2 → O2 + 4e (Oxidation)
–

Cathode reaction : Al3 + 3e → Al(l) (Reduction)

+ –

vvv
172 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

ASSIGNMENT - 8
Time : 1 Hr. Marks : 20

Q.1. (A) Answer the following questions: (3)

(1) Fill in the blank:
(i) The metals that produce a sound on striking on hard surface are said to be .
(2) Find the odd man out:
(i) K2O, Na2O, CaO, Al2O3
(3) Find out the correlation
Brass : Copper and Zinc :: Bronze :
Q.1. (B) Choose and write the correct options: (2)
(1) has the highest melting point.
(a) Copper (b) Iron (c) Tungsten (d) Zinc
(2) Cinnabar is an ore of
(a) Aluminium (b) Sodium (c) Iron (d) Mercury
Q.2. Answer the following: (Any 2) (4)
(1) Distinguish between metals and non-metals.
(2) Write the balanced chemical equation for the reaction.
When copper reacts with concentracted nitric acid.
(3) How can corrosion of metals be prevented?
Q.3. Answer the following: (Any 2) (6)
(1) Describe Bayer's Process.
(2) Theelectronicconfigurationofmetal'A'is(2,8,1),andthatofmetal'B'is(2,8,2).Whichofthesetwo
metals is more reactive? Write their reaction with dilute hydrochloric acid.
(3) Explain magnetic separation method.
Q.4. Answer the following: (Any 1) (5)
(1) Givescientificreasons:
(i) Lemon or tamarind is used for cleaning copper vessels turned greenish.
(ii) Gold and silver are used to make jewellery.
vvv
(2) Explain electrolytic reduction of Alumina with the help of a diagram.
vvv
 9 Carbon Compounds
CONCEPT MAP
Living things Non living
Substances in Nature are
are Inorganic
are (may or may not
Organic can be
are contain carbon)
(all containing converted to
carbon ) containing
carbon
are
CO, not containing
Hydrocarbons CO2, carbon, O2, Fe,
Na2CO3 sand, water.
NaHCO3
Air
Straight chain and
branched chain
are classified
as Closed chain or Cyclic or
Ring compounds
are classified
Saturated Unsaturated
as

Shading (Alkanes) Aromatic hydrocarbon

Alicyclic hydrocarbon
–

(Alkenes) (Alkynes) e.g. Cyclohexane e.g. Benzene

(– C –)
(– C C –) (C6H6)
–

(– C C –) (C6H12)
e.g. Ethane (C2H6) e.g. Ethyne H
e.g. Ethene H H
H H (C2H4) (C2H2) C
H H C
C C H H H (H– C C –H) H C C H
H H C C H
H H
H H C C C C H
H H C C H
C
H H C
Undergo H H
H
substitution Undergo addition
reaction reaction

(4) The chemical bond formed by sharing of two

MASTER KEY QUESTION SET - 9 valence electrons between the two atoms is called
Q.1 (A) 1. Fill in the blanks and rewrite the .
completed sentence (5) are known as parent organic
(1) The essential element in all the organic compounds.
compounds is .
(6) Saturated hydrocarbons have bonds
(2) The organic compounds having double or triple only.
bonds in them are termed as .
(7) The general formula for alkanes is .
(3) The chemical bonds in carbon compounds do not
(8) Hydrocarbons necessarily contain
produce .
and .
(173)

Third Proof : 09.02.2019 D:\Dipa\2018\Books\Masker Key\X\Science\Xth_Science_Chapter 9_ Xth_Science_Chapter_9_Revised

174 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

(9) Covalent compounds are generally soluble in (14) C6H12 (15) Benzene (16) Ketone (17) –CH2
solvents. (18) ethanoic acid (19) substitution reaction
(20) Acetic acid (21) alcohol or sprit (22) glacial acetic
(10) The molecular masses of carbon compounds
acid (23) macromolecules (24) polymer (25) 78°C,
range upto .
–114°C (26) CnH2n – 2 (27) sodium acetate
(11) The property of carbon atom to form strong
Q.1 (A) 2. Match the columns:
covalent bond with itself and results in formation
of big molecules, is called . (1) Column A Column B
(1) Benzene (a) CH3COOH
(12) Being one carbon atom can form
bonds with four other atoms. (2) Sodium ethoxide (b) C6H12
(3) Acetic acid (c) C6H6
(13) Hydrocarbons having identical molecular
(4) Cyclohexane (d) CH3CH2ONa
formula but different structures are called
.
Ans. (1 – c), (2 – d), (3 – a), (4 – b)
(14) The molecular formula of cyclohexane is *(2) Column A Column B
.
(1) C2H6 (a) Unsaturated hydrocarbon
(15) is a cyclic unsaturated hydrocarbon. (2) C2H2 (b) Molecular formula of an
O alcohol
(16) The functional group is called . (3) C2H5OH (c) Saturated hydrocarbon
C
(4) C3H6 (d) Triple bond
(17) Difference between successive members of
homologous series is . Ans. (1 – c), (2 – d), (3 – b), (4 – a)
(18) Ethanol gets oxidized by alkaline Potassium (3) Column A Column B
permanganate to form . Name of the Structural Formula
(19) The reaction in which the place of one type of Compound
atom/ group in a reactant is taken by another (1) Ethyl alcohol (a) CH - CH - CH - CH
3 2 2 3
atom/ group of atoms is called .
(2) Acetone (b) CH3 - CH2 - CH2 - OH
(20) Ethanoic acid is commonly called .
O

––
(21) Ethanol is also called or . (3) Propionic acid (c) CH – C – CH
3 3
(22) During winter in cold countries ethanoic acid
freezes at room temperature itself and looks like
=O
ice. Therefore, it is named . (4) Ethyne (d) CH3 - CH2 - C –
OH
(23) The giant carbon molecules formed from
hundreds and thousands of atoms are called (5) Propanol (e) CH3-CH2OH
. (6) Butane (f) CH CH
(24) A macro molecule formed by regular repetition
Ans. (1 – e), (2 – c), (3 – d), (4 – f), (5 – b), (6 – a)
of a small unit is called .
(4) Column A Column B
(25) Boiling point of ethanol is and
freezing point is . Name of Polymer Constituent monomer
(1) Polyethylene (a) CF2= CF2
(26) Molecular formula for the homologous series of
alkynes is . (2) Polystyrene (b) CH3 – CH=CH2
(3) Polyvinyl (c) CH2 = CH – C = N
(27) The IUPAC name of the salt is Sodium ethanoate
chloride (PVC)
while its common name is .
(4) Polyacrylo nitrile (d) Cl – CH = CH2
Ans. (1) Carbon (2) Unsaturated hydrocarbon (3) ions (5) Teflon (e) CH2 = CH2
(4) Covalent bond (5) Hydrocarbons (6) single
(6) Polypropylene (f) C6H5 – CH = CH2
(7) CnH2n+2 (8) Hydrogen and Carbon (9) organic
(10) 1012 (11) Catenation (12) tetravalent (13) isomers Ans. (1 – e), (2 – f), (3 – d), (4 – c), (5 – a), (6 – b)

Third Proof : 09.02.2019 D:\Dipa\2018\Books\Masker Key\X\Science\Xth_Science_Chapter 9_ Xth_Science_Chapter_9_Revised

Carbon Compounds 175

(5) Column A Column B

Acid
(1) CH3COOH + CH3 - CH2 - OH CH3 - COO - CH2 - CH3 + H2O (a) Addition Reaction
Catalyst

(2) CH = CH + H Ni CH3 – CH3 (b) Substitution reaction

2 2 2

(3) CH + Cl Sunlight CH3Cl + HCl (c) Neutralisation reaction

4 2

(4) CH3COOH + NaOH CH3COONa + H2O (d) Esterification reaction

Ans. (1 – d), (2 – a), (3 – b), (4 – c)

Q.1. (A) 3. State whether the following statements (12) The atom of the element which is substitute for
are true or false. If false, rewrite the correct hydrogen is referred as hetero atoms.
statements: Ans. (1) False. Saturated hydrocarbon burns with non-smoky
(1) Saturated hydrocarbons burn with smoky flame. .(2) (3) .     
(2) The essential element in all the organic compounds compounds are found to be bad conductor of electricity.
is carbon. ( ) .  i      
two nitrogen atoms to form a Nitrogen molecule.
(3) Generally, most of the carbon compounds are
(5) ( ) .    
found to be good conductors of electricity.
  iv    i     .
(4) Two pairs of electrons are shared between two
(7)  (8)  (9) .   i i
nitrogen atoms to form a nitrogen molecule.
(10) False. Covalent compounds have low melting and
(5) Ethanoic acid reacts with a base like sodium i i  i ( ) ( 2) .
hydroxide to form sodium ethanoate and water.
*Q.1. (A) 4. Write the IUPAC names of the following
(6) When Unsaturated carbon compounds burn, they
structural formula
give a clean oxidizing flame with lots of black
carbon. (1) CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – CH3
(7) CH3-CH2-CH2Br is 1- bromo propane. (2) CH3 – CH – OH –CH3
(3) CH3 – CH2 – COOH
(8) Carbon is tetravalent and it can undergo catenation.
O (4) CH3 – CH2 – NH2
––

(9) (5) CH3 – CHO

CH3– CH2 – C – OH is propanone.
(6) CH3 –CO – CH2 – CH3
(10) Covalent compounds have high melting and
boiling points. Ans. (1) Butane (2) Propanol or Propan-1-ol (3) Propan-1-
oic acid (4) Ethan-1-amine (5) ethanal (6) butan - 2
(11) Monomer of protein is alpha amino acids.
- one

Q.1. (A) 5. Identify the type of the following reaction of carbon compounds. Ans.
*(1) CH3-CH2-CH2-OH CH3-CH2-COOH Oxidation reaction
*(2) CH3-CH2-CH2 + 5O2 3CO2 + 4H2O Combustion reaction
*(3) CH3-CH = CH - CH3 + Br2 CH3-CHBr - CHBr-CH3 Addition reaction
*(4) CH3-CH3 + Cl2 CH3-CH2-Cl + HCl Substitution reaction
*(5) CH3-CH2-CH2-CH2-OH CH3-CH2 – CH = CH2 + H2O Dehydration reaction
*(6) CH3-CH2-COOH + NaOH CH3-CH2-COONa + H2O Neutralization reaction
*(7) CH3-COOH + CH3-OH CH3-COOCH3 + H2O Esterification reaction
(8) CH3COOC2H5 + NaOH CH3COONa + C2H5OH Saponification reaction
(9) CH2 = CH2 + Br2 Br–CH2–CH2–Br Addition reaction
(10) 2CH3OH + 3O2 2CO2 + 4H2O Combustion reaction
(11) CH3CH2OH + 2[O] CH3COOH + H2O Oxidation reaction
176 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

Q.1. (A) 6. Answer the following questions in one Ans. A chemical bond is an attraction between atoms,
sentences: ions or molecules that enables the formation of
(1) Name the five things which contain carbon chemical compounds.
essentially. *(12) What is the number of chemical bonds that an
Ans. ood, clothes, medicines, books, wooden table etc. atom of an element forms called? (Can you tell;
Textbook Page no. 110)
(2) How can carbon become stable?
Ans. The number of chemical bonds that an atom of an
Ans. Carbon becomes stable by sharing four electrons element forms is called its valency.
with atoms of other elements or carbon itself.
*(13) What are the two important types of chemical
(3) Which organic compounds are named as alkanol bond? (Can you tell; Textbook Page no. 110)
in I PAC system? Ans. The two important types of chemical bond are
Ans. The alcohol with functional group –OH are Ionic or Electrovalent bond and Covalent bond.
named as alkanol in I PAC system. *(14) With which bond C atom in CO2 is bonded to each
(4) What is glacial acetic acid? of the O atoms? (Use your brain power; Textbook
Ans. Acetic acid or ethanoic acid when frozen below Page no. 112)
17oC (290 K) solidifies to an ice-like mass, which Ans. As carbon and oxygen share the valence electrons
is known as glacial acetic acid. and fulfill their valency, the bond formed is
covalent bond.
(5) What is covalent bond?
*(15) Molecular formula of propane is C3H8. rom the
Ans. The chemical bond formed by sharing of two
Molecular formula draw its structural formula.
valence electrons between the two atoms is called
(Use your brain power; Textbook Page no. 115)
covalent bond. Ans. Structural formula : C3H8.
(6) What are isomers? H H H
Ans. Compounds having different structural formula
H C C C H
but having the same molecular formula are called
isomers. H H H
(7) What is a functional group? *(16) Propane (C3H8) is one of the combustible
component of PG. Write down the reaction for
Ans. The atom or group of atoms present in the molecule
propane (C3H8). (Use your brain power; Textbook
which determine characteristic properties of an
page no 123)
organic compound is called the functional group.
Ans. C3H8 5O2 3CO2 + 4H2O heat light
*(8) What are the types of compounds? (Can you
*(17) Which is the component of biogas that makes it
recall; Textbook Page no. 110)
useful as fuel. (Can you recall; Textbook Page no 123)
Ans. Organic and Inorganic compounds.
Ans. Methane present in biogas makes it useful as fuel.
*(9) Objects in everyday uses such as foodstuff,
*(18) Which product is formed by the combustion
fibers, paper, medicines, wood, fuels are made of
of elemental carbon? (Can you recall; Textbook
various compounds.
Page no 123)
Which constituent elements are common in these Ans. Carbon dioxide and water are formed by the
compounds? (Can you recall; Textbook Page no. 110) combustion of elemental carbon.
Ans. All these materials are made up of organic
*(19) Is the biogas combustion reaction endothermic or
compounds and the constituent element common exothermic (Can you recall; Textbook Page no 123)
in their compounds is carbon. Ans. It is an exothermic reaction.
*(10) To which group in the periodic table does the *(20) Which one of ethanoic acid and hydrochloric acid
element carbon belong? Write down the electronic is stronger? (Use your brain power; Textbook Page no
configuration of carbon and deduce the valency 129)
of carbon. (Can you recall; Textbook Page no. 110) Ans. Hydrochloric acid is stronger than ethanoic acid
Ans. Carbon belongs to group 14 of the Periodic table. (acetic acid).
Its atomic number is 6. Electronic configuration is *(21) Which indicator paper out of blue litmus paper
(2, 4) and valency of carbon is 4. and pH paper is useful to distinguish between
*(11) What is meant by a chemical bond? (Can you tell; ethanoic acid and hydrochloric acid? (Use your
Textbook Page no. 110) brain power; Textbook Page no 129)

Third Proof : 09.02.2019 D:\Dipa\2018\Books\Masker Key\X\Science\Xth_Science_Chapter 9_ Xth_Science_Chapter_9_Revised

Carbon Compounds 177

Ans. pH paper is useful to distinguish between the (2) A functional group mainly determines the
ethanoic acid and hydrochloric acid. properties.
*(22) When fat is heated with sodium hydroxide (a) physical (b) chemical
solution, soap and glycerin are formed. Which (c) both (d) none of the above
functional groups might be present in fat and
(3) The hydrocarbon is also called
glycerin? (   i     3 )
marsh gas.
Ans. Ester –COO group, Alcohol- OH, and (–COOH) (a) ethane (b) propane
carboxyl functional groups, are present in fat and
(c) methane (d) butane
glycerin.
(4) Ethane with the molecular formula C2H6 has
*(23) What are the chemical names of the nutrients that covalent bonds.
we get from the food stuff, namely cereals, pulses
(a) six (b) seven (c) eight (d) nine
and meat? (       3 )
(5) What are the products obtained on complete
Ans. Carbohydrates, fats and proteins
combustion of hydrocarbons?
*(24) What are the chemical substances that make (a) CO + H2O (b) CO2 + H2
cloth, furniture, and elastic objects? (Can you tell;
(c) CO2 + H2O (d) CO + H2
   3 )
(6) The functional group of alcohol is .
Ans. Manmade fibres, elastomers.
O O
(25) Hydrogen peroxide decomposes on its own by
(a) –COOH (b) –OH (c) H C (d) C
the following reaction. (Use your brain power;
  . 3) (7) Ethanol is used as an additive to increase
H – O – O – H 2H-–O – H +O2 the efficiency of petrol such a fuel is called
From this, what will be your inference about the
strength of O – O, Covalent bond. (a) ethanol (b) cananol
Ans. The strength of O - O, Covalent bond is weaker. (c) gashol (d) methanol
*(26) Tell from the above example whether oxygen has (8) After the formation of four Covalent bonds,
catenation power or not? (Use your brain power; Carbon attains the electronic configuration of
  . 3) .
Ans. No, oxygen shows catenation property only in
(a) Helium (b) Neon
the formation of ozone.
(c) Argon (d) Krypton
(27) What is the full from of PET?
(9) Diamond and graphite have the same
Ans. PET - Poly ethylene terephthalate.
.
(28) Give uses of the following polymer’s.
(a) chemical properties
(a) polyethylene (b) polystyrene
(b) degree of hardness
(c) polyvinyl chloride (d) polyacrylo nitrile
(c) electrical conductivity
Ans. (a) polyethylene : It is used to make carry bags,
and sports wear (d) physical forms
(b) polystyrene : It is used to make thermocol (10) The reaction in which two molecules react to
articles. form a single product is known as
(c) polyvinyl chloride : It is used to produce reaction.
P.V.C. pipes, door mats, tubes and bags in (a) substitution (b) addition
hospital kits. (c) hydrogenation (d) polymerisation
(d) polyacrylo nitrile : It is used in producing (11) IUPAC name of CH3-CH3 is
winter clothing and blankets.
(a) ethene (b) ethane
Q.1. (B) Choose and write the correct option.
(c) ethyne (d) ethylene
(1) The fundamental organic compounds are also
(12) A saturated hydrocarbon will have suffix
known as compounds.
(a) parent (b) father
(c) mother (d) daughter (a) –ene (b) –yne (c) –ane (d) –one
178 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

(13) The valency of carbon is Each of the covalent bonds contains two electrons
(a) 2 (b) 3 (c) 4 (d) 6 – one from a hydrogen atom and one from the
(14) is a natural macromolecule. oxygen atom. Both atoms share the electrons.

(a) Polythene (b) Monosaccharide’s H O H

(c) Polysaccharides (d) Disaccharides *(3) Hetero atom in a carbon compound
(15) Gas evolved during fermentation Ans. The atoms of the elements, substitute one or more
(a) O2 (b) CO (c) H2 (d) CO2 hydrogen atoms in the hydrocarbon chain and
(16) A small unit that repeats regularly to form a thereby, the tetravalency of carbon is satisfied.
polymer. The atom of the element which is substitute for
(a) Macromolecule (b) Polysaccharides hydrogen is referred as hetero atom.
(c) Monomer (d) Dinomer e.g. CH3OH. In this example, one hydrogen atom
in methane CH4 is replaced by –OH group. OH is
(17) Monomer of polythene is
a functional group. So, OH is a heteroatom.
(a) CH CH (b) CH2=CH2
*(4) Functional group
(c) CH3-CH3 (d) C2H5 – C2H5
Ans. The hetero atom or group of hetero atoms, present
(18) are used for making fragrance and
in a compound due to which the compound
flavouring agents
acquires specific chemical properties irrespective
(a) Ethers (b) Ethanol
of the length and nature of the carbon chain in
(c) Ester (d) Ethanoic acid it, are called as functional group. e.g. alcohol
(19) is used in nonstick cookware. group (-OH). Any hydrocarbon that has – OH
(a) PVC (b) Teflon substituent. e.g. methanol (CH3OH)
(c) Polystyrene (d) Polypropylene H
Ans. (1) (a) parent (2) (b) chemical (3) (c) methane H C OH
(4) (b) seven (5) (c) CO2+H2O (6) (b)–OH
H
(7) (c) gashol (8) (b) neon (9) (a) chemical properties
*(5) Alkane
(10) (b) addition (11) (b) ethane (12) (c) -ane (13) (c) 4
(14) (c) polysaccharides (15) (d) CO2 (16) (c) monomer Ans. Alkanes are chemical compounds that consist
(17) (b) CH2=CH2 ( 8) ( )  ( 9) ( ) of carbon and hydrogen atoms, so they are also
called hydrocarbons, the chemical structure of
Q.2.1. Define the following: alkanes only consists of single covalent bonds.
*(1) Structural isomerism As they contain only single bonds, and because
Ans. The phenomenon in which compounds have of that each carbon atom is saturated with
different structural formulae but have the same hydrogen atoms. Alkanes are, therefore referred
molecular formula is called structural isomerism. to as saturated hydrocarbons.
e.g. Structural formula of compound C4H10 e.g.:Methane Ethane Pentane
H H H CH4 C2H6 C5H12
H H H H H C C C H
H H H H H H H H
H C C C C H
H H H C H H C C H H C C C C C H
H H H H H C H H H H H H H H H
H
*(2) Covalent bond *(6) Unsaturated hydrocarbons
Ans. The chemical bond formed by sharing of two Ans. Hydrocarbons in which carbon atoms are linked
valence electrons between the two atoms is called to each other by double or triple bonds are known
covalent bond. as unsaturated hydrocarbons.
e.g. Covalent bond is formed between oxygen and
e.g. Ethene; (C2H4), Ethyne; (C2H2)
each of the hydrogen in a water molecule (H2O).

Third Proof : 09.02.2019 D:\Dipa\2018\Books\Masker Key\X\Science\Xth_Science_Chapter 9_ Xth_Science_Chapter_9_Revised

Carbon Compounds 179

*(8) Monomer
H C C H H C=C H Ans. A macromolecule formed by regular repetition
H H of a small unit is called polymer. The small unit
*(7) Homopolymer that repeats regularly to form a polymer is called
Ans. When the polymers are formed by repetition of monomer e.g. Vinyl chloride polymerizes into
single monomer. polyvinyl chloride of PVC. Glucose polymerises

These are called homopolymer. e.g. Polyvinyl

Chloride (PVC)

into starch, cellulose, laminarin and glucans.

Synthesis of polyethylene is as follows:

H H H H H H H H H H H H
Polymerisation
C=C + C=C + C=C +... C C C C C C
H H H H H H
H H H H H H n
ethylene monomer Polyethylene

*(9) Reduction: same functional group in the place of a particular

Ans. Reduction is the type of reaction in which loss of hydrogen atom in the chains having sequentially
oxygen and gain of hydrogen occurs or in terms increasing length is called Homologous Series.
of electron transfer, we can define reduction (14) Addition reaction
reactions are the type of reactions where gain of Ans. When a carbon compound combines with another
electrons takes place.
compound to form a product that contains all the
e.g: CH3CHO CH3CH2OH
atoms in both the reactants is called as Addition
Reduction by gain of hydrogen Reaction.
*(10) Oxidant: (15) Substitution reaction
Ans. Substances that can give oxygen to other Ans. The reaction in which the place of one type of
substances are called oxidants or oxidizing atom or group in a reactant is taken by another
agents. e.g. Potassium permanganate or atom or group of atoms is called Substitution
potassium dichromate are commonly used as Reaction.
oxidizing agents. Sunlight
For example CH4+Cl2 CH3 - Cl + HCl
(11) Catenation
Ans. Carbon has a unique ability to form strong (16) Aliphatic compounds
covalent bonds with other carbon atoms, this Ans. A group of hydrocarbons that contains carbon
results in formation of big molecules. This atoms joined together in straight chains, branched
property of carbon is called Catenation power. chains or simple rings.
(12) Structural Isomerism (17) Aromatic Compounds
Ans. The phenomenon in which compounds having Ans. A cyclic compound containing at least one
different structural formulae but have the same benzene ring and characterized by the presence
molecular formula is called Structural Isomerism.
of alternating double bonds within the ring. e.g.
(13) Homologous series Benzene – C6H6
Ans. The series of compounds formed by joining the
180 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

Q.2.2 Differentiate between:

(1) Saturated and unsaturated Hydrocarbons.
Ans. Saturated Hydrocarbons Unsaturated Hydrocarbons
(i) They have C-C single bonds. (i) They have C-C double or triple bonds.
(ii) These compounds are chemically less reactive. (ii) These compounds are more reactive.
(iii) Substitution reaction is the characteristic (iii) Addition reaction is the characteristic property
property of these hydrocarbons. of these hydrocarbons.
(iv) The general formula is CnH2n+2 (iv) The general formula is CnH2n–2 or CnH2n
H (v) e.g. ethene C2H4. H2C = CH2
(v) e.g. Methane CH4. H C H ethyne C2H2. HC CH

H
(2) Alkanes and Alkenes
Ans. Alkanes Alkenes
(i) Hydrocarbons containing carbon to carbon (i) The hydrocarbons which contain carbon to
single bonds (C-C) only are called alkanes or carbon double bonds (C=C) are called Alkenes
Paraffins. or Olefins.
(ii) Their general formula is CnH2n+2 (ii) Their general formula is CnH2n
(iii) They are chemically less reactive. (iii) They are chemically more reactive.
(iv) They undergo substitution reaction. (iv) They undergo addition reaction.
H H H H
(v) e.g. ethene C2H4. C = C
(v) e.g. ethane – C2H6. H C C H

H H H H

(3) Alkenes and Alkynes.

Ans. Alkenes Alkynes
(i) The hydrocarbons which contain carbon to (i) The hydrocarbons which contain carbon to
carbon double bonds (C = C) are called alkenes. carbon triple bonds (C C) are called alkynes.
(ii) Their general formula is CnH2n (ii) Their general formula is CnH2n-2
H H (iii) e.g. ethyne C2H2. HC CH.
(iii) e.g. ethene C2H4. C = C

H H

(4) Covalent compounds and Ionic compounds.

Ans. Covalent compounds Ionic compounds
(i) These compounds are formed due to sharing of (i) These compounds are formed due to transfer of
electrons. electrons.
(ii) They exist as solid, liquid and gases. (ii) They exist as solids.
(iii) Covalent compounds have low melting and (iii) Ionic compounds have high melting and boiling
boiling points. points.
(iv) They are generally insoluble in water. (iv) They are mostly soluble in water.
(v) They do not conduct electricity in molten or in (v) They conduct electricity in molten state and in
aqueous solution. aqueous solution.
(vi) e.g. Methane (CH4), ethane (C2H6). (vi) e.g. Sodium Chloride (NaCl).
Potassium Chloride (KCl)
Carbon Compounds 181

(5) Ethanol and Ethanoic acid (Physical properties)

Ans. Ethanol Ethanoic Acid
(i) It has a specific smell. (i) It has vinegar like smell.
(ii) It has a burning taste. (ii) It is sour to taste.
(iii) It does not freeze in winters. (iii) It freezes in winters.
(iv) Boiling point is 78°C. (iv) Boiling point is 118°C.

(6) Ethanol and Ethanoic acid (Chemical Properties)

Ans. Ethanol Ethanoic acid
(i) It does not react with NaHCO3. (i) It evolves CO2 with NaHCO3.
(ii) It burns with a blue flame. (ii) It does not burn with a blue flame.
(iii) It does not affect blue litmus. (iii) It turns blue litmus red.

Q.2.3 Answer the following questions: *Q.2.4 Give Scientific reasons:

(1) Why are carbon and its compounds used as (1) Covalent compounds have low melting and
fuels for most application? boiling points.
Ans. Carbon and its compounds undergo combustion Ans.
to produce heat, the amount of heat released can (i) When substances melt or boil, bonds between the
be handled and used, so that they can be used as molecules are broken due to heat supplied.
fuels for most application.
(ii) In covalent compounds, the bonds between two
(2) How is ethene prepared from ethanol? Give the or more molecules are weak.
reaction involved in it.
(iii) Hence, intermolecular bonds in covalent
Ans. When ethanol is heated at the temperature 170°C
compounds are broken easily due to which they
with excess amount of concentrated sulphuric
have low melting and boiling points.
acid, one molecule of water is removed from
(2) Carbon can form a large number of compounds.
its molecule to form ethene, an unsaturated
compound. Ans.

170°C (i) Atomic number of carbon is 6 and its electronic

CH3 – CH2 – OH CH2 = CH2 + H2O
Conc H2SO4 configuration is (2,4).
Ethanol Ethene (ii) An atom of carbon has four valence electrons.
It can share these electrons with other carbon
(3) State the physical properties of ethanoic acid.
atoms and also with hydrogen, oxygen, nitrogen,
Ans. Physical properties of ethanoic acid are: sulphur etc.
(i) Ethanoic acid is a colourless liquid. (iii) Carbon also shows the property of catenation.
(ii) Boiling point of ethanoic acid is 118°C. By virtue of this property, it can form a variety of
(iii) Melting point of ethanoic acid is 17°C. chain and ring structures, with different shapes,
(iv) Ethanoic acid is commonly called as acetic acid and sizes and molecular mass.
the frozen ethanoic acid is called glacial acetic acid. (iv) Thus, carbon can form a large number of
(4) State the number of bonds essentially present compounds.
between carbon and carbon in alkenes and (3) Graphite is a good conductor of electricity.
alkynes. Ans.
Ans. In alkenes, at least one carbon is linked to another (i) Graphite is an crystalline allotrope of carbon.
carbon by a double bond and in alkynes at least
(ii) In its structure, each carbon is attached to three
one carbon is linked to another carbon by a triple
other carbon atoms, forming a hexagonal planar
bond.
structure.
182 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

(iii) These hexagonal rings form layer on one another. Ans.

Thus, in graphite many free electrons move (a) Methane - molecular formula - CH4
throughout the entire layers. H
(iv) These free electrons help in conduction of H C H
electricity. H
(v) Hence, graphite is a good conductor of electricity. (b) Ethene - molecular formula - C2H4
H H
(4) Many hydrocarbons are used as fuels in day to
C C
day life.
H H
Ans.
(c) Methanol - molecular formula - CH3OH
(i) Hydrocarbons are compounds consisting H
of carbon and hydrogen and they are easily H C O H
combustible H
(ii) When they burn in air, large amount of heat is
(d) Water - molecular formula - H2O
evolved with the formation of carbon dioxide.
H O H
(iii) Due to evolution of heat on combustion, many
hydrocarbons are used as fuels in day to day life.
(2) Draw all possible structural formula of
(5) Conversion of ethanol to ethanoic acid an compounds from their molecular formula given
oxidation reaction below.
Ans. (A) C3 H8 (B) C4 H10 (C) C3H4
(i) Addition of oxygen or removal of hydrogen or Ans.
loss of electrons is known as oxidation. (A) C3H8 Propane

(ii) Ethanol gets oxidised by alkaline potassium 2D - formula 3D - formula

permangnate to form ethanoic acid. H H H H H
(iii) The following equation will explain conversion H C C H
H C C C H
of ethanol acid. H C H
O H H H
[O] H H
CH3 – CH2 – OH CH3 – C – OH
alkaline (C3H8) (C3H8)
(ethanol) KMnO4 (ethanoic acid)
H H H
2 Hydrogen atoms are replaced by one Oxygen H H H H H
C H C C H C
atom, therefore it is an oxidation reaction. H H
H C C C H
(6) Vegetable oils are healthy as compared to H C C H H
H H H H H
vegetable ghee. H H
Ans. (C3H8) (C3H8) (C3H8)
(i) Vegetable oils which contain unsaturated fatty (B) C4 H10 Butane
acids are good for health as they do not increase
H
cholesterol.
H H H H H C H
(ii) Vegetable ghee contains saturated fatty acids
H C C C C H H H
which are harmful, they increase cholesterol and
increase lipids in blood. H H H H H C C C H
(iii) Hence, vegetable oils are healthy as compared to C4 H10 H H H
vegetable ghee. C4 H10
*Q.2.5. Answer the following questions: (C) C3H4 Propyne
(1) Draw an electron dot structure of the following
H H
molecules. (without showing the circles).
H C C C H H C C C H
(a) Methane (b) Ethene
(c) Methanol (d) Water H H

Third Proof : 09.02.2019 D:\Dipa\2018\Books\Masker Key\X\Science\Xth_Science_Chapter 9_ Xth_Science_Chapter_9_Revised

Carbon Compounds 183

*(3) Write structural formulae for the following (ix) Methanol. Molecular formula CH2O
IUPAC names. Structural formula
(i) Pent - 2 - one - Molecular formula- C5H10O O
Structural formula H C H
H H H O H
H C C C C C H *(4) Draw all possible structural formulae having
molecular formula C6H14. Give names to all the
H H H H isomers. Which difficulties were faced by you
(ii) 2 - Chlorobutane : Molecular formula C4H9Cl while naming? (   i   
Structural formula Page No. 121)
H H Cl H Ans. Molecular formula is C6H14 Its Hexane.
H C C C C H Having 5 isomers.
(i) H H H H H H
H H H H
(iii) Propan - 2 - ol : Molecular formula- C3H7OH H C C C C C C H
Structural formula
H H H H H H
H H H
n- Hexane
H C C C H (ii) H H H H H
H OH H H C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 H
(iv) Methanol : Molecular formula- CH3OH H H H H
Structural formula H C H
H
H
H C OH Iso- hexane or 2 methyl pentane
H
(iii) H H H H H
(v) Butanoic acid : Molecular formula- C4H8O2 or H C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 H
CH3CH2CH2 COOH
Structural formula H H H H
H H H O H C H

H C C C C O H H
3- methyl pentane
H H H
H
(vi) 1- bromopropane : Molecular formula - C3H7Br (iv)
Structural formula H C H
H H H H H H

H C Br H C4 C3 C2 C1 H
C C
H H H
H H H
H C H
(vii) Ethanamine: Molecular formula C2H5NH2
H
Structural formula
2, 2 – dimethyl butane or neohexane
H H
H H H H H
H C C N (v)
H H C1 C2 C3 C4 H
H H
H H
(viii) Butanone: Molecular formula C4H8O H C H H C H
Structural formula
H H
H H H
2, 3 dimethyl butane
H C C C C H The difficulty faced by us is naming the isomer.
H O H H As the number of carbon atoms increases number
184 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

of isomers will also increase and their common Q.2.6. Answer the following questions:
name creates confusion. *(1) By how many CH2 (methylene) units do
*(5) The molecular formula of sulphur is S8 in which the formulae and the first two members of
eight sulphur atoms are bonded to each other to homologous series of alkane, methane (CH4) and
form a ring. Draw an electron – dot structure of ethane (C2H6) differ? Similarly, by how many
S8 without showing circles. (Use your brain power; CH2 Units do the neighbouring members
  . 2) ethane (C2H6) and propane (C3H8) differ from
Ans. each other? (   i    
Electron - dot no. 119)
structure S S
Ans. Methane and ethane differ by one – CH2- unit.
S S
S S Also in ethane and propane differ by one – CH2-
S S unit.
*(2) How many methylene units are extra in the
S S formula of the fourth member than the third
S S
Line members of the homologous series of alcohols?
S S S S structure (   i     . 9)
Ans. There is only one extra unit of methylene
*(6) Draw electron dot structure of cyclohexane
(–CH2–) in the formula of the fourth member
(   i     . )
than the third member of the homologous series
Ans. Molecular formula is C6H12 of alcohol.
H H *(3) How many methylene units are less in the
H C H formula of the second member than the third
H C C H member of two homologous series of alkenes?
(   i     . 9)

H C C H Ans. One unit of methylene (–CH2–) is less in the

H C H formula of the second member than the third
member of the homologous series of alkenes.
H H
*(4) Atomic number of Chlorine is 17. What is the
(7) The proportion of carbon atoms in ethanol
number of electrons in the valence shell of
(C2H5OH) and naphthalene (C10H8)
Chlorine? (   i     .
Ans. 112)
Compound The number of Ans. Atomic Number of Chlorine is 17, Electronic
carbon atoms configuration in 2, 8, 7. Therefore, number of
electrons in valence shell is 7.
Ethanol 2
*(5) Inspect the molecular formulae of the members
Naphthalene 10
of Alkenes.
(8) How is the transformation of ethanol into Do you find any relationship in the number
ethanoic acid an oxidation reaction? of carbon atoms and the number of hydrogen
Ans. Ethanol gets oxidised by alkaline potassium atoms in the molecular formulae (Use your brain
permanganate to form ethanoic acid. Potassium    . 20)
permanganate is an oxidizing agent which is
Ans. In the Alkene series, First member is ethene
the source of oxygen. Addition of oxygen is
where molecular formula is C2H4, Next is propene
oxidation.
O C3H6, then 1- Butene – C4H8. We can see from
(O) the molecular formula that if number of carbon
CH2 – CH2 – OH CH3 – C – OH
alkaline KMnO4 atoms increases by ‘1’, then number of hydrogen
ethanoic acid
atoms increases by ‘2’

Third Proof : 09.02.2019 D:\Dipa\2018\Books\Masker Key\X\Science\Xth_Science_Chapter 9_ Xth_Science_Chapter_9_Revised

Carbon Compounds 185

*(6) If the number of carbon atoms in the molecular *(8) What is meant by vinegar and gashol? What are
formulae of alkenes is denoted by ‘n’ what will their uses?
be the number of hydrogen atom? (Use your Ans.
i     . 20) (i) Vinegar: Ethanoic acid is most commonly known
as acetic acid. Its dilute solution in water (5-8 %)
Ans. General formula of alkenes is CnH2n. When the is known as vinegar.
value of n = 2, then the number of hydrogen (ii) Uses: Vinegar is used as a cooking ingredient, as
atoms will be 2n = 2 × 2 = 4. Or if n = 3, then the a preservative in pickles, food storage, vinegar is
hydrogen atoms will be 2n = 2 × 3 = 6 also used for fermentation and also in medicinal
*(7) What causes the existence of very large number field.
of carbon compounds? (iii) Gashol: Ethanol is a clean fuel. Therefore, it is
Ans. used as an additive to increase the efficiency of
petrol. Such a fuel is called gashol.
(i) Carbon is the only element that can form so many
(iv) Uses: It is used as a fuel.
different compounds because each carbon atom
*(9) What is a catalyst? Write any one reaction which
can form four chemical bonds with other atoms.
is brought about by use of a catalyst.
(ii) Having the atomic number 6, every carbon atom
Ans. Catalyst: A substance which increases the rate
has a total of six electrons. The carbon atom’s four
of reaction without causing any disturbance is
valence electrons can be shared by other atom,
called a catalyst.
forming covalent bonds, gives them the ability
Vegetable oils are converted into vanaspati ghee
to form long carbon – to – carbon chain, they
by passing hydrogen in presence of nickel as
can even join “head – to – tail” to make rings of
catalyst.
carbon atoms.
(iii) Carbon atoms can share not only a single electron Vegetable oil + H Ni vanaspati ghee
2

with another atom to form a single bond, but it H H H H

H2
can also share two or three electrons, forming H C = C C C
double or triple bond. Pt/Ni
(iv) This makes a huge number of different possible H H
molecules. Hence, carbon forms large number of (10) State some of the physical properties of covalent
compounds, because of all these properties. compounds.
Ans. Some physical properties of covalent compounds
are i) They have low melting and boiling points.
ii) They are generally insoluble in water but
soluble in other organic solvents iii) They are
poor conductors of heat and electricity.

(11) Explain by writing a reaction, what will happen when pieces of sodium metal are put in n- propyl alcohol.
Ans. When pieces of sodium metal are put in n-propyl alcohol, hydrogen is liberated and sodium n-propoxide salt
is formed.
2Na + 2CH3 – CH2 – CH2OH 2CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – ONa + H2
Sodium n-propyl alcohol i  i Hydrogen
(12) Explain by writing a reaction, which product will be formed on heating n - butyl alcohol with concentrated
sulphuric acid.
Ans. When n - butyl alcohol is heated at the temperature 170°C with excess amount of concentrated sulphuric acid,
one molecule of water is removed from its molecule to form butene, an unsaturated compound.

CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – CH2OH 170°C CH3 – CH2 – CH = CH2 + H2O

Conc H2SO4
Butene
Here concentrated sulphuric acid acts as a dehydrating agent.
186 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

Q.3.1. Answer the following questions:

*(1) Write down structural formula of the first four members and the various homologous series formed by
making use of the functional groups. (   i     20)
Ans. First four members of Alkanes and Alcohols.

Alkanes Formula of Alcohol Common Name IUPAC Name

CH4 Methane CH3OH Methyl alcohol Methanol

C2H6 Ethane C2H5OH Ethyl alcohol Ethanol

C3H8 Propane C3H7OH n-propyl alcohol 1- Propanol

C4H10 Butane C4H9OH n-butyl alcohol 1- Butanol

Alkyl Halides
Molecular formula Structural Formula Common Name IUPAC Name
CH3Cl CH3Cl Methyl chloride Chloro methane
C2H5Cl CH3CH2 Cl Ethyl chloride Chloro ethane
C3H7Cl CH3CH2 CH2Cl n-propyl chloride 1- Chloropropane
C4H9Cl CH3CH2 CH2CH2 Cl n-Butyl chloride 1- Chlorobutane

Aldehydes
Molecular formula Structural Formula Common Name IUPAC Name
O
HCHO Formaldehyde Methanal
H–C–H
O
CH3CHO Acetaldehyde Ethanal
CH3 – C – H
H H O
CH3 – CH2 – CHO H – C – C– C Propionaldehyde Propanal
H H H
H H H O
CH3CH2 CH2 CHO H – C – C– C – C– H Butyraldehyde Butanal
H H H
Ketones
Molecular formula Structural Formula Common Name IUPAC Name
H O H
CH3CO CH3 H – C – C– C – H Acetone Propanone
H H
H O H H
CH3CO C2H5 H – C – C– C – C– H Ethyl methyl Ketone Butanone
H H H
H H O H H
C2H5CO C2H5 H – C – C– C – C – C– H diethyl ketone Pentan-3-one
H H H H
H O H H H
CH3CO CH2CH2 CH3 H – C – C– C – C – C– H Methyl-n-propyl ketone 2- pentanone
H H H H
Carbon Compounds 187

Carboxylic Acids
Molecular formula Structural Formula Common Name IUPAC Name

O
HCO OH Formic acid Methanoic acid
H – C – OH
H O
CH3CO OH H–C–C Acetic acid Ethanoic acid
H O–H
H H O
CH3CH2 COOH H – C – C– C – O – H Propionic acid Propanoic acid
H H
H H H O
CH3CH2 CH2COOH H – C – C– C – C – O – H Butyric acid Butanoic acid
H H H

Same way students can write with Alkenes and *(4) Give the names n-pentane, and Neo-pentane to
Alkynes. the above structural formulae.
*(2) General formula and the homologous series of (Use the same logic as used in the names of the
alkanes is CnH2n+2. Write down the molecular isomeric butanes for their purpose). (Use your
formula of the 8th and 12th member using this. i     2 )
(   i     20) Ans. In –the above question
Ans. General formula of alkanes is CnH2n + 2 (i) Structure is n-pentane
Molecular formula of 8th member n=8 (ii) Structure is i-pentane or isopentane
C8 H2 × 8 + 2 = C8 H18 (iii) Structure is Neopentane.
There are two isomers of Butane(C4H10). n-Butane
Molecular formula of 12th member
and isobutane.
i.e n = 12.
C12 H2 × 12 + 2 = C12 H26 H H H H

*(3) Draw three structural formulae having

H C C C C H Or CH3-CH2-CH2-CH3
molecular formula C5H12. (Use your brain power H H H H n - butane
  2 )
H H H
CH3-CH-CH3
Ans. Molecular formula = C5H12. Or
H C C C H
i. H H H H H CH3
H H
H C C C C C H Or CH -CH -CH -CH -CH H C H Isobutane
3 2 2 2 3

H H H H H
H
ii. H H H H *(5) Molecular formula of chlorine is Cl2. Draw an
H C C C C H CH3-CH-CH2-CH3 electron dot and line structure of a chlorine
Or
H H H CH3 molecule. (   i     .
H C H 112)
H Ans. Molecular formula Cl2

H
Electron-dot Structure outermost shell of
iii.
chlorine contain 7 electrons.
H C H
H H CH3
H C C C H Or CH3 C CH3 Cl + Cl Cl Cl
H H CH3

H C H Line Structure – Cl + Cl Cl2 or Cl – Cl

H
188 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

*(6) The molecular formula of water is H2O. Draw *(8) The molecular formula of carbon-dioxide is
electron-dot and line structure of this triatomic CO2 – Draw the electron dot structure (without
molecule. (use dots for electron of oxygen showing circle) and line structure of CO2
atom and cross for electrons of hydrogen atom) (   i     . 2)
(   i     . 2) Ans. Molecular formula and Carbon dioxide is CO2
Ans. Molecular formula of water is H2O Atomic number of carbon = 6;
Electron dot structure: Electronic configuration = (2, 4)
Atomic number of oxygen = 8;
H ×+ O +× H H× O ×H Electronic configuration (2, 6)
Electron – dot structure.
Hydrogen Oxygen Hydrogen Water O + C + O O C O
atom atom atom molecule

Carbon  CO2 - Compound
Line structure: atom atom atom
H O H Line Structure: O = C = O
*(7) The molecular formula of Ammonia is NH3. *(9) In the Chlorination, substitution reaction of
Draw electron dot structure and line structure propane, two isomeric products containing
of ammonia molecule. (Use your brain power; one chlorine atom are obtained. Draw their
  . 2) structural formula and give their IUPAC names.
Ans. Molecular formula of Ammonia is NH3. (   i      . 2 )
Atomic number of Nitrogen is 7. Ans.
Electronic configuration : (2, 5) 2CH3 CH2 CH3 + Cl2 CH3CH2-CH2Cl + CH3-CH Cl-CH3
Its valency is 3, which will be satisfied by three (45%) ((55%)
hydrogen atoms. Structural formula and two isomers
Electron – dot structure H H H H H H

H ×+ H ×+ N +× H H × N ×H H C C C Cl H C C C H
×
H H H H H Cl H
Line Structure: 1- Chloropropane 2- Chloropropane
H N H Ammonia
molecule
H
*Q.3.2. Complete the given tables:
(1) Complete the table by writing their IUPAC names (      . 23)

Sr. No. Common Name Structural Formula IUPAC Name

(1) Ethylene CH2 = CH2 ethene
(2) Acetylene HC CH ethyne
(3) Acetic acid CH3 - COOH ethanoic acid
(4) Methyl alcohol CH3 - OH methanol
(5) Ethyl alcohol CH3 - CH2 - OH ethanol
(6) Acetaldehyde CH3 - CHO ethanal
(7) Propionaldehyde CH3 - CO - CH3 propanone or propan – 2 – one
(8) Ethyl methyl ketone CH3 - CO - CH2 - CH3 butanone or butan – 2 – one
(9) Ethyl amine CH3 - CH2 - NH2 ethanamine or 1 – Aminoethane
(10) n- propyl chloride CH3 - CH - CH2 - Cl 1 – chloropropane
Carbon Compounds 189

(2) Fill in the gaps in the table a, b and c of homologous series.

(a) Homologous Series of Alkanes

Name Molecular Condensed Structural Number of Number of Boiling

formula formula carbon atoms -CH2- units point 0C

Methane CH4 CH4 1 1 - 162

Ethane C2H6 CH3-CH3 2 2 - 88.5

Propane C3H8 CH3-CH2-CH3 3 3 - 42

Butane C4H10 CH3-CH2-CH2-CH3 4 4 0

Pentane C5H12 CH3-CH2-CH2-CH2-CH3 5 5 36

Hexane C6H14 CH3-CH2-CH2-CH2-CH2-CH3 6 6 69

(b) Homologous Series of Alcohols

Name Molecular Condensed Structural Number of Number of Boiling

formula formula carbon atoms -CH2- units point 0C

Methanol CH4O CH3-OH 1 1 63

Ethanol C2H6O CH3-CH2-OH 2 2 78

Propanol C3H8O CH3-CH2-CH2-OH 3 3 97

Butanol C4H10O CH3-CH2-CH2-CH2-OH 4 4 118

(c) Homologous Series of Alkenes

Name Molecular Condensed Structural Number of Number of Boiling

formula formula carbon atoms -CH2- units point 0C

Ethene C2H4 CH2 = CH2 2 0 - 102

Propene C3H6 CH3-CH = CH2 3 1 - 48

l-Butene C4H8 CH3-CH2-CH = CH2 4 2 - 6.5

l-Pentene C5H10 CH3-CH2-CH2-CH = CH2 5 3 30

(3) Which of the substances do contain a multiple bond?

Name Molecular formula Number of C = C double bonds Will it decolourize I2?

Stearic acid C17 H35 COOH No double bonds yes / no

Oleic acid C17 H33 COOH 2 double bonds yes / no

Plamitic acid C15 H31 COOH No double bonds yes / no

Linoleic acid C17 H31 COOH 2 double bonds yes / no

190 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

*Q.3.3. Answer the questions based on the reaction. (i) What reaction is shown in the above diagram?
(1) Observe the given reaction and answer the Name the reactant and products.
questions given below. (ii) Name the chemical equation.
(iii) What is the special characteristic of the group
Test tube that is formed in this reaction?
Ans.
(i) Reaction - Esterification
Beaker Reactant - Ethanoic acid and ethanol in presence
Water
of concentrated sulphuric acid as catalyst.
Wire guage Products - Ethyl ethanoate (ester) and water.
Tripod stand (ii) Chemical equation.
Mixture of
ethanoic acid, CH3COOH + C2H5OH CH3COO – C2H5 + H2O
Burner
ethanol and Ethanoic Ethanol Ethyl ethanate Water
sulphuric acid acid (ester)
(iii) The special characteristic of esters is that they
have sweet odour and hence used for making
fragrances and flavouring agents.
(2) Answer the questions based on the reaction. Observe the given reaction and answer the questions given below.

H H H H H H H H H H H H
C=C + C=C + C=C + ... C C C C C C
H H H H H H H H H H H H

(i) What type of reaction is it? Define it. polymerization reaction, ethylene (monomer)
(ii) Name the reactant and the products. molecules are converted into polyethylene
(polymer).
(iii) What are the uses of the product / products?
Ans. (ii) The reactant is ethylene (monomer) and the
product is polyethylene (polymer).
(i) It is a Polymerization reaction. The reaction by
which monomer molecules are converted into a (iii) The uses of the product polyethylene is for
polymer is called polymerization. In the above making carry bags and sportswear.
Q.4.1. Answer the following questions:
*(1) Give any four functional groups containing oxygen as the heteroatom in it. Write name and structural formula
and one example each.
Ans.
Functional group
Condensed
Hetero atom Name Structural formula Example
Structural formula
Ethyl alcohol
Oxygen (1) Alcohol –O–H – OH
C2H5–OH
Acetaldehyde
O
Oxygen (2) Aldehyde – CHO O
–
–

–C–H
CH3 – C – H
Propanone
O
Oxygen (3) Ketone – CO– O
–
–

–
–

–C–
CH3 – C – CH3
O Acetic Acid
Oxygen (4) Carboxylic acid – COOH
–
–

–C–O–H CH3COOH
Carbon Compounds 191

*(2) Give names of three functional groups containing three different heteroatoms, write names and structural
formulae and one example each.
Ans.
Functional group
Condensed
Hetero atom Name Structural formula Example
Structural formula
Halogen Ethyl Chloride or
Halo (chloro,
(Chlorine, –X (–Cl, –Br, –I) –X (–Cl, –Br, –I) chloro ethane
bromo, iodo)
Bromine, Iodine) C2H5–Cl
Propanone
O
Oxygen Ketone – CO– O

–
–

–
–
–C–
CH3 – C – CH3
Methyl amine
–N–H H
Nitrogen Amines – – NH2 H C N H
H
H H

*(3) Saturated hydrocarbons are classified into three

Polymer Name of the Occurence
types. Write these names giving one example monomer
each.
Polysaccharide Glucose Starch and
Ans. Saturated hydrocarbons in which the carbon Cellulose
atoms are linked to each other only by single bonds Proteins Alpha amino Muscles, hair,
(C – C) are known as saturated hydrocarbons. acids enzyme, skin,
They are classified into: egg.
Saturated Hydrocarbon DNA Nucleotide Chromosomes
(base- deoxy of animals
Straight chain Branched chain Cyclic or ring ribose
carbon atoms
phosphate)
e.g. Ethane e.g. Butane e.g. Cyclohexane
(5) With the help of an example explain what is
(C2H6) (C4H10) (C6H12)
meant by homologous series.
H H Ans.
H H H (i) You have seen that chains of different length are
H C
H H H formed by joining the carbon atoms to each other.
H C C C H C C
H H
H C C H Moreover you have also seen that a functional
H H H H
C C H group can take place of hydrogen atom on these
H H H C H H
C chains.
C2H6 H
H H (ii) As a result, large number of compounds are formed
C4H10
C6H12 having same functional group but different length
of carbon chain. For example, there are many
*(4) Give names of three natural polymers. Write
compounds such as CH3-OH, CH3-CH2-OH,
the place of their occurrence and name of
monomers from which they are formed. CH3-CH2-CH2-OH, CH3-CH2-CH2-CH2-OH which
contain alcohol as the functional group.
Ans. A macromolecule formed at regular repetition
of a small unit is called polymer. The small unit (iii) Though the length of the carbon chain in them is
that repeats itself regularly to form a polymer is different, their chemical properties are very much
called monomer. Most of the structure of living similar due to the presence of the same functional
things are composed of natural polymers. group in them.
(iv) The series of compounds formed by joining the
same functional group in the place of a particular
192 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

hydrogen atom on the chains having sequentially pillars of the living world. (ii) We get food, clothing
increasing length is called homologous series. and shelter from polysaccharides, namely starch
(v) There are different homologous series in and cellulose. (iii) Proteins constitute a large part
accordance with the functional group. For of the bodies of animals and also are responsible
example, homologous series of alcohols, for their movement and various physiological
homologous series of carboxylic acids, processes. (iv) Nucleic acids control the heredity
homologous series of aldehydes, etc. at molecular level. Rubber is another type of
(vi) All the members of the homologous series are natural macromolecule.
homologues of each other. Homologous series of Man-made macromolecule: (i) Today manmade
alkanes is: macromolecules are in use in every walk of
CH4 Methane C2H6 Ethane life. (ii) Manmade fibres which have strength
C3H8 Propane C4H10 Butane along the length similar to natural fibres cotton,
wool and silk (iii) Elastomers which have the
(6) Explain with an example what is meant by
substitution and addition reactions. elastic property of rubber, plastics from which
innumerable types of articles, sheets, pipes are
Ans.
made. (iv) All these are examples of manmade
(i) The reaction in which the place of one type of macromolecules.
atom or group of atoms in a reactant is taken
(8) What is esterification and give its uses?
by another atom or group of atoms is called
Substitution reaction. Ans.
sunlight (i) Esterification is the reaction in which esters are
CH4 + Cl2 CH3 – Cl + HCl
formed by reaction between carboxylic acid
sunlight and an alcohol in the presence of concentrated
CH3Cl + Cl2 CH2Cl2 + HCl
sulphuric acid
sunlight
CH2Cl2 + Cl2 CHCl3 + HCl
Alcohol + Carboxylic acid Ester + water
sunlight
CHCl3 + Cl2 CCl4 + HCl For e.g. Ethanoic acid reacts with ethanol in
the presence of an acid catalyst and ester, ethyl
(ii) When a carbon compound combines with another ethanoate is formed.
compound to form a product that contains all acid
the atoms in both the reactants, it is called an C2H5OH + CH3COOH catalyst CH3COO – C2H5 + H2O
addition reaction. For example - When ethene Ethanol Ethanoic Ester (ethyl water
is heated with bromine, bromine gets added to acid ethanoate)
ethene to form ethylene dibromide. (ii) Uses: They are used for making fragrances and
flavouring agents. e.g.: flavouring in ice-cream
H H H H
and sweets.
H C C H + Br – Br H C C H
(9) What is saponification?
Ethene Bromine Br Br Ans.
Ethylene dibromide (i) Saponification is the process of making soap
(7) What are macromolecules? Explain Natural and molecule from the chemical reaction in which
manmade macromolecule. fatty esters are hydrolysed in basic conditions.
Ans. (ii) This process converts fats and oils via basic
reaction medium to salts of fatty acids.
(i) The number of the known carbon compounds is
as large as about 10 million and the range of their (iii) When an ester is reacted with the alkali sodium
molecular masses is as large as 101-1012- hydroxide, the corresponding alcohol and
carboxylic acid (in the form of its sodium
(ii) The giant carbon molecules formed from
salt) are obtained back. This reaction is called
hundreds or thousands of atoms are called
saponification reaction as it is used for preparation
macromolecules.
of soap from fats.
Natural macromolecules: (i) The natural
Ester + Sodium hydroxide Sodium Carboxylate
macromolecules namely polysaccharides,
+ Alcohol
proteins and nucleic acids are the supporting
Carbon Compounds 193

Q.4.2. Study the diagram and answer the following (i) Which acid is present in the big test tube?
questions: (ii) What is the observation and conclusion of this
(1) experiment?
Thistle funnel (iii) Explain neutralization reaction of this acid with
Stand a base.
Gas delivery tube
Cork Ans.
Small Test (i) Acetic acid (ethanoic acid) is present in the big test
tube
tube.
(ii) Observation : Acetic acid (ethanoic acid) reacts
Big test
tube wtih basic salt namely, sodium carbonate and a
Acetic Freshly prepared gas with effervescence is given out. This gas, when
acid lime water passed through lime water in the small test tube,
turns lime water milky.
Sodium carbonate

Conclusion : Acetic acid (ethanoic acid) reacts with basic salt namely, Sodium carbonate, to form a salt named
sodium ethanoate, water and carbon dioxide gas.
2CH3COOH(aq) + Na2CO3(s) 2CH3COONa(aq) + H2O(I) + CO2(g)
Acetic acid Sodium Sodium Water Carbon
carbonate ethanoate dioxide
This carbon dioxide gas reacts with lime water Ca (OH)2 in the small test tube and forms a white colour precipitate
of calcium carbonate due to which lime water turns milky.
CO2(g) + Ca(OH)2(aq) H2O + CaCO3
Carbon Lime Water Calcium
dioxide Water carbonate
(water)
(iii) The neutralization reaction of this acid with a base to form salt and water.
CH3COOH + NaOH CH3COONa(aq) + H2O(I)
(2) Observe the apparatus and chemicals given below and answer the following questions:
Apparatus : Test tube, beakers, burner etc.
Chemicals : Glacial ethanoic acid, ethanol, concentrated Sulphuric acid etc.
(a) Which reaction will you study using above apparatus and chemicals? Draw a neat labelled diagram for the
experimental set up.
(b) How will you identify that the reaction has occurred?
(c) Write chemical equation involved in this experiment.
(For fig. see pg. 172 Q.3.3(1))
Ans.
(i) We will be able to study the esterification reaction. Substances having ester as the functional group are formed by
the reaction between a carboxylic acid and an alcohol.
(ii) 1 ml of ethanol is mixed with 1 ml of glacial ethanoic acid in a test tube and a few drops of concentrated sulphuric
acid is added to this mixture. This tube is heated using hot water bath for five minutes. This mixture is powered
into 20-0 ml of water in a breaker. If we get a sweet odour the reaction is complete, as the esters have sweet odour.
(iii) Ethanoic acid reacts with ethanol in the presence of an acid catalyst and ester, ethyl ethanoate is formed.
Acid
CH3COOH + CH3CH2 – OH Catalyst CH3 – COO – CH2 – CH2+ H2O
Ethanoic Ethanol (ethyl ethanoate) water
acid
vvv
194 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

ASSIGNMENT - 9
Time : 1 Hr. Marks : 20

Q.1. (A) Fill in the blanks: (3)

(1) Hydrocarbons having identical molecular formula but different structures are called .
(2) Ethanoic acid is commonly known as .
(3) A macromolecule formed by regular repetition of a small unit is called .
Q.1. (B) Choose and write the correct option: (2)
(1) What are the products obtained on complete combustion of hydrocarbons?
(a) CO + H2O (b) CO2 + H2 (c) CO2 + H2O (d) CO + H2
(2) Ethanol is used as an additive to increase the efficiency of petrol. Such a fuel is called
(a) Ethanol (b) Cananol (c) Gasohol (d) Methanol
Q.2 Answer the following: (Any 2) (4)
(1) Why acetic acid is called glacial acetic acid?
(2) Give IUPAC names for the given compounds
(a) H H H (b) H H OH H
H C C C H C C C C H
H H H H H H H
(3) Differentiate between natural and man-made macromolecules.
Q.3 Answer the following: (Any 2) (6)
(1) Draw electron dot structure of (i) CO2 (ii) H2O
(2) Detergents are superior to soaps - Give scientific reasons.
(3) Write short notes on (i) Structural Isomerism (ii) Covalent bonds.
Q.4 Answer the following: (Any 1) (5)
(1) Explain with example: (i) Substitution reaction (ii) Addition reaction
(2) Classify saturated compounds. Give 1 example of each.
vvv
10 Space Missions
Points to Remember:
zz The universe consists of vast emptiness called space with unknown boundaries. It comprises of millions of
galaxies which are cluster of Stars.
zz Astronomy is a branch of Science which deals with the study of all the Celestial or Heavenly bodies in this
Universe. Unlike other sciences, astronomy is an observational Science.
zz The advancement of technology, specially space technology, has taken a huge step in the last part of
20th century. Hence, space travel got a boost.
zz Thousands of artificial satellites are revolving around the earth in specific orbits. This enables man to
know and understand more about the Solar system.
zz Spacemissionisbroadlyclassifiedintotwotypes:
z - Launching an artificial satellite in the orbit around the earth for research and various other useful
applications.
z - Sending spacecrafts to outer space to observe objects closely and to understand them.
zz Russian Yuri Gagarinwasthefirsttogo into the space and revolve around the Earth.
In 1969, Neil Armstrong was the 1st man to land on the surface of the Moon.
zz In 1984, Rakesh Sharma, was the first Indian to orbit the earth.
zz Sunita Williams and Kalpana Chawla of Indian origin also participated in space exploration through missions
organized by NASA.
zz Due to space explorations, the world has becomes a universal or global village.
zz Moon is the natural satellite of the earth. Jupiter has maximum, i.e. 69 natural satellites.
zz Artificialsatelliteisaman made objectthatrevolvesregularlyaroundaplanetorearthinafixedorbit.
zz The firstartificialsatellite‘Sputnik’waslaunchedinspacebyRussia in 1957.
zz There are different types of artificial satellites  they are : Weather satellites, Communication satellites,
Broadcast satellites, Navigational satellites, Military satellites and Earth Observation Satellites.
zz Allartificialsatellitesdo not revolve around the Earth in the same orbit.
zz The satellite takes 24 hours to orbit around the earth if its height from the surface of the earth is 35780 km.
z -  hespecificvelocitygiventoasatelliteinatangentialdirectiontotheorbitsothatitstartsrevolving
T
around earth is called as critical velocity (vc).
z -  heorbitofasatelliteataheightgreaterthanorequalto35780kmaboveearth’ssurfaceiscalledHigh
T
earth orbit.
z -  heorbitofasatelliteataheightbetween2000kmand35780kmaboveearth’ssurfaceiscalledMedium
T
earth orbit.
z -  heorbitofasatelliteataheightbetween180kmand2000kmaboveearth’ssurfaceiscalledLowearth
T
orbit.
z - Satellitelaunchvehiclesareusedtoplacesatellitesintheirspecificorbits.
z - Geosynchronous satellites revolve in an orbit parallel to the equator and have a time of revolution of 24
hours.
z - Polar satellites revolve in elliptical orbits passing over polar regions and revolve in 2 to 24 hours.

(195)
196 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

zz TheMoonistheclosestcelestialobjectaroundtheEarth.Hence,theearlierexplorationsweretowardsMoon
only.
zz The second closest celestial body is Mars.TheMarsexpeditionswereverytough.IS O launched a space
MangalyaanShuttletoMarsinNov. 2013 and in Sept. 2014,itgotplacedintheorbitofMarsandstarted
functioning.
zz Vikram SarabhaiisknownasthefatheroftheIndianspaceprogramme.ThefirstIndianartificialsatellite
Aryabhatta’ was launched in 1963underhisefforts.
zz There are many other explorations carried on other planets which were successful. Some space shuttles
moved around those planets and some landed on them.
zz In the space due to explorations, some man-made objects revolve around the earth. In 2016, it was noticed that
nearly 2 crore objects having length of more than 1 cm are revolving around the earth. This is called space
waste or space garbage.Theworldwideeffortsarenowunderwaytomanagethesespacedebris.

(16) The earth takes almost hours to

MASTE KE QUESTION SET 10 rotate about itself.
Q.1. (A) 1. Fill in the blanks and rewrite the (17)  he first satellite launched by India was named
T
statement: as .
(1) The man made devices that revolve around the (18) The earth takes almost days to
earth, like any other planet are called . revolve around the Sun.
*(2) I fheightoforbitofasatellitefromearth’ssurface (19) The planet Jupiter has satellites.
is increased, the tangential velocity of the satellite (20) are the Broadcast satellites of India.
will . Ans. ( ) i i  i (2) (3) v i 
*(3) The initial velocity (during launching) of the ( )    (5)  ( ) .
Mangalyaan must be greater than i  (7) .  (8)  
of the earth. (9)  i  ( i i ) ( 0) i 
(4) The presence of  on the Moon was ( )  ( 2)  ( 3) i  i
predictedbythespaceshuttle . ( )  ( 5)  ( ) 2  ( 7) 
( 8)3 5( 9) 9(20) .
(5) India’s first successful inter-planetary mission
was . Q.1. (A) 2. Find the odd man out:
(6)  he first man to travel in space through a
T (1) Yuri Gagarin, Neil Armstrong, Rakesh Sharma,
spacecraftwas . Vikram Sarabhai
(7) I n1969,thefirstpersonwholandedontheMoon Ans. Vikram Sarabhai - He was a scientist while others
was . were astronauts.

(8)  hefirstIndian
T travelled around the (2) Moon,Sputnik,INSAT,Mars
earthina ussianspacecraftin1984. Ans. M
 ars-Itisaplanetwhileothersaresatellitesof
earth.
(9) Due to , the world has become a
global village. (3) INSAT,GSAT,I S,PSLV
(10) In 1957, Russia launched a satellite named Ans. P
 SLV-Itisasatellitelaunchvehiclewhileothers
. are satellites.

(11) The launching of a satellite is based on (4) H.E.O,L.E.O,M.E.O,GSLV

third law of motion. Ans. G
 SLV-Itisasatellitelaunchvehiclewhileothers
are earth orbits.
(12) The nearest celestial object from the earth is
. Q.1. (A) 3. Complete the analogy:
(13) The Father of Indian space exploration (1) USS :YuriGagarin::India:
programme is . Ans. akesh Sharma: The first person to go in space
(14) The nearest planet to earth is . from USSR was Yuri Gagarin, whereas the 1st
Indian to go in space was Rakesh Sharma.
(15) In India, ISRO is headquatered at .
  i i 97

(2) PSLV : Polar Satellite Launch Vehicle : : GSLV : (3) Column A Column B
(1) Neil Armstrong (a) Thefirstmanin
Ans. G
 eosynchronousSatelliteLaunchVehicle:PSLV
space
standsforPolarSatelliteLaunchVehiclewhereas
GSLV stands for Geosynchronous ‘Satellite (2) Yuri Gagarin (b) The father of
LaunchVehicle. Indian Space
Research
(3) 2 000kmto35780km:M.E.O::180kmto2000
km: (3) Rakesh Sharma (c) Thefirstmanon
Ans. ( LEO) : If the height of the satellite orbit above Moon
earth’ssurfaceisinbetween2000kmand35780 (4) Vikram Sarabhai (d) ThefirstIndian
km, the orbits are called Medium Earth Orbits, in space
(MEO), Whereas if the height of the satellite
Ans. (   ) (2  ) (3  ) (   )
orbitabovetheearth’ssurfaceisinbetween180
kmand2000km,theorbitarecalledLowEarth (4) Column A Column B
Orbits,(LEO)
(1) Gravitational (a) 6 × 1024 kg
(4) Moon:Chandrayan-1::Mars:
Constant
Ans. M
 angalyan:In2008,IS Osuccessfullylaunched
(2) Gravitational (b) 6.4 × 106 m
ChandrayanIandplaceditintoanorbitaround
acceleration
the moon, while the spacecraft made by IS O
in November 2013 was placed into orbit around (3) Massoftheearth (c) 9.8 m/s2
Mars. (4) Radius of the (d) 6.67 × 10-11 Nm2/kg2
Q.1. (A) 4. Match the columns: earth

(1) Column A Column B Ans. (   ) (2  ) (3  ) (   )

(1) INSAT (a) Polar Satellite Q.1. (A) 5. State whether the following statements
LaunchVehicle are True’ or False’. Correct the false statements:
(1) If a spacecraft has to be sent away from the
(2) GSAT (b) Indian National
influenceofEarth sgravitationalfield,itsvelocity
Satellite
must be less than the escape velocity.
(3) GSLV (c) Geo synchronous
(2) INSAT is an educational satellite.
Satellite
(3) TheescapevelocityontheMoonislessthanthat
(4) PSLV (d) Geo synchronous on the Earth.
SatelliteLaunch
(4) Asatelliteneedsaspecificvelocitytorevolvein
vehicle
specificorbit.
Ans. (   ) (2  ) (3  ) (   ) *(5) If the height of the orbit of a satellite increases, its
(2) Column A Column B velocity must also increase.
(6) All artificial satellites revolve in similar orbits
(1) Weathersatellite (a) Information of the
around earth.
area on protection
point (7) ISSandHubblerevolveinL.E.O.
Ans. ( ) .  v i i  i   
(2) Communication (b) To decide accurate
 i   i   v   
satellite latitude and
vi i  . i v i    
longitude
  v i . (2) . i  
(3) Navigational (c) Communicate i  i     i .(3) .  
satellite various places vi i    i    i  
through waves      v i i  i  
(4) Militarysatellite (d) To predict weather v   vi i  . ( ) . (5) .
forecast  i i  v i  . ( ) .
 i i  i    v v i  i i  i 
Ans. (  ) (2  ) (3  ) (   )
 .(7)
198 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

Q.1. (A) 6. Name the following: (4) Who is called the father of Indian Space
(1) Indian origin female astronauts who travelled by programme?
NASA satellite. Ans. Vikram Sarabhai is called the father of Indian
Ans. Sunita Williams and Kalpana Chawla Space programme.
(2) Satellite designed by the student of COEP in (5) NametwofemaleastronautsofIndianOrigin?
Pune. Ans. Two female astronauts of Indian origin are Sunita
Ans. Swayam Williams and Kalpana Chawla.
(3) In2008,theIS Olaunchedspaceshuttle. (6) What are the applications of geo-stationary
Ans. Chandrayan 1 satellite?
Ans. Geo-stationary satellites are used for weather
(4) First Satellite launched by India.
report, telephone, television, Radio, broadcasting
Ans. Aryabhatta and telecommunication.
(5) Value of gravitational constant.
Q.1 (A) 8. Write the full forms of the following:
Ans. 6.67 × 10-11 Nm2/kg2
(1) INSAT : Indian National Satellite
(6) Orbit of a satellite between 180 km. to 2000 km
(2) GSAT : Geosynchronous Satellite
from Earth’s surface.
(3) IRNSS : lndian Regional Navigation Satellite
Ans. Low Earth Orbit
System
(7) Energy on which satellites work.
(4) GSLV : Geosynchronous Satellite Launch
Ans. Solar energy Vehicle
(8) Satellite which appears stationary with respect to (5) PSLV : Polar Satellite Launch Vehicle
Earth, revolving parallel to the equator.
(6) ISRO : Indian Space Research Organisation
Ans. Geosynchronous satellite
(7) NASA : National Aeronautics and Space
(9) Orbits in which satellites complete one revolution Administration
in 2 to 24 hours.
Q.1. (B) Choose and Re-write with the correct option:
Ans. Polar Orbits
(1) Which of the following is the communication
(10) The velocity required for launching a remote satelliteofIndia?
sensing satellite.
(a) INSAT (b) EDUSAT
Ans. Escape velocity
(c) Astrosat (d) Resourusat–1
(11) Indian satellite working for monitoring and
(2) ‘Launching of a rocket’ is based on Newton’s
management of natural resources and disaster
law of motion.
management.
 (a) first (b) second (c) third (d) fourth
Ans. IRS Satellite
(3)  planet has maximum number of
Q.1. (A) 7. Answer the following in one sentence:
satellites.
(1) Whatisanartificialsatellite? (a) Earth (b) Jupiter (c) Mars (d) Saturn
Ans. A man made object that revolves around the (4) Which of the following is a satellite launch
Earthoranyotherplanetinafixedorbitiscalled vehicle?
artificialsatellite.
(a) PSLV (b) IRS (c) INSAT (d) GSAT
(2) W
 hichplanetinoursolarsystemhasmaximum
(5) is known as Pioneer of Indian space
satellites?
Programme.
Ans.  upiterhasmaximumsatellites,i.e.69. (a) Neil Armstrong (b) Yuri Gagarin
(3) W
 hatisthenameofthefirstIndiansatellite? (c) Rakesh Sharma (d) Vikram Sarabhai
Ans. ThefirstIndianSatelliteisnamedas‘Aryabhatta’.
  i i 199

(6) is a High Earth Orbit (HEO) To find: ve(p)=?

satellite?
Formula: ve = 2GM
(a) Navigational satellite R
(b) Geosynchronous
Solution:
(c) International Space Station
 (d) SPUTNIK (a) For earth,

(7)  hichofthefollowingisLowEarthOrbit(LEO)
W 2GMe
statellite? ve = = 11.2 km/s ...(i)
Re
(a) Navigational satellite (b) For the planet given,
(b) Geostationary satellite 2GMp
(c) International Space Station vc = ...(ii)
Rp
(d) All of the above ∴
2G8Me (Mp=8Me , Rp = 2Re)
(8) To use a satellite for communication or =
2Re
meteorology, what type of orbit will be best
suited? 8 2GMe
= ×
2 Re
 (a) Circularorbit
(b) Geosynchronous orbit 4 × 2GMe
=
(c) Elliptical orbit (d) Polar orbit Re

(9)  wo satellites revolving in a LEO and geo-

T 2GMe
=2× ...[from (i)]
synchronous orbit have speed and respectively. Re
Whichofthefollowingrelationiscorrect? = 2 × 11.2
(a) > (b) < = 22.4 km/s

(c) = (d) None of the above ∴ The escape velocity for that planet will be
(10)  hichisthebestsuitedorbitforaremotesensing
W 22.4 km/s.
satellite? Type: B
(a) Geosynchronous orbit
Orbital velocity:
 (b) Ellipticalorbit (c) Circularorbit
(d) Sun synchronous Polar orbit v= GM
R+h
Ans. ( )( ) (2)( ) i (3)( ) i ( )( ) 2 r
(5) ( ) i  i ( ) ( )  v= T
i  (7) ( ) i   i  Note: At height h from surface
(8) ( )  i  (9) ( )    ( 0) ( ) 2 (R + h)
 i v= T
Q.2.1. Solve the following: *(1) Suppose the orbit of a satellite is exactly 35780
Type: A km above the earth’s surface. Determine the
Escape velocity: tangential velocity of the satellite.

vesc = 2GM Ans. Given: = 35780 km = 35780000m

R R = 6.4 × 106 m = 6400000m
for earth: vesc = 11.2 km/s.    M=6 1024 kg
G = 6.67 × 10–11 Nm2/kg2
*(1) If mass of a planet is eight times the mass of
the earth and its radius is twice the radius of the To find: v=?
earth, what will be the escape velocity for that Formula: v = GM
planet? R+
Ans. Given: Mp=8Me 6.67 × 10–11 × 6 ×1024
Solution: v =
(35780000 + 6400000)
Rp = 2 Re
200 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

40.02 × 1013 Formulae: v = GM , v = 2 r (R + h)

= R+h T
42180000

Solution: v = GM
40.02 × 1013
= R+h
42.18 × 106
let vn be the new velocity,
40 × 107
=
42 GMn
vn =
= 0.95 × 107 R+h

= 9.5 × 106 G × 4M
vn =
= 3.08 × 103 m/s or 3.08 km/s R+h
∴ Tangential velocity will be 3.08 km/s. 4 × GM
vn =
*(2) In the previous example, how much time the R+h
satellite will take to complete one revolution GM
vn = 2 ×
around the earth? R+h
Ans. Given: v = 3.08 km/s vn = 2v ...(i)
h = 35780 km (R + h)
Also, vn = 2
R = 6400 km Tn
2 (R + h)
To find: T = ? Tn =
vn
2 r
Formula: v = 2 (R + h)
T Tn = ...from equation (i)
2 r 2v
Solution: v =
T 3.14
2 r Tn = × (35780 + 6400)
T = 3.08
v 3.1
2 Tn = × 42180
T = (R + h) 3.1
v
42180
T = 2× × (6400 + 35780) Tn = 42180 s or Tn = = 11.71 hrs. ~ 12 hrs.
3.08 3600
3.1 ∴ Time take will be ~ 12 hrs.
= 2× × 42180
3.1 *(3) How much time a satellite in an orbit at height
= 2 × 42.18 × 103 35780 km above earth`s surface would take, if
= 2 × 43 × 103 the mass of the earth would have been four
= 86 × 103 s or 86000 s times its original mass?
86000 Ans. Method 2
Also, T = hrs = 23.89 hrs = 23 hrs 54 mins
3600 Given: New Mass of Earth (M) = 4 × (6 × 1024) kg
∴ Satellite will take 23 Hrs. 54 mins to = 24 × 1024 kg.
complete one revolution. Altitude of the satellite (h) = 35780 km
*(3) How much time a satellite in an orbit at height = 35780 × 103 m.
35780 km above earth’s surface would take, if To find: Time required for revolution (T) = ?
the mass of the earth would have been four
times its original mass? GM
Formulae: v =
R+h
Ans. Method 1
2π( +h)
Given: h = 35780 km T=
v
v = 3.08 km/s
M=4M GM
Solution: v =
R = 6400 km R+h
To find: T = ? 6.67 × 10-11 × 24 ×1024
∴ v =
6.4 ×106 + 35780 ×103
Space Missions 201

∴ v = 37.95 × 106 Q.2.2. Define the following:

v = 6.160 km/s. (1) Geo-stationary satellite
Ans. I fthesatelliteisrevolvinginanorbitparallelto
2π( +h) the equator, the time of revolution of the Earth
T =
v around itself and that of the satellite to revolve
2 × 3.14 ×6400+35780 around the Earth is the same. Thus the satellite
=
6.16 will appear to be stationary with respect to the
Earth. This satellite is called Geo-stationary
2 × 3.14 ×42180 satellite.
T =
6.16 (2) High Earth Orbits
  =43001.68sec Ans. I f the height of the satellite’s orbit above the
 T =11.94hr 12hours Earth’s surface is greater than or equal to 35780
km,theorbitiscalledHighEarthOrbits.
∴ The satellite will take approximately 12
hours to revolve around earth. (3) Medium Earth Orbits
Ans. I f the height of the satellite’s orbit above the
*(4) If the height of a satellite completing one Earth’s surface is in between 2000 km to 35780
revolution around the earth in T seconds km,theorbitsarecalledMediumEarthOrbits.
is h1 meter, then what would be the height (4) Low Earth Orbits
of a satellite taking 2√2 T. seconds for one
Ans. The height of the satellite orbit above the earth
revolution?
surface is in between 180 km and 2000 km are
Ans. Given: Heightof1stsatellite=h1 calledLowEarthOrbits.
   Timeofrev.of1stsatellite=T (5) Polar Orbit
   Timeofrev.of2ndsatellite=2√2 T Ans. In order to observe and study polar regions,
nd
To find: Heightof2 satellite(h2)=? geo-stationarysatelliteshavelimitations.Hence,
2 ( +h) elliptical medium earth orbits  passing over the
T2
Formulae: 3
= k, T polar regions are used. They are called Polar
r
Orbits.
Solution: Case(i)Time=T,r= +h1
(6) Critical Velocity (vc)
T2
= k (i) Ans. The specific velocity given to a satellite in a
( +h1)3
tangential direction to the orbit, so that it starts
 Case(ii) Time=2√2 T revolving around earth is called as critical
r= +h2 velocity(vc).
2
8T (7) Satellite Launch vehicle
= k (ii)
( +h2)3
Ans. The space vehicles which are used to place
  From(i)and(ii) satellitesintheirspecificorbitsarecalledSatellite
T2 = 8T2 Launchvehicles.
(bycrossmultiplying)
( +h1)3 ( +h2)3
Q.2.3. Write short notes:
( +h2)3=8( +h1)3 (1) Space Exploration
  Takingcuberootonbothsides, Ans.
(R + h )
3 3
3
2
= 3
8 (R + h1 ) (i) I n the second half of the 20th century, there
was tremendous development in technology,
  +h2 = 2 ( +h1) especiallyspacetechnology.Hence,spaceshuttles
+h2 = 2 +2h1 weredevelopedandlaunchedinthespace.
h2 = 2 +2h1  (ii)  ore than thousands of artificial satellites now
M
h2 = +2h1 arerevolvingaroundtheEarthinvariousorbits.
(iii) S
 pace Exploration helps to observe and study
∴ Height of the 2nd satellite will be R + 2h1 the various aspects of our solar system and the
universeoutsidethesolarsystem.
202 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

(iv)  he collective effect of space exploration can

T (iv) I S O has made an expedition towards Mars,
be seen in the development of communication a success. In Nov, 2013 a space shuttle was
technology,weatherforecastingandmanyother launchedtowardsMarsandinSept2014,valuable
fieldswhereartificialsatellitesareplayingavery informationsweregatheredaboutMars.
importantroleintheworldtoday.
Q.2.4. Label the diagram:
(v)  pace explorations are basically of two types,
S
(1) Orbits of satellites
a) Satellite revolving around the Earth which
study and observe various things happening
on or around earth and sending information to (b)
the earth. b) Sending satellite outside our solar
systemtoknowmoreabouttheuniverse.
(c)
(2) Artificial Satellite (a)
Ans.
(i)   man-made object which revolves around the
A
Earthinadefiniteorbitiscalledartificialsatellite
oftheearth.
(ii)  putnik wasthe first artificial satellite launched
S
in1957.
(d)
(iii)  oday,therearemorethanthousandsofartificial
T
satellitesrevolvingaroundtheearth.
Fig 10.1 : Orbits of Satellites
(iv)  hese satellites use solar energy for their
T
Ans. (a)LEO(b)MEO(c)MEO(d)HEO
functioning.
(v)  atellites are used for various purposes, like
S (2) Structure of PSLV made by IS O
weather,communication,broadcastingetc.
(vi) AryabhattawasthefirstIndiansatellite.
(3) Lunar expeditions (a)
Ans.
(i) Moonisthenaturalcelestialbodynearesttothe
Earth. (b)
(ii) It is our natural satellite. Therefore, initial
explorationswerealwayscausedonthemoon. (c)
(iii) Soviet Union, USA, European countries, China,
apanandnowIndiacarriedoutsuchexpeditions
towardsthemoon. (d)

(iv)  ussia had sent series of space shuttles called

Lunoonthemoon. (e)
(v)  rom1962to1972,USAcarriedoutexpeditionto
F
Moon.
(vi) I n 1969, NeilArmstrong was the first man who
landedonMoon. (f)

(4) Mars expeditions

Ans.
(i) TheplanetnearesttotheEarthis‘Mars’. Ans. (a)Placeforsatellite(b)Fourthstageusingliquid
(ii)  anycountrieshadsentspaceshuttlestowards
M fuel (c) Third stage using solid fuel (d) Second
Marsforvariouspurposes. stageusingliquidfuel(e)Firststageusingsolid
(iii)  arsexpeditionsareverytoughandnearly50%
M fuel (f) Engine using solid fuel which provides
oftheexpeditionshavefailed. theinitialthrust
  i i 203

Q.2.5. Answer the following: (6) How are satellites launched in an orbit?
(1) What are the applications of geo-stationary Ans. The satellites are taken to the desired orbits using
satellite? a satellite launcher. The satellite is then given a
Ans. Geo-stationary satellites are used for weather specific velocity, called critical velocity (vC) in a
report, telephone, television, Radio, broadcasting tangential direction.
and telecommunication. *(7) Complete the following table:
(2) What is space debris ? How this debris is
managed? Fix the location of
Ans. any place on the
(i) Inadditiontoartificialsatellitessomeotherobjects earth’s  surface in Navigational
I NSS
terms of its very satellite
also revolve around the earth. They include non-
precise latitude and
functional parts of satellites, detached parts of
longitude
launcher, pieces due to collision of satellites.
(ii) This debris can be harmful to the artificial
INSAT
satellites. They can collide with the satellites or Weather study and Weather
and
space crafts and damage them. Soon it will be prediction satellite
GSAT
verydifficulttolaunchnewspacecrafts.
(iii) How is it managed. Study of forest,
(3) Explain escape velocity. Write the value of deserts, ocean, etc. Earth’s
IRS
escape velocity of earth? and management of observation
Ans. natural resources
(i) The velocity required to overcome the Earth’s
*(8) What is difference between space and sky? ( 
gravitational force and move the objects in space
     35)
is called escape velocity.
Ans.
(ii) The escape velocity for the Earth is 11.2 km/s.
(i)  pace: The region between the celestial bodies
S
*(4) Why are geo-stationary satellites not useful for
which have different gases and dust particles
studies of polar regions?
is called space. There are many stars, planets,
Ans.
(i) Geo-stationary satellites have orbits parallel to galaxies present in the space.
the equator and hence the observation of polar (ii)  ky:Onacloudlessnight,ifweobserveupabove
S
regions is not carried out properly. the earth, from an open ground, we can see stars
(ii) For this purpose, elliptical medium earth orbits twinkling on a dark background. What we see
passing over polar regions are used. beyond the earth’s atmosphere with our naked
*(5) Which types of telescopes are orbiting around eyes which appears like a ceiling is called the sky.
the earth? Why it is necessary to put them in *(9) What are different components of Solar System?
space? (      . 35)
Ans. Our Solar system comprises of Sun, Moon,
Ans.
Planets,dwarfplanets,Comets,Meteors,etc.
(i)  hedifferenttypesoftelescopesorbitingaround
T
the earth are optical telescopes (Hubble), X ray *(10) What is meant by Satellite?
telescope(Chandra),etc. Ans. An astronomical object in space that orbits
(ii) These telescopes are placed in space because or circles around the earth or planet is called
(a) Some of the light coming from heavenly satellite.
bodiesisabsorbedbyearth’satmosphere. *(11) How many natural satellites does the earth
(b) The position of image is disturbed due have?
to changes in pressure and turbulence in Ans. TheMoonistheonlynaturalsatelliteoftheEarth.
atmosphere. *(12) Where does the signal in your cell phone come
(c) Optical telescopes cannot be used during from?
the day due to sunlight. Ans. Mobile receives its signals from communication
(d) During night, city lights and cloudy weather (mobile) towers on the earth which are in the
causesdifficultyinobservations. vicinity.
204 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

*(13) Where from do mobile towers receive the artificial satellites which overcome the earth’s
signals? gravitational force and move into space.
Ans. Mobile towers receive the signals through various (ii) The velocity of an object should be more than
communication satellites like INSAT, GSAT the escape velocity, only then the object can be
series of satellites. launched into space.
*(14) Where does the signal to your TV set come
from? 2GM
vesc =
R
Ans. TV sets receive signals from various broadcasting
satellites which revolve around the earth. G - Gravitational constant = 6.67 × 10-11 Nm2/kg2
*(15) You may have seen photographs showing the M - Mass of the planet (earth) = 6 × 1024 kg
position of monsoon clouds over the country, in R - Radius of the earth = 6.4 × 106 m
the newspaper. How are these images obtained? 2GM
∴ v=
Ans. They are obtained with the help of weather R
satellites like INSAT and GSAT.
2 × 6.67 × 10-11 × 6 × 1024
(16) The broadcast signals that originate from a v=
6.4 ×106
radio station are sent to an artificial satellite for
redistribution to other locations. Name the orbit v = 11.18 × 103 m/s = 11.18 km/s.
where such satellites should be placed and the Hence, the escape velocity for earth is 11.18 km/s.
launch vehicle used. The satellite launch vehicle should have velocity
Ans. The satellite should be placed in High Earth Orbit more than or at least 11.2 km/s.
(HEO). The launch vehicle used is GSLV.
(2) Derive the formula for critical velocity (vc).
(17) What is the range from the Earth’s surface, where Ans. If a satellite of mass ‘m’ is revolving around the
an artificial satellite, to detect a precise latitude
earth in an orbit of height ‘h’ with speed ‘vc’, then
and longitude of a place, should revolve?
mvc2
Ans. 2000 km. to 35780 km. centripetal force F = will act on it.
r
(18) An artificial satellite is at a height of 35780 km. Here, ‘r’ is the orbital radius of the satellite from
from the Earth’s surface. What is the period of the centre of the earth.
revolution of this satellite?
This centripetal force is provided by the
Ans. Since the orbit is at a height of 35780 km. from the
gravitational force of the earth.
Earth’s surface, its period of revolution is 24 hrs.
Therefore, centripetal force = gravitational force
(19) Satellites need a specific velocity to revolve in between the Earth and the satellite.
specific orbits. ustify whether true of false.
Ans. True. mvc2 GMm
= vc
R+h (R + h)2 satellite
(i) The specific velocity given to a satellite in
h
tangential direction i.e. the critical velocity is vc2 = GM satellite
R+h R
orbit
GM r
given as vc = Taking square root on
R+h Earth
both sides,
(ii) Since the gravitational constant (G), mass of
Earth (M) and the radius of Earth (R) is constant, GM
vc = i  0.2  i   i i 
the critical velocity depends on the height of the R+h
i
satellite from the Earth’s surface. Thus satellites
*(3) What is meant by the ‘orbit’ of a satellite? On
need a specific velocity to revolve in specific
orbits. what basis and how are the orbits of artificial
satellites classified?
*Q.3. Answer the following: Ans.
(1) Calculate the minimum velocity required by (i) The particular path that a satellite follows to
spacecraft to escape the earth’s gravitational revolve around the earth is known as its orbit.
force.
Different artificial satellites revolve in different
Ans.
orbits around the earth.
(i) Space launch vehicles are used for the launching
  i i 205

(ii)  he orbits of artificial satellites are classified on

T (v) The structure of the launch vehicle is decided by
the basis of following factors - the weight of the satellite and the type of satellite
 (a) HeightoftheorbitabovetheEarth’ssurface. orbit.
(b) The shape of the orbit (i.e. circular or
elliptical)
 (c) Whetheritisparalleltotheequatorormakes Place for
satellite
a particular angle with the equator.
(iii)  ccordingtothealtitude,theorbitsareclassified
A Fourth stage
asfollows: using liquid fuel
 (a) High Earth Orbits: Height 35780 km or
Third stage
higherabovetheEarth’ssurface.
using solid fuel
 (b) Medium Earth Orbits: Height 2000 km to
35780kmabovetheEarth’ssurface. Second stage
 (c) LowEarthOrbits:Height180kmto2000km, using liquid fuel
  abovetheEarth’ssurface.
First stage using
*(4) Why is it beneficial to use Satellite Launch solid fuel
Vehicles made of more than one stage?
Ans. Engine using
(i)  atellite Launch Vehicle uses a special type of
S solid fuel which
fuel in huge amounts. provides the
(ii) Hence, the maximum weight of the launcher is initial thrust
due to the fuel.
i  0.3      
(iii)  uetothis,differentstagesoffuelsaremadeso
D
that as the fuel gets utilized, the weight of the (vi) The fuel forms a major portion of the total weight
satellite launch vehicle can gradually reduce. of the launch vehicle.
(iv) As the fuel in the 1st step is burnt, that part get (vii) To overcome this problem, launch vehicles with
automatically detached from the launcher. Due more than one stages are used. Due to this, the
to this, the satellite launch vehicle can acquire weight of the vehicle can be reduced step by step,
more velocity. afteritslaunching.
(v) Thus, ultimately escape velocity is achieved and (viii) For example, consider a launch vehicle having
satellite can be launched successfully. two stages.
Q.4. Answer in detail: For launching the vehicle, the fuel and engine in
*(1) What is meant by satellite launch vehicles? the first stage are used. This imparts a specific
Explain a satellite launch vehicle developed by velocity to the vehicle and takes it to a certain
IS O with the help of a schematic diagram. height.
Ans. (ix) Oncethefuelinthisfirststageisexhausted,the
(i) Satellite launch vehicles are used, to place the empty fuel tank and the engine are detached
satellitesintheirspecificorbits.Thefunctioning from the main body of the vehicle and fall either
of the satellite launch vehicle is based on the into a sea or on an unpopulated land.
Newton’sthirdlawofmotion. (x) Asthefuelinthefirststageisexhausted,thefuel
(ii) Thelaunchvehicleusesspecifictypeoffuel. in the second stage is ignited.
(iii) The gas produced due to combustion of the (xi) Since, the vehicle now contains only one stage,
fuel expands due to its high temperature and is the weight has now been reduced and the vehicle
expelled forcefully through the nozzles at the can move with higher speed. Almost all vehicles
rear of the launch vehicle. are made of either two or more stages.
(iv) As a reaction of this, a thrust acts on the vehicle,
(xii) As an example, Polar Satellite Launch Vehicle
which drives the vehicle high into the space.
(PSLV)
vvv
20 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

ASSIGNMENT 10
Time : 1 Hr. Marks : 20

Q.1. (A) Answer the following questions. (3)

(1) Fill in the blanks and rewrite the statement.
The nearest planet to earth is .
(2) Find the odd one out.
  INSAT,GSAT,I S,PSLV
 (3) Completetheanalogy.
  2000kmto35780km:M.E.O::180kmto2000km:
Q.1. (B) Choose and write the correct option: (2)
  (1) LaunchingofrocketisbasedonNewton’s law of motion.
(a) first (b) second (c) third (d) fourth
(2) is known as Pioneer of Indian Space Programme.
(a) Neil Armstrong (b) Yuri Gagarin (c) Rakesh Sharma (d) Vikram Sarabhai
Q.2. Answer the following: (Any 2) (4)
(1) Writeshortnoteon:Artificialsatellite.
(2) Whatisthedifferencebetweenspaceandsky.
(3) Define(a)HighEarthorbits(b)LowEarthorbits
Q.3. Answer the following: (Any 2) (6)
(1) Howaresatellitesclassifiedbasedontheirfunctions?
(2) Completethefollowingtable.

I NSS

Weather study and prediction

Earth’s observation

(3) Howmuchtimeasatelliteinanorbitatheight35780kmaboveEarth’sSurfacewouldtake,if
themassofearthwouldhavebeenfourtimesitsoriginalmass?
Q.4. Answer in detail: (Any 1) (5)
(1) Derive the formula for escape velocity.
(2) WhatareSatelliteLaunchVehicles?ExplainaSatelliteLaunchVehicledevelopedbyIS Owiththe
help of schematic diagram.
vvv
MODEL ACTIVITY SHEET 207

MODEL ACTIVITY SHEET

Time : 2 Hrs. Marks : 40

Q.1. (A) Solve the following questions. (5)

(1) If the height of the orbit of a satellite from the earth surface is increased, the tangential velocity of the
satellite will .
(2) The conversion of Ferrous Sulphate to Ferric Sulphate is reaction.
(3) Write the proper answer in the box: H = × R × t.
(4) What is the odd one out from:
Fuse wire, bad conductor, rubber gloves, generator.
(5) During transformation of liquid phase to solid phase; the latent heat is .
Q.1. (B) Choose the correct alternative and rewrite the sentence: (5)
(1) The force of gravitation between two bodies in the Universe does not depend on .
(a) the distance between them (c) the sum of their masses
(b) the product of their masses (d) the gravitational constant
(2) Which of the following is a Dobereinei’s triad?
(a) Ne, Ca, Na (b) H2, N2, O2 (c) Li, Na, K (d) Na, Br, Ar
(3) When electric current is passed through a bulb, the bulb gives light because of .
(a) electric effect of current (c) glowing effect of current
(b) heating effect of current (d) lighting effect of current
(4) Which of the following has the highest heat capacity.
(a) Water (b) Air (c) Soil (d) None of the above
(5) The part of the lens through which the ray of light passes without suffering deviation is called .
(a) Focus (b) Optical centre (c) Centre of curvature (d) Pole
Q.2. Solve the following questions: (Any 5) (10)
(1) Complete the following table.

IRNSS
Weather study and predict
(2) Write the IUPAC names of the following structural formulae.
(a) CH3 – CH2 – COOH (b) CH3 – CO – CH2 – CH3
(3) Explain the terms: (a) Ores (b) Gangue
(4) Distinguish between: Farsightedness and Nearsightedness.
(5) The absolute refractive index of water is 1.36. What is the velocity of light in water? (velocity of light in
vaccum is 3 × 108 m/s).
(6) What is meant by latent heat? How will the state of matter transform if latent heat is given off.
(7) Give scientific reasons: Tungsten metal is used to make a solenoid type coil in an electric bulb.
Q.3. Solve the following questions: (Any 5) (15)
(1) The gravitation force between two objects is F. How will this force change when:
(a) Distance between them is reduced to half.
(b) The mass of each object is quadrupled.
(2) What is the cause of non - metallic character of elements? What is the expected trend in the variation
of non - metallic character of element from left to right in a period?
208 Master Key Science and Technology Part-1 (Std. X)

(3) Some examples of redox reaction are as follows:

(a) Identify the reductants and oxidants from them:
2H2S + SO2 3S + 2H2O
MnO2 + 4HCl MnCl2 + 2H2O + Cl2
(b) If oxidation means losing electrons, what is meant by reduction?
(c) Write the reaction of formation of Fe2+ by reduction Fe3+ by making use of the symbol (e–).
(4) An electron enters a magnetic field at right angle to the
field direction.
(a) State the rule to find the direction of force acting
on the electron. Magnetic field
(b) What will be the direction of force acting on the
electron in the above case?
Electron
(5) Observe the following graph. Considering the
change in volume of water as its temperature is raised from 0 C, discuss the difference in the
behaviour of water and other substances. What is this behaviour of water called?

0.30

25
1 kg Volume of water

0.20
15
0.10
05
0.00
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Temperature °C

(6) Prove the statement: A rainbow is the combined effect of the refraction, dispersion and total internal
reflection of light.
(7) What is meant by Satellite launch vehicles? Explain a Satellite launch vehicle developed by ISRO with
the help of a schematic diagram.
Q.4. Solve the following questions: (Any 1) (5)
(1) Most of the children of a school in a village bring parantha and pickle in their tiffin in school. These
children do not share their food with anyone. Some children bring chapati, fruits, salad, curd,
vegetable. Those children share their food with each other.
(a) Which acid is present in curd and vinegar used in pickles?
(b) What class of compounds should be present in our diet?
(c) Which group of children bring healthy food? Give two benefits of this food.
(d) Which group of children bring unhealthy food? Give two harmful effects.
(e) Which group of children have better value system and why?
(2) An element is placed in 2nd group and 3rd period of the periodic table, burns in presence of oxygen to
form a basic oxide.
(a) Identify the element.
(b) Write the electronic configuration.
(c) Write the balanced equation when it burns in the presence of air.
(d) Write the balanced equation when this oxide is dissolved in water.
(e) Draw the electron dot structure for the formation of this oxide.

vvv